JP2019136154A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably suggesting a determination result.SOLUTION: A game machine executes determination by first determination means, based on establishment of a first determination condition, and based on a specific determination result of the first determination means, executes a privilege game advantageous to a player. A first performance for suggesting the determination result of the first determination means is executed by first performance execution means. Determination by second determination means is executed based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A second performance for suggesting a determination result of the second determination means can be executed in an overlapped state to the first performance. When the first and second performances are overlapped and executed by executing the second performance, in the second performance, a specific performance mode capable of suggesting the determination result of the first determination means suggested by the first performance can be executed. Therefore, the determination result can be preferably suggested.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 301

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  For game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the game board surface, whether or not it is hit is determined, and if the determination result is hit, it is advantageous for the player There are those that perform special privilege games.

JP 2012-217766 A

  However, in such a conventional game machine, it may be difficult to appropriately suggest the determination result.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suggesting a discrimination result.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first determination unit that executes determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination result of the first determination unit is a specific determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, a first effect executing means for executing a first effect for indicating a discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and the first The second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means overlap the first effect. A second effect executing means that can be executed, and the second effect executing means executes the second effect so that the first effect and the second effect are executed in an overlapping manner. Further, in the second effect, the first size indicated by the first effect. It is what is configured to be able to execute certain representation embodiment capable suggest discrimination result of the means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second effect executing means has the second effect before the determination result of the first determining means is indicated by the first effect. In the production, the specific production mode can be executed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, The first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is provided to the second ball entry means. It is established on the basis of the game ball entering.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a first state in which a gaming ball can enter and a gaming ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. Variable entry means that can be changed to the second state, privilege provision means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the variable entry means, and determination by the second determination means Based on the result of the second determination result being different from the specific determination result, the variable pitching means executes a variable game in which the variable state is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period. Variable game executing means, wherein the second effect executing means is characterized in that in the second effect that is executed based on the determination result of the second determining means being the second determination result, the specifying It is comprised so that the presentation aspect of can be suggested.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the first gaming state in which the discrimination of the first discrimination means is easily performed as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game, and the first game A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is more easily performed than the state; and in the first gaming state in advance And a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first determination unit that executes the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination result of the first determination unit is based on the specific determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, a first effect executing means for executing a first effect for indicating a determination result of the first determining means, and the first determination condition. The second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of different second determination conditions and the second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means can be executed in duplicate with the first effect. A second effect executing means, wherein the second effect executing means executes the second effect, and the second effect is executed when the first effect and the second effect are executed in duplicate. In the production, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means indicated by the first production is displayed. It is what is configured to be able to execute 唆 possible specific representation embodiment.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the discrimination result can be preferably suggested.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the second effect executing means is more than the determination result of the first determining means shown by the first effect. Before, since the specific effect mode can be executed in the second effect, the determination result of the first determining means can be obtained by confirming the second effect without confirming the first effect to the end. Can be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and the first ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. Two ball entry means, wherein the first discrimination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second discrimination condition is This is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means.

  Thereby, the game can be performed while paying attention to the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, a first state in which a gaming ball can enter and a gaming ball than the first state. The second state in which it is difficult to enter, a variable entry means that can be varied, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the variable entry means, The variable pitching means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the fact that the discrimination result of the second discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. Variable game execution means for executing the variable game, wherein the second effect execution means is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. In 2 productions, it is configured to suggest the specific production mode. That.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the determination result of the second determination means becomes the second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, the first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is easily performed as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the determination of the second determining means is easier to be executed than the first gaming state; And a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the first gaming state.

  Thereby, in the 1st game state, since it can be made to play in anticipation that specific conditions are satisfied, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the probability change in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol is non-change after the hit fluctuation start of the 1st special symbol in 1st Embodiment, (b) is 1st implementation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol hits small during RUSH in a form. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol is changing after the hit fluctuation start of the 1st special symbol in 1st Embodiment, (b) is 1st implementation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when a 2nd special symbol stops a change during the hit fluctuation of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is the figure which showed an example in the state where the result of the change display of the 1st special symbol became jackpot A during RUSH in 1st Embodiment, (b) is RUSH in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example in the state where the result of the change display of the 1st special symbol became jackpot C or jackpot D. (A) is the figure which showed the card forgetting warning screen in 1st Embodiment, (b)-(d) is the timing chart which showed the timing which displays the card forgetting warning screen in 1st Embodiment. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small random number table, (c) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for time reduction and probability change, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latency. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the usual figure fluctuation pattern table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the stop display mode selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the additional production | presentation selection table. It is a block diagram of the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in a 1st embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation restart process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 1 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter update processes performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the rush inrush command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the additional effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning the jackpot C in the probability variation state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a related figure of the game contents of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state in 2nd Embodiment was set, and a grant privilege. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol was changing at the time of the 1st special symbol hitting symbol stop in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is 2nd implementation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stops while the hit symbol stop of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 2 table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 2 table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the detachment type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 2 tables for time reduction and probability change. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fixed period setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during fixed time performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol movement stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fixed period setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the restart process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol determination related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a related figure of the game contents of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state in 3rd Embodiment was set, and a grant privilege. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of end of jackpot in a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents of the 1st change after jackpot. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of the third change after jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents of the fourth change after jackpot. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after jackpot when the third variation after jackpot is a jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is between 1-3 variations after jackpot It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the 2nd change after jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number 3 table per 1st, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number 3 table per small. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 3 table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three tables for probability variation, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability variation A table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation C table, and (c) is a probability variation D table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of this. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 3 tables for subtlety. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the probability change effect selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 removal stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning information relevant process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of jackpot completion performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the change display setting process for probability change performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning a special figure 1 big hit in the probability variation state in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the flow at the time digestion in the probability variation state. It is the timing chart shown. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the RUSH rush-in by the short-time arrival in 4th Embodiment, (b) is RUSH in the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content to alert | report. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning a fall lottery in the latency state in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a special figure in the latency state in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display screen at the time of winning a jackpot in 2. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically about the counter etc. which are provided in RAM203 of the main controller 110 in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fall lottery table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the latent probability mode selection table, (c) is a fall. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the alerting | reporting selection table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the latency mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process 4 which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting process 4 for the special figure 1 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting process 4 for the special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is the operation | movement figure which looked at the variable winning device for small hits from the back side. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning a special figure 1 big hit in the probability change state in 5th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of short-time digestion in the probability change state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of small hit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents during a small hit game. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display contents when a ball passes the fall gate during the small hit game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram where the ball falls over the fall gate during the small hit game. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of not passing. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of a small hit end, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in a latent state (invincible mode). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hits entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passage related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit state flag, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit state flag. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation condition discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory opening / closing process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the enlarged view to which the flow-path unit in 7th Embodiment was expanded. (A) is the top view which showed typically the ball | bowl flow when the electrically-driven accessory in 7th Embodiment is a closed state (embedded state), (b) is a closed state (embedded state) It is the perspective view which showed the ball | bowl flow in the case of) typically. (A) is the top view which showed typically the ball | bowl flow when the electrically-driven accessory in 7th Embodiment is an open state (protrusion state), (b) is an open state (protrusion state) of an electrically-driven accessory. It is the perspective view which showed the ball | bowl flow in the case of) typically. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd symbol in the time reduction state in 7th Embodiment, (b) is the 2nd entrance in the time reduction state in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when a ball | bowl entered. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is out of place in the time reduction state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is in the time reduction state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a sphere is flowing down a delay passage during the special figure 2 variation. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in case the ball | bowl is flowing down the normal channel | path during the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation in the time reduction state in 7th Embodiment, (b) is 7th implementation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of passing V during the small hit game in a form. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of not passing V during the small hit game in the time reduction state in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a time reduction state in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the time reduction state A is set. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment, (b) showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number 7 table per 1st, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the special symbol 1 random number table typically, (c) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the content of the special symbol 2 random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table, (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number 7 table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection 7 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern 7 table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 1st time reduction, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 2nd time reduction. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the open scenario 7 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of small hit V passage in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the delay channel | path state flag. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the short time frequency update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory opening / closing process 7 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit | related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 7th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the short time effect related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of completion | finish per common figure performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting process for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. (A) is the top view which showed typically the case where the opening-and-closing door 3650f which the 2nd attacker 3650 in 8th Embodiment has is an open state, (b) is the 2nd attacker 3650 in 8th Embodiment. It is the top view which showed typically the case where the opening-and-closing door 3650f which has is in a closed state. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 8th Embodiment, Comprising: It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the ball | bowl to the 2nd attacker. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 8th Embodiment, Comprising: It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the ball | bowl to the 2nd entrance. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a ball in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in 8th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of entering a 2nd entrance. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the ending screen of the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in 8th Embodiment, (b) is after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in 8th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the special figure 2 game during screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning a special figure 2 small hit in the normal state in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a big hit H in the special figure 2 in 8th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the special figure 2 game in the time reduction state in 8th Embodiment, (b) is the final special figure change end in the time reduction state in 8th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment, (b) is the content of the random number 8 table | surface per 1st in 8th Embodiment typically. It is the shown schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st classification selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the operation scenario 8 table in 8th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the content of each scenario classification in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number 8 table in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 8 tables for normal / hidden probability in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of 8 tables for time-change / probability change in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation start process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the number-of-holding ball related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of reduction performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 8 which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 8th execution form. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-short end process performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the jackpot symbol stop screen in 10th Embodiment, (b) is an example of the display content in the symbol determination period in jackpot C in 10th Embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number 10 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot type selection 10 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the specific winning action pattern table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific entrance process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the production content in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a high probability second random number 11 table 202ja in the modification of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a low probability second hit in the modification of the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the random number 11 table 202jb. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common drawing effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning a special figure 2 small hit in the latent state in the modification of 4th Embodiment, (b) is the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning out of the special figure 2 in the latent state in FIG. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot content suggestion effect in the modification of 4th Embodiment, (b) shows an example of the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment, (b) is the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the suggestion aspect selection table in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the suggestion effect selection table in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 11 for the special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal production execution management process 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (A) showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the ending effect performed in the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability variation state or the short-time state is set after the jackpot in the eleventh embodiment. (B) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the probability change state before a river breakthrough effect is performed, and a time-short state in 11th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 at the time of the start of a river breakthrough effect in 11th Embodiment, (b) is a river breakthrough effect in 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the case where the breakthrough of the river was succeeded and continuation of the chance zone was notified. (A) shows an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the river breakthrough is successfully achieved and the transition to the latent state (RUSH) is notified. (B) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the river breakthrough is failed due to the river breakthrough effect and the transition to the normal state is notified. FIG. (A), (b) is the figure shown about the transition of the gaming state and effect mode when a chance zone is set after the end of jackpot in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the small bonus effect of the second special symbol is executed, which suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit random number table in 11th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the small hit random number table in 11th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 11th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for time-shortness and probability change in 11th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the table for latency in 11th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit effect selection table in 11th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the winning sound selection table in 11th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize winning process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process 12 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hits related process 12 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 12 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 12 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 12th embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in normal mode in 12th Embodiment, (b) is the number of probability change in normal mode in 12th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 at the time of making it pass and changing to a normal state. (A) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the preparation state after the transition to the extended resort mode and the state in which a prize ball can be actually acquired in the twelfth embodiment. (B) is the figure in the twelfth embodiment when a game ball enters the second entrance in the preparation state and wins a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of 3 symbol display apparatus. (A) In the twelfth embodiment, the holding ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the extended mode is removed, and the lottery of the second special symbol is continued twice in the preparation mode. It is the figure which showed about the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect when it becomes off and becomes a small hit in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol of the 3rd time. It is the figure shown about the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect in case the reservation ball | bowl of the 1st special symbol at the time of shifting to (2) is a lottery result corresponding to “big hit D12”. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 12th Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of the 1st random number table in 12th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number table in 12th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 12th Embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 12th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability variation / latent probability start in 12th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for time-short start in 12th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal start in 12th Embodiment, (b) The schematic which showed the content of the table for RUSH in 12th Embodiment typically. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 stoppage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 13 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation aspect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for normal performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 13 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st per random number table in 13th Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of the 2nd per random number table in 13th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 13th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability variation / latent probability start in 13th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 13th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the flow path | route of the game ball in the state by which the electrically-driven accessory was closed in the modification of 13th Embodiment, (b) is an electrically-driven combination in the modification of 13th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the flow path | route of the game ball in the state in which the thing was open | released. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the A table for probability change in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the B table for probability change in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 15th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the flow path | route of the game ball in a time-short state in 15th Embodiment, (b) showed the flow path | route of the game ball in a latent state in 15th Embodiment. FIG. In 15th Embodiment, it is the figure shown about the transition of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot of the 1st special symbol during the probability change state, and the production | presentation aspect. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 at the time of the fluctuation | variation start per special figure 1 in a probability variation state in 15th Embodiment, (b) is 15th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the number of time reductions has passed during the big hit fluctuation. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number table in 15th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for time-shortness and probability change in 15th Embodiment, (b) showed typically the content of the table for latency in 15th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus when the river breakthrough effect in the modification of 11th Embodiment is started.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 87, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. A mouth 63, a first entrance 64, a second entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, an out port 66, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 ( (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 (37 </ b> A, 37 </ b> A, 37 </ b> A, 37 </ b> A, 37 </ b> A ”) includes a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62. 37B) is provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Is called. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) determines whether the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), It is comprised so that it may be used properly according to whether it entered into the 2nd entrance 640. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first entrance 64b1 and a lower first entrance 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 are shown, the term of the first entrance 64 will be used.

  Specifically, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain variation state, a short-time state or a normal state by a lighting state, and whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a lighting state. In addition to indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a symbol that is out of play, or a small hit symbol, by a lighting state, and indicating the number of reserved balls by a lighting state The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when there is an entry at either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R hourly jackpot, 2R hourly jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to (or sets) a probability variation state that is a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds. The “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds. In addition, “15R short-time jackpot” is a special symbol low-probability state and normal symbol high-probability state after a maximum jackpot of 15 rounds for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) A jackpot to be set, and “2R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot in which the short-time state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after the maximum number of rounds is two rounds of jackpot .

  In addition, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, in other words, a state of a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. The “ordinary symbol high probability state” is a state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a game state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened.

  In addition, the gaming state (probability change state, short time state) in which the “normal symbol high probability state” is set not only increases the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol), but also the lower first entrance 64b2 As the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the game, a longer time is set as compared with the gaming state (latent probability state, normal state) in which the “ordinary symbol low probability state” is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the opened state (open state), the ball is moved to the lower first entrance 64b2 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to win. Therefore, during the probability changing state or the short time state, it becomes easy to win a ball to the lower first entrance 64b2, and it is possible to increase the number of times that the big hit lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 during the probability changing state or the time-shortening state, once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 64a opens | releases at the time of hitting more than the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, and the electric combination in the time and the time when the electric combination 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times the 64a is opened. In addition, during the probability change state and the short time state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per change are not changed. Only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to that in the normal state.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has a trigger (trigger) triggered by the ball entering (starting prize) into either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) in synchronization with the variable display, and a ball to the through gate 67 There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display a normal symbol (second symbol) with the passage as a trigger.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  In this manner, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the dynamic of the third symbol is displayed. By configuring the display mode to notify the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110 ( For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by blinking display mode in which lighting and turning off are repeated in units of 0.1 second), the movement of the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced. For example, by dynamically setting the target display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), the dynamic display mode (the first symbol can be suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit 3rd design effect) It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device turns on the symbol “◯” as the normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) and the symbol “x” alternately for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is It is configured to be in an activated state for a predetermined time (actuated to an open state).

  The time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (probability variation state, short-time state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as a gaming state. Is set to be Thereby, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2.

  Therefore, during the probability changing state and the short time state, it can be set as a gaming state in which the ball is likely to win the lower first entrance 64b2. In the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probability variation state is set as the gaming state or the short time state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to guess the current gaming situation.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a plurality of gaming states in which a normal symbol high probability state is set, the same as the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The display mode is set. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what the current gaming state is based on the operating state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

  It should be noted that the probability of hitting is increased in the probability changing state or in the short-time state, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a per hit are also reduced in the probability changing state or in the short-time state. When it is in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter the 1 entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state in the probability variation state or in the short time state, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. In addition, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric utility item 64a per hit may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol), a short time state (special) Four game states are provided: a low probability state of a symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol, and a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol). The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another game state. It is possible to execute the lottery that is advantageous to the player most efficiently by defining the length to be shorter than the case where the game is performed.

  In the first embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first variable is partially changed. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if the big win is not won, there are many opportunities to get the ball into the first specific winning port 65a and win the prize ball. It is more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the off-lot lottery result in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as “small hit”.

  In the second special symbol lottery, the first special winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small win in addition to the big win, so that the prize ball in the latent state where the variation time of the second special symbol is short Can continue to increase. Therefore, a game can be performed in expectation of becoming a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, and thus novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Using a variable method). As a result, even when the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be performed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a big hit or small hit stop symbol, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variation display is fixedly displayed with the hit or the small hit and the big hit or the small hit is started in an overlapping manner.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 2, the various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of the balls launched toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment is configured to divide the gaming area into a left area and a right area by a variable display device unit 80 disposed in the center of the gaming area. .

  In the present embodiment, the fired ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (rotated clockwise) from the initial position (in a state where the player is not rotated). A sphere is fired at a launch intensity of about. Therefore, the fired sphere finally flows back in the firing flow path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul sphere. The foul sphere that has flowed back and down passes through the start position of the firing channel (the lower left end portion of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) flow down to the upper plate 17. With this configuration, even when a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to fire a ball with a desired launch strength, the foul ball remains in the launch path and the game Can be prevented.

  Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (a state in which the player does not rotate), the ball is launched with a launch intensity sufficient to flow down the left region described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees that is the maximum amount of rotation of the operation handle 51), a sphere is launched with a launch intensity that flows down the right region described above.

  In other words, the present embodiment is configured such that the area where the ball flows down can be made different based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the player's operation. Further, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left region. Instead of a game that is adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) that is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down in the right region is performed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, while the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the player only needs to maintain the state in which the operation handle 51 is rotated to the upper limit (the state in which the operating handle 51 has been rotated 120 degrees). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily play an appropriate game.

  Next, the left side area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the gaming state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state), a short time state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability state (short time) ) State), probability variation state (special symbol high probability (probability variation) state: normal symbol high probability (short time) state), latent probability state (special symbol high probability (probability variation) state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state) Is configured to be set. Also, a jackpot gaming state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is won and a small winning game state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is won by the small bonus is set. It is configured.

  Among them, when the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is caused to perform the left-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left area of the game board 13. A right-handed game in which a game method is guided to the player using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81 and a ball is caused to flow down to the left area of the game board 13 when the latent state is set. The game method is guided to the player using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, during the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player is guided to the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) according to the game state before winning.

  In addition, as a guide method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, it is configured so that a game method suitable for the current game state is always displayed, or only after the game method is switched You may comprise so that a game method may be displayed. Also, when a game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time between left-handed games and right-handed games is set as a normal game, and a game method other than normal games (right-handed game) is performed. The game method may be always displayed as guidance on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guidance display may not be performed when a left-handed game is performed.

  When there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player as in this embodiment, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether one display mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used in order to guide the game method to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, a configuration in which a player is informed of a game method may be used, or a configuration in which a player is notified using voice or a lamp may be used.

  In the left area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are arranged. Further, an upper first entrance 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display unit 80 so that a sphere that has flowed down the left region can enter. A lower first entrance 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided at a position below the upper first entrance 64b1. This electric accessory 64a is inserted into the lower first entrance 64b2 when a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67. The ball is configured to be variably operated from a closed state (first state) where the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) where the ball can easily enter the lower first entrance 64b2. ing.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, a state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed) When a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed. That is, the ball entering the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol to be executed.

  Also, in a state where the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) cannot be newly executed (the state of Special Figure 1 has already been executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed) In the case where a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, the storage means for storing the right of entrance of the ball up to a predetermined number (four) is provided. ing.

  Therefore, since the player can continue to play the game while the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is being executed, the operation of the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, only the storage means for storing the right that the ball has entered and the first special symbol are provided.

  80% of the spheres flowing down the left area by left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% (8 out of 100 balls) of the fired balls enter the upper first entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by a structure such as a plurality of nails and a windmill so as to form a sphere. Further, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, the number of balls entering the lower first entrance 64b2 is about 0%, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first entrance The spherical flow path is formed so that the number of spheres entering 64b2 is about 25%. That is, it is difficult for the balls to enter in the order of the lower first entrance 64b2 (in the open state of the electric accessory 64a), the upper first entrance 64b1, and the lower first entrance 64b2 (in the closed state of the electric accessory 64a). It is comprised so that it may become.

  As described above, the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player a privilege of paying out a prize ball in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. Each time one ball enters, four prize balls are paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the same number (four) of prize balls is given both when the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and when the ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided in the right area of the game board 13. The second entrance 640 is configured such that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by entering the ball, and a plurality of balls are entered such that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right region enter. A ball channel is formed by the nail. Here, the balls that have not entered the second entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right region.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variation time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed to when the lottery result is displayed is long. In a state in which a time variation time (10 minutes) is set and a latent state is set, a short variation time (1 second) is set.

  In other words, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the right-handed game is played rather than the left-handed game and the ball entering the first entrance 64 to execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in order to perform the second special symbol lottery, but it is easy to enter the ball, but since the variation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is improved. It will be very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player performs a left-handed game and executes the first special symbol lottery.

  In addition, since the second entrance 640 is set with one award ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state in which a normal state is set, and a ball that is fired by a right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball enters the second entrance 640, the number of balls does not increase.

  Furthermore, when the short time state or the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol is in a high probability state, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67 serving as a normal symbol lottery opportunity for opening the electric accessory 64a is provided only in the left region, the lower first entrance 64b2 that makes it easier for the ball to enter than in the normal state. In order to enter the ball, the player is configured to play a left-handed game.

  On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol is in a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the variation time of (one second) is set, it is appropriate to play the right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is won in a small win (winning probability is about 1/2). In the case of winning a small win, the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hit game, and 10 for each ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65. Each prize ball is configured to be awarded.

  That is, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, by continuously executing the right-handed game to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol aiming for the small win, the small hit game, Can be executed continuously.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lowermost part of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 is opened so that when the big win is won by lottery of a special symbol, the turning door 650f is operated to the front side so that a ball can be won in the second specific winning opening 650a. It is what is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured such that a ball that has flowed down the left region by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down a right-hand region by a right-handed game can equally enter. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the game method is given to the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

  When a ball enters the above-described first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is shown. ) Is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) makes a big lottery due to the first entrance switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. It is.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a jackpot, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  The first entrance 64 is a winning entrance where four balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, and the second entrance 640 receives a single ball when entering the ball. It is one of the winning entries to be paid out as prize balls. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 Are the same (both are 4) and different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (1), but the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 The number of prize balls to be paid out in this case may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2.

  In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first entrance 64b1 is set to 4 and the number of prize balls in the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which the balls are difficult to enter is set. In the case where the ball is in the upper first entrance 64b1, the privilege for entering the ball is increased, and when a specific gaming state (probability change state, short-time state) is set, the ball becomes easier to enter. Even if a ball frequently enters one entrance 64b2, the player may not be allowed to acquire excessive prize balls, and the upper first entrance 64b1 may have four prize balls. When the number of winning balls at the entrance 64b2 is set to five and a specific game state (probability change state, short time state) is set, a great privilege may be given to the player.

  Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (for example, both 5 You may comprise as a piece.

  The lower first entrance 64b2 is accompanied by an electric accessory 64a. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (regulated state), and the ball is difficult to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol lottery) performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, 64a is in an open state (allowable state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher in the probability variation state and in the short-time state than in the normal state, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. In FIG. 5, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (allowed state) increases. Further, during the probability changing state or the short time state, the time for which the electric utility item 64a is opened also becomes longer than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the lower first entrance 64b2 during the probability changing state or the short time state as compared to the normal state.

  In addition, as described above, the lower first entrance 64b2, that is, the entrance associated with the electric accessory 64a is in a state (first state) in which a ball can easily enter according to the set gaming state. It is possible to set a state where the ball is difficult to enter (second state). In other words, from the viewpoint of ease of entering a ball, the first state is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). It becomes.

  Here, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (the second special symbol lottery). ) Is the same, and if a special symbol low probability state is set, a lottery that will be a big winner is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280). When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery that is a big hit with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to hit than the low probability state is executed. However, the type of jackpot that is selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment provides the player with a “left-handed (left-handed game)” and “right-handed game” as a ball firing method (game method) according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to “Strike (Right-handed game)”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Out board 66 is provided in game board 13. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win (enter) any of the winning entrances (entrance entrances) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a is shown through the out entrance 66. Not guided to the ball discharge path. The out port 66 is disposed below the lower first entrance port 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area has one out port 66. However, other configurations may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

  By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally collecting the balls launched into the game area into one place (the place where the out port 66 is disposed). Since it is eliminated, the degree of freedom of arrangement of various devices constituting the game area can be increased. Specifically, for example, a sphere-specific outlet that flows down the left region and a sphere-specific outlet that flows down the right region may be provided. Further, when providing a plurality of out openings, it is preferable to provide an informing means for informing the player that the entrance is an out opening. As a result, a situation in which no privilege is given even though the ball enters the entrance (in fact, the exit) provided in the game area is suppressed, and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (decorative symbol dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on the rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number “1” is assigned to a rear symbol that imitates an elephant, and a number “2” is assigned to a rear symbol that imitates a lion. In this way, by making the third symbol a display mode in which the rear symbol and the number are associated and synthesized, it is possible for the player to display the rear symbol even if the third symbol is being dynamically displayed ( The type of the 3rd symbol is roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc., and when the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the back symbol is identified to ensure the type of the 3rd symbol. Can be grasped.

  In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a lottery result that is different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide games that never get bored. In addition, by setting the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol so as to be regularly changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, for example, as the third symbol The accuracy of game content prediction based on the display mode (combination of rear symbols and numbers) displayed in a stopped manner can be increased, and pleasure for the player to make predictions can be provided.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variation display is finished. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small bonus as a special symbol lottery result. When the special symbol lottery result is a small bonus, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, “341”). Is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, the combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed is made different so that the player can easily understand the lottery result. For example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win and when the special symbol is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts vertically, and about 3/4 on the upper side is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in each symbol row L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from right to left) with a periodicity. Is done. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the right-down diagonal lines and the right-up diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped (determined) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment, and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the holding ball after a 1 second stop display (definite display) Is started. If there are a plurality of holding balls, a lottery is executed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

  On the other hand, when there is no reserved ball and the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the detachment of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second (determined display), the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped (determined), a demonstration effect (a customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. .

  There is rarely a situation in which there is no entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the 3rd symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Based on the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of held balls whose variation display is currently held. In the present embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. For this reason, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the dynamic display of the third symbol (variable display) is performed in the main display area Dm. In this case, an effect including the effect (variable effect) is executed and the display of the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, etc. is executed in the sub display area Ds. It is not necessary to form each area shown in FIG. 1, for example, when the player is gazing at the effect for suggesting whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds A powerful effect may be executed by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols and a game guide that explains the contents of future games are executed with emphasis in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced. You may comprise so that the player can perform the presentation which is easy to understand by enlarging the display area of the display area Ds.

  Further, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols in the main display area Dm and an area for executing a notice effect may be formed according to the set gaming state and the effect mode being executed. You may provide the area | region which performs the variable display of a 3rd symbol in the display area Ds.

  Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display area Dm. In the small area Dm1, three 3rd symbols are displayed in a simple manner with only one of the numbers “1” to “9”. Even in the small area Dm1, a big hit is started by stopping and displaying three third symbols composed of the same numbers. Note that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. This is because the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed.

  Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the special symbol variation display that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol is referred to as the main variation). A variation display of a special symbol that is hardly executed when a regular gaming method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is applicable) is referred to as a secondary variation.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, when the big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the long-term (up to 10 minutes) A variation display (dynamic display) is executed, and at the timing when the variation display is started, the gaming state is changed from the probability variation state to the latent certain state. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the time when the fluctuation display that is a big hit is executed until the time when the fluctuation display ends and the jackpot game is started), the second special symbol is drawn. It is configured to execute a game aiming for a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol is the sub variation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols simulating a bird's face are displayed as the number of reserved balls in the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding holding balls, the reserved symbols are executed to enter the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the change display corresponding to the holding ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed, for example, when a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the entrance to the 2nd entrance 640 can be suspended. Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variation display effect of the 3rd symbol in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the change display effect executed in response to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the change situation of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) Can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  When the probability display state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state of normal symbol Is shifted to the low probability state, and the gaming state is shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, since the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, many lots of the second special symbol can be executed. This is a possible period (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantage Period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent state is set as the gaming state, When the player wins, the small hit game is frequently executed, and a gaming state advantageous to a player who can obtain a lot of prize balls (a special figure 2 advantageous state) is obtained.

  As described above, the period during which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that is won in the jackpot in the probability variation state. Therefore, when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game is executed. Thus, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player are set in succession, various benefits are continuously given to the player. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a small win is won with one special symbol (Special Figure 2) and the small bonus game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (Special Figure 1) is interrupted (variable display period) Measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the suspended variable display period is resumed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. A certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special diagram 1), the other special symbol (special diagram 2) that is changing is displayed as a stop display that indicates a loss. Is configured to forcibly stop. By comprising in this way, the situation where a small hit game is performed during a big hit game can be prevented.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is varied according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the fact that the lottery result is out of the fluctuation of the other special symbol When the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (the lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the end of the provision of the second privilege (until the end of the small hit game), and resumes after the end of the provision of the second privilege. In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is out of place, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery contents of the other special symbol (the period until the lottery result and lottery result are displayed) can be varied. A variety of playability can be provided.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can grant a privilege to a player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is varied according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the lottery result is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of control, the player is prevented from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery results that are given fewer benefits than the jackpot game (small hits) In this case, the variation table is used to prevent a bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are changing at the same time, the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given by giving the privilege that is not the most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not performed, and to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short display period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the case where the winning state is set in the state where the probability variation state is set and the first special symbol is won. Is displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period that is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the jackpot game. The second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to make the game eagerly so that the first advantageous period is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot gaming state is set as the gaming state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, for example, the jackpot game round currently being executed as the contents of the jackpot game. Round number display mode for indicating the number, acquired amount display mode for indicating the number of acquired balls, type of jackpot game being executed (number of rounds, game state set after the jackpot game is finished) The number of jackpots won in a period in which the non-normal state (probability change state, latent state, short time state) is continuously set without setting the normal state as the suggestion display mode and the game state (the so-called consecutive number of consecutive times) ), Etc. are displayed.

  Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), if the current jackpot type is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) that sets a probable change state as a gaming state after the jackpot game ends, As shown in FIG. 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) that aims to set a latent state advantageous to the player is displayed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the jackpot game ending screen, a comment “chance zone entry!” Indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 displayed during a period in which the probability change state and the latent state are set is displayed. The character 811 is configured not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in a period during which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A gaming state that is advantageous to the game state (a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

  With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen. Can be provided.

  In addition, a comment “Aim for RUSH !!” for aiming at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm is displayed. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a “left-handed” character is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. Thereby, when the probability variation state is set for the player, it is possible to easily grasp that the left game aiming at the left region is performed. In the present embodiment, the second variable prize-winning device 650 that is released during the jackpot game is a ball that is fired by a left-handed game (a ball that has flowed down the left region) or a ball that is fired by a right-handed game. , Which are arranged at positions that can be won (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)) and displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the big hit game ("left-handed", "right-handed"), The game method to be guided during the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

  Specifically, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined, and if it is determined that the game state in which the left-handed game is guided (normal state, short-time state, probability change state), When “left-handed” is displayed and it is determined that the game state (latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is guided is displayed, “right-handed” is displayed as the guidance display during the big hit. Thereby, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the player from changing the game method.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, a special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, “777” is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (displaying the ending screen). It is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, “-” is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described non-variable display mode is displayed when the special symbol has not been variably displayed even once the power is turned on. By displaying this non-variable display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict a past game history (variable history of special symbols).

  In the present embodiment, the non-variable display mode described above is configured to be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating a deviation is displayed. The display that is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 when it is determined that the elapsed period from the previous variation display has exceeded a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes). You may comprise so that a mode may be changed and displayed to an initial display mode or a non-variable display mode.

  Returning to FIG. In the state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 5B), the gaming state is such that it is easy to execute the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game. That is, the probability variation state is a state in which the electric symbol 64a is easy to open because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easy to enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probability changing state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the display screen in the probability variation state. As shown in FIG. 6B, a comment “in the chance zone” indicating that the current gaming state is a probable change state is displayed in the sub display area Ds so as to scroll in the horizontal direction (from right to left). The

  In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Even at this time, the second special symbol is not changed from the state shown in FIG. 6A (because the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). In the special figure 2 display region Dm2, the non-variable display mode “-” is continuously displayed.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of action display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probability changing state, and the lottery result (whether or not determination result) of the first special symbol in the probability changing state is stored. Accordingly, the operation display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. Accordingly, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to predict whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol wins a big win in the probability variation state.

  After the display screen shown in FIG. 6B is displayed, when the variable display for indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol has been won is executed, the display shown in FIG. A screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variation display that wins the jackpot is started in the probability variation state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state at the timing when a variation display indicating that the first special symbol is won in the probability variation state is started. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous to the player (latent probability state) at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being performed is displayed, the display mode (display mode of “333”) of the effect symbol 813 for indicating that the game state has transitioned to the player is stopped. Is done. Thereby, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state by the fact that the effect symbol 813 is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the 3rd symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the stop symbol display of the effect symbol display mode indicates a special symbol lottery result. It can be thought of as an aspect.

  In the present embodiment, a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent state is set. Therefore, at least during the period when the latent state is set, “right-handed” for showing the player a right-handed game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment “RUSH rushed in! Please hit right” is displayed to indicate that the latent state has been set as the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols displayed in the main display area Dm are stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of variation of the first special symbol won in the jackpot. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has shifted according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

  Then, when the right hit game is continuously executed (during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol) during the latent state (when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing), when winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. As a result, an effect mode for indicating that the player has won the small hit is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the display screen in the latent state.

  According to FIG. 7B, in the state in which the latent state is set (during RUSH), if the lottery of the second special symbol is won, the special special symbol 1 display area Dm1 has the first special symbol. Is displayed in a variation display mode for suggesting that the game is changing (a jackpot is changing), and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a display mode “341” indicating that the player has won the jackpot is displayed. .

  Then, a treasure box 812 displayed as an effect mode in RUSH is opened, and “V” for indicating a small hit is displayed as an effect symbol 813 for indicating a game result from the inside. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that a small hit is won with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and that the small hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 that is rotated when a small win is won is provided in the right region, and the game can be played with the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if a small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the big hit variation, and the latent probability state is set. In a state where is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time that the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state), the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second when the probability variation state is set. Both special symbols may also vary.

  In such a case, even if a display mode (see FIG. 7A) indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second currently changing state is displayed. Until the special symbol fluctuates, the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state cannot be executed, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed indefinitely even in the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variation state), the variation state of the second special symbol (the presence or absence of variation, (Variable remaining period) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is made different.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variation state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the effect when special figure 2) is fluctuating will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the second special symbol is changing at the time when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability changing state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability changing is performed. A “super chance zone” is displayed in which the degree of expectation that the RUSH state is set is higher than the “chance zone” for indicating the state.

  Here, the display content of the display screen in the “super chance zone” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram in the case where the variation won in the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in the probability variation state. In other words, the “super chance zone” is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the variation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is the display mode which shows the state which is not complete | finished.

  When the “super chance zone” is set, a comment is displayed in the sub display area Ds to indicate that “in the super chance zone”. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed so as to move faster than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at high speed can easily find the treasure chest 812.

  In the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a “variation display mode” is displayed to indicate that the first special symbol is changing, and a latent state is set in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. A “variation display mode” that has been fluctuating from a point in time before is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. The display screen of the “super chance zone” shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing of the special figure 2 change executed across the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state, When the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is completed (see FIG. 5D), the “RUSH” entry screen is displayed to notify the player that the player has entered “RUSH” (see FIG. 8B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, an effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure chest 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered “RUSH” is displayed. Then, “right-handed” for guiding the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this time, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a change display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (due to big jackpot change), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates a disconnection. The display mode “346” is stopped and displayed.

  Returning to FIG. During the rush game (RUSH), that is, during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the game that frequently draws the second special symbol in which the variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing the right-handed game Is executed. In addition, although detailed explanation will be described later, in this embodiment, in the state of winning a jackpot with one special symbol (including during the jackpot fluctuation), it is possible to win a jackpot by lottery of the other special symbol It is configured not to exist. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either small hit or miss. And in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

  Therefore, during a rush game, a game that wins a small hit with a probability of 1/2 and acquires a prize ball by the small hit game continues until the big hit variation of the first special symbol is completed. In other words, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot variation period of the first special symbol is fully used because the lottery is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol. Rush games can be provided.

  When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, a display screen at the end of the rush game (at the time of special figure 1 big hit fluctuation stop) will be described.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a jackpot (a jackpot A (see FIG. 16A)) that is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. These are the figures which showed typically the display content at the time of winning the big hit (hit D (refer FIG. 16 (a))) which is disadvantageous for a player.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16A) is won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of “346” indicating the disengagement is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“super V”) indicating that the jackpot advantageous to the player has been won from the treasure chest 812 is displayed, and a comment “congratulations” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this case, a “right-handed” character, which is the same gaming method as in the latent state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9B, at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of “346” indicating the disengagement is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“End?”) Indicating that the player has won the jackpot unfavorable to the player from the treasure chest 812 is displayed, and a comment “Please return to the left” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Is done. In this case, in order to suggest to the player that the rush game has ended, the character “left-handed” which is the same game method as in the normal state is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

  9B shows the display screen when winning the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A), but when winning the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A), that is, the jackpot D The same jackpot game is executed, but the same display screen is displayed even when the game state set after the jackpot ends wins a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, and when the jackpot game ends, The production is configured to execute an effect for playing a right-handed game. Thereby, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgetting attention calling screen displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player has won a lot of prize balls by playing a game, he forgets that he / she has inserted the card into the card unit and forgets to take the card at the end of the game. There was something to do.

  In contrast, the present embodiment is configured to display a card forgetting attention calling screen (see FIG. 10A) at a predetermined timing (for example, during a big hit game where a winning ball can be obtained). Thereby, the situation where a player forgets to take a card can be prevented. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that is easy to win a prize ball and a jackpot that is difficult to win as a jackpot game, and further, it is possible to set a gaming state that can frequently execute a jackpot game in a short period of time. In addition, the timing for displaying the card forgetting warning screen can be set according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

  Here, with reference to Fig.10 (a), the display content of the forgetting card alert screen is demonstrated. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the card forgetting warning screen. In this way, the operation for removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment “Please be careful not to forget to remove the card” is displayed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10B to FIG. 10D, the display timing of the forgetting card warning screen will be described. FIG. 10 (b) shows a case where the first jackpot is “Big Jack A (see FIG. 16 (a))”, that is, the jackpot winning a lot of winning balls to the player in one jackpot game. FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D are timing charts showing the display timing of the card display (card forgotten warning alert display). In FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D, the first jackpot is “jackpot A (see FIG. 16A)”. That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgotten warning display) when winning a jackpot that can give a player a lot of prize balls in one jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), when the first jackpot (the jackpot won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is jackpot A, a sufficient number of winning balls will be given during the jackpot. Since it will be granted, the card display is executed during the jackpot ending period (ED).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, when the first jackpot is the jackpot C, a sufficient number of winning balls cannot be given during the jackpot, and the player Since there is a possibility of renting a ball using a card, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first jackpot (jackpot C).

  In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first jackpot until the normal state is set again is regarded as an advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is The card display is executed by using the card display execution condition that a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) has been reached.

  In other words, after the big hit C has been completed, if a small hit game occurs continuously, and the number of prize balls during the advantageous duration exceeds a predetermined amount, the card display is made on the small hit game ending screen. (Refer to FIG. 10 (c)) When the number of prize balls during the advantageous duration exceeds a predetermined amount by repeatedly executing the jackpot C, the card display is performed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (See FIG. 10D).

<About game state transition in the first embodiment>
Next, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method from one gaming state to another gaming state for the four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  First, a game state transition method in the case of staying in a normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game because the special symbol lottery frequency is likely to increase. This is because, when left-handed, it is easy to enter the upper first entrance 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the small hits are not lottery. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility that the game state may be shifted to another gaming state only when a big hit is made. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, in the normal state ST1, when the jackpot is determined by a ratio of 65% in the case of winning the first special symbol, the center of FIG. Transition to the probability variation state ST2 shown in FIG. In addition, when the big win D is determined at a rate of 10% in the normal state ST1 when the first special symbol is a lottery, the game shifts to the short time state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. . On the other hand, when a big hit B is determined at a rate of 25% when the first special symbol is a lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the big hit (the normal state is looped). To do).

  In the normal state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handed, but the player intentionally hits the right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, a part of the left-handed ball enters the second entrance 640, so that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types (bonus E to G) as the jackpot type set when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol was won in the normal state When the jackpot E and F are determined at a ratio of 65% in total, the game shifts to the probable change state ST2 after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined at a ratio of 35%, the game state after the jackpot ends is the normal state Is set again (loops normal state).

  In this way, in the normal state, if the first special symbol is a lottery due to the lottery, there is a possibility of shifting to a shorter time state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D), In the normal state, when the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the possibility of shifting to the time-saving state becomes zero. Therefore, since the disadvantage in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the normal state can be increased, it is possible to suppress irregular games. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state is configured so that a variation pattern having a long variation time (10 minutes) is set, so that the game efficiency is left-handed. Therefore, the demerit in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing the right handing in the normal state can be further increased.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the probability variation state will be described. As described above, in the probability variation state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game. It becomes. In the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state, which is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. When the probability change state ST2 is set, the process shifts to the latent state SP1 when the first special symbol jackpot is won (the special figure 1 jackpot variation starts).

  In the probability variation state, as in the normal state, aiming at the lower first entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first entrance 64b1, while aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handed, the game is played. Will do. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set during the probability variation state, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes easier to execute the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

  In the probability variation state configured as described above, a left-handed game is usually performed and a lottery of the first special symbol is executed, but a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is executed. There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery. In this case, when the jackpot E and F are determined at a ratio of 65% in the case of winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, the probability variation state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends, and is determined at a ratio of 35%. When the big hit G is reached, the short time state is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  In other words, if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the probability variation state, it is possible to shift to the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, while the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In such a case, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the probability variation state, the irregular game can be suppressed.

  Next, a game state transition method in the case where the user stays in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent state, unlike the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the second special symbol can be drawn efficiently by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike than to make a left strike.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won with the probability variation state set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won with the probability variation state and the time reduction state set If the first transition condition is satisfied and the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is in the stage before the jackpot game is started, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the second transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set after the big hit game is over.

  With this configuration, the timing at which the gaming state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that a variety of games can be given to the player. Can provide sex.

  Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent state is set is the jackpot variation period of the first special symbol, so the period in which the latent state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent state in advance (when the latent state is set) in accordance with the period during which the latent state is set.

  In addition, in the state where the probability variation state is set, if the big hit C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent probability state can be set both before and after the big hit game. Unexpected game play can be provided.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. The MPU 201 receives various commands and commands via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown). Execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device, and the like. used.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first per-type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation-type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores counters for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a in which counter values are stored for the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the entrance to the second entrance 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 is provided with up to four holding balls. For this reason, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not a big hit game, each counter value is When a ball enters the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and enters the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to an execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display) are executed. Each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entrance 64, If the number of reserved balls in the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Is done. Further, when the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired, and a prize ball (four in this embodiment) is obtained. ) Is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second entrance 640 during the period when the second special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In some cases, each counter value or the like is not acquired, and only the winning balls (two winning balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for the first entrance 64, but is not limited thereto, and may be less than four (for example, three), It may be more than four (for example, eight). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the entrance to the second entrance 640 (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not put on hold, but hold storage is possible as with the first entrance 64. It may be configured.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. And the random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first per random number counter C1 When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot. Further, the random number value which is a small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state, short time state) of the special symbol, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Then, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “7, 8”, and if it is “7, 8”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of “0-5”, and if it is within the range of “0-5”, it is determined that it is a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the total number of 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, two values are defined as values for determining the jackpot, so the low probability state of the special symbol The jackpot probability at time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability when the special symbol is in a high probability state is 1/80.

  Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be small hits are set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, in the lottery of the first special symbol, a random number value that is a small hit is not defined. In other words, the first special symbol lottery does not win. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of “212 to 432” regardless of the gaming state, and the range of “212 to 432” is determined. If it is within, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first per-random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “7, 8” is the first per-number as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480 and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 2, the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is “1/240”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0-5” is the first per-random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 6, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is “1/80”.

  Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first per-random number counter C1 that will be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random values “212 to 432” are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 among the total number of random numbers being 480, the probability of hitting special symbols is “2211/480” (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, based on the value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B), the small hit type (small hit) A to C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In the variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables corresponding to the gaming state are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second per random number table 202c, there are 11 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (in the normal state and in the latent state) of the normal symbol as the gaming state, and the range is "0-10. " The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233. Since the total number of random number values that can be won is 11, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “11/233”.

  On the other hand, there are 232 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (in the probability variation state and the short time state), and the range is “0 to 231”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be hit is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is “232/233”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number value that hits the normal symbol is configured so that a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol is provided. Yes. In addition, when the normal symbol fluctuates, and when the normal symbol is hit, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is higher than the normal symbol in the low probability state. The probability state is more advantageous (the ball is likely to enter the lower first entrance 64b2).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened “only twice per second”. On the other hand, in the normal symbol high probability state, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened “only twice per second”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the gameability is not impaired.

  The normal variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 (see FIG. 20). ) Is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Details of the normal variation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second hit random number table 202c, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection are selected. At least a table 202f and an ordinary map pattern table 202g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is Are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, the first hit The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), “big hit A” is associated with the first special symbol (special drawing 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 24”. It is prescribed. This “big hit A” has 15 rounds, and a big hit game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that become “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  Then, when “big hit A” is selected, regardless of the gaming state when the big hit is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reductions is 10,000 times. It is set (a value of 10,000 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f). That is, after the “big hit A” is completed, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

  “Big hit A” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, which is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which a game advantageous to the normal state can be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is more easily given to the player in the latent probability state than in the probability variation state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 49”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. The “big hit B” is the same big hit game as the “big hit A” described above. The number of rounds is 15 and the big hit that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). A game is set. After the “big hit B” is finished, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF, and the hour / short counter 203f is set to a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

  When the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, a value of “0” is set in the hourly counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the reduced time state or the probable change state, A value of “100” is set. In other words, when winning the “big hit B” with the normal state set, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, whereas when winning the “big hit B” during the short-time state After the jackpot, the short time state (100 times) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  “Big Bonus B” is one of the types of jackpots with the same number of rounds as “Big Jack A”, which is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be earned. , The jackpot type is more disadvantageous than the “jackpot A”.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 89”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. The “big hit C” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is also opened in the small hit game executed when the small special is won in the second special symbol lottery. The game is configured so that it is difficult for the player to discriminate between the case where the “big hit C” is won and the case where the “small win” is won.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to know whether a big hit game or a small hit game has been executed when a hit game in which the first attacker is released is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to be in a latent state (RUSH state) in which a small hit game can be frequently executed during the big hit fluctuation period of the first special symbol. A game is played with the expectation that the winning game when one attacker is released is a small winning game. That is, it is possible to provide a novel gameability by providing a game period in which the player does not want a situation in which the jackpot game most desired by the player is normally executed.

  After the “big hit C” is finished, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, and the hour / hour counter 203f is set to a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. When the gaming state at the time of the big win is the normal state, a value of “10000” is set in the hourly counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of the big win is the short-time state or the probability variation state, the time-shortage counter 203f is set. A value of “0” is set. In other words, when winning the “big hit C” with the normal state set, the probable change state is set after the big win ends, whereas the “big hit C” wins during the probable change state or the short time state. In this case, the latent state is set after the big hit.

  In this way, in the gaming state when winning the jackpot, even if it is the same type of jackpot, the game state set after the jackpot ends is configured to be different so that the player simply aims to win the jackpot In addition to being able to watch not only the set gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the probability changing state is set as a condition for setting the latent state. There are two settings: a first setting condition for starting the big hit variation of the special symbol when the symbol is set, and a second setting condition for winning the jackpot C when the probability variation state and the short time state are set. doing. That is, the degree of expectation (probability) in which the latent state is set is made different depending on the gaming state when winning the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the player is gradually increased in the degree of expectation that a game state advantageous to the player is set as the game progresses (in accordance with the set game state). Can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 40 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 40% (40/100). “Big hit C” is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the “big hit A” and “big hit B” described above, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, since it is the only jackpot type that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends, it is set after the jackpot In terms of the gaming state, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated and defined. This “big hit D” has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as “big hit C”) that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

  After the “big hit D” is finished, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF and the value of “0” is set to the hour / short counter 203f. In other words, when “big hit C” is won, the normal state is set after the big hit. Since this “big hit D” is the same big hit game content as the above “big hit C”, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small hit game. ing.

  Since the normal state is set as described above after the end of the “big hit D”, the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) won in the “big hit D” in the state where the probability variation state is set. If executed, the jackpot game is executed after frequently playing the jackpot game during the jackpot change, and then the normal state is set.

  That is, in the latent state (RUSH state) in the case of winning the “big hit D” in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state after the “big hit D” in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player seem to have finished the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed.

  Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). “Big hit D” is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than “big hit A” and “big hit B” described above, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. It becomes. In addition, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment has four jackpot types ("jackpot A" to "jackpot D") as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Yes. Among them, in the two jackpot types ("jackpot A", "jackpot B"), the jackpot game for which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) that is opened only during the jackpot game is to be opened is executed. In the other two jackpot types ("big hit C", "big hit D"), a big hit game is executed with the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the small hit game being released.

  That is, in the first embodiment, as a special symbol jackpot, the main jackpot game ("jackpot A", "jackpot B") for the purpose of causing the player to win a prize ball and the game state are varied. And a sub jackpot game ("Big Jack C") that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the player has won the jackpot (it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot game is a jackpot game) “Big jackpot D”).

  Further, in this embodiment, since it is a game property that allows a player to acquire a prize ball by a small hit game instead of a big hit game, it is set so that it is difficult to acquire a large number of prize balls during the big hit game. (Even if a jackpot game where only a small amount of prize balls can be won depending on the type of jackpot is executed), a jackpot game aimed at changing the gaming state while suppressing discomfort to the player. Can be set.

  On the other hand, as a jackpot type by lottery of the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “0-4” is defined in association with “jackpot E”. The “big hit E” has 15 rounds, and a big hit game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

  Then, when “Big Jack E” is selected, regardless of the gaming state when the big jackpot is won, the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reductions is 10,000 times. It is set (a value of 10,000 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f). That is, after the “big hit E” is completed, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

  “Big hit E” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, which is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which a game advantageous to the normal state can be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is more easily given to the player in the latent probability state than in the probability variation state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 64”, “big hit F” is associated and defined. This “big hit F” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big special win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

  Then, when “big hit F” is selected, regardless of the gaming state when the big win is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reductions is 10,000 times. It is set (a value of 10,000 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f). That is, after the “big hit F” is completed, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

  The “big hit F” is one of the big hit types with the least number of rounds, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which a game advantageous to the normal state can be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is more easily given to the player in the latent probability state than in the probability variation state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  “Big hit G” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “65 to 99”. The “big hit G” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 35 counter values that are “big hit G”, so “big hit G” is determined when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The proportion is 35% (35/100).

  Then, when “Big Bonus G” is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big jackpot, and the number of time reductions is zero. It is set (a value of 0 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f).

  “Big hit G” is one of the big hit types with the least number of rounds, and is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is the normal state, the gaming state set after the jackpot is also disadvantageous. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) And the ratio that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot ends is 65% (65/100), but the ratio that 15 rounds are set as the jackpot game (50% for special figure 1). , Special figure 2 is 5%), the percentage that the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the release target (50% for special figure 1 and 5% for special figure 2), the game state at the time of winning the big hit The ratio of 10000 being set in the hour / hour counter 203f after the jackpot is over when the time is in the short-time state or the probability variation state (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol) (25% for special figure 1 and 65% for special figure 2) Are configured differently.

  In this way, by making the jackpot game content and the game state after the jackpot end different according to the type of the special symbol that won the jackpot, it becomes possible to provide the player with various games, It is possible to improve interest.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described content is configured to be different depending on the type of special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the above-described content may be configured to be different. In addition to the contents described above, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to FIG. The ratio of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON may be varied.

  Also, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is completed on condition that the ball has passed a specific area (for example, an area through which the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game. The gaming machine configured as described above may be configured such that the probability that a ball passes through a specific area is different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for showing the lottery result in each gaming state set after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16A, in this embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to “10”, the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit value of the opening operation in the round game may be varied depending on the winning jackpot type (or the type of special symbol won in the jackpot).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described. The small hitting type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small hitting when the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is a lottery. In the small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 93”. This “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only for 1.5 seconds × 1 during the small hit game.

  Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 94 random number values that are “small hit A”, and therefore, when a small hit is made in the second special symbol lottery, “small hit A” Is determined to be 94% (94/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “94 to 98”, “small hit B” is defined in association with it. This “small hit B” is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.2 seconds × 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are five random number values that are “small hit B”. Is determined to be 5% (5/100).

  Furthermore, “small hit C” is defined in association with the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5. This “small hit C” is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds × 8 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there is one random number value that becomes “small hitting C”, so when the special symbol lottery is won, it becomes “small hitting C”. The ratio is 1% (1/100).

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202f defines a random value for determining a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is a normal table 202f1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a normal state, and for time reduction / probability change for determining a fluctuation pattern in a short time state and a probability variation state. A table 202f2 and a latent probability table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent probability state are included at least. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. In each table shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the variation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the variation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

  First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 includes a random value (variation type) for determining a variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (result of determination). Counter value of the counter CS1) is defined.

  Specifically, as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated. Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range “51-100”, super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range “101-150”, and super reach A is associated with the range “151-198”. C (30 seconds) is associated.

  On the other hand, when the special table 202f1 is referenced by the lottery of the first special symbol, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d). Accordingly, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern varies. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is in the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is long in the range of “0 to 70”. A variation pattern of out (12 seconds) is associated, and out of normal range (20 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 150”. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “151 to 170”, and the outage super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. It has been.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the variation pattern of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to a variation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) within the range of “0 to 70”. As a value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 130”, and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a variation of “131 to 170”. ing. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with outlier superreach A (30 seconds) in the range of “171 to 185”, and the outage superreach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “186 to 198”. It has been.

  Note that the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 in FIG. 35) is the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when the number of the holding balls is four.

  Thus, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this way, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is large, the fluctuation time becomes short, and it becomes difficult to store the balls on hold. Therefore, the ball enters the first entrance 64 in a state where the number of balls on hold is at the upper limit (four). Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, the outlier long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. As a result, when the right hand is made in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time of 600 seconds is set every time, so that the game efficiency is much worse than when the left hand is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn at normal times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, details of the time-shortening / probability changing table 202f2 will be described. The time / probability change table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a high probability state (that is, a time-short state or a probability change state) of a normal symbol is set as the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), this time-shortening / probability changing table 202f2 is for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for each special symbol type and for each special symbol stop type (result of determination). A random value (counter value of the variation type counter CS1) is defined. Unlike the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18, the time reduction / probability changing table 202f2 is configured such that a different variation pattern is not selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. doing.

  In other words, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol in order to perform the game aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 while performing the left-handed game, There is a possibility that a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changed) may occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected. Thereby, in the normal state, the state where the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the short-time / probability changing table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19 (a) performs a left-handed game, and when the game for entering a ball into the lower first entrance 64b2 is performed, or during the probability-changing state. A data table to be referenced. At this time, during the short state and the probable change state, since the electric utility item 64a is frequently released, the game state is such that the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

  As described above, when the game state is set so that the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored, the variation occurs when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small like the normal table 202f1 described above. If you add a configuration that makes it easy to select a long-time variation pattern, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation that is executed when the game is rested and the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol decreases The fluctuation time of the game becomes long, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time-short state and the probability-change state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern table (time reduction / time reduction) that is referred to in a gaming state (short time state, probability variation state) in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored, that is, a normal symbol high probability state. The probability variation table 202f2) is selected so that the variation pattern selected by the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is not different (a variation pattern having a long variation time is not selected when the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is small). ) Is composed. This makes it possible to efficiently execute the game in the short time state and the probability variation state.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the winning change state is set and the jackpot is won, the probability changing state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state at the timing when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to move to. Specifically, when the probability variation state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Diagram 1) is performed, and when the lottery result (whether or not determination result) is a big hit, the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 is stored. When the winning special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes a latent state while the winning special variation (600 seconds) is executed, and when the winning special variation ends, the special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot, and the jackpot game is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the lottery and the variable display can be executed at the same time, so that the latent state is set (the special fluctuation per special figure 1). Can be made to draw the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display period (variation time) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol is included. It is configured to win a small hit. By configuring in this way, the player can frequently draw lots of the second special symbol while the latent state is set (while the special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed), so that the player Can win many prize balls.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 19 (a), in this embodiment, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, 60 seconds to 600 seconds depending on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. The second variation time is set, and this variation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a result of lottery of the special symbol, not only the result of whether or not the jackpot is won (result of determination of success / failure) but also the player can be focused on the selected variation pattern (variation time). The interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the time reduction / probability changing table 202f2 is referred to, the variation time is set to 60 seconds (1 minute) regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. When the special symbol lottery result is out of place, the outlier long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hand is made in the short-time state and the probability variation state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time of 60 seconds is set every time, so that the game efficiency is much higher than the left-handed state. Getting worse. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn in the short-time state and the certainty-change state.

  Next, the details of the latent probability table 202f3 will be described with reference to FIG. This latent probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a latent probability state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), this latent probability table 202f3 is a random pattern for determining the variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (result of determination). A numerical value (counter value of the variation type counter CS1) is defined. It should be noted that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured such that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similar to the above-mentioned time-shortening / probability changing table 202f2.

  This latent probability table 202f3 is used for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) during the period in which the jackpot variation of the special diagram 1 is being executed during the probabilistic state, When winning the jackpot, which is a jackpot type of “Big Jack C”, and selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) executed after the jackpot game ends. Referenced.

  This latent probability table 202f3 is selected when the first special symbol lottery is won for the contents defined in the time reduction / probability changing table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern is different from the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol, The rest is the same. Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the fluctuation pattern determined when the first special symbol is a lottery is determined as a fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 39” and the normal fluctuation (60 Seconds), a super variation (180 seconds) is associated with the range of “40 to 119”, and a special variation (600 seconds) is associated with the range of “120 to 198”.

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the first special symbol is lost and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) ) And the middle fluctuation (30 seconds) are associated with each other regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. When the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the out-of-range short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Thereby, many lotteries (fluctuations) of the second special symbol can be executed during the latent state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the common map variation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the normal symbol when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, the normal variation pattern table 202 g includes a range of values of the general variation type counter CS <b> 2 and a variation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state when the normal symbol lottery is executed. Are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state, the latent state, that is, the low probability state of the normal symbol, the entire range of values that can be taken by the normal variation type counter CS2 ( 0 to 198) is associated with a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the gaming state is in a probable variation state, a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of values that can be taken by the normal variation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a short-time state, a probable variation state, that is, a normal symbol high probability state, the variation value of the normal variation type counter CS2 is within the range of “0 to 198” and the variation time is 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

  In the first embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may be varied. When the normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability state, the variation time is 2 of 1 second or 3 seconds. The configuration may be such that any one of the types is set. The variation time is not limited to two types, and more variation times may be selected. The more variation the variation time has, the less likely the player will be able to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to make the right handing more reliably and continuously in the latent state.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired common symbol variation type counter CS2, but in addition to this, based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol Alternatively, a configuration in which the variation time is changed, a configuration in which the variation time is changed based on the number of times of drawing a special symbol, or a configuration in which the variation time of the normal symbol is set by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the game state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and thereafter (for example, , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time.

  In this way, by measuring the number of special figure fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot, the variable time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed. In the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with a sense of expectation so that more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, short fluctuation time) is executed. it can.

  In addition, while the lottery of the even number of special symbols has been executed after the game state has shifted to the latent state, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, otherwise (odd number of times) You may comprise so that 3 second may be set as a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times that the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. It is possible to make a right turn continuously. In this case, the special symbol lottery time is set to be longer in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed (in comparison with the case where the special symbol lottery is executed) It may be configured such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of lotteries stored on hold is smaller.

  In addition, when the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it may be configured such that a longer variation time becomes easier to select as the number of retained balls of the normal symbol increases. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is difficult to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to easily store the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol are per unit time. The number of normal symbol lotteries can be made uniform.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203e, hour / hour counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 2 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, special figure 2 fluctuation It has at least a time counter 203n, a big hit / medium flag 203o, a small hit / medium flag 203p, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, a general figure short fluctuation flag 203t, a winning counter 203u, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the area, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the first reserved area). Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected is stored.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area (ordinary symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is set to the execution area. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into the reserved area with the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a special symbol variable display (first symbol display device 37, which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47). (See S1705). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is held in the actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The value of the normal symbol held ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is set to an initial value of zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a new variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1903: No in FIG. 49). reference).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time reduction state. The hour counter 203f is set with a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type after the jackpot is over. Then, the hour / hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 in the gaming state update process executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see S308 in FIG. 36). When a normal symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the time-short counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and the normal symbol is determined by referring to the table for high probability. . On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol, and whether or not the normal symbol is correct is determined with reference to the table for low probability.

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and indicates that the special symbol is in a high probability state when set to ON. That is, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, as the gaming state, the probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state), One of the normal symbols (low probability state) is set.

  The probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot for setting a probability change state or a latent probability state after the jackpot is ended (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54) (FIG. 54). 54, S2403). When the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the symbol is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the special symbol jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a special symbol after a special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability state) is set as a special symbol high probability end condition for ending the special symbol high probability state. The probability variation flag 203g may be set to OFF when the number of times of fluctuation (number of times of special figure fluctuation) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, in order to set the timing when the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF, a storage means for preliminarily storing the number of times of variation of the special figure as a special figure high accuracy end condition, and a state after the special figure high accuracy state is set. Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end judgment for judging whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high-precision termination condition) stored in the storage means And means.

  Furthermore, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared. For example, a special figure 1 high-precision end condition that can be established based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high-precision state, A special figure 2 high-precision end condition that can be established based only on the number of times, and a lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small hit) Such a special figure high-accuracy end condition may be facilitated, and the probability variation flag 203g may be set to OFF when any of the special figure high-accuracy end conditions is satisfied.

  The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the first entrance 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (See S407 in FIG. 34). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

  When the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is on and the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, a process of removing the second special symbol and forcibly stopping the symbol with the symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other hits a big hit or a small hit during execution of one big hit.

  The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (See S1007 in FIG. 40). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

  When the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i is on and the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, a process of removing the first special symbol and forcibly stopping the symbol with the symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). . Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other hits a big hit or a small hit during execution of one big hit.

  The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “00H” is stored as the information indicating. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the probability change state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203g is on), the winning state storage area 203j indicates the probability change state. “01H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “02H” is stored as the information to be indicated.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

  The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second inlet 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203k turned on, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is subtracted). (Stop) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol during the second special symbol small hit and the big hit is started during the small win. it can.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. The first special symbol and the second special symbol When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the time measurement results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

  The big hit flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit. If this jackpot flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. The jackpot medium flag 203o is set to ON when the jackpot start is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

  The small hitting flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting small, and if it is off, it indicates that the small hitting is not being hit. This small hitting medium flag 203p is set to ON when the small hitting start is set (see S1606 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is set off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 55).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol wins a small hit, and when winning a small hit (when the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to ON) It is configured to interrupt the variable display of one special symbol. That is, among the special symbols of multiple types (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is won in the lottery, and the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to ON. In this state, the display of the variation of the other special symbol (the first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the small hit game. In addition, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variation display of the other special symbol from being ended and the big hit game from being started.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating a period from when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) with the big win stop symbol to when the big hit is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when there is a new entry to the second entrance 640. (See S901 in FIG. 39: Yes). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. In this case, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

  The common figure short variation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was short variation (fluctuation for three seconds). This shows that a short variation of the symbol has been executed. This normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the short time state (short time) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes). ) Is set to ON when a variation time of 3 seconds (short variation) is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48). Yes), when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a win (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

  Here, when it is determined that the general-purpose short variation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819: Yes in FIG. 48), it is determined whether the current time is in the short-time state (short-time) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the time is short (short time) (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48). 48 S1822). It is to be noted that the common figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal symbol fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

  In this way, the gaming state at the time of starting the change of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the variable time is set) and the setting of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric utility item 64a only when both of the gaming states are in the short-time state, a plurality of gaming states (normal states) It is possible to reliably prevent the electric player 64a from being released for a long time by the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols executed across the time-short state), and a privilege advantageous to the player (long of the electric player 64a It is possible to suppress excessively providing (open) to the player.

  The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the first specific winning opening 65a in the small hit game round. When the value of the winning counter 203u is 10 which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). Even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10 in each jackpot round, the round ends when the round period set for the round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a winning ball is detected with respect to the first specific winning opening 65a during the small round effective period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the above-described winning counter 203u is not limited to the small hit game, but also counts the number of balls won to the second specific winning slot 650a in each round during the big hit game. It is also used for.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a as the game content of the small hit game is set to 1.5 seconds, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winning is set to 10 doing. In other words, the valid period of the round game (1.5 seconds) elapses before 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be made constant, the production over the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game) The production period of a series of productions executed in the same manner can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the change timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect, and enhance the effect.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) in the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation process (figure 46). 32 (see S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure 1 is performed in the same manner as when changing (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device 37 continuously executes the fluctuation display. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v to ON. If it is determined that the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) is set to ON (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won by the small bonus, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small bonus is the first special symbol. If the lottery of the first special symbol can be won in small hits, the special special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the fact that the jackpot game is executed) When the other special symbol's change display is forcibly stopped and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination that indicates a small hit Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game ends).

  That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the game result that is most advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit), and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) To determine the details of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when winning is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the fluctuation time is normal fluctuation and fluctuation per 60 seconds. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either a super fluctuation per time of 180 seconds or a special fluctuation per fluctuation time of 600 seconds is output from the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the received fluctuation pattern command (variation time). The variation effect corresponding to the information) is set.

  Here, as the variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds execute the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second effect is performed in the period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A stage effect mode (for example, an effect of defeating a second enemy) is executed, and a variable effect is set to execute a third stage effect mode (an effect of defeating a third enemy) during a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds. As the variation effect corresponding to the variation (180 seconds), the first 60 seconds of the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed, and the second stage effect mode of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. For example, the first 60 seconds is the first stage of the production mode (for example, the first enemy is set as the fluctuation production corresponding to the normal fluctuation (60 seconds)). Defeated performance ) Change production to be executed is set to.

  In this way, the variation pattern set this time for the player is set by setting the production mode so as to delimit the variation production to be executed corresponding to the stage of the fluctuation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to entertain the fluctuating effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type is, and enhance the effect.

  In the case of executing the above-described variation effect, the remaining time display mode for allowing the player to grasp the remaining time for the effect period set as each stage (for example, the timing at which the effect mode can shift to the next stage) It may be configured to display an effect mode that counts down the remaining time until. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to grasp in advance the period during which at least the variation effect is continuously executed (the period during which the latent state is continuously set), so that the game can be performed with peace of mind. it can.

  Also, there are multiple types of enemies that appear during the fluctuating effects, and the degree of expectation that the fluctuating effects will move to the next stage according to the types of enemies that appear (ratio where the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected) The contents of the jackpot game executed after the end of the current variable display and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished may be suggested.

  In addition, in this case, for example, when the enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is If the variation pattern is a hit special variation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a type other than the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the effect mode (enemy type) of the variable effect by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give a privilege advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

  In the stop display mode selection table 222b, a latent state is set as a gaming state, and a period in which a small hitting game can be executed frequently (hereinafter referred to as a rush period) is set by lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table referred when selecting the stop display mode (refer to Drawing 7 (a) and Drawing 8 (b)) of the production symbol for reporting to a person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured such that different stop display modes are selected according to the jackpot type won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

  Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the stop display mode selection table 222b predicts the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (number of rounds, gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is specified that the stop display mode of the effect symbol is set so as to be able to.

  Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special map 1), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period is set). If the information stored in the information storage area) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39”. The stop display mode “111” is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. .

  In addition, the “big hit A” is won and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ˜300 seconds, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”, and the stop display mode “333” is set in the range of “40 to 79”. ”Is defined, the stop display mode“ 333 ”is defined in the range of“ 80 to 99 ”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. In the case of “301 seconds to”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “777” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "777", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "VVV".

  And among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the jackpot type which is disadvantageous to the player is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period is stored) Display area) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39” and the stop display mode “222” is defined, a stop display mode “444” is defined in the range “40 to 79”, and a stop display mode “666” is defined in the range “80 to 99”.

  The information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ˜300 seconds, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”, and the stop display mode “666” is set in the range of “40 to 79”. ”Is defined, the stop display mode“ 111 ”is defined in the range of“ 80 to 99 ”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. In the case of “301 seconds to”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "333", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "333".

  Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (Special Chart 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type, “Big Jack C”, or the most unfavorable jackpot type, “Big Jack D” is won and left When the information stored in the time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the obtained effect counter 223h The stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “0-39”, the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “40-79”, and the range of “80-99” A stop display mode “444” is defined.

  In addition, the “big hit C” and “big hit D” are won and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, When the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “0 to 39” of the acquired effect counter 223h, and the range of “40 to 79” The stop display mode “111” is defined, and the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99” and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (an area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). When the displayed information is “301 seconds to”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223h “0 to 39”. , In the range of 40 to 99 ", it is defined stop display mode" 777 ".

  As described above, in this embodiment, the length of the rush period and after the end of the rush period, depending on the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period starts. The content of the jackpot to be executed (type of jackpot) is configured to be suggested to the player. Thus, by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it is possible to cause the player to predict future game contents.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is defined that the stop display mode of the production symbol has a predetermined law, and specifically, the stop display mode of the production symbol is “even number symbol”, “odd number symbol”, It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player increase in the order of “777” and “VVV” (the rush period becomes longer and the jackpot type becomes advantageous). In this way, by giving the display pattern stop display mode a predetermined law, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Further, since the combination of the jackpot type and the length of the rush period is selected to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol, for example, the stop display mode “111” of the effect symbol is most advantageous to the player. Only when the jackpot type “Big Jack A” is set, it is specified that even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the player is selected when “111” is displayed. In contrast to the innovative gameplay that the rush period is desired to end in 60 seconds, that is, the gameplay that normally requires a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game property in which a game result (short rush period) opposite to the normal one is desired.

  In addition, when “VVV” is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it indicates that the most advantageous type for the player is selected for both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period. On the other hand, it is possible to play games with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol with reference to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the gaming state (timing for stopping the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is selected. It is configured to be different. Specifically, whether or not the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent state is set (when the probability change state is set and the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts). If it is determined that the second special symbol has not fluctuated, that is, if the second special symbol can be drawn immediately after the latent state is set, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is The effect design is configured to stop and display based on the start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent state is set (when the probability variation state is set and when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts), In other words, unless the variation display of the second special symbol currently being executed is finished, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is performed. The effect design is configured to be stopped and displayed based on the timing at which is finished.

  With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery can be executed in a state in which the latent state is set immediately after the production symbol is stopped and the rush period is started, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. A game in the latent state can be performed without giving.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol is changed at the time when the latent state is set (when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the state of probability change is set). In the case of determination, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is completed is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect of stopping and displaying the effect symbol (Effects indicating that the rush period has started) is not executed. As a result, the effect symbol is stopped and the rush period ends if the small hit game is executed despite the fact that the rush period has started (the rush game has started). Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to display that the rush period (rush game) has started with an effect symbol similar to the third symbol, it is as if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol. It is possible to make it seem as if the rush game has been executed based on the symbols being stopped and displayed. Moreover, even when the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the effect symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a player a great sense of discomfort.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing at which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special currently being executed at the timing when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is started or when the latent state is set. Although the timing at which the variable display of the symbols is stopped is used, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed at other timings, for example, stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the winning information command indicating the winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that the jackpot change will be executed in the next change, immediately before the jackpot change is executed (the third pattern in the change before the jackpot change). The production symbol may be stopped and displayed at a timing when is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

  As described above, when using a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot variation is executed and the rush game is started, the second input is started from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When a game (right-handed game) aiming at the ball outlet 640 is performed, it is preferable that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next big hit fluctuation starts. As a result, as a result of performing the right-handed game based on the fact that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the second time is set before the latent probability state is set (before the big hit variation is started), that is, during the probability variation state. It is possible to prevent a situation where a special symbol lottery is executed and a period during which a rush game is executed is shortened.

  The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting an effect mode (additional effect mode) for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol temporarily stopped by winning the small bonus in the second special symbol lottery. It is a data table to be referred to, and is configured such that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol after resumption. Here, the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. Thus, the player predicts the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (the remaining period of the rush period) by executing the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type. Configure to get.

  Specifically, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99”. "" Is defined as the additional effect type "none", and "added effect A" is defined as the range "100 to 198". When the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99”. An additional effect type “addition effect A” is defined in the range of “”, and “addition effect B” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”. When the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is in the range of “0 to 99”. In addition, an additional effect type “addition effect B” is defined, and “addition effect C” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”.

  Here, when “additional effect A” is set, the display mode of the treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to a tattered display mode. The player can predict that the remaining rush period is small by grasping the display mode of tatters. Further, when “addition effect B” is set, a treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7B) in a normal display mode is displayed, and when “addition effect C” is set, the normal display mode is set. A gorgeous display mode is set. If “None” is selected, an effect that does not display the treasure chest 812 during the remaining rush period is set.

  In addition, in the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23B) shown in the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other is shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Without being configured, for example, “Additional effect C” is set in the period B, and “Additional effect A” and “None” are set in the period C. Also good. As a result, an effect that is surprising to the player can be executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the embodiment, the combined game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is displayed in the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed at the timing when the rush game is started. It is configured to provide the player with game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period by providing additional effects during the rush period. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to predict more detailed game contents by comprehensively discriminating the stop display mode of the effect symbol executed as the composite game information and the effect mode of the additional effect.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, additional production counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining short time count area 223k, special figure 1 variation time counter 223m, special figure 2 variation time counter 223n, remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification completed flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display completed flag 223t, prize ball number counter 223u, power supply The disconnect flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are at least It is provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning for the first entrance 64 is detected in the main controller 110, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2 acquired according to the start win, Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize is drawn from each value of the small hitting type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (whether, big hit type in case of big win, variation pattern) Predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (whether or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the first special symbol being performed up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is stored in the special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Each type of management is managed.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. And stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 of FIG. 60). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and also stores the first special symbol stored after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are respectively received when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are received when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from main controller 110 are received. (See S4301 in FIG. 61) and off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a big hit type in the case of a big win). It is determined.

  The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Is done.

  The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one. Updated.

  The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time the status command output from the main controller 110 is received, information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in the status setting area 223j (see S4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, in the state setting area 223j, a 2-bit storage area is allocated, and whether the special symbol has a high probability state or the normal symbol has a high probability state in order from the upper bit. A value indicating whether or not is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is “11B”, it means that the state is a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol). It means a certain state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol). On the other hand, “00H” means a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

  By updating the state setting area 223j in accordance with the state command output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The remaining short number of times area 223k is a storage area for storing the number of remaining times of the normal symbol high probability state. The remaining short number of times area 223k is updated to the number notified by the remaining short number of times command that is output every time the value of the time-short counter 203f is updated in the main controller 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining time reduction count area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the main control device 110, so that the remaining time reduction count grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 is It can be made to coincide with the actual time reduction number updated by the main controller 110.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuation time when each fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, 1 is subtracted from each value (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received from the main controller 110 to when the special figure 1 restart command is received is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. However, the special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is not subtracted by 1.

  When the remaining variation time is calculated in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60) that the temporary stop related command has been received. Referenced (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

  The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily suspended first special information is displayed. The remaining period information stored when setting an additional effect in the case of resuming the variable display of symbols is referred to.

  The card notification completed flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgotten warning screen is displayed. Is set.

  The card notification enable flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notifying), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. Set to ON when certain conditions are met.

  The rush display flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not a rush game has been started in a state in which the latent state is set, and a rush entry screen (see FIG. 7) indicating that the rush game has started. When (a) and FIG. 8 (b)) are displayed, it is set to ON.

  The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls since the jackpot game is started, and the prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. The number is configured to be accumulated. Specifically, when it is determined in the winning association process (S4216 in FIG. 63) that a prize ball command has been received (S4505: Yes in FIG. 63), a value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added ( S4506 in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in the small hit game in addition to the big hit game. The card forgotten card alert display can be executed after the winning game is finished or after the big winning game in which a small number of rounds is set.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), it is constant after the power-off flag 223y is set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information on the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM 233 constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when entry to the entrance 64b2 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 25 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 25 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the entrance is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2. In such a case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. Are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an entry is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 26 (b) shows the rear surfaces A to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage”, respectively. . FIG. 27 shows the back E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 First, between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the position a and the position c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow in the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the rear image on the rear surface E is a third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is the 3rd pattern in the state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. 27A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 27C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back image shown to Fig.27 (a), and the back image of Fig.27 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, a back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 27A and 27B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is made resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, if so, the resident video RAM 235 is used. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 27A to FIG. 27B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27A and 27B) is displayed as the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface BD can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27 (a) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) to 27 (a) so that the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. ) To (b) are set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27B to 27C and FIGS. 27C to 27A are normally used while the images of FIGS. 27A to 27B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images shown in FIGS. 27B to 27C and 27C to 27A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the rear image thus made. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the back B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  In addition, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device is used in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to produce a variation after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with an enlargement larger than the standard size, and when the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is done.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 29). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address “02F0H” in which the “End” information is described is made to correspond to the presentation mode to be specified in the display data table. The drawn contents are described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 29).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 75) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 75 (b)). In step S6303), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 30), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 30, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as symbol 1), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design 1).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, a V interrupt process (FIG. 75 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81 (a)). ) (See S7002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82). When other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 of FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B, FIG. 79, S6905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5, and those counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 479, 99, 232, 99) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process (S105) is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are performed. The symbol variation process is executed (S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current big hit or small hit (S201), and if it is determined that the big hit or small hit (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure variation time during the interruption is interrupted by the fact that one special figure is stopped and displayed with a winning symbol. In the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure temporarily stopped is updated. (S203) That is, for the special figure for which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted, a process for continuing the fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and this process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the current big hit or small hit is (S201: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, special figure 1 fluctuates) (S204), if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not greater than 0 (0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S208) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S209, in which the fluctuation process relating to the special figure 2 is executed. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executes the process during the special symbol 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is completed, it is then determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (whether the special diagram 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206). When it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

  In the processing of S209 to S213, the same processing as that of S204 to S207 executed for Special Figure 1 is executed. When the process of S209 is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) (S209), and the special figure 2 fluctuation If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process ends. Details of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S209 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation execution process (S211) is executed. The second special symbol variation executing process (S211) executes the process during the special symbol 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is completed, it is next determined whether the variation time end timing (special diagram 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) or not (S212). When it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S212, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, a first special symbol variation start process (S208), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S208).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1 is subtracted (S303), and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice is recorded. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S304 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of S305 ends, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34. The value of the first special random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not the jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S306 is completed, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although details will be described later, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is performed in the first special symbol determination result and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, a gaming state update process is then executed (S308). The game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the time-shortening counter 203f indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. Is a process for updating. When the process of S308 ends, this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 33, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery during the period in which the variation display (bonus variation) won in the jackpot in any one of the special symbols is executed. It is configured not to make a determination.

  In other words, in a state where it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the lapse of the fluctuation time) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery will win a big hit, and multiple times in a short period of time It is configured to suppress winning a jackpot and giving a privilege excessively.

  In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as the normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting the out symbol, the other It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state (probability change state, latent state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random value that becomes the big hit specified in the first per random number table 202a for high probability And the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer is determined, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability is stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value corresponding to the big hit matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 202i is ON (S405). If it is determined that the lottery result is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S408). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value according to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j (S410), 1 is set in the time reduction counter 203f (S411), and this process is terminated.

  Here, by setting the value of the hour / short counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S306 of FIG. 34) in the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 of FIG. 33). The high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state in the gaming state update process (S308) executed later than the above. As a result, when a big win is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set a low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the big hit variation starts. Accordingly, the probability variation state can be shifted to the latent state by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set.

  In addition, by performing the process of setting the value of the hour / short counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the jackpot is won, and the special symbol Any of the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the number of fluctuations reaches the predetermined number can be executed using the game state update process (S308). Thereby, even when a plurality of conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main controller 110 from becoming complicated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S405 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S405: Yes), or in the process of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out (S406: No), the off symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then the present process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above.

  In the process of S501, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is obtained in the process of S401. A jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S503.

  In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the gaming state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S506).

  When the process of S506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507), then the first special symbol change start is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the process of S505 is performed. A value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m (S509), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the gaming state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update processing (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the value of the hour / short counter 203f is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol among the state of the probability variation flag 203g which is a condition for setting the gaming state and the value of the hour / short counter 203f. In addition, in the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), a process of updating the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is executed.

  Although the details will be described later, the probability variation flag 203g that is set to ON is set to OFF when the big hit variation ends and the special symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

  That is, one of the two condition elements (the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the hourly counter 203f) referred to when setting the gaming state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other condition elements By making it possible to update when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two condition elements. In addition, since a specific gaming state (for example, a latent state) can be set only during a period from when the change of the special symbol is started until it is ended, it is advantageous for the player only during a predetermined period. It becomes possible to set a gaming state.

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / short counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S602), and a remaining short time count command indicating the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S604: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605: Yes), the probability variation state to which the short-time game is not given (that is, the latent probability state) indicates the latent probability state. A status command is set (S606), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S605 that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and this process is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is ended as it is.

  In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot). In addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided instead of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted every time a special symbol variation is executed, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In some cases, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state.

  When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is designated as the special figure change start game state update process, and at the timing when the special symbol change display ends separately. By providing a special figure variation stop game state update process that updates the value of the probability variation counter, a process for determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special symbol, and whether or not to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process for determining whether or not.

  Next, referring to FIG. 37, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. Explain. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205). In the first special symbol variation execution process (S205), when the variation time subtraction of the special diagram 1 is interrupted, the subtraction restart processing and the variation time subtraction processing are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a brief description will be given of a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it is a hit (small hit). Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON within the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON), it is a big hit in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or the small hit game) is completed and it is determined that the big hit game (or the small hit game) is not in the process of S201, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured to be the timing at which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been resumed.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S702). The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and S704 is performed. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S704, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is updated by subtracting 1 (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S802). A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (S804).

  When the processing of S804 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, the probability variation flag 203g, and the hour / short counter 203f are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

  On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped and the process proceeds to S808.

  In the process of S808, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S808). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol currently variably displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S809), and this process is complete | finished.

  Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) for stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big win (S801: Yes), a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during the variable display (S803, S804) is executed.

  In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is configured to be stopped and forcibly stopped with the symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And it is good also as a structure which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol after the jackpot of a 1st special symbol is complete | finished. Thereby, compared with the case where it stops compulsorily by off, it can be set as a natural aspect effect. In the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S805 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 You may make it do.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S210), a process for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the process related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the variation target is merely changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed descriptions of elements are omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation start process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to ON while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the disengagement when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on, it means that a big hit is started, and therefore the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on in the process of S901, this process is terminated without executing the processes of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) is acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S904: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S903 that there is data (S904: Yes), a second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing a second special symbol jackpot determination based on each stored counter value is performed. Execute (S905). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S905 ends, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is then executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). . Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 of FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) and The differences will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). And the process of S1002-S1004 for acquiring the lottery result whether it is a big win based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203g is performed. Each of these processes is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

  When the processing of S1003 or S1004 ends, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S1006: Yes), the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to the jackpot is executed, and this processing is terminated. In each of these processes of S1007 to S1010, the same processes as the processes of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1005 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or if the acquired lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big win in the process of S1006. If it is determined (S1006: No), a special figure 2 out-of-range variation process for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or out of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is a small hit. (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), the outlier of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then This process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 42, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the big special jackpot of the second special symbol has been set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above, the big hit from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). The type is determined (S1204).

  When the process of S1204 is completed, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1205), and then a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

  In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the variation start of the second special symbol (S1209), and sets the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1205 in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n ( S1210), the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is ON (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1302). Then, based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B), the small hit type is selected (S1303).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the small variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the variation pattern selection table thus read. Is selected (S1305). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S1306), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, missed) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) is read (S1307), and a deviation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, based on the selected deviation variation pattern, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is a process in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, is performed. The contents will be explained. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211). In the second special symbol variation execution process (S211), when the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, a process of restarting the subtraction and a process of subtracting the fluctuation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n is updated by subtracting 1 (S1401), and the second special symbol display on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Is updated (S1402), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stopping process (S213). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

  When the second special symbol fluctuation stopping process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S1501), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on. Is determined (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating a special figure 1 fluctuation stop is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is finished, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and is stopped and displayed with the symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability variation flag 203g, and the hourly counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the process of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S1509). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 2nd special symbol currently variably displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1510), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-described S1509 and S1510 are executed. This process is executed and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special figure 2 outage stop process (S1508) which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 stoppage processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 off stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, off), special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of FIG. 2 is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

  In the special figure 2 off stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set (S1603).

  When the process of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203k is set to OFF (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S1606).

  When the process of S1606 ends, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is variably stopped at the small hit symbol (S1608), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1609). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1610), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, the variable display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol which shows a jackpot on either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) determines whether or not a game ball has entered (wins) in the first entrance (first start entrance) 64. This is a process of storing the acquired counter values in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (maximum of four at the first entrance 64). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, a process for predicting the determination result or the variation pattern to be selected is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (starting prize) which is the first start opening (S1701). Here, it discriminate | determines using the detection result of the 1st entrance switch (not shown) which detects the entrance of the ball | bowl to the 1st entrance 64. FIG. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (the start prize has been received) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). This is discriminated whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1705). Various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is obtained. Are each stored (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of held balls (S1706).

  Next, based on the stored counter values, the first special symbol determination result, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins a first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the determination result is based on the information stored and stored. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. For example, it is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and execute an effect that suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the second symbol variation display and variation time performed in the second symbol display device 83, the lower first entrance 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated therewith.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S1801). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is performed. And in the middle of being made. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1801: Yes), it is in a state where a new normal symbol variation (lottery) cannot be started (executed). This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (ordinary symbol changing). When it is determined (S1802) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (ordinary symbol variation) (S1802: No), that is, even if the current symbol is a normal symbol variation, If it is determined that there is no particular state, that is, a state in which a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be started (executed), data (random number per second) is stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter C4 is stored (S1804). If no data is stored (S1804: No), the normal symbol lottery cannot be executed. The present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1804 that data is stored in the execution area (S1804: Yes), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c Is acquired (S1807). Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, and the normal symbol When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “232”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S1808 is a normal symbol win (S1809). If it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S1809: Yes), Is set (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1809 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1812), and the processing proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

  When the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the process of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (short time state) (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (short time). (S1811: Yes), the normal symbol variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the general symbol short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is not in a high probability state (short-time state) (ordinary symbol is in a low probability state) (S1811: No), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this process ends.

  Note that the short symbol variation flag 203t set to ON in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is executed, and the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. This is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, it is possible to vary the contents of the opening operation of the electric combination 64a according to which gaming state is the normal symbol change (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric combination 64a.

  In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the normal symbol change (lottery) is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is winning in the gaming state storage means that can always store the currently set gaming state, the gaming state when the normal symbol lottery is executed is displayed. A storage area for temporary storage may be provided. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the normal symbol is drawn. By doing so, you may comprise so that the gaming state in the timing when the normal symbol lottery was performed can be discriminate | determined. That is, it is only necessary to provide a storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and a storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined past timing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1802 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1816). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1810 or the processing of S1812 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S1813, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1816 that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then a stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1810, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S1812, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. It should be noted that the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part is lit in the blinking display (alternate display of “◯” and “x”) indicating that the second symbol is changing. (Confirmed display). Thereby, it can be made to grasp | ascertain easily that the 2nd symbol was stopped and displayed with respect to the player.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S1810 or S1812.

  When the processing of S1817 is completed, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation processing (S106) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started next. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit (S1818). If it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S1818: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S1818: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the general-purpose short variation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

  In the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short variation flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started. When it is determined that the current state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric utility item 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1819, when it is determined that the general-purpose short variation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started is determined to be the short-time state. If it is made (S1819: Yes), the common figure short variation flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the short time state (short time) (S1821).

  In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the short-time state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set. Once set (S1824), the process proceeds to S1823.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the short-time state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started, and the current gaming state (the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) Since the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to two (electrical accessory) 64a is set (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing for executing the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol, the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a that is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Only when both are in the time-short state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol lottery ( Even if a short-time state is set before the normal symbol fluctuation time (10 seconds) ends, long open is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is nothing. Similarly, the normal state is set as the gaming state until the normal symbol change (lottery) executed in the state where the time reduction state is set is won and the normal symbol change stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it can suppress that the privilege (long opening of the electrically-driven accessory 64a) advantageous excessively with respect to a player is provided.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 64a from being long open in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is easy to execute a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to a short time state. In the present embodiment, the gaming state at the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set is determined, and the gaming state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an opening operation (S1824 in FIG. 48) that is disadvantageous to the player only when the normal symbol lottery (variation) start timing and the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a are both in the normal state. It is also possible to configure so that a long opening (opening operation set in S1822 in FIG. 48) is set in other states. By configuring in this way, a benefit (long release) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed in the period before and after the short time state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time-saving state more advantageous to the player.

  In this way, while the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes very short as “10 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case where the normal state is set, Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64b2 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. Become. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time reduction state is configured to end, so that the jackpot game is in the normal state. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long time, and a plurality of winning ports (first specific winning port 65a, lower first winning port) 64b2) is a specific period in which it is easy to enter the ball.

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the electric accessory 64a and the lower first entrance 64b2 are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. The ball may enter the two winning holes (the specific winning hole 65a and the lower first inlet 64b2) during the small hit game, so that the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the small hit game Can be increased, and a privilege more advantageous to the player can be given.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, the opening / closing of the electric accessory will be performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S1824 or the process of S1822 are completed.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is.

  In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is less than an upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

  When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is used as the free reserved area (holding first 1) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The area is stored in the first area (area 1 to reserved area 4) (S1905), and the process is terminated. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, a state in which a ball can enter the lower first entrance 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state. .

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the usual prior determination result, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using the result of prior determination of such a normal map, not only the effect based on the determination result of the normal map but also the electric accessory 64a when the normal map is determined to be hit is opened. It is recommended to produce an effect that suggests the timing. By doing in this way, in the normal gaming state, the game is aimed at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first entrance 64 b 2 (entrance accompanied with the electric accessory 64 a) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game (so-called right-handed) that aims at the right side of the game board 13 before the electric accessory 64a performs the opening operation. However, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104). If it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105). (S2105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally. In this case as well, the process proceeds to S2110.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2111, S2112) is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process (S2111 and S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2113.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2113). Thereafter, the state of the probability variation flag 203g and each value of the time reduction counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the process of S2115 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process, first, output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S2201).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). A jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the big hit control process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hitting control process (S2205) will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, an electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2206), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. Thereafter, display update processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

  Next, display update processing of the second symbol (for example, symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and at the second symbol display device Variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is reached, the electric accessory 64a is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201, and the processes after S2201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S2210: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S2211, S2212).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2202 (S2212).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S2209, if the occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 50 has been executed, the power-off process after S2213 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2209 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2201 to S2208 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from the process of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case of initialization in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S2101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S2201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the first specific winning prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2301: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that a jackpot scenario has been set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303). . More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario It is determined whether the value falls within the range.

  In the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is the timing of the opening of the jackpot scenario (start of jackpot) (S2303: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

  In the process of S2305, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot is executed ( In step S2306, this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2305, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2305: No). S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, when the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, a total number of balls (for example, 10) are won, or the first When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a that is currently open in the processing of S2308 is set to be closed, This process ends. Note that the above-described determination processing from S2305 to S2307 is repeated for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is determined. Is the start timing (S2309: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S2310), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2309, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S2311). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S2311, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S2312), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot end timing (S2311: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end process (S2312) which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2312).

  In the jackpot ending process (S2312), first, based on the winning state storage area 203j, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability change jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the current jackpot is a probable change jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probable change jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404. Thereby, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning read out by the processing of S2401 and the jackpot type is set in the hour / short counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when “big hit A” is set as the big hit type, “10000” is set as the value of the hour / short counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, "Is set to" 100 "as the value of the hour / short counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100.

  When the processing of S2404 is finished, the big hit flag 203o is then set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). Thereafter, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2406), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, two condition elements for determining the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning and setting the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. The contents of (probability change flag 203g, hour-short counter 203f) are set. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to both the winning jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hit control process (S2205) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 52) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process (S2205).

  In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 outage stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed to determine whether or not the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the processing of S2501 (S2501: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the processing of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is changed to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the start of the opening.

  In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S2504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505).

  In the process of S2505, when it is determined that it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. Details of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of balls (for example, five) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S2508. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509).

  In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit end timing (S2511). Here, the small hit end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2511 that it is the small hitting end timing (S2511: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2512), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the small hit end timing (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is ended. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting action setting process (S2506).

  In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, an open scenario in which an open operation corresponding to the number of small hit rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is terminated.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513) which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 55), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a as described above.

  In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S2701). Here, the round effective period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. If it is not the round effective period in the process of S2701 (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current period is the round effective period (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning at the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected in the processing of S2703 (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u and updated (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( S2705: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S4117 (see FIG. 59) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the information on the occurrence of power failure from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), the power lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S4117 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag 223y is turned on is the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The state setting area 223j is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, through the processes of S4004 to S4006. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4111. In S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S4102 to S4111 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variable display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of the various counter update processes will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set to transmit to S, is executed (S4113). Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power off flag and the power off process flag are turned on (S4116), and the power off process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the special command is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 or not. Is discriminated (S4203). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. Details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but based on the state command output from the main controller 110, the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A process of setting (status) in the status setting area 223j is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that a status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206). The fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4207), and this process is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol) Used).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S4208 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4210), and this processing is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of S4208, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the first And the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value. S4212), the process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is not stored, the value of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) reserved ball number counter 223c is set in the process of S4212. Only the updating process is executed.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and therefore, every time there is a start winning, the processing of S4212 is performed. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the reserved ball number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that a pending ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). If it is determined in the process of S4213 that a winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the received winning information command information (whether special symbol lottery, winning type, and variation pattern) is associated with the winning information. The storage area 223b is set (S4214), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4213 that no winning information command has been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received from the main controller (S4215). In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a hit related command has been received (S4215: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the win-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63. Processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute display is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4215 that no hit-related command has been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a short remaining time command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4217). In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the short remaining time command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number update process (S4218) is executed. Details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining short time number command output from the main controller 110. Processing for setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

  In the process of S4217, if it is determined that the remaining short time command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). If it is determined in the process of S4219 that a temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. Details of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure change time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. When the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, processing for setting an effect (addition effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4219 that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), processing according to another command is executed (S4221), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the process (see S4203 in FIG. 60) for determining whether a status command has been received. The process is performed before the process (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60) for determining whether a variation pattern command for each special symbol has been received.

  With this configuration, when the variation pattern command and the status command are output simultaneously from the main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) of the main controller 110. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed thereafter is a game. Even when a state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the gaming state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined prior to the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

  Therefore, when the jackpot of FIG. 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, and the latent probability state is set during the jackpot variation, the voice lamp control device 113 side assumes that the latent probability state is set. It is possible to easily set a variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a variation pattern command that becomes a big hit variation in the determined state.

  Unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed prior to the state command determination processing, the variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot variation described above is more likely to change. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received contents is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute a variation display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time that the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set in this way is delayed, the timing for notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be played is delayed, so that the player feels uncomfortable. The problem of giving will occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main controller 110 side, processing for changing the gaming state after the jackpot determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). (Game state update process (S308 in FIG. 33)) is executed, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60) is executed first, and thereafter A variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the change display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed even though the latent state is set.

  Further, it is necessary to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110 on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, stop type command reception processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is displayed. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302). The process ends.

  The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage each stop type and execute an appropriate change display. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the state command process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the status command process (S4204) will be described below.

  In this state command process (S4204), a process for setting the current gaming state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110 is executed, and the gaming state is shifted to the latent state. And a process for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set, and the game state has shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used for displaying the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the state command process (S4204), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command is received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is a latent state (S4402). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, if the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), a latent notification effect that notifies the entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 4402 that the gaming state before receiving the state command is a latent state (S4402: Yes), the processes of S4403 and S4404 are skipped, and the process of S4405 is executed. The process proceeds to S4406. In the process of S4403, if the received command is not a status command indicating the shift to the latent state (S4403: No), the process of S4404 and S4405 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4406.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal status (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a status command indicating a shift to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating a transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card informed flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the winning ball counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card informed flag 223q, the card informing flag is available 223s, the rush display flag 223t is set to OFF (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to off (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed, End the process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a hit related process (S4216) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process (S4216). In the winning related process, as a result of the special symbol lottery, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the jackpot game executed when the jackpot or the jackpot is won. The process corresponding to the various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed when the big win or the small win is won.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. Based on the result, processing for displaying a card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the hit-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot-related command (S4501). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot related command (S4501: Yes), a jackpot related process is executed (S4502), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot related process (S4502), which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot related process, the third symbol display device 81 performs a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won. When the jackpot is won, the main controller Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether the jackpot related command received by the hit related process (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4601 that a jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S4603). When the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the information indicating the round number is transmitted as the round number command from the main controller 110, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the control device 110, in the case of a configuration in which information indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided for accumulating the number of received round update commands. Configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4603 that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that an ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to on (S4607). When it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command not including card notification is set (S4608). That is, processing for preventing the display mode of FIG. 10A from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card alert is set (S4610), and the card alert flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, the process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to on (S4612: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to off (S4613), and the processing of S4610 to S4611 described above is executed. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the jackpot-related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64), game information about the jackpot game being executed (opening, In addition to the processing for setting the display content of the ending and the number of rounds), the processing for determining whether or not to display the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  This card forgotten warning alert screen is displayed when a player acquires a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of winning balls in a winning game (big hit game, small hit game), and rents a card (ball to the player). This is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the card described above when the winning ball number acquired in the period (continuous advantageous period) from winning the normal state to winning the jackpot and returning to the normal state again satisfies a condition that can reach a predetermined amount. It is configured to display a forgetting reminder screen.

  Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, a jackpot (bonus A, If the jackpot B) is won, a card alert that displays a forgetting card warning screen will be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, and if the other jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) are won, the card alert will be executed. It is configured not to.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a card forgotten warning screen is displayed for a player who has not won a predetermined amount of prize balls, and the game can be continued while borrowing a ball. It is possible to prevent discomfort for the player who performs the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the jackpot game, a game state (latency probability state) in which a small hit game is likely to be executed frequently can be set. Therefore, by repeating the small hit game, the player can There are cases where a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls is obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and if the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is performed at that time. It is configured to display a warning screen for forgetting a card on the ending screen of the middle jackpot game or the small jackpot game. Thereby, a card forgetting attention alert screen can be displayed at an appropriate timing for the player.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that a card forgetting attention alert screen may be alert | reported only once during one advantageous continuation period. Thereby, it can suppress that the card forgetting attention alert screen is displayed frequently and gives a player discomfort. Note that the method for displaying the card forgotten warning screen is not limited to the content of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring means for measuring an advantageous duration is provided, and the elapsed time since the last card forgotten warning screen is displayed. May be displayed again when a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) is exceeded. In this case, since the card forgotten warning screen is displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgotten warning screen are already satisfied), during the special symbol change period (for example, during the advantageous duration) In this case, the forgetting card warning screen may be displayed when a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds or more is selected.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the player's fixed concept that a card forgetting attention alert screen is displayed after the jackpot game ends. Further, as a technique for achieving the same effect, the big hit game may display the card forgetting warning screen using the opening period of the small hit game.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S4501 that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received a jackpot related command (S4503). When it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), a small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small hit related process (S4504) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related processing (S4504). In the small hit related process, the third symbol display device 81 performs a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when winning the small hit. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether or not the hit related command received in the hit related process (S4216) has received the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hitting start command is received (S4701: Yes), the display small hitting start command is set (S4702), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the received command is not a small hitting start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S4703: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S4703: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). . If it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command not including card notification is set (S4706), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4705 that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: No), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4708), and a display ending command including card notification is set ( S4709), the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even in a small hit game that does not satisfy the display condition for displaying the card forgotten warning alert screen in one game, after winning a big hit in a normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of winning balls acquired during the game period (advantageous duration) until the normal state is set again meets the display conditions (for example, the number of winning winning balls reaches 250), Even after the game is over, the forgetting card warning screen is displayed. Thereby, a card forgetting attention alert screen can be displayed at an appropriate timing for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4503 that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter 223u added in the processing of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the added prize ball counter 223u is 250 or more (S4508: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4509), and a display prize ball number command is set. (S4510), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4507 that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the process of S4508, the added prize ball number counter 223u is less than 250. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) that the normal state has been set, and the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared. The prize ball number counter 223u accumulates the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period up to (advantageous continuation period). Then, at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) (at the ending screen display timing), the forgetting card warning screen is displayed according to the value of the winning ball counter 223u.

  Thus, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the advantageous duration is a jackpot C (a jackpot that is difficult to win a predetermined amount (250 shots) in one jackpot game) Can display a forgetting card warning screen when winning a small hit game during the advantageous continuation period or winning a big hit C again.

  Next, the remaining number update processing (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the remaining short time command is sent from the main controller 110. Is received, the processing for updating the contents set in the remaining short time count area 223k, the remaining variation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

  In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining short time number command is received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining short-time command has not been received (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4801 that the remaining short time command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display short time command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In the temporary stop related process (S4220), when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command are received, the third symbol display device A process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed at 81 is executed.

  When the temporary stop related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901). If it is determined that it has not been received (S4901: No), the change restart process is performed. (S4902) is executed. Details of the change restart process (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: YES), the remaining variation time of the variation pattern currently set is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the remaining variation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the remaining variation time is stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4904, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), the remaining variation period is 2 seconds or more and is longer than 15 seconds. If it is determined that it is less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the remaining variation time information storage area 223o indicates that it is a normal remaining variation time. Is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4906, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the remaining variation time is long in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o. A period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when special figure fluctuation is interrupted (subtraction of special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing when the special figure change is resumed.

  In the present embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation time (remaining variation period) executed when the special figure variation is resumed is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, selection of each period information so that the period A is easily selected as the remaining time is short, and the period C is easily selected as the remaining time is long. The ratio may be configured to vary according to the remaining time, or the remaining period is divided at a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the periods A to C are allocated in order to each of the divided periods. It may be configured.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining variation time. It is possible to provide fun to predict the fluctuation time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the change restart process (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the change restart process (S4902). This variation restart process (S4902) executes a process for setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 variation restart command is received.

  When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that it has not been received (S5001: No), this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 change restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), then the remaining change time information stored in the remaining change time information storage area 223o is read (S5002). The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining variation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is cleared (S5005), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is resumed after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends. A swing effect that swings and displays the 3rd symbol is executed in the period until it is performed, and when the special figure change is resumed, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (residual change period) after the restart is executed However, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an effect period discriminating unit that discriminates a normal effect period in which the normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating unit determines that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. Also good. By comprising in this way, since a normal production | presentation and an additional production | presentation can be performed continuously, the production | presentation display more suitable for a player can be provided. In this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure change period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for swinging and displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. You may comprise as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed based on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S5107. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special display variation display setting process (S5104) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. To do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variation display setting process (S5104). In the special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, the first special symbol is displayed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A process of setting a latent variation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time read in the process of S5201 is sub-figure 1. The variation time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), a display rush entry command is set (S5204), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is greater than 0 (S5203: Yes), the processes of S5204 and S5205 described above are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display-specific latent variation pattern command for the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). A variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (see FIG. 59) of the main processing (see FIG. 59). In step S4102, the data is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5106).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since there is, the process of S5111 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the special display variation display setting process (S5109) for special figure 2, which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process (S5109).

  In the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5301), and the variation that has been read out. A value corresponding to the time is set in the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5303). If it is determined that the state is the latent state (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush display flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the remaining time read out is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush entry command is set (S5307), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display special probability variation pattern command for the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the processing of S5309 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when the variation display of the first special symbol is set, that is, during the big hit variation period, the latent state is When the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation is set, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is changing, and it is determined that the special symbol 2 is not changing. Is configured to set a rush entry command as an effect mode of the variable display. That is, it is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 variation is executed. doing.

  On the other hand, when setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that is in the latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is varying, When it is determined that 2 is changing, a screen (see FIG. 6B) indicating that the state is in the latent state without setting the display rush entry command is set as an effect mode of the change display. It is configured to display.

  Accordingly, when a right-handed game is performed at the time when a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that a rush has been entered is displayed by setting a display rush rush command, immediately The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state can be executed, and a game without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

  Further, when setting a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that is in the latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is varying, and the special diagram 2 If it is determined that is changing, it is possible to forcibly terminate the changing special figure 2 fluctuation and execute a new special figure 2 fluctuation.

  In addition, the setting timing of the display rush entry command when the gaming state shifts to the latent state during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and a game without a sense of incongruity is provided to the player. It suffices if the configuration is such that For example, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 that is fluctuating at the timing when the latent state is set, a display rush inrush command may be set, or fluctuates when the latent state is set. It is also possible to determine the remaining time until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the middle is finished, and to set the display rush inrush command when the judgment result is a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, as the predetermined time to be set, it takes from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right-handed game until the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be set as appropriate according to the configuration of the game board 13.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It transmits to the control apparatus 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5111: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S5112).

  In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the judgment result is out of place. Is done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter update processing (S4111). The various counter update processing (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one processing of the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223 are displayed. This is a process for executing an update.

  In the various counter update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the process of S5401, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped, and S5403 Move on to processing. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S5404).

  Next, the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the reading of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are executed (S5405), and the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is subtracted from the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n. Is subtracted to calculate the remaining time (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), and the values of various other counters are decremented by 1 (S5408), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5403: No), the above-described S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets an instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program, so that the NOR ROM 234d is operated at high speed. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in the meantime. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hits A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or out of complete) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to ON (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether there is a display rush entry command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a rush rush command (S6414: Yes), the rush rush command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the rush entry command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing a rush inrush command process. This rush inrush command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rush rush command process, first, a rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6931). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6932).

  Next, based on the rush entry display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the rush entry command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display rush entry command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a command (S6416: Yes), an additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 80B, details of the additional effect command processing (S6417) will be described. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. This additional effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display additional effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the display additional effect command is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6951). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6952).

  Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no display additional effect command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the others The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored) ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420). If (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6421) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the processing returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is “”. If the result is End information (S7402: Yes), the pointer 233f is updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Means that.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d because the confirmed display effect has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect is performed. (S7210), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag 233z is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and therefore a certain time from the end of the final display effect. After the elapse, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  If the demonstration display flag 233y is on in the process of S7216 (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. End and return to V-interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each back image type. Of the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 30) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. To do. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variation display is being executed, another variation display may not be executed. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as a structure which performs a variable display in an order from a holding ball in which a start winning is temporally old. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability of normal symbol) State), short-time state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) Yes. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another game state. It is possible to execute the lottery that is advantageous to the player most efficiently by defining the length to be shorter than the case where the game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows the player to expect the latent state to be set.

  Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big win, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small win, so that the variation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, the prize ball can continue to increase. Therefore, a game can be performed in expectation of becoming a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, and thus novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Using a variable method). As a result, even when the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be performed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a big hit or small hit stop symbol, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variation display is fixedly displayed with the hit or the small hit and the big hit or the small hit is started in an overlapping manner.

  In the first embodiment, when the probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, a variable display corresponding to a jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. The high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent probability state. While this latent state is set, since the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, many lots of the second special symbol can be executed. This is a possible period (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantage Period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent state is set as the gaming state, When the player wins, the small hit game is frequently executed, and a gaming state advantageous to a player who can obtain a lot of prize balls (a special figure 2 advantageous state) is obtained.

  As described above, the period during which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that is won in the jackpot in the probability variation state. Therefore, when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game is executed. Thus, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player are set in succession, various benefits are continuously given to the player. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a small win is won with one special symbol (Special Figure 2) and the small bonus game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (Special Figure 1) is interrupted (variable display period) Measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the suspended variable display period is resumed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. A certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special diagram 1), the other special symbol (special diagram 2) that is changing is displayed as a stop display that indicates a loss. Is configured to forcibly stop. By comprising in this way, the situation where a small hit game is performed during a big hit game can be prevented.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is varied according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the fact that the lottery result is out of the fluctuation of the other special symbol When the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (the lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the end of the provision of the second privilege (until the end of the small hit game), and is resumed after the end of the provision of the second privilege. In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is out of place, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery contents of the other special symbol (the period until the lottery result and lottery result are displayed) can be varied. A variety of playability can be provided.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can grant a privilege to a player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is varied according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the lottery result is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of control, the player is prevented from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery results that are given fewer benefits than the jackpot game (small hits) In this case, the variation table is used to prevent a bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are changing at the same time, the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given by giving the privilege that is not the most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not performed, and to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short display period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the case where the winning state is set in the state where the probability variation state is set and the first special symbol is won. Is displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period that is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the jackpot game. The second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to make the game eagerly so that the first advantageous period is set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the big hit variation, and the latent probability state is set. In a state where is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time that the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state), the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second when the probability variation state is set. Both special symbols may also vary.

  In such a case, even if a display mode (see FIG. 7A) indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second currently changing state is displayed. Until the special symbol fluctuates, the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state cannot be executed, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed indefinitely even in the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variation state), the variation state of the second special symbol (the presence or absence of variation, (Variable remaining period) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is made different.

  Specifically, when the condition for transition to the latent state is established, when it is determined that the variation of the new second special symbol can be executed, the fact that the RUSH state has been set is notified. It is composed. Thereby, despite notifying that the RUSH state has been set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the change of the new second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, a period from when the state of the new second special symbol can be changed to when the latent state ends is determined. When the determined period is less than the predetermined period, it is configured not to notify that the RUSH state is set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being started without executing the small hit game despite the notification that the RUSH state has been set.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the game state is changed by shifting the normal symbol high probability state to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to set the latent state, and when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol is not shifted to the low probability state when the big hit variation starts The probability variation state is continued even during the big hit variation. By comprising in this way, a different gameability can be provided according to the kind of special symbol.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and even when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state when the big hit variation starts. It may be configured to set a latent state as a gaming state by shifting to, and it is normal at the time when the big hit variation starts only when a specific big hit type is set among a plurality of big hit types The latent state may be set as the gaming state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

  Furthermore, measure the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number, shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state when the jackpot fluctuation starts Thus, the latent state may be set as the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the latent state is set in a period until the jackpot variation ends at the time when the jackpot variation starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a period until the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information is completed based on the prediction that winning the jackpot in the start winning process (see FIG. 47) ( (Multiple variation periods) The latent state may be set.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in the state where the latent probability state is set, the variation pattern table is always constant regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol during the latent probability state setting. (Refer to FIG. 19 (b)). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the data is selected, and to change the data table for selecting the variation pattern based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

  Specifically, if the number of changes in the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 50), the data table in which the average of the change time is about 2 seconds is referred to, and the change in the second special symbol When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to the data table in which the average of the variation time is about 1 second. As a result, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as the big hit variation of the first special symbol is selected, it is possible to provide more small hit games to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot variation in the probability variation state, but in addition to this, the special symbol lottery result is a specific miss or a small hit. It may be configured so that the latent state is set during the fluctuation display in the case, or the number of times that the special symbol lottery result is out of the specified or the small hits reaches the predetermined number during the probability variation state. In this case, the latent state may be set.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the first embodiment described above, when the probability variation state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) In addition, the game state during the big hit variation is set to the latent probability state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent probability state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the gaming state can be changed during the symbol determination period (period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the special symbol lottery result. It is configured to make it. In other words, when the big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the jackpot) The latent state is set as the gaming state at the timing when the display is stopped).

  Furthermore, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a different symbol determination period is set based on the special symbol lottery result. By comprising in this way, the length of the period for which the latent state advantageous to a player is set can be varied according to the length of the set symbol determination period. In addition, as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol determination period (special symbol) of the special symbol is compared with the configuration in which the latent state is set corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol (period in which the special symbol is varied). Since the configuration in which the latent state is set corresponding to the period during which the symbol is stopped) is used, the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state where the latent state is set can be simplified. The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, once the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state continues until the next jackpot is won, but in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot is made. Even if not selected, the probability variation state is terminated when a predetermined termination condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability variation state is set reaches the predetermined number of times (50)) is satisfied. It is different in that it is configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to move to the latent state during the period in which the probability change state is set, and to actively play the game.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of a game flow when a specific jackpot (big hit C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set. . As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the jackpot game is played from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88 (c)). The latent state is set in the period until the execution (symbol determination period).

  In the state in which the latent state is set, a game for performing the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, if the winning of the small bonus of Special Figure 2 is won during the symbol determination period of Special Figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol determination period of Special Figure 1 is suspended during the period when the small hit game is executed. ing. In addition, the second embodiment is configured such that a different symbol determination period is set according to the lottery result even when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play or small win. Thereby, the player desires that a long period is set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result of the special figure 1 corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set (the lottery result winning the jackpot), In the state in which the latent state is set, it is desired that a short period is set as the symbol determination period in order to execute the lottery of the special figure 2 more.

  That is, in the second embodiment in which the symbol determination period is changed according to the lottery result, when a long symbol determination period is desired and when a short symbol determination period is desired according to the gaming state or the special symbol type Can be provided to the player. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol determination period from being predicted in advance by the variable display contents of the special symbol for the player, and which symbol determination period is set for this special symbol lottery. It can be difficult to understand until the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-described configuration, with respect to the fluctuation effect (the effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) executed corresponding to one fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern). Since a plurality of types of symbol determination periods are set, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after the special symbol lottery has been performed, the next special symbol lottery can be performed. Even when the time is set in a complicated manner, it is possible to unify the variation effects.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game when winning the jackpot in FIG. 1 when the probability variation state is set, that is, when the remaining short number of times is 47 is shown. Thus, the latent state is set from the time when the big hit fluctuation stops. In addition to this, when the winning of the special figure 1 is won at the timing when the probability changing state ends (the value of the probability changing counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special drawing lottery after the probability changing state is set). Is configured such that the latent state is set from the timing when the big hit variation starts.

  With such a configuration, in a state where the probability variation state is set, advantageous periods having different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the jackpot in FIG. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play a game while desiring to win a jackpot at a timing when a long advantageous period is set, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the gaming state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) executed when the probability variation state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the contents of the special figure 1 game after the probability variation state is set and the awarded score.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the probability variation state is set and the number of lotteries (number of special figure fluctuations). It is configured to do. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability variation state is continuously set until the number of special symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning a jackpot. Among them, if the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) for special symbols is won between 1 and 49, the symbol where the special symbol indicating the probable change state and jackpot is stopped and displayed during the jackpot variation is displayed. The latent state is set during the fixed period. As a result, the player is given as a privilege a game with a latent probability (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the completion of the latent state.

  Next, when the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) for the special symbol wins the jackpot at the 50th, the latent state is set during the jackpot variation and during the symbol determination period. As a result, the player is given as a privilege a jackpot change game until the end of the symbol determination period (RUSH game) and a jackpot game after the end of the latent status. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the transition condition to the latent probability state (big win winning) is in a state where the specific condition (specific number of lotteries (50th)) is satisfied. When established, a privilege advantageous to the player is given more than when the transition condition to the latent state is established when the specific condition is not established.

  When the number of lotteries for special symbols exceeds 50, the predetermined number of certain variations is reached and the normal state is set as the gaming state. If the jackpot is won during the normal state, the normal state continues during the special symbol change and the symbol determination period, and the jackpot game is executed.

  On the other hand, if the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) for a special symbol is out of the 1st to 49th times after the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state remains during the variation of the special symbol and the symbol determination period. If it continues and is out of the 50th time, since the latent state is set during the variation of the special symbol and during the symbol determination period, the latent state from the special symbol variation to the end of the symbol determination period A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the second embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win for the variation time of the special symbol in the probability variation state and the symbol fixed period, it is not a big win In the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, for example, the variation time is “60 seconds to 180 seconds”. ”Is selected, and the symbol determination period of“ 5 seconds to 150 seconds ”is selected as the symbol determination period. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a big hit (for example, miss) A variation time of “0.5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the variation time, and a symbol determination period of “0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination period.

  By configuring in this way, a special symbol lottery result (RUSH game) according to the lottery result and the number of lottery times is 330 seconds at the maximum (when the big win is won at the 50th special symbol fluctuation number), the minimum Can be provided to the player with a width of 5 seconds (when the big win is won at the 1st to 49th special figure fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting how long the current latent state will continue.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, when the special symbol lottery number (variation number) after the probability variation state is set is the 50th, during the variation of the special symbol, and Since the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period, even if the jackpot is not won during the probability change state, the latent state game (RUSH game) is given to the player. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot experience the latent state game (RUSH game) and get bored with the game even though the game has been performed for a long time.

  Further, in this embodiment, the latent state is set when the latent state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won during the probability change state, rather than the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the longer the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the jackpot game after the completion of the latent state game (RUSH game). Therefore, it is possible to cause a player in the latent state game (RUSH game) to play a game while expecting a jackpot game to be executed.

  Unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in the case where the latent state is set without winning the jackpot, it is equivalent to the case where the latent state is set based on winning the jackpot Alternatively, set a variation time or symbol determination period corresponding to a special symbol lottery result other than big wins (outgoing, small hits) so that a longer-latency game (RUSH game) is executed. Also good. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a situation where it may be advantageous for a player not to win a big win by drawing a special symbol, and an unexpected game can be provided.

  In this embodiment, as described above, a long latent state is easily set when a big win is won during the probability change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the state is set, a long latent state may be set. In this case, for example, the probability variation number (the number of lotteries (variation number) of special symbols in which the probability variation state is continuously set) is 50, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state, that is, the special symbol high probability state is 1/20. It is preferable to configure so that a long latent state is set when the result of lottery drawing of special symbols is out of 50 consecutive times (about 7%).

  Next, of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, since the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, the special diagram 1 for the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is shown. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90A, in the second embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped (determined), the latent state is set. The display of the production mode (super chance zone display) indicating the state in which the variation of the second special symbol is executed across the timing, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) in the special diagram 1 display area Dm1 This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8A) in that it is executed during the period in which the second symbol for display is stopped (determined). Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the display mode (“777”) of the third symbol for indicating that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has won the jackpot is stopped and displayed. It shows that the latent state is set based on winning the jackpot with the first special symbol during the probability changing state. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display form that the player can visually recognize is formed, the player can display the special figure 1 display area. By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the production mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, the flow of the future game The game can be performed in a state in which information (information on whether or not the jackpot game is executed after completion of the latent state game) is acquired in advance.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, the falling lottery (special symbol) is performed when the special symbol lottery is performed in the latent probability state. The lottery for shifting the high probability state to the low probability state is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to grasp whether the current latent state is an advantageous latent state advantageous to the player. You can play games with peace of mind.

  In the second embodiment, the configuration in which the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the special symbol lottery result is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol lottery result is displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area is reduced, or the screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, provided on the game board 13 or other than the third symbol display device 81). Or a liquid crystal display device or the like may be used. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to know what the latent state is set as a trigger, so that the big hit game is executed after the latent state game (RUSH game) is finished. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether or not a falling lottery is being executed during a latent state game (RUSH game).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from when the third symbol is stopped (determined display) to the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 until the fixed display period (symbol determined period) elapses. Although it is configured to completely stop without changing, as long as it informs the player that the present is in the special symbol fixed display period (symbol fixed period), without limitation to this, for example, During the fixed display period, the variable display of the third symbol is stopped, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol is not recognized by the player. You may comprise so that a pattern may be rock | fluctuated.

  In addition, because the player is currently in the fixed display period (symbol fixed period) or has not yet acquired the special symbol lottery right to be newly executed, a new special symbol lottery (variation) ) May be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify whether the state is not executed, for example, “determined display” or “waiting” in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 May be configured, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be varied between “determined display” and “standby”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress erroneous recognition that a new lottery is not started in spite of the state of holding storage during the fixed display period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), display contents at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of entry into the latent state game (RUSH game). As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped (determined), the latent state game (RUSH game) is set. An effect mode indicating entry is executed during a period in which the second symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is stopped and displayed (determined display) in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen (see FIG. 8B) of the first embodiment described above. Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are changed with respect to the first embodiment described above. Is different. About another point, it is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced with the jackpot type selection table 202e, and the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab. Is different from the first embodiment described above in that a variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and an outlier type selection table 202ad is further provided.

  The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the type of jackpot type is changed, and various counters set after the jackpot end (time-short counter 203f, probability variation counter 203aa). The content of the fixed time counters 203ad, 203ae) is different from the point that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each big hit type is changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa has the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. For each jackpot type, the values of the hour / hour counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are defined.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot) The value of “100” is set to the time-shortage counter 203f when the gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, and the value “50” is set when the state is the short-time state or the state of probability change. Therefore, it is defined that a value of “50” is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

  Furthermore, as the symbol determination period for special symbols, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to “5 seconds”, the jackpot A2 is set to “60 seconds”, and the jackpot A3 is set to “150 seconds”. The jackpot A1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is “0 to 19”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in “24”. That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed in 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 80% (20/20) 25) is jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is jackpot A3.

  In other words, in this embodiment, even if the jackpot game that is most advantageous for the player is won, the symbol determination period is short as a period (symbol determination period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If it is selected, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is shortened. Therefore, with respect to the special symbol lottery, not only the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, but also the length of the symbol determination period can be watched by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the symbol defining period is defined in association with the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jacket type); You may comprise so that the lottery for selecting a symbol fixed period may be performed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined with a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide gameability that is difficult for a player to predict.

  Next, similarly to the jackpots A1 to A3 described above, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, jackpots D1 to D3 are respectively defined.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot B of the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot) When the gaming state is in the normal state or in the latent state, the value of “0” is set in the hour / hour counter 203f, and the value of “100” is set in the hour / short state and the probability change state. Therefore, it is defined that a value of “0” is set in the probability variation counter 203aa. Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the jackpot B1 is set to be “5 seconds”, the jackpot B2 is set to “60 seconds”, and the jackpot B3 is set to “150 seconds”.

  Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93A, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the hit A to the small hit C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  Specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 9” as the small hit type for which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. The “small hit A1” with the symbol fixed time “0.2 seconds” is in the range of “10 to 89”, and the “small hit A2” with the symbol fixed time “0.5 seconds” is “90 to 93”. "Small hit A3" having a symbol determination time of "1.5 seconds" is defined in the range of "".

  Then, as the small hitting type for which the small hitting operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hitting B of the first embodiment described above is executed, the symbol determination counter C5 has a value in the range of “94 to 95”. “Small B1” with a time of “0.2 seconds” is in the range of “96 to 97”, “Small B2” with a symbol determination time of “0.5 seconds” is a value of “98” A “small hit B3” with a fixed time of “1.5 seconds” is defined. Furthermore, as the small hit type for which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “99” and the symbol determination time is “1. A small hit operation (open operation) of “5 seconds” is defined.

  Next, the contents of the outlier type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. This outage type selection table 202ad is referred to in order to select the outage type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, and a different symbol corresponding to the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. A fixed time is specified.

  In the present embodiment, the same counter value (the value of the small hit type counter C5) is used in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit and in the case of a loss because the lottery result of the special symbol cannot be duplicated. ) To select a type. As a result, the number of counters included in the main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, it is good also as a structure which uses a different counter by the case where the lottery result of a special symbol is a small hit and the case where it remove | deviates, without limiting to the structure mentioned above.

  FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the outlier type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), a symbol type (outage type) with a symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is defined in correspondence with the value of the type counter C5.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set a lottery result of a big win, a small hit, or a loss as a special symbol lottery result, and it is possible to set a different symbol determination time for each lottery result. It is configured. Thereby, even if it is a case where the lottery result of a special symbol is the same, a different symbol fixed time can be set.

  Here, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, a longer time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol determination time. Since the period during which the latent state is set can be lengthened, it can be advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the longer the symbol determination time is selected, the less the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lotteries) becomes, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Further, the second special symbol (special diagram 2) in the case where the latent state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big win is stopped and displayed. In the latent state game (RUSH game) in which a lottery is executed, if the lottery result of Special Figure 2 is a small hit or missed, a long symbol determination time is selected, so that a predetermined latent state is selected. Since the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed during the period (design symbol period of special figure 1) is reduced, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  In this way, since the degree of advantage of the set symbol determination period can be varied according to the special symbol lottery result, it is possible to provide the player with innovative gameplay.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period during which the latent state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set is changed and is executed during the latent state. By changing the number of times of special symbol lottery, it is configured to vary the degree of advantage provided to the player, but other configurations may be used, for example, big wins by lottery of special symbols Only when the symbol determination period of the special symbol indicating winning is longer than the predetermined period, it may be configured to give a privilege to display a preferable video to the player, or music played during the jackpot game You may comprise so that selection operation can be performed during a symbol fixed period.

  Next, referring to FIG. 94, the contents of the time reduction / probability changing two table 202ac2 will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time reduction / probability changing two table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time reduction / accuracy change 2 table 202ac2 is different from the time reduction / accuracy change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A) of the first embodiment in the variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1. It is different in that the length is different. Other than that, it is the same as the time / probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set during the special symbol stop display period (symbol determination period) in the case where the big win is won in the special symbol lottery (the special symbol 1 lottery) during the probability variation state. Since it is configured, the variable display period of FIG. 1 during the probability variation state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 95, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a probability variation counter 203aa is provided instead of the probability variation flag 203g, and the special symbol 1 symbol determining flag 203ab, The difference is that a symbol determining flag 203ac, a special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.

  The probability variation counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of special symbol lotteries executed in a high probability state (latent probability state, probability variation state) of a special symbol, and a period during which the special symbol lottery is performed with a high probability. It is for showing.

  The probability variation counter 203aa is a value (corresponding to the selected jackpot type) at the timing when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S2312 in FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 92) is set, and the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery corresponding to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa is performed. This is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). Similarly, it is also referred to when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (see S953 in FIG. 102).

  Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol determination period of the special symbol (Special Diagram 1, Special Diagram 2) has elapsed, and is reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol determination period of the special symbol winning the jackpot has elapsed. .

  The special figure 1 determining symbol 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed. This indicates that the period is in progress (during the symbol determination period). The special symbol determining flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol determining period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol variation stopping process 2 (see FIG. 99). In S257). When it is determined that the symbol determination period has elapsed (S853: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to off.

  The special figure 2 symbol finalizing flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed. This indicates that the period is in progress (during the symbol determination period). This special symbol 2 symbol finalizing flag 203ac is different from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 symbol finalizing flag 203ab in changing the type of the target special symbol from the first special symbol (special diagram 1) to the second special symbol (special symbol). It is different only in that it is changed to 2), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are counters for measuring the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) or the second special symbol (Special Figure 2). When the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) or the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol determination period is set in the corresponding counter. Then, in the fixed-time processing (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed, the value of the counter is subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae become zero. In this case, a process for ending the symbol determination period for the special symbol is executed.

  In the second embodiment, a different symbol determination period is set according to the type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). The latent state is set as the gaming state during the symbol determination period.

  Next, information stored in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, a special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, a special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab, a remaining confirmation time information storage area. The difference is that 223ac and in-completion flag 223ad are added.

  The special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and is sent from the main controller 110 to the first special symbol (special figure 1). Is received, a value corresponding to the symbol determination period in FIG. 1 is set.

  The value set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol). By managing the value of the 1 determination counter 223aa, it is possible to set the remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent state is continuously set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning of the small bonus of the second special symbol during the symbol fixed period of the special figure 1 (during the latent state game), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa during the small hit game The process of subtracting is interrupted. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, the second special symbol lottery can be appropriately executed during the symbol determination period.

  In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process for accumulating a period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is interrupted may be provided. Specifically, a small hit game counter that measures the period during which the small hit game is executed is provided, and the small hit game counter is used during the small hit game in the latent state that is continuously set by using the small hit game counter. May be configured to calculate the accumulated period of time, or a suspension counter is provided for measuring the period during which the flag for interrupting the subtraction process of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is set to on, and the interruption is performed. A cumulative period during the small hit game in the latent state that is continuously set using the middle counter may be calculated.

  In this way, by calculating the cumulative interruption information that accumulates the period during which the symbol determination period subtraction process in FIG. 1 is interrupted, the player is notified of the result of the current latent state game (RUSH game). Can do. Further, as detailed game results of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small hits per winning prize, and the above-described interruption accumulation Based on the information, a game result indicating whether or not there are more benefits acquired than the design value (or more than the past history), and whether or not the number of acquired balls is larger than the number of winning small hits The player may be informed of the game result to be shown and the game result to indicate whether or not the accumulated interruption information is long with respect to the number of winning small hits. In addition, it may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, and cumulative interruption information.

  The special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a period during which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period), and the symbol specialization period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main controller 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period in FIG. 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as the above-described special figure 1 determination counter 223aa except that the measurement target is the symbol determination period of special figure 2 instead of the symbol determination period of special figure 1, and the details thereof are the same. Description is omitted.

  The remaining determined time information storage area 223ac indicates the remaining time (remaining determined time) of the symbol determined period at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol determined period of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of Special Figure 1). This is a data area for storing the remaining confirmation time information shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode for resuming the symbol determination period subtraction process is set based on the remaining determination time information stored in the remaining determination time information storage area 223ac. As a result, it is possible to predict the period until the latent state ends by grasping the effect mode that is executed when the small hit game ends and the symbol determination period subtraction process is resumed.

  In the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac, when it is determined that a temporary stop related command is received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4219: Yes in FIG. 106). The remaining fixed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, when resuming the symbol determination period subtraction process in the resuming process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), it is read. 109 (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and referred to when determining the additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

  Since various information conditions are thus established, information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified, so the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the latent state game is displayed. It is possible to acquire information indicating the remaining period that can be executed by grasping the effects of various effects performed during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

  In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period in which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided ranges is provided to the player. Is configured so that the player can roughly grasp the remaining period of the latent state game and provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the specific remaining period. For example, a specific remaining period may be notified to the player in units of seconds.

  The determined flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol determined period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol determined period). The The in-confirmed flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON regardless of which of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is in the symbol final period. Yes.

  The confirming flag 223ad is a symbol determination that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 of FIG. 106) of the sound lamp control device 113 that a symbol determination related command has been received (S4254: Yes in FIG. 106). It is set to ON in the related processing (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). When it is determined in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol determination period. Is referred to to determine whether or not (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Further, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command is received in the restart process (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) (S5001: Yes in FIG. 109). Reference is made to determine whether or not the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is in the symbol determination period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time of winning a small hit by the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) (when the small hit game is executed) or at the time of the end of the small hit game It is determined whether the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in the variable display period or the symbol determination period, and based on the determination result, the special symbol 1 is temporarily stopped (the variable display period, It is configured to set the process when the subtraction of the symbol determination period is interrupted and the effect mode when the special figure 1 is restarted (the subtraction of the variable display period and the symbol determination period is restarted).

  By configuring in this way, the process is appropriately executed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) at the timing of winning the small bonus in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2). can do.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is a special symbol variation process 2 instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in contrast to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 97), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), and instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 38). Instead of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see FIG. 102), the second special symbol variation stop processing In place of (see FIG. 45), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 103), and in FIG. 2 the special figure 2 outage stop process 2 (see FIG. The first special Pattern confirmation period setting process (see FIG. 100), with the difference that adding a new second special symbol determined period setting process (see FIG. 104). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, in the contents of the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, the points that are greatly different from the first embodiment will be briefly described. In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it comprised so that the latent state which is a game state advantageous to a player might be set during the fluctuation | variation display period of one special symbol (special drawing 1). More specifically, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol won in the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is played until the variation display period ends. The jackpot game is configured to be executed immediately after the variable display period ends. As a result, the player can continuously execute two different privilege games (a game that frequently causes a small hit in the latent state and a big hit game), and the player can perform a lot in a short period of time. It was possible to grant the benefits.

  Furthermore, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in the state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed with peace of mind. That is, even if the game result of the first half side is not good due to the fact that the big bonus game that is generally given to the player more than the small hit game is set to the latter half of two consecutive bonus games In addition, it is possible to eagerly obtain a privilege in a game (a jackpot game) executed in the second half.

  In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be executed while the big hit variation is being executed, a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed may be set in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and excessively gives a privilege to the player.

  In addition, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies depending on the variation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, since it is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is executed and the length of the game period of the latent game (RUSH game) by one lottery of a special symbol, the latent game ( The processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where the processing using a dedicated selection table is executed in order to preset the length of the game period of (RUSH game).

  However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of (RUSH games) game periods, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) in advance, and there is a possibility that the data area for storing the variation patterns may be compressed.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the symbol determination period) is also a period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In addition, the length of the symbol determination period is made different according to the symbol type based on the special symbol lottery result.

  By configuring in this way, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding (combining) the special symbol variation time and the symbol fixed period. A plurality of patterns can be set with a small amount of data for a game period of a game (RUSH game).

  Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) in the latent state game (RUSH game), it is set because a different symbol determination period is set according to the lottery result. Depending on the symbol determination period, the number of lotteries in FIG. 2 executed during a predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time in FIG. 1) can be varied.

  That is, in the first special symbol lottery in which the game period of the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set, it is desired to set a longer symbol determination period, and the latent probability state game (RUSH game). In the lottery of the second special symbol that is repeatedly executed during the game, it becomes a gameability that it is desired to set a shorter symbol determination period, and a novel result that a different lottery result is desired depending on the special symbol type to be drawn. A certain game characteristic can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (subtraction processing of the hourly counter 203f) is executed at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol In the state where the special symbol high probability state is set, and the processing for transitioning to the low probability state (subtraction processing of the probability variation counter 203aa) is executed at the end of the special symbol determination period. When the number of fluctuations in the special symbol (number of lotteries) reaches the predetermined number (50), the special symbol's high probability state is shifted to the low probability state, and the special symbol's high probability state is set. When the number of symbol changes (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the normal symbol high probability state can be shifted to the low probability state.

  In other words, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the number of variations of the special symbol (number of lotteries) reaches 50, the variation (the 50th variation) ) Is started, the game state shifts to a latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and the timing (the 50th variation) ends (the symbol determination period ends) The gaming state can be changed to a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol).

  By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot is not won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined period (the 50th variation period (including the symbol determination period)). It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience a latent state game (RUSH game).

  First, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 (S154) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). The special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is replaced with the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in that the processes of S251 and S252 are added to the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment described above. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213).

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (S154), when it is determined in the processing of S204 that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). When it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol finalizing flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Details of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S251 that the special symbol 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is set to OFF (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and the process of S209 is performed. Transition to processing.

  When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (greater than 0) in the process of S206 described above (S206: No), or when the processes of S208 and S257 are executed, It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n in FIG. 2 is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 symbol determining flag 203ac is set to ON. (S252).

  In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 symbol determining flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252: No), that is, the processing of S209 and S252, the current is the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2). If it is determined that there is no change display or symbol determination period, a second special symbol change start process is executed to newly start a change of the second special symbol (special illustration 2) (S210). End the process. Note that the processing content of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, the symbol special period of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is currently set. Is determined, the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in place of the process of S402 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above. This is different in that the process of determining (S451) is executed.

  That is, in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state is continued until the special symbol jackpot is won. Although the probability variation flag 203g for indicating the high probability state is used, in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot winning (first termination condition) is selected. In addition, there is a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of the special symbol during a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability variation counter 203aa is for measuring the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of lotteries) until the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to be.

  It should be noted that the configuration other than the present embodiment may be any configuration that can determine whether or not the second end condition described above is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203g used in the first embodiment and the second The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation counter that always measures the variation number of the special symbol (number of lotteries) regardless of the gaming state is provided, and the setting state of the probability variation flag 203g, You may comprise so that the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation of the special symbol in a probability variation state may be discriminate | determined based on the update number of a fluctuation frequency counter.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the number of changes in the special symbol, that is, the number of changes in the number of changes in the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and the number of changes in the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is added. Although the end condition (second end condition) for ending the probability variation state is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. Figure 1 Fluctuation counter and special figure 2 fluctuation counter that measures only the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) are provided, and for each special symbol variation (lottery) In this case, an end condition (an end condition for ending the probability variation state) may be set.

  In the second embodiment, in addition to the first ending condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol as the ending condition for ending the high probability state (for example, the probability variation state) of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol Although the second end condition based on (the number of lotteries) is provided, other end conditions may be provided. For example, the special symbol lottery result is a special lottery result other than the big hit (for example, a small hit). You may provide the 3rd completion | finish conditions satisfied when the frequency | count of becoming reaches the predetermined frequency. Further, the third end condition may be set for the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, respectively.

  In addition, there is a time counter that counts the time when the special symbol's high probability state is set, and the fourth end condition that is established when the time counter counts the predetermined time, and the special symbol's high probability state is set. A fifth end condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery result of the normal symbol executed in the state in which it is performed or the number of lotteries may be provided.

  In addition, when any of the plurality of termination conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is set other than the timing used in the second embodiment. For example, immediately before the special symbol lottery is started, immediately after the special symbol lottery is executed, when the special symbol variation is started, or when the special symbol variation is started for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), when special symbol changes stop, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second), or when a special symbol is stopped It may be configured to shift at any timing of the end timing of (period).

  In this way, by providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and the timing for ending the high probability state of the special symbol when the end condition is satisfied, a special symbol is provided to the player. It can be difficult to tell how long the high probability state of the symbol will continue and when it will end (when the special symbol starts to change, when the change stops, or when the symbol determination period ends). A game can be performed while giving a feeling.

  Since the other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 99, a first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257), which is a process in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is a process (S851 to S858) executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol in contrast to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above. , S860) is different from the point that the contents of the reset process when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) won in the jackpot is stopped and displayed are different. Since the other processes are the same as the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), the special symbol variation is stopped, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the symbol fixed period), and the set symbol fixed. The process for measuring the period and various execution processes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol after the symbol determination period has elapsed are configured to be executed.

  Therefore, in the process of S206 in FIG. 97, that is, in the process of determining whether or not it is time to end the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the timing to stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). (S206: Yes in FIG. 97) and the processing of S251, that is, the current state of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1). In the process of determining whether or not the stop display is in progress, it is determined that the stop display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is being performed (the special symbol 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is set to ON). (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes).

  Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. In the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has passed and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed to stop and display special figure 1, that is, in the process of S206 of FIG. When the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed by determining that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is 0, the special symbol 1 symbol fixed flag 203ab is set to ON. Therefore, it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) in the processing of S851 (S851: No), and the first special symbol determination period setting processing is executed. (S852).

  In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (symbol determination period) during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol fixed period setting process which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), a determination time (symbol determination period) is set, a process of setting a command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol (special symbol) of this time are set. When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, a process for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state is executed.

  In the second embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is won (first short-time end condition) as a condition for shifting the high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state (short-time end condition), the normal symbol Two short-time ends when the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) (second short-time end condition) in a state where the high probability state is continuously set If the first short-time termination condition described above is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol determination period). When the 2 o'clock short end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol variation display is started (the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed). .

  In this way, a plurality of conditions (short time end conditions) that trigger the transition of the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low probability state is varied according to the established short time end condition. By configuring as above, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at any timing for the player who is playing the game state (the short time state, the probability variation state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it can be difficult to predict whether the game state (normal state, latent state) will be entered, it is possible to always keep a close eye on the game content and provide a game that never gets tired.

  In the second embodiment, it is configured to shift the state of the normal symbol with the above-described content, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the special symbol lottery, or the special symbol Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing for starting the variation of the special symbol, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the variation of the special symbol is started, the timing when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, It is configured to shift at a timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, or at the end timing of the special symbol stop display period (symbol determination period). May be.

  In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the determination time (symbol determination time) corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the special symbol 1 determination time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, a fixed time corresponding to each type selected in various tables (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, outage type selection table 202ad) used in the special symbol lottery. Since (symbol determination period) is defined, a value indicating a determination time (symbol determination period) corresponding to the type to be stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot, and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is the jackpot A3, it is confirmed. Since 150 seconds is defined as the time (design determination period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad.

  Next, the special figure 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is set to ON (S2802), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, this time, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for setting the fixed time (symbol fixed time) is a big hit If this is the case, in order to shift the normal symbol high probability state to the low probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is reset (S2804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. Thereby, only when the special symbol lottery result is a big win, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be set at the timing of stopping the special symbol.

  In addition, for example, when a special symbol jackpot is won (first short-term end condition), and when a high probability state of a normal symbol is continuously set, the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times ( For example, when the two short-time end conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, whether or not the first short-time end condition is satisfied is determined. Since the process for determining whether or not the second short-time end condition is satisfied is executed in preference to the process to perform, the special symbol jackpot is won when setting the symbol determination period for the special symbol. Even in this case, the process of S2804 is skipped.

  After executing the processing of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 in the processing of S2805 (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805: Yes), a status command indicating the latent status is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2808. After executing the processing of S2806 or S2807, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the variation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S851 that the special symbol 1 symbol finalizing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851: Yes), that is, the symbol special symbol period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is currently set. If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S853. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes in FIG. 97), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 When (see S257 of FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined in the process of S851 that the special figure 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is set to ON.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether the present time is the timing when the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the current time is within the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1). In the case (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and this process is terminated. In this fixed time process (S860), the process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period is executed, or the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period temporarily stopped based on the execution of the small hit game is updated. A process for resuming the process is executed, and detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the determination time (symbol determination period). Then, the special figure 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is set to OFF (S854). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a status command is set according to the values of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa (S857).

  By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, after the special symbol stop display period has elapsed (after the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed. When the value of the subsequent probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. As a result, a probability variation end condition (a condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) is satisfied. In such a case, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the special symbol's stop display period has elapsed, so the special symbol's high probability is displayed during the variable display period of the target special symbol and during the symbol determination period. It can be a probability state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-described probability variation end condition is satisfied due to the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol during the variation display period of the first special symbol and during the symbol determination period The second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed in a state where is set.

  The contents of the state command set in the above-described processing of S857 will be described in detail. When the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability variation counter When the value of 203aa is greater than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state is set, and when the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is a short-time state. A status command is set. In addition, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set), if the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0, the gaming state is a latent probability state. When the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

  Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), a remaining probability variation command is set as information indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, the remaining probability variation number. The status command set in the process of S857 and the remaining probability variation command are output to the audio lamp control apparatus 113 by the external output process (see S2201 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control apparatus 110. Is done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes processing corresponding to the command received in the command determination processing 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). As a result, the current gaming situation can be properly determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first short-time end condition (the condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to the low probability at the stop display timing of the special symbol. When the second short-term end condition (condition that is satisfied according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of lotteries)) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is reduced at the special symbol fluctuation start timing. When transitioning to the probability state, the probability variation end condition (the first probability variation end condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won, the second probability variation end condition that is satisfied according to the number of special symbol changes (the number of lotteries)) is satisfied Is configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state at the end timing of the special symbol stop display period (design fixed period).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the period during which the latent state that becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player as the gaming state is set according to the short-term end condition that is established. In addition, it can be expected not only whether the special symbol lottery result is a big win or not, but also a longer period during which an advantageous gaming state is set.

  Next, a special figure 1 confirmation period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the first embodiment described above is executed. Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h and the probability variation counter 203aa are reset (S859), the big hit medium flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a process during a fixed time, which is one process in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment ( S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fixed time processing (S860).

  In the fixed time processing (S860), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when a lottery is won in the second special symbol lottery and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period in which the small hit game is being executed, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97). That is, in the process of S2901 of the fixed time process (see S860 in FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small hit game ends. Only when the variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

  Therefore, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), a special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. 203v is set to OFF (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hit game has been completed, so the small hit game is executed. In order to restart the update process of the symbol determination period that has been temporarily stopped as a result, the processes of S2902 and S2903 are executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped and S2904 is performed. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this process ends.

  Next, a second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) is different from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above in place of the process of S1002, and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is The difference is that the process of determining whether it is greater than 0 (S1051) is executed. Since the other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), detailed description thereof is omitted. The details of the process executed in S1051 are the same as the contents executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). Description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), which is a process in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is the addition of the processing of S1551 to S1563 to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506. The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of S1509, and the processes of S1509 and S1510 are deleted. The other processes are the same as the second special symbol variation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the symbol determination period elapses after the special symbol variation time has elapsed, as in the first special symbol variation suspension process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99). This is different in that the control object is changed from the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) to the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2). Of the various types of processing executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the control target is simply compared with the various types of processing in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99). The detailed description of the processing that is different only in the symbol type will be omitted.

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stopping process 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 symbol determining flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). If it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determining flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1551 that the special symbol 2 symbol determining flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1551: No), the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one process in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). In the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552), the symbol type targeted for the process executed in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) is the first special symbol. Is changed to the second special symbol, the command to be set is a special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. They are only different, and the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the detailed description of this process is abbreviate | omitted with reference to the content of the 1st special symbol determination period setting process (refer S852 of FIG. 100) mentioned above.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is, If it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S1553: No), the value of the special symbol 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), This process is terminated.

  The process of S1563 is to update the display of the second special symbol that has already been stopped. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays a symbol to indicate that the special symbol is stopped (including a display that blinks at a high speed to the extent that the player recognizes that the symbol is lit). Thus, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

  In the case of using a configuration in which the special symbol is continuously turned on during the symbol determination period as in this embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104). In the processing of S3009, it is configured to output an instruction to stop the second special symbol from being changed (stop display), and to output information indicating a period of stop display (symbol determination period). It may be configured to set in advance so that the second special symbol is turned on during the (period). Such a configuration eliminates the need to execute a process for updating the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 each time in a process executed in a short cycle. Can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1554). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa. It is determined whether the value of is greater than 0 (S1556).

  If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to S1558. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1555 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 in the processing of S1556. (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1558.

  In the process of S1558, a status command is set according to the values of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa (S1558), then a special figure 2 confirmation period end command is set (S1559), and then the first embodiment described above. The same processing of S1501 to S1505 is executed. Here, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off stop process 2 (S1561). ) Is executed, and this process ends.

  When the processing of S1505 is completed, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as in the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 105, special figure 2 outage stop process 2 (one process in second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment ( S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 off stop process 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 outage stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 outage stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 59), compared to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (Refer to FIG. 106) The difference is that various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) is executed instead of the various counter update processing (see FIG. 72), and the other processing is the same. Specifically, the process executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main controller 110 from the first embodiment and the various kinds added from the second embodiment are added. A process to update the counter value has been added.

  First, with reference to FIG. 106, the command determination process 2 (S4162) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) is different from the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in step S4215 that a hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4215: No), it is next determined whether a remaining number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

  Here, as the remaining number related command, the remaining short number of times command (set in the process of S603 in FIG. 36) indicating the remaining number of times that the normal symbol high probability state is continuously set (the number of special symbol remaining fluctuations) is set. Command) and a remaining probability variation number command (command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining variation of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. If it is determined that the remaining number related command has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number updating process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) differs from the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, it is different in that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the remaining probability variation number to the display control device 114 is added.

  In the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining short time number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining short number of times command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display remaining short number of times command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining short time command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not a remaining variation number command has been received (S4851). If it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has been received (S4851: Yes), the display remaining certain variation number command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), the present process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. In the process of S4251, when it is determined that the remaining number related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (S4219). Here, in the temporary stop related command, the special figure 1 temporary stop command set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON (see S1603 in FIG. 46). And a special figure 1 restart command (refer to S2902 in FIG. 101) set when the first special symbol that is temporarily stopped is displayed, or when the stop display is restarted. When it is determined that the temporary stop related command is received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining confirmation time is added.

  In the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), when the elapsed display of the first special symbol or the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporary stop), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is displayed. Processing for executing an effect mode corresponding to the variable display mode or the stop display mode on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received from the main controller 110 (S4951). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the restart process (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4951 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) with the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is the timing for temporarily stopping the stop display, it is next determined whether the in-confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, if it is determined that the finalizing flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953: Yes), since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (during the symbol determination period), the set symbol determination time is set. The remaining time of the symbol determination time of the first special symbol is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to S4955.

  In the process of S4954, the remaining time of the set symbol fixed time is calculated by reading the value of the special symbol 1 fixed counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol fixed time of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the symbol determination time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining confirmation time is short is set in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4955 that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. Is determined (S4957). In the processing of S4957, if it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), it is determined that the remaining remaining time information storage area 223ac is a normal remaining confirmed time. A period B shown is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends.

  In the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), it indicates that the remaining confirmation time is long in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. A period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4953, when it is determined that the finalizing flag 223ad is set to OFF (S4953: No), that is, when it is determined that the current time is during the variable display period of the first special symbol, The process (see S4903 to S4908) for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol executed in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the process of S4952 Migrate to Note that the process for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that in the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the restart process (S4952) which is one process in the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4952).

  In the second embodiment, the second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed during the stop display (during the symbol determination period) in addition to the first special symbol change display (during the variable display period). Due to the configuration, when the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the symbol determination period is temporarily suspended). It is configured as follows. In addition, the stop display of the first special symbol is resumed (the subtraction of the symbol determination period is resumed) at the timing when the small hit game is finished. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the state of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol or the stop display is restarted is determined, and the effect mode after the restart is set based on the determination result. It is configured to do.

  In the restart process (S4952), it is first determined whether or not a special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the in-confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). If it is determined that the confirming flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, if the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is the first special symbol stop display, the remaining confirmation The remaining effect time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac is read (S5052), and the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa based on the read remaining event time information and the additional effect counter 223i ( In step S5053, the display additional effect command corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the in-confirmation flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5056), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5051 that the in-confirmation flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In some cases, the same processing of S5002 to S5005 as the variation restart processing (S4902 in FIG. 68) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S4219 that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether a symbol determination related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol determination related command has been received (S4254: Yes), symbol determination related processing (S4255) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4221), and this processing is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the symbol determination related process (S4255) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

  In the symbol determination related process (S4255), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol 1 determination command is received from the main controller 110 (S5071). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, a value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5071 that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5074.

  In the process of S5074, it is determined whether a special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the display special figure 2 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is designated as the special figure. 2 is set in the confirmation counter 223ab (S5076), the in-confirmation flag 223ad is set to on (S5077), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the processes of S5075 and S5076 are skipped, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process is terminated. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the various counter update process 2 (S4161) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processing 2 (S4161).

  In the various counter update processing 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is decremented by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is obtained. And the reading of the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is executed (S5455). Next, the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa read out in the process of S5455 to calculate the remaining time (S5456). Next, the processing of S5407 and S5408 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456, S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. This process is terminated.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment described above is configured so that the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the second special symbol (special diagram 2) fluctuate simultaneously (the so-called first embodiment) (the so-called first embodiment). , Simultaneous variation type), the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure 2 is executed during the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, so that a lot of small hit games (RUSH games) can be executed. Was configured.

  Furthermore, as a condition for setting the latent probability state (a condition for enabling the RUSH game to be executed), the first probability change that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery shown in FIG. Conditions and a second probability variation end condition that is established when the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), and if the first probability variation end condition is satisfied, a win is won When the special symbol (special symbol 1) indicating that the symbol has been stopped is displayed in a latent state and the second probability variation end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is variably displayed. The period (variable display period) and the symbol determination period are configured to be in a latent state.

  In addition, the length of the symbol determination period is different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the symbol determination period is set longer when winning the jackpot than when not winning the jackpot It was configured as follows.

  In addition, when a big win is won in the lottery of one special symbol (Special Figure 1), an invalid lottery that does not win a big jackpot in the lottery of the other symbol (Special Figure 2) is executed. In other words, the invalid lottery is configured so that the value related to the condition for changing the gaming state is not updated. Specifically, the lottery of special figure 2 is executed during the period when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbol won by jackpot and during the symbol fixed period) Even so, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is configured not to be updated (subtracted).

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, when a big win is won in the lottery shown in FIG. Since the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed until the period, the symbol determination period), the special figure 2 is relieved. Was able to perform the fluctuations.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the type of probability variation end condition is increased as compared to the second embodiment described above, and the period during which the latent state is set is longer than that of the second embodiment described above. doing. Specifically, as the probability variation end condition, the probability variation end condition (third probability variation end condition) is established when the small win is won in FIG. When the probability change end condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the probability changing state to the latent state when the small hit game is started.

  Further, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (value of the probability variation counter 203aa) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (value of the hour / short counter 203f) are the same (for example, “4 )) If the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, and the jackpot is not won, the game state will shift from the probability change state to the normal state It is configured.

  In other words, in the third embodiment, while the probability variation state (a special symbol and a normal symbol are both in a high probability state) is set, the small symbol is won in the lottery of the special diagram 1 and the normal symbol is changed to a low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hit game until the low probability state of the special symbol is set can be set to the latent state.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the period during which the latent state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player is continuously set in accordance with the timing of winning a small hit in the lottery shown in FIG. . Therefore, the player can be interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and a gaming machine that does not get bored can be provided.

  Further, the third embodiment is configured such that a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected when a big hit is won in the final variation where the probability variation state ends. As a result, even if the final variation of the probability variation state is reached without winning a small hit, it is possible to set a long-term latent certain state, so that the game with expectations to the end is performed for the player Can be made.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the kind of privilege provided based on the game content of the special figure 1 in the probability variation state in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game contents of the special figure 1 game after the probability variation state is set and the granted privilege. As shown in FIG. 112, in this embodiment, the probability variation state is configured to be set in a predetermined period (four variations of the special symbol) after the jackpot ends, and the number of variations in the probability variation state (after the jackpot) The contents of the privilege given to the player are made different depending on the number of special figure fluctuations) and the special drawing lottery result.

  Specifically, in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a big hit, there are many players. In addition to the jackpot game that can win the prize ball, the period in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is a jackpot as a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed (symbol determination period) ) Is set. Further, when the lottery result (lottery result in Fig. 1) is a small hit, the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result in Fig. 1 as a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. After that, it is specified that a period (symbol determination period) until the number of special symbol fluctuations after the big hit reaches 4 times is set.

  In other words, if a small win is won in the first special figure 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing at which the small hit game is started (the timing at which the first special symbol variation is stopped and the small hit game is executed) ) To the latent state game (RUSH game) in the period from the end of jackpot to the end of the fourth special figure change. Therefore, the period in which the latent state (RUSH state) is set is “ultra-long” in which the longest period can be set. In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out of the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no special benefit is given to the player. Is never given.

  In the third special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability variation state is set. It is composed. Here, in the case of winning a small hit, since the period until the end of the fourth special figure change is set as the latent state in addition to during the small hit game, the probability change state described above is set The period during which the latent state is set is shortened as compared to the case of winning the small win in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery).

  Moreover, in this 3rd Embodiment, the variation | change which has a long variation | change time, when winning a jackpot, so that the number of special figure 1 fluctuation | variations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability variation state is set in the probability variation state increases. The pattern is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, the period during which the latent state is set is made easier than in the case where the big win is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-described certainty state is set. be able to.

  Next, in the fourth special figure variation (special drawing lottery) after the probability variation state is set, that is, the special diagram final variation in the certain variation state, the special diagram variation is started regardless of the result of the special figure lottery. The period from the end to the end (after the symbol determination period elapses) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, it is easy to set a long fluctuation time when a big win is won in the special figure final fluctuation (the fourth special figure fluctuation after the probability variation state is set) in the probability variation state. The length of the period during which the latent state is set is “long”.

  If the big win is not won in the special figure final change in the probability variation state, the normal state is set after the symbol determination period has elapsed, and the fifth special drawing lottery is executed.

<About the effect display contents in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period in which the latent state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the established transition condition (probability change end condition). And a suggestion effect (bingo game) is executed in order to suggest to the player the possibility that the latent state is set and the timing when the latent state is set during the probability change state. It is composed.

  Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. Among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the display content of the end game (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the probability variation state is set will be described. FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the end of jackpot. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm has the same special figure 1 display area Dm1 and special figure 2 display area as those of the second embodiment described above. Dm2 and guidance display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, special figure 1 reservation number display area Dm4 indicating the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservation number display area Dm5 indicating the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 , Is formed.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows an end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 jackpot, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 indicates that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a jackpot. Further, the stop display mode “777” of the third symbol is displayed, and “−” indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. In the guidance display area Dm3, a “left-handed” character is displayed to indicate that the jackpot game has been played with a left-handed game.

  In the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content at the time of winning the jackpot It is comprised so that. That is, the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is a jackpot that was won during the left-handed game.

  Furthermore, a bingo card 820 used in a probability change state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, bingo is used as a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the latent probability state is set or whether or not the jackpot is won during the period in which the probability variation state is set. The game is configured to be executed.

  In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113 (a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for the nine squares (vertical 3 × horizontal 3) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). The numbers are announced based on the lottery of the special figure 1 executed in the state where the probability variation state is set, and the player is based on the announced numbers and the arrangement of the numbers described in the bingo card 820. An effect that suggests the game result (the lottery result of FIG. 1) is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113 (b) to FIG. 115, display contents (effect contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the bingo game will be described. When the bingo game is started (when the special figure 1 change during the probability change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113B is executed. FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents displayed when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed after the big hit ends.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display form indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. . Then, “3” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area Dm4, and the fact that the special figure 1 has been subtracted (updated) from the value (“4”) shown in FIG. 113 (a). Show.

  In the lower left area of the main display area Dm, a number “1” is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the current lottery result (special figure 1 variation (first time)). The remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number “last 3” of the bingo game is displayed. Here, for example, an effect example in the case where the special figure 1 variation (fourth) in the probability variation state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the third time) when the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fourth time) in the probability variation state is a big hit. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, the latent state is set at the timing when the variation display of the special diagram 1 is started in the final variation (the special diagram 1 variation (fourth time)) of the certain variation state. In the latent state, a latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery shown in FIG. 2 is executed by a right-handed game is executed.

  Therefore, in order to immediately cause the player to perform a right-handed game immediately after the final variation of the probability variation state is executed (after the symbol determination period of the special diagram 1 variation (third time)), the latent probability state is The effect result (bingo two-row aligned display) for notifying that it is set is before the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in which the latent state is set (during the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time)). It is configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, the latent state can be set in a state in which the player sufficiently understands that the latent state is set.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the big win or the small win is not won in the lottery shown in FIG. A variation pattern of variation time (1 second) is selected, and an effect result (bingo two-row alignment display) for notifying that a latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. . Thereby, it is not necessary to notify the player that the latent state is actually set for a short period of time, and a bingo game failure effect can be executed. In addition, when a short-term latent state is set, since it is not displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 that the player is to make a right-handed game, the inconvenience to the game can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 114 (a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) is performed, the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time), and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (second time). “8” is displayed as the past history 823 on the left side of the main display area Dm, and “5” is displayed as the current lottery result 821. In the bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to “1”, “8”, and “5” displayed in the current bingo game are changed to “X”, and two lines of lines are formed and displayed. .

  Furthermore, “double bingo” is displayed as the status display mode 824 indicating the current status, and a comment “super lucky” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that the bingo game was successful during the fluctuation before the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) that will be actually won the jackpot, In addition to providing a period for enjoying a successful satisfaction, it is possible to notify in advance that it is necessary to play a right-handed game from the next fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, as a comment for notifying that a right-handed game is performed from the next change (a comment for notifying that a right-handed game condition has been established (a condition for setting a latent state is established)) The sub-display area Ds displays “It is a right-handed game soon”, but the player is notified in advance of the timing at which the latent state is set, that is, the timing at which the right-handed game is performed. For example, the remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) (the remaining period obtained by adding the residual fluctuation display period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) and the symbol determination period) is calculated. A calculation means may be provided, and information based on the calculation result of the calculation means (information for indicating the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time)) may be notified to the player.

  In the third embodiment, when a probability change state is set as a gaming state and a ball is entered into the second entrance 640 (when the start condition in FIG. 2 is established), Regardless of the lottery result, a variation pattern having a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set. As a result, if a right-handed game is executed in a state where the probability variation state is set and the variation (lottery) in FIG. 2 is executed, the probability variation state is set for a period during which the latent probability state can be set. Compared with the case where left-handed game is performed in the state and fluctuation (lottery) is executed in FIG. 2, the right-handed game in the probabilistic state can be made unfavorable to the player. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of intentionally playing an irregular game different from the displayed content during the probability changing state in which “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (when the start condition in FIG. 2 is satisfied) ) Is configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The time may be configured to have a fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) extremely longer than the special figure 1 fluctuation time.

  By configuring in this way, for example, when a right-handed game is performed in a state where the probability variation state is set ignoring the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed on the third symbol display device 81 In addition, since the special figure 2 fluctuation for a long time (for example, 120 seconds) is executed, even if the latent state is set thereafter (for example, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 won for the big hit (fourth) fluctuation) Even if the display is started), since the special figure 2 variation is being executed, a latent probability state game (a game for executing the special figure 2 variation in a state where the latent probability state is set) is newly added. It can be made difficult to execute.

  And in this embodiment, since the latent probability state which is a game state advantageous to a player is set based on the variation period of the special symbol (special symbol 1) and the symbol fixed period, the latent probability state The period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed (latent probability) as the period from the setting of the predetermined special figure 1 fluctuation to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed becomes longer. (State game period) will be shortened. In addition, when the probability variation state is set, when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the latent probability state is set in order to reliably prevent the fluctuation of the special figure 2 from being executed. When the right-handed game is started from the same time, the latent state game period is similarly shortened. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right-handed game, the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the player is performed. The contents displayed on the screen can be watched.

  When a right-handed game is performed in the latent state and the special figure 2 variation is executed, the effect display in the RUSH game (latent state game) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Displayed on the display screen. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure change is a big hit after the big hit is finished (after the probability variation state is set). In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when a latent probability state is set, a latent probability state game (RUSH game) is performed in which a variation (lottery) in FIG. That is, during the latent state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game and the left-handed game is a disadvantaged game.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the guidance display area Dm3 is “right-handed”, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 has a special figure 1 fluctuation (4). The display mode indicating that the change in the second time is being performed, and the display mode indicating that the change in the special map 2 is being executed are displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, and the special figure 1 hold number display area Dm4 is displayed. “0” indicating that there is no reserved number in the special figure 1 is displayed, and “0” indicating that there is no reserved number in the special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm5.

  During the period in which this RUSH game is being executed, the character 811 simulating a rabbit runs from left to right and opens the treasure chest 812 found on the way (the same effect as in the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, characters “RUSH” indicating that the game is in a latent state game (RUSH game) are displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the current game is in the latent state game (RUSH game).

  In FIG. 113 to FIG. 114 described above, when the second probability variation end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied as the probability variation end condition for ending the probability variation state, that is, the final variation (4 An example of the display screen when the latent state is set in the second special map variation) has been described. In the third embodiment, as the probability variation end condition (the condition for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) for ending the probability variation state (shifting the probability variation state to the latent probability state), the first Probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on jackpot winning), 2nd probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of special symbol), 3rd probability change end condition (established based on small win win) When one of the end conditions is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the probability changing state to the latent probability state.

  Next, referring to FIG. 115 (a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied before the second probability variation end condition described above is satisfied. The contents will be explained. FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents executed during the third special figure change after the big hit (after the probability variation state is set) and the third special figure change is a big hit. FIG.

  In the third embodiment, when the first probability variation end condition (winning a special symbol jackpot) is satisfied, a special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. The latent state is set during the period until the stop display ends (symbol determination period). Therefore, since the probability variation state is continuously set during the variation display period of FIG. 1 (during the variation of the special diagram), in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 1 displays a display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, “4” is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that a line of lines has been established.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the above-described first probability variation end condition is satisfied and the latent state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is a target. It is configured so that different numbers can be displayed multiple times as the bingo game lottery result 821 during the special symbol variation display period, and information for indicating the final result of this bingo game is notified step by step to the player It is configured to do.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), while Special Figure 1 is in a variable display, a line of lines is established. For example, if the type of jackpot won this time is long In the case of a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C) for which a period (for example, 300 seconds) is set, different numbers are used as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variable display in FIG. (For example, “5”) is newly displayed, and finally, the effect that the result of the bingo game is “the formation of two lines of lines” is executed.

  In this manner, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) can be varied a plurality of times during the special symbol variation display. As a result, the contents of the special benefits (RUSH game, jackpot game) given to the player at the time when the special figure variation is completed can be grasped as the special symbol fluctuation display period elapses. The contents of the effect displayed on the display screen of the 3 symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

  Further, when the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) for which a short symbol determination period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result (number of established lines) of the bingo game is not variable. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a number (for example, "3") may be displayed and the result of a bingo game may be "one line line establishment".

  With this configuration, the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, and the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to correlate with the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display. Therefore, since the player can be watched with respect to the contents and results of the bingo game, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the special symbol lottery result, and the result of the bingo game. Although the effect of thrilling the player as to whether (the number of established lines) increases is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable symbol display The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. Accordingly, it is possible to give a privilege that is more advantageous to the player when a larger number is displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Next, the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 (b) schematically shows an example of display contents executed during the second special figure change in the case where the second special figure change is a small hit after the big hit (after the probability variation state is set). It is a schematic diagram.

  The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the latent state is set differs depending on the type of the probability change end condition that is satisfied. Specifically, when the first probability variation termination condition is satisfied, a period (target symbol) from when the corresponding special symbol stop display is started until the stop display is ended (until the jackpot game is started). Is set as a latent state and the second probability variation end condition is satisfied, from the time when the corresponding special symbol variation display is started until the corresponding special symbol stop display is terminated. A period (a target symbol variation display period and a symbol determination period) is set as a latent state. That is, the latent state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 variation regardless of which of the first probability variation end condition and the second probability variation end condition described above is satisfied.

  On the other hand, when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied, when a small win is won in any of a plurality of (four times) special figure 1 variations that can be executed within the period in which the probability variation state is set In addition, the latent state is set in a period from the start of the special symbol stop display indicating that the lottery result is a small hit to the end of the special symbol stop display that is the final variation of the probability variation state. . In other words, if a special winning lottery (first special drawing lottery) executed immediately after the probability variation state is set, a special symbol indicating the result of the first special lottery (small hitting) is stopped. From the time when the special symbol lottery period (fluctuation display period and symbol decision period) to the end of the special symbol stop display indicating the result of the fourth special symbol lottery (multiple times) The special state is set, and the latent state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied, “ALL” for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and 8 lines (all lines) are satisfied. The bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating. In the special figure 1 display area Dm1, “341” is displayed indicating that the player has won the small hit, and in the guidance display area Dm3 “right” is displayed to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) has started. "Strike" is displayed.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first probability variation end condition or the second probability variation end condition is satisfied is determined by a special figure fluctuation (special drawing lottery) that satisfies each probability variation end condition. ) Is determined prior to execution (preliminary determination), whereas the third probability variation end condition is configured not to perform preliminary determination.

  By configuring in this way, the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed across a plurality of special symbol variations executed during the period in which the probability variation state is set, is completed at the first probability variation. If the condition or the second certain variation end condition is satisfied, it can be set, so that it is possible to execute a suggestive effect without a sense of incongruity to the player and the third end condition is satisfied Since the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed, an unexpected effect can be provided.

  In the third embodiment, the first probability change end condition and the second probability change end condition are determined in advance, and the third probability change end condition is not determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured such that only the second certain variation end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is determined in advance.

  Further, as the above-described prior determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), the preliminary determination is performed for the special figure 1 stored on hold, and the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 stored on hold. It is configured to determine whether or not information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

  By configuring in this way, there is no suggestion effect (bingo) with a sense of incongruity with respect to the number of special figure changes executed before winning the jackpot and the privilege amount given to the player by winning the jackpot Game). In addition, when the player grasps the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide pleasure for predicting future game results in advance.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the second embodiment described above. Is different. About another point, it is the same as that of 2nd Embodiment, attaches | subjects the same code | symbol about the same element, and abbreviate | omits the detailed description.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, instead of the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit random number 3 table 202ba, instead of the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit random number 3 table 202bb is replaced with the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa. The big hit type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is provided, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac. This is different from the second embodiment.

  The first random number 3 table 202ba is a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, compared to the first random number table 202a of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment and refer to FIG. 15A). The value range of the first per-random number counter C1 determined to be different from the range of the value of the first per-random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol is different.

  Here, the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the gaming state is a low probability state of the special symbol (normal state, short time state), the first special symbol acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is obtained. It is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 is “0-9”, and if it is any of “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of “0 to 99”, and if it is within the range of “0 to 99”, it is determined that it is a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, among the total number of 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, 10 values are defined as values for determining the jackpot. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability when the special symbol is in a high probability state is 1/4.

  The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is different from the small hit random number table 202b in the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15B) in the first special symbol (special drawing 1). Even in the lottery, it is different in that it has been changed to win a small hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the contents defined in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “10-14”, If it is any of “10-14”, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2), the same contents as the small hit random number table 202b (see Fig. 15 (b)) are defined, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In other words, the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment described above in that the first special symbol lottery is configured so that a winning combination can be won. In the third embodiment, when a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, a normal winning is obtained when a lottery is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. A process for shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state, that is, a process for shifting the gaming state from the probability changing state to the latent state is executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the latent probability state during the probability variation state, so that the game that is ambitious to the player who is executing the game in the probability variation state Can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the third embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117 (a))) is more than. The probability of winning the small bonus of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 (see (b)))) is configured to be higher. A player who is executing a game in the probability-changing state because the latent probability state is set based on the small hitting win with higher probability than the case where the latent probability state is set based on winning. On the other hand, both the game with a latent probability state (RUSH game) and the jackpot game are executed, but only the game aiming for a jackpot winner that is difficult to win and the game with a latent probability state (RUSH game) are executed. Aiming to win small wins that are easy to win It can be performed and skill, both.

  In the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the big win probability of special figure 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but this is not limitative. In this case, it may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state. For example, even if the probability of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1 is set to a low probability of 1/480. good. By configuring in this way, in a state where the probability variation state is set, when a small win is won before the big win, a latent promising game (RUSH game) in which the big win game is not executed is performed. Since the game can be executed, an unexpected game can be provided to the player.

  The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of jackpot type is changed and various counters (time counter 203f, probability variation counter) set after the jackpot is finished. 203aa, the determined time counters 203ad, 203ae) is different from the point that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each big hit type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 118A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118A, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is a jackpot operation content of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot operation contents differing only in the number of rounds to be executed are defined. For each jackpot type, the hour / hour counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 determination time The value of the counter 203ae is defined.

  Specifically, the jackpot A set with the symbol type corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has a value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) of “0 to 49”. The jackpot operation content in which the round game that opens the second attacker (second variable prize-winning device 650) is executed two rounds (2R), and the value of “4” is set in the hour / short counter 203f, It is specified that a value of “4” is set in the probability variation counter 203aa and a value indicating “5 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot B set with the symbol type corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is defined in the range of “50 to 96” in the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99). The jackpot operation content in which the round game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of “4” in the hour / short counter 203f, “ The value “4” is defined such that a value indicating “100 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  For the jackpot C set with the symbol type corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of “97 to 99”. The jackpot operation content in which the round game that opens the first attacker (the first variable prize winning device 65) is executed 2 rounds (2R), the value of “4” in the hour / short counter 203f, and “ The value of “4” is defined such that a value indicating “300 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot D set with the symbol type corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is “0 to 64”. The jackpot operation content in which the round game that opens the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is executed 2 rounds (2R), and the value of “4” in the time-short counter 203f is the probability variation counter 203aa The value of “4” is set to “5”, and the value indicating “0.5 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot E set with the symbol type corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined in the range of “65 to 99” as the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99). The jackpot operation content in which the round game that opens the first attacker (the first variable prize winning device 65) is executed 2 rounds (2R), the value of “4” in the hour / short counter 203f, and “ The value of “4” is defined such that a value indicating “1 second” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the special symbol jackpot probability is set higher than that of the second embodiment described above to make it easier to win the jackpot, and the privilege to be given to the player in the jackpot game ( (Prize balls) are reduced. With this configuration, the amount of privilege (prize ball) given to the player is determined depending on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period in which the latent state is continuously set. The number) can be varied greatly, so that it is possible to provide a novel game for the player.

  The small hitting type selection 3 table 202bd is the content of the small hitting type set when winning the special figure 1 with respect to the small hitting type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is regulated by adding. Here, with reference to FIG. 118B, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd will be described.

  FIG. 118B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. Is different from the small hitting type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) in that the small hitting type D is added as a small hitting type corresponding to “”. Otherwise, the small hitting type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)). Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  The small hitting type selection 3 table 202bd shows that the first attacker (first variable winning prize) regardless of the value of the obtained small hitting type counter C5 when winning a small hitting with the first special symbol (special figure 1). A small hit game is defined in which the opening operation for opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is executed once. In other words, when a small win is won in the lottery shown in FIG. 1, a small hit game is executed in which it is difficult for the player to win a prize ball in the small hit game.

  In other words, in the third embodiment, the small win in FIG. 1 is not the purpose of granting a privilege (prize ball) to the player by the small hit game, but as an opportunity to set the latent state as the gaming state. It is an object. As a result, when the winning position is won in the special figure 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) for notifying that effect is executed. Even so, since the small hit game has already ended (because the time required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the right region is longer than the small hit game period), the latent probability state is smooth A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

  In addition, when the small win in the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hit game can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small hit game is set to be as short as 0.02 seconds, when winning the small hit of Special Figure 1 in the normal state, Even when the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game (when the special symbol indicating the small winner is stopped and displayed) at the time of winning, the first variable winning device 65 is changed during the small-hit game. It is difficult to win a prize, so that, in the normal state, when winning the bonus of Special Figure 1, an effect or guidance that emphasizes that the winner is won on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The display area Dm3 is configured so that “right-handed” display for guiding a right-handed game is not executed.

  Thereby, it can suppress making a player perform troublesome game operation. It is also possible to provide a notification means for notifying that the winning of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, or right-handed display even when the small winning game is based on the special figure 1 winning in the normal state. May be configured to execute.

  The variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is replaced with the time variation / probability variation table 202f2 that is referred to when the probability variation state is set with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above, and the probability variation 3 table 202be1. Is different from the latent probability table 202f3 that is referred to when the latent probability state is set in that a latent probability three table 202be2 is provided.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as in the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the probability variation state is determined. It is defined that the probability variation 3 table 202be1 is referred to when it is set, and the latent probability 3 table 202be2 is referred to when the latent state is set.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118A, the value of the hour / short counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are configured to be the same after the end of the jackpot. Since the gaming state (that is, the short-time state) in which the value of 203aa is 0 and the value of the short-time counter 203f is larger than 0 is not set, the variation referred to when the short-time state is set. It does not have a pattern selection table.

  Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the third embodiment is configured such that the probability variation state is always set for four special symbol variations when a jackpot is won. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern (refer to the variation pattern table depending on the special symbol variation number after the end of the jackpot (special symbol variation number) and the special symbol lottery result) (Variation time) is selected.

  By configuring in this way, the latent state is set according to the timing (special figure fluctuation frequency) when the condition for setting the latent state as a gaming state (special figure 1 big hit winning or small win winning) is established. It is possible to vary the period (special drawing fluctuation time) for which is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the special symbol lottery result but also to the special symbol fluctuation frequency, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is “big hit”, the special figure change count after the big hit is “1 to 2”. , “Probability variation A table 202 bea (probability variation A)” is referred to. In the case of “3 times”, “Probability variation B table 202 beb (probability variation B)” is referred to, and in the case of “4 times”, “Probability variation C”. Table 202 bec (probability variation C) "is defined to be referred to. In addition, when the lottery result is “small hit, miss”, when the number of special figure fluctuations after the big hit is “1-3”, “probability change A table 202 bea (probability change A)” is referred. In the case of “four times”, “probability change C table 202 bec (probability change C)” is defined to be referred to.

  Furthermore, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 2, the “probability variation D table 202bed (probability variation D)” is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot. It is stipulated in.

  Next, the contents defined in various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202bea to probability variation D table 202beed) referred to in the three probability variation tables 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (c) to 120. . FIG. 119 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation A table 202bea, and FIG. 120 (a) schematically shows the contents defined in the probability variation B table 202beb. 120 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation C table 202bec, and FIG. 120 (c) is defined in the probability variation D table 202bed. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” as a variation pattern that is determined when the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a lottery. Jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of “˜99”, jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of “100 to 197”, and jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the value “198”. ) Are associated. In addition, when winning a small hit or out in the special drawing 1 lottery, the small hit variation 1 (1 second) or the out variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. It has been.

  As shown in FIG. 120A, in the probability variation B table 202beb, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big hit. Jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of “˜99”, jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of “100-149”, and jackpot variation 3 (with the range of “150-198”) 300 seconds).

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the probability variation C table 202bec, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big win. Is associated with a jackpot variation 1 (1 second), a value of “1” is associated with a jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and a jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is within a range of “2 to 198”. It is associated. Further, when winning a small hit in the lottery shown in FIG. 1, a small hit variation 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and when winning a loss, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1, outlier fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, the variation pattern determined in the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is irrespective of the value of the variation type counter CS1. If the big hit variation 1 (1 second) is associated and the small hit is won, the small hit variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the deviation fluctuation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents defined in the latent probability 3 table 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set is selected when the lottery shown in FIG. It is constituted so that.

  Here, in the third embodiment, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, the configuration is such that the latent probability state is set when the small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery. In order to select a variation pattern with reference to the third table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit in the lottery shown in FIG.

  As described above, the third embodiment is configured such that a variation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to a different table according to the number of special symbol variations in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the special symbol variation number (the variation number after the probability variation state is set) which is the lottery result.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment adds a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit flag 203bb to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. It is different in point. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that the small bonus has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It shows that it was won in the small hit. This special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON during a period from the winning of the small hit in the special drawing 1 until the small hit game is executed.

  The special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that a small hitting game is executed based on the small special winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON. This shows that the small hit game based on the small win winning of FIG. 1 is being executed. In the third embodiment, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the small hit game based on the small win winning of the special figure 1 is started, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to execute the process of shifting to.

  The special figure 1 small hit flag 203bb is determined when the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 off stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), set to ON (S3207 in FIG. 128), and when it is determined that it is the timing of the small hit start in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) (see S2503 in FIG. 129) (S2551 in FIG. 129).

  Next, in the process of S2551 in FIG. 129, when it is determined that the flag is set to ON (S2551 in FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the current small hit game is won by the lottery in FIG. If it is determined that it is a small hit that is executed based on this, the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is set to zero. If it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that the small hit end timing is reached (S2511 in FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to OFF.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a). FIG. 123 (a) shows the sound lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of 113. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above in place of the additional effect selection table 222c and the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. It is different in that it is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. This probability variation effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final mode of the suggestion effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115 (a), and wins the jackpot. The final mode is defined based on the number of changes (number of special figure changes since the end of jackpot) and the jackpot type that can be won.

  Specifically, if the number of changes to the jackpot win is “2”, that is, if the winner of the special symbol change is the second time after winning the jackpot, the jackpot type to be won will be “big hit A”, “big hit B” "Is set to produce an effect mode in which one row (line) is established in bingo, and in the case of" big hit C ", an effect mode is established in which 3 rows (line) are established in bingo.

  And if the number of jackpot winning changes is “3”, that is, if the jackpot is won in the third special symbol change after the jackpot ends, if the jackpot type to be won is “jackpot A” or “jackpot B” , It is defined that an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and if “big hit C”, an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

  Finally, if the number of wins for winning the jackpot is "4", that is, if you win the jackpot for the fourth special symbol change after the end of the jackpot (the special chart final change for which the probability variation state is set), the type of jackpot to win If “Large Bonus A” is set, an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are formed in bingo is set, and if “Large Bonus B” is set, an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and “Big Hit C” is set. If so, it is stipulated that an effect mode in which all rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, when winning a jackpot in the first special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, a display screen at the end of the jackpot (in the normal case, a bingo card) A special display screen is displayed on the screen (see FIG. 113) on which 820 is displayed to guide that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot.

  On this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and “right-handed” for guiding a right-handed game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to play a game (right-handed game) suitable for the game state (latent probability state) after the jackpot game ends, so that the period in which the latent probability state is set is full. Utilizing this, the lottery game of the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) can be executed.

  In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the jackpot is configured to display a special display screen in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot. The timing for displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as the jackpot game is in progress, may be the timing when the jackpot game is started, or may be the timing when a predetermined round game is executed in the jackpot game. In this case, in the case of winning the jackpot in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol change to be executed next in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b before the round game of the jackpot game is started. Pre-discriminating means for pre-determining whether the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the jackpot ends) contains information indicating that the jackpot is won is provided, and the prior discriminating means by the prior discriminating means is provided. As a result, if information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, “right-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 and the right-handed game is performed in order to make the jackpot game right-handed. The display mode is configured to be executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and does not include information indicating that the jackpot is won. In this case, it may be configured to display a "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm3.

  With this configuration, when the jackpot is won in the normal state (the game state in which the left-handed game is performed), the jackpot game is determined according to the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 that guides the gaming method during the jackpot game. The game content after the end can be predicted. In the present embodiment, since the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment is used, a left-handed game was performed when a jackpot game that opens the second variable winning device 650 is executed. The ratio in which the ball wins the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the right-handed game. Therefore, even if the configuration in which the gaming method (right-handed or left-handed) is changed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is disadvantageous to the player during the big hit game. Does not provide a unique situation.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) executed when it is determined that the ending command is received in the jackpot related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605: Yes in FIG. 132). In the winning information storage area 223b, it is determined whether or not the winning information (winning information in FIG. 1) includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (see S5605 in FIG. 133). Newly generated winning information is also determined, and more winning information can be determined. However, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (the winning information in FIG. 1) A timing other than the present embodiment may be set as a timing for determining whether there is winning information for winning a jackpot, for example, The timing at which the winning game is started, the timing at which a specific number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is reached, or the timing at which a specific round game (round game at the first round) is completed may be used as the timing for executing the determination. good.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) shows the sound lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM223 of 113 typically. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with a remaining probability variation count area 223ba, a look-ahead flag 223bb, and a remaining variation count counter 223bc with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. It is different in point. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The remaining probability variation count area 223ba is a storage area for storing a variation count at which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. A value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end time processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set in the remaining probability variation number area 223ba (S5604 in FIG. 133). . Then, in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, in the probability changing state. When the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation that can be executed is newly received (S5504; Yes in FIG. 131), the pre-reading process (the information corresponding to the winning information is processed as the special symbol variation executed in the certain variation state). A process for determining whether or not it is included) is executed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then 1 is subtracted from the set value (S5507 in FIG. 131).

  Thus, the probability variation state is set by determining whether or not new winning information can be set as the special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state using the remaining probability variation number area 223ba. It becomes possible to determine whether or not the winning information newly received in the state corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state. Therefore, since the probability variation effect executed during the probability variation state can be set based only on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation performed during the probability variation state, it is possible to enhance the effect effect.

  The pre-reading hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won for the special symbol jackpot, and when set to ON, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b Indicates that winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included.

  The pre-reading hit flag 223bb is determined in the winning jack end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information indicating that the winning jackpot is won. (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). Further, it is determined that the winning information received this time in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131) corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability changing state (S5504: Yes in FIG. 131), Even when it is determined that the winning information includes winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505: Yes in FIG. 131), it is set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

  Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process for probability variation (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and the prefetch flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135), or is set to ON ( Processing is executed so that a different production mode can be set in step S5702 in FIG. 135: Yes).

  The remaining change count counter 223bc is for counting the remaining special figure change count until winning the jackpot, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133). When the winning information includes winning information that wins the jackpot (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), the value corresponding to the number of special symbol changes until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information that wins the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, in the variation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134), when it is determined that the variation display in the certain variation state is set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151 in FIG. 135) is executed. In the case of determining that the special symbol for which the current variation display is set is the previous variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information that is won in the jackpot (the next time will be the jackpot variation) (S5703 in FIG. 135: Yes). ), An effect mode using the probability change effect selection table 222ba is set.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129. The control process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment is the same as the control process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above, instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98). 1 special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol variation stop processing 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) instead of first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control It is different in that the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In the second embodiment described above, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed, and therefore, the detailed description is omitted with reference to the drawings used for the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, portions where the same processing as that of the second embodiment described above is executed are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 125, the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) performed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a bonus in the lottery of FIG. 1, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is the first special in the second embodiment described above. It differs from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) in that the contents of the process executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a jackpot is different. doing. The rest is the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) described above is executed, and the current variation is a jackpot in the process of S406. When it is determined that it is not (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471) is executed, and this process is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of special figure 1 is other than the big win, and it is determined whether or not the small win is won and the determination is made. The process corresponding to the result is executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471), which is one process in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. ). FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471). This special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471) executes a process for displaying a small hit symbol or a missing symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets the second special symbol (special figure 2). It differs from the processing content of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011 in FIG. 41) to be executed in that the target special symbol is changed from special figure 2 to special figure 1.

  In the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S3103). ). Next, the small bonus symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the execution data is not a small hit (displacement) (S3101: No), the outlier of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105) This process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 3 (S277) performed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277). The first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277) is a case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 off stop process (S871) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 off stop process (S871), which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277), will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure stop process (S871). In the special figure 1 off stop process (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a process for starting the small hit game is executed.

  In the special figure 1 removal stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201: Yes), in order to forcibly stop and display the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the fluctuation with the lottery result indicating the detachment, The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

  Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is disengaged and stopped and displayed (S3204). Next, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is turned on. The setting is made (S3207), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to ON (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out) (S3201: No), the present The process ends.

  By configuring in this way, in the case of winning the small win in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1), it is possible to forcibly stop the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 that is changing, so the small hit game It is possible to easily execute a new special figure 2 change during the latent state set at the start timing. In addition, in this 3rd Embodiment, when winning the small hit of special figure 1, the processing which forcibly stops the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out is used. For example, the measurement of the variation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation is interrupted so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed does not progress during the period in which the small hit game is executed. You may do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) is different in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added to the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), when it is determined that the timing of the small hit is started in the process of S2503 (S2503: Yes), that is, the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 is started. In the case of the content indicating that the opening command is set (S2504), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hitting medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the hour / hour counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this process is terminated.

  The third embodiment is configured so that a winning combination can be won for both the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and the second special symbol (Special Figure 2). Only in the case of winning, the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is set to 0 (cleared).

  In other words, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (the state where the value of the hour / short counter 203f is greater than 0), the special winning prize of the special figure 1 (start of the small hitting game based on the special winning prize of the special figure 1) Is set. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be terminated under conditions other than the case where the variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in a state where a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, at any timing (any special symbol lottery), a latent state (a game state advantageous to the player ( It is possible to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol), so that the player can always be motivated to play a game.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (four times). Therefore, the shorter the period from the setting of the probable change state to the winning of the small win in the special drawing 1 is increased, the more the number of special symbols that can be executed in the latent state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game more eagerly.

  In addition, the third embodiment is configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol does not end when the small bonus is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of FIG. 2 is set higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of FIG. 1, in the state where the probability variation state is set, It is possible to suppress a situation where a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2551, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hitting medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in this third embodiment, when a big win is won by a special symbol lottery, the probability change state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol) is always made after the jackpot game ends. Are set for a predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations), and various transition conditions (latent state transition state) for shifting the high probability latent state of the normal symbol to the low probability state during the probability variation state By establishing the above, it is configured to set a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the third embodiment, as the latent probability state transition condition, the first latent probability transition condition that is established when the jackpot is won during the probability variation state, and a predetermined period during which the probability variation state is set (special symbol variation 4). In the case of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special probability transition condition that is established when the final variation is executed and the specific special symbol (first special symbol (special diagram 1)) in the probability variation state And a third latent transition condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring so that the latent state is set under various conditions, it is possible to provide a game that does not get bored for the player.

  Further, each of the plurality of latent probability transition conditions described above is configured such that the period in which the latent probability state is set after establishment is different, and indicates a jackpot when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied. If the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second latent probability transition condition is met, the latent state is displayed during the variation period of the target special symbol variation and during the symbol confirmation period. When the probability state is set and the third latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the probability variation state is determined from the timing at which the target small hit game is executed (the timing at which the first variable winning device 65 is released as the small hit game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol determination period of the special symbol corresponding to the final change of the end is completed.

  By configuring in this way, a game for setting the latent state during the probability changing state is performed, and the game is not intended only for the latent state but is also triggered when the latent state is set. Since the person can be watched, the game can be performed more eagerly.

  In the third embodiment, the symbol determination period of the special symbol is varied according to the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the variable display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is varied according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability variation state is set.

  Specifically, when a special symbol lottery result satisfying the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied, that is, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, the symbol determination period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds depending on the lottery result. It is configured to be set within the range. With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent transition condition has been satisfied (even if a special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed), the symbol determination period set thereafter Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that a long period is set as a period in which the latent state is continuously set.

  In addition, when the second latent probability transition condition described above is satisfied, the latent probability state is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the certain variation state) corresponding to the satisfaction of the second latent probability transition condition. For example, in the final variation in the probability variation state, when the special symbol lottery result is out, the length of the period set as the latent probability state is It is configured to be shorter than the variation time (including the same) of the special figure 2 variation executed during the latent state. With such a configuration, when the final variation of the probability variation state is out of the way, the latent state is temporarily set internally. It is possible to set an unfavorable latent state that is unfavorable for a player who makes it impossible (difficult) to win a winning game.

  When the above-described disadvantageous latent state is set, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is not subjected to an effect mode for notifying that the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed. It is better not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the final variation of the probability variation state, the disadvantageous probability state is set, but for example, the lottery result of the special symbol When a symbol is out of place, a long symbol determination period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big win) is set, or when the special symbol lottery result is out As a variation pattern (variation time) to be selected, it may be possible to set 300 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a latent state that is advantageous to the player even if the big win or the small win is not won during the probability change state, so that the expectation until the end of the probability change state is given. While playing games. Also, by making the set symbol determination period and variation pattern the same as the period (time) that can be set when winning the jackpot, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed after the end of the latent state be able to.

  In the above-described example, in the case where the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol determination period to the same length as the case where the jackpot is won, the special symbol lottery result is The special symbol (the third symbol) may be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the lottery result of the current special symbol is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game willingness during the latent state game is reduced.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the length of the period during which the latent state is set differs depending on the timing at which the first latent state transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, the latent state is configured to be set longer as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the state of probability change increases. Thus, as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probability variation state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol variations that can be executed during the probability variation state decreases, it becomes easier to set a latent probability state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (I want to establish the first latent probability transition condition) or to win the jackpot just before the end of the probability change state. Can be made. In addition, when the big win is won in the final variation of the probability variation state, that is, when both the first latent probability transition condition and the second latent probability transition condition are satisfied by one special symbol variation (lottery). Since the latent state is set from the period when the big hit variation starts, it is possible to provide a longer state latent state.

  In the present embodiment, the delay state is configured so that the latent state is easily set for a long period of time if the first latent state transition condition is delayed, but other than that, a specific number of fluctuations (for example, When the number of fluctuations is an even number, or when the jackpot is won in the third time), the longest latent state may be set, or the first latent state transition condition is established as soon as possible. The latent state may be configured to be easily set for a long period of time.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is a command determination process instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 106), compared to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment described above. 3 (see FIG. 130), jackpot-related processing 3 (see FIG. 132) instead of jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 64), and fluctuation display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 134) instead of fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 69) , And a bonus information related process (see FIG. 131), a jackpot end process (see FIG. 133), and a probability change variation display process (see FIG. 135) are added. Executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 130, the command determination process 3 (S4172) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. The other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the winning information related process (S4271) which is one process in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related process (S4271).

  In the winning information related process (S4271), first, reading of the information indicating the gaming state stored in the state setting area 223j is executed (S5501). Next, in the processing of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read gaming state (that is, the current gaming state) is in the probability change state (S5502). If it is determined that the read gaming state is in the probability change state (S5502: Yes), the value in the remaining probability change count area 223ba is read out (S5503). Next, in the processing of S5503, it is determined whether or not the value of the read residual variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). If it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223ba is greater than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning information received this time has hit information (S5505). If it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the pre-reading winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223ba (S5507), the received winning information command information is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5502 that the read gaming state is not in a probable change (S5502: No), or in the process of S5504, it is determined that the value of the remaining probability change count area 223ba is 0. (S5504: No), a display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the process of S5508 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the jackpot related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related processing 3 (S4552). The jackpot related process 3 (S4552) executes the above-described processing of S4608 or S4611 with respect to the jackpot related process (S4502) in the first embodiment described above, and then executes the jackpot end time process (S4651). It is different in point. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end process (S4651), which is one process in the jackpot related process 3 (S4552), executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S4651).

  In the big jackpot end process (S4651), first, all information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5601). Next, it is determined whether there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the processing of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation set number (n = 4) (S5603). Next, in the process of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual variation count area 223ba (S5604).

  Next, it is determined whether the read information has hit information (S5605). If it is determined that there is winning information in the read information (S5605: Yes), is the winning information corresponding to the next change (that is, the first change executed after the jackpot game is ended) included in the winning information? Is discriminated (S5606). In the process of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next change includes the winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is informed that the latent state is set immediately after the big hit. A special effect mode is set for this purpose (S5607), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next change does not include winning information (S5606: No), the prefetching winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes. The number of special figure fluctuations until this time is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5609), a display ending command including a bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S5605 that there is no information corresponding to the read state (S5605: No), the probability variation set number (n = 4) is set in the remaining variation counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-described S5611. This process is executed and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variation display setting process 3 (S4173) is performed when it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not a latent probability state (S5103) with respect to the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above (S5103). : No), it is different in that the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 135, the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151) which is one process in the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of probability variation display setting processing (S5151). In the variation display setting process for probability change (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is based on the special diagram 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Is set and transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a small hit (S5701). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode that is all bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114 (b) is set (S5709). Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5701 that the current variation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). When it is determined that the prefetching per-flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is 2, that is, whether the remaining variation count is 2 ( S5703). If it is determined that the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next variation is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

  Next, based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of changes, an effect mode is set from the probability change effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is set to OFF (S5706), the remaining probability variation count area 223ba and the remaining variation count counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5710. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5702 that the prefetching per-flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or when it is determined that the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is not 2 in the process of S5703 (S5703: No), an effect mode in which bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is decremented by 1 (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5710.

  Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect mode set in any of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this process is terminated.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. In each of the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) are configured to change at the same time (so-called simultaneous change type), and the game state is latent. A lot of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the lottery (fluctuation) of special figure 2 during the period when the state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set It was configured to be possible.

  The latent state once set is the first latent probability end condition established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to end when any of the second latent end conditions established based on the above is satisfied.

  In the above-described first to third embodiments configured as described above, for example, when the first latent probability end condition is satisfied, the latent probability gaming state (as the first advantageous game advantageous to the player) ( RUSH game) is executed until immediately before the jackpot game that is the second advantageous game is started, so that the player can continuously execute a plurality of different advantageous games. Was able to give satisfaction.

  However, in each of the above-described embodiments, the probability variation state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, and then the latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol). The probability change end condition to be shifted to is configured so that a plurality of types can be set. However, since only the above-described two types are used as the latent probability end conditions to end the latent probability state, There is a problem that the period during which the certain state continues is easily predicted.

  For such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery for shifting (falling) a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state every time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed. (Hereinafter referred to as a falling lottery) is executed, and when the falling lottery is won, a low probability state of a special symbol is set.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to solve the problem that a player can easily predict a period in which a high probability state of a special symbol is continuously set, and this is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. The game can be performed while expecting that the latent state game (RUSH game) will continue for a long time.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, during the period (special figure fluctuation display period) during which the variable display (special figure fluctuation display) for displaying that the jackpot is won in one special symbol is executed, the other symbol Even if the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is invalidated.

  As a result, when the latent probability state is set because the first probability variation termination condition (the probability variation termination condition established based on the jackpot winning) is established, the latent probability state game (RUSH) executed during the latent probability state In the game), the falling lottery can be invalidated, so that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long time.

  On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set because the second probability variation termination condition (the probability variation termination condition established based on the number of changes in the special symbol) is established, the falling lottery is executed during the latent probability state. Therefore, there is a risk that the latent state will end early based on the fact that the falling lottery is won, so the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-described advantageous latent state. The game can be a normal latent state game that is likely to be shorter than the state game.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probability changing state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing four types of game state transition methods set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the game state transition method when winning the falling lottery is added to the game state transition method in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment described above, and each transition The difference is that the element until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied is different from the change of the transition ratio to be transferred at the time of winning the jackpot, and the rest is the same. Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 136, the fourth embodiment is configured to execute a falling lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. When winning, it shifts to the short time state, and when it wins the falling lottery during the latent state, it shifts to the normal state.

  By configuring in this way, in order to set a latent probability state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player, a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition that shifts the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (for example, short-time digestion) is more than the condition that shifts the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (winning the falling lottery) It needs to be established first.

  Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing of the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), so that the player can watch the game content, Can improve the interest of Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the probability variation state and the short-time state, and the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Is configured in a similar manner. Therefore, even if the falling lottery is won before the normal symbol transition condition (the condition for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is established, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow of setting the latent state in the fourth embodiment and the flow of the game in the latent state will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability variation state (when the first probability variation termination condition is satisfied), and FIG. FIG. 6 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the number of time reductions becomes 0 during the probability variation state (when the second probability variation termination condition is satisfied).

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the fourth embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state in the state where the high probability state (probability variation state or latent state) of the special symbol is set. If the lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to is performed every time a lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols is executed, when winning a jackpot during the probability variation state (first probability variation end condition) Is set as a falling lottery invalid period during which the falling lottery is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the second probability variation termination condition is satisfied, the falling lottery is effective even during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) as shown in FIG. 137 (b). Since this is executed, the latent state is shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the falling lottery is won before the special figure 1 change ends. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied, a latent probability state game (RUSH game) that is more advantageous than when the second probability variation end condition is satisfied can be executed.

<About the effect display contents in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect content executed in the first embodiment described above as the effect content executed during the probability change state, the player is suggested (notified) of the opportunity to set the latent state. The difference is that an effect for suggesting (notifying) that a falling lottery was won during the latent state game (RUSH game) is added.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 138 to FIG. 140, the contents of effects added in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set when the second probability variation end condition (reduction of the number of short times) is satisfied. FIG. 138 (b) schematically shows the contents of the performance for suggesting that the latent state game (RUSH game) is set when the first probability variation end condition (big win win) is established. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a) and FIG. 138 (b), in this embodiment, the player is given an opportunity to set the latent state according to the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed when the treasure chest 812 is opened. When the display form “444” is displayed as the production symbol 813, the fact that the second probability variation end condition (reaching the number of short times) has been established is notified, and “ When the display mode of “SUPER RUSH” is displayed, it is configured so as to notify that the first probability variation end condition (big win winning) has been established.

  In the fourth embodiment, the player is notified of the opportunity to set the latent state by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed as the effect result in the probability changing state. Other configurations may be used, and for example, a plurality of display modes with different selection ratios may be provided depending on the type of probability variation end condition established as the display mode of the displayed effect design 813. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which probability change end condition is satisfied.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139 (a), the display contents when winning the falling lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when winning the falling lottery during the latent probability game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is satisfied, and the special symbol lottery start condition is satisfied. The lottery lottery is executed during the period from when the jackpot lottery is executed, that is, before the jackpot lottery is executed.

  Therefore, when winning the falling lottery, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), while the special symbol corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery (Special Fig. 1) is variably displayed, the game with a latent probability state (RUSH game) Is performed to indicate that the new special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed after the falling lottery winning (after the game state has shifted from the latent state to the normal state). In addition, by variably displaying the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 from “right-handed” to “left-handed” while the special symbol (special drawing 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is variably displayed, After the falling lottery win (after the gaming state has shifted from the latent state to the normal state), the new special figure 2 fluctuation is prevented from being executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139 (b), description will be given of the contents of effects executed when a big win is won during a latent state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of effects executed when a big win is won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the effects in the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) which is advantageous to the player in the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the establishment of the first probability variation end condition, the falling that invalidates the falling lottery during the setting period of the latent probability state. The lottery invalid period is set, and the fact that the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) is in progress is displayed on the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of displays is increased, and a comment “Super RUSH” is displayed in the sub display area Ds, indicating that the game is in the advantageous latent state game.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, referring to FIG. 141, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. This is different from the above-described embodiments in that a falling lottery counter C6 used for determining the lottery result of the falling lottery is added.

  The falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in a range of “0 to 239”, and is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (falling lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  The value of the falling lottery counter C6 is referred to in the falling lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON). When it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 is a determination value preliminarily defined in the falling lottery table 202cb, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts (falls) to the low probability state.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in that a jackpot type selection table 202ca is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d, and a lottery lottery. The difference is that a table 202cb is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed, there is an operation content (operation scenario) that always opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). It is different from the first embodiment described above in that it is set. In addition, the first embodiment described above in that the operation content (operation scenario) is set such that at least 5 rounds of the jackpot game are executed as the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won. Is different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in order to make it difficult for a player to know whether a special symbol jackpot or a small jackpot has been won, the contents of operations executed during the jackpot game A jackpot game in which the same action content as the (operation scenario) (concept including a difference that is difficult for the player to discriminate) is executed is defined, and a latent state that is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set. Whereas the timing and the timing to finish are difficult to understand, the fourth embodiment allows the player to easily determine whether the player has won the jackpot or the jackpot (the jackpot game It is configured so that the player can easily discriminate by making the action content different from the action content of the small hit game).

  In this way, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be easily made by allowing the player to easily determine whether the big hit game or the small hit game has been executed. Can be grasped.

  Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the falling lottery table 202cb. The falling lottery table 202cb is a data table in which the determination value of the above-described falling lottery counter C6 is stored. The value of the falling lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is any one specified in the fall lottery table 202cb. Is set so as to shift to a low probability state of a special symbol (if it falls).

  More specifically, four determination values “43, 107, 195, and 222” are defined as determination values that are determined to fall in the high probability state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in a range of “0 to 239”. Of the 240 values that the falling lottery counter C6 can take, there are four judgment values that are determined to be falling, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the special symbol probability variation state Is 1/60 (4/240).

  In the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 6/480 (see FIG. 15A), and the winner is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the lottery. Is set to be 221/480 (see FIG. 15B). That is, the probability of winning the falling lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. In other words, the fourth embodiment is configured so that winning is easy in the order of small hits, falls, and big hits in a state in which the latent state is set.

  Note that the winning ratios of the big win, the small hit, and the falling in the high probability state of the special symbol are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the easiness of winning may be varied. For example, the probability of falling (probability of winning a falling lottery) is set lower than the probability of winning a jackpot, and it is configured to repeatedly enjoy the jackpot game and the small hit game during the latent state until the winning of the fall. It is also possible to set the small hit probability and the fall probability to be almost the same (for example, small hit probability 1/3, fall probability 1/4), and a special symbol lottery will be performed during the latent state. It is good also as the game nature which makes a player throbbing every time. Also, a special symbol lottery can be executed in a state in which the latent probability state is set only when the fall probability is set to a high value (for example, ½) and only the first fall lottery does not fall. good.

  Note that in the fall lottery table 202cb in the present embodiment, only a determination value for determining whether or not a special symbol has a high probability state is defined, and a determination value for a special symbol low probability state is defined. It has not been. It is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low probability state.

  In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery table 202cb and the regularly updated falling lottery counter C6 are compared to shift from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall down). ) Or not. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) to normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be made random. . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends during the latent state game (RUSH game) that is performed during the period in which the latent state is set.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not to shift (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol has been lottered (determination), but it is determined by lottery (determination) to shift to another state ) For example, whether or not to shift from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state of the normal symbol may be determined by a lottery (special symbol lottery) executed for each variation of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to randomize how long a normal symbol's high probability state lasts. Therefore, the probability variation state (a special symbol's high probability state, a normal symbol's high probability state) is changed to a latent state (a special symbol's high probability state). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of transition to the low probability state of a normal symbol. Therefore, during the period when the probability variation state is set, it is possible to always play a game while expecting the latent probability state to be set. In addition, for example, it may be configured so that whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol can be drawn.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted. This indicates that the parameter update is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is skipped.

  This state update restriction flag 203ca is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S406 in FIG. 147). :)), or when it is determined that the lottery of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is won in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) (S1006: Yes in FIG. 150) ) Is set to ON (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

  Further, it is referred to in the game state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S651 in FIG. 149: Yes), the time counter 203f The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (number of times reduced) corresponding to the condition for shifting the gaming state is skipped. If it is determined in the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148) that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 148: Yes), it is set to OFF. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, in the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151), when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), it is also turned off. It is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

  In other words, in the fourth embodiment, when a big win is won in any of a plurality of special symbols (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol won in the big win During the period in which the change display is executed, the gaming state is not changed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145 (a). FIG. 145 (a) shows the sound lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of 113 MPU221. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment in that a latent mode selection table 222ca and a drop notification selection table 222cb are provided. doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The latent mode selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when selecting a production mode (latency mode) of a production (latent production) for notifying the player that a latent state has been set. . The latent mode selection table 222ca includes a plurality of performance modes in association with a timing of setting a latent accuracy state (a chance of winning a big hit, a time-shortened number of times (missing time)) and a mode setting effect counter 223ca described later. The production mode) is defined, and the player can be instructed of the opportunity to set the latent state according to the production mode of the selected latent production.

  Next, detailed contents defined in the latent probability mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the current latent state is the big hit latent state, the acquired value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca is obtained. “Invincible mode” is defined in the range of “0 to 49”, “Normal mode B” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”, and “Normal mode A” is defined in the range of “90 to 99” ing.

  Then, when the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the current latent state is the short-running latent state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca is “0 to 49”. “Normal mode A” is defined in the range, “normal mode B” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”, and “normal mode B” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  The fall notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) that the player has won the fall lottery, and the time-short state (normal probability high probability state) continues. The notification mode is selected on the basis of the value of the remaining short time count area 223k indicating the remaining period and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

  The fourth embodiment is executed by the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state and when the time-short state is set. The various display modes are configured to be the same. With this configuration, the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is a probabilistic change state or a short time state. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment executes a lottery lottery, so that the probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol high probability state) is set at a random timing in a state where the probability variation state is set. A state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set.

  When the probability variation state is set and the normal symbol high probability state shifts to the low probability state, the gaming state transitions from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, and the latent state advantageous to the player is obtained. When a certain state game (RUSH game) is executed, and the short time state is set, and the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, the game state is changed from the short time state to the normal state. Transition to the state.

  Here, specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (c). FIG. 146 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146 (c), this fall notification selection table 222cb associates the remaining short number of times (information in the remaining short number of times area 223k) with the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf at the time of winning the fall. Thus, a notification mode is defined.

  Specifically, the timing of winning the fall is when the remaining short number of times is 0 (when the information stored in the remaining short number of times area 223k indicates the remaining short number of times 0), that is, a high probability of a normal symbol When the falling lottery is won due to the fluctuation that the state ends, “definite notification” is defined regardless of the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf. When the falling winning timing is 1 to 49, that is, when more than half of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set has passed, the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf “Suggested notification” is defined in the range of “0 to 49” or “90 to 99”, and “Confirmed notification” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”. When the remaining short time is 50 to 98, that is, when more than half of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains, the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is “0 to 89”. “Suggested notification” is defined in the range of “90”, and “Confirmed notification” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  Here, when “confirmed notification” is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode in which the player can easily grasp that the falling lottery has been won, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has fallen. A notification mode is set for performing a display indicating the effect (for example, “unfortunately”) or notifying that the winning lottery is won by the sound or the emission color of the decorative member.

  In addition, when “suggestion notification” is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, “pinch” display) is set to notify the player that there is a possibility of winning the falling lottery. . Although detailed explanation is omitted, the “suggestion notification” is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the falling lottery is not won. By configuring in this way, the “suggestion notification” is executed both when the winning lottery is actually won and when the falling lottery is not won.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the mode of notification (implying) effect of whether or not the falling lottery has been won is set as a remaining period (short remaining time) in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is continuously set. It is configured so as to be set on the basis of (period), and it is configured such that the “definite notification” is less likely to be set as the remaining short period is longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player knows that the lottery has been won in a state where the remaining short period is long, and the gaming motivation during the remaining short period is reduced.

  In addition, the setting frequency of the “suggestion notification” that is set when the falling lottery is not won may be configured to vary based on the length of the remaining short period. For example, the longer the remaining short period, the more the falling It may be configured so that “suggestion notification” is easily set in a state where the lottery is not won. As a result, it is possible to vary the possibility of actually winning the falling lottery when “suggesting notification” is executed based on the length of the remaining short-term, so “suggesting notification” is executed. The game can be played during the short period of time while making the player predict whether or not the falling lottery will be won while discriminating between the frequency (number of times) played and the short time of the remaining time. it can.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145 (b). FIG. 145 (b) shows the sound lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM223 of MPU221 of 113. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above in the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent probability mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits. The difference is that a counter 223 cc, a fall flag 223 cd, a time-shortage notification flag 223 ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223 cf are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting the latent mode using the latent mode selection table 222ca. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The latent mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the currently set latent mode, and stores (sets) the latent mode determined in the latent mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to (see S5171 in FIG. 159) in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and a display variation pattern command is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and a display variation pattern command is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). Information (latent probability mode information) stored (set) in this latent probability mode storage area 223cb is determined when the gaming state has shifted to the normal state in state command processing 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153). (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

  The small hit number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won during the latent state. The small hit number counter 223cc receives a small hit start command in the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) during the latent state. When received, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small hits won in the latent state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, the small hit count display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit count counter 223cc, and the small hit count is displayed during the period when the latent state is set. When the number of wins reaches a predetermined number (multiple of 10), the remaining time in the latent state is displayed.

  The falling flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the falling lottery has been won during the probability variation state, and is set to ON to indicate that the falling lottery has been won.

  The time-shortage notification flag 223ce wins the falling lottery during the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) and shifts to short time state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol). And a flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (effect executed when final notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) is executed to notify the player of the fact that The fall notification effect is set by being set to ON.

  The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting a fall lottery notification mode using the fall notification selection table 222cb. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is a first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in place of the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. In place of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see FIG. 148), the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 40) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), the second special symbol variation stop processing It is different in that the second special symbol variation stopping process 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 147, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) shifts from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, compared to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above ( It is different in that a process of executing a lottery for determining whether or not to fall is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on (S481). If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), the process is terminated because the second special symbol jackpot is being executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probability variation is in progress (S482). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off, that is, the probability variation is not being performed (S482: No), the processing proceeds to S404.

  On the other hand, in the process of S482, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, when it is determined that the probability variation is being performed (S482: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the falling lottery table 202cb. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery counter C6 matches any determination value (random value) defined in the falling lottery table 202cb (that is, a value corresponding to a fall) (S484). ), When it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S484 that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 matches one of the determination values (random values) defined in the falling lottery table 202cb (a value corresponding to a fall) ( S484: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF, thereby shifting (falling) from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, a fall command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the special symbol has changed from the probability variation state to the low probability state of the special symbol (falling) (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S406 that the data in the current execution area is a big hit (S406: Yes), after executing the processes of S407 to S411, the state update restriction flag 203ca. Is set to ON (S487), and this process ends.

  By executing the special symbol variation start process 4 (S386), it is possible to easily execute a lottery for determining whether to shift (fall) to a low probability state of the special symbol and a lottery for determining whether the special symbol is a big hit. be able to. In the present embodiment, as the order of processing in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the lottery (falling lottery) on whether to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol first is executed, and then the special symbol jackpot The lottery of whether or not to be performed is configured to be executed, but the processing order is not limited to this. The lottery lottery may be performed first before the falling lottery is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287). In the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287), after executing the processing of S801 to S805 with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above, the state update restriction flag 203ca is set. The difference is that a process of setting off (S871) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the gaming state update process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) is different from the game state update process (S308) in the first embodiment described above in that a process (S651) for determining whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on is added. Is different. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the game state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S651, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S651: No), the process proceeds to S601.

  Then, after executing the processing of S601 to S604, it is determined in the processing of S605 whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, whether or not the probability change is in progress) (S605). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on (S652). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652: Yes), a state command indicating a jackpot latent state is set (S653), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S652 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is not on (S652: No), a status command indicating a short time missing latent state is set (S654), and this processing is terminated. .

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) shifts from the special symbol probability change state to the special symbol low probability state in contrast to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above ( It is different in that a process of executing a lottery for determining whether or not to fall is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, referring to FIG. 147, with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) described above, a process of changing the target of the symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is performed. Since it is only executed, its detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 4 (S293) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 in 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S293). In the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S293), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set after executing S1501, S1503 to S1506 with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process (S213) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a process of setting to OFF (S1571) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 4 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), compared to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (Refer to FIG. 152) The difference is that the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 152, the command determination process 4 (S4182) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4182). The command determination process 4 (S4182), when it is determined that the status command is received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4203 with respect to the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above (S4203: No), and is different in that status command processing 4 (S4281) is executed instead of status command processing (S4204). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the state command process 4 (S4281), which is one process in the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the status command process 4 (S4281). The state command process 4 (S4281) determines whether or not a command related to a fall has been received in that a latent mode setting process (S4451) is added to the state command process (S4204) in the first embodiment described above. It is different in that processing is added. Other processes are the same as the state command process (S4204) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the status command process 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a status command indicating a shift to the latent status (S4403: Yes), a latent mode setting process (S4451) is executed. Details of the latent mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a status command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: No), a fall command is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether it has been received (S4452). If it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), a fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the fall effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4452 that a fall command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406 to S4411, the latent mode storage area 223cb, the small hit count counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the time-notification flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, a latent mode setting process (S4451) which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. . FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent mode setting process (S4451).

  In the latent mode setting process (S4451), first, the status command type received from the main controller 110 is read (S5801). Next, based on the received status command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode is determined using the latent mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146 (b)) (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, a display latent mode command corresponding to the determined latent mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent mode is set in the latent mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, a latent notification effect that notifies the entry of the latent state is set (S5805), a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this process is terminated. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a fall effect setting process (S4453) which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall effect setting process (S4453).

  In the fall effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5901). If it is determined that the current gaming state is a latent state (S5901: Yes), a latent notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main controller 110 The value corresponding to the gaming state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then the remaining short number of times is 99 or more, that is, the remaining short number of times area 223k. It is determined whether the value stored in is equal to or greater than 99 (S5904). When it is determined that the remaining short time count is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), a short time notification effect for notifying the entry of the short time state is set (S5905), and the short time notification completed flag 223ce is set to ON (S5906). . On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5904 that the remaining short time count is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processes of S5905 and S5906 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5907. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this process ends. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small hit related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 4 (S4574). The small hit related process 4 (S4574) is different from the small hit related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying remaining time information is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the small hit related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received from the main controller 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state. (S4751). When it is determined that the current gaming state is a latent state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit number counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is read (S4754). A display time information command indicating the remaining time information is set (S4755), then a display small hitting start command is set (S4702), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4751 that it is not in the latent state (S4751: No), or when it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 in the process of S4753 ( S4753: No), the process of S4702 is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variable display setting process 4 (S4183) is different from the variable display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above in place of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104). 4 (S5171), it is different in that the fluctuation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) is executed instead of the fluctuation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), and the fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the fluctuation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is a latent state (S5103: Yes), the special figure 1 variation display setting process 4 (S5171) is executed, and the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). Details of the special display variation display setting process 4 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether or not the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), a fall notification process (S5173) is executed. Details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S5105), and the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S5106. Next, the process performed on the special figure 1 of S5171 to S5173 is executed by changing the target to the special figure 2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 158, the fall notification process (S5173) which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

  In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction notification flag 223ce is on (S8001). If it is determined that the time-notified flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a display probability variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this processing is performed. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-shortage notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information of the remaining short-time count area 223k is read (S8002). Next, a fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb based on the remaining short time read in the process of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is a fixed notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that it is a definite notification mode (S8004: Yes), the time reduction notification flag 223ce is set off (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set off (S8006). Next, a time-notification effect for notifying the entry of a time-short state is set (S8007), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S8004 that the determined notification mode is not the fixed notification mode (S8004: No), a display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( S8008), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171). The special figure 1 variation display setting process 4 (S5171) is executed in the process of S5206 after executing the processes of S5201 to S5205 with respect to the special figure 1 variation display setting process (S5104) in the first embodiment described above. Instead, the latent probability mode stored in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is read (S5251), and the first special symbol display latent variation pattern command is executed based on the extracted variation pattern and latent probability mode. Is different in that the process of setting (S5252) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation display setting process 4 (S5175). The variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) executes the process of S5301 to S5308 with respect to the fluctuation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) in the first embodiment described above, and then performs the process of S5309. Instead, the latent-accuracy mode stored in the latent-accuracy mode storage area 223cb is read (S5351), and based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent-accuracy mode, a display-specific latent variation pattern command is displayed. Is different in that the process of setting (S5352) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration for performing the falling lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state based on the lottery result for each of the first embodiments described above. Therefore, in a state where a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, at what timing time short state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to move to.

  In addition, if the winning lottery is won during the probabilistic state and a transition is made to the short-time state, the game state is advantageous to the player (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) Since it is difficult to make a transition (it is harder to make the transition than the probability variation state), once the probability variation state is set, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set However, the game can be performed while being thrilled not to win the falling lottery before.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the same game method (left-handed game) is performed when the probability variation state is set and when the short-time state is set, It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the gaming state is a probabilistic change state or a short-time state.

  Also, in the fourth embodiment, immediately after the probability variation state is set (for example, the first special symbol variation), if the falling lottery is won, the player is notified that the probability variation state has been set. Without being configured, since it is configured to execute the production mode (time-shortage notification production) that makes it appear as if the short-time state has been set from the beginning (after the jackpot), there is another possibility that the latent state is set. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an unpleasant feeling that the probability variation state higher than the gaming state has ended in a short period of time.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, an effect (suggestion notification) that suggests to the player that the winning lottery has been won during the probability variation state, and an effect (notification notification) that notifies the player that the falling lottery has been won. ) Can be executed, and the selection ratio between the suggestion notification and the final notification is made different based on the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations that can be set with the probability variation state continuously. Specifically, it is configured such that the definite notification is less likely to be executed as the remaining number of fluctuations in the probability variation state increases. Thereby, it can be recognized that the player has recognized the transition from the probability variation state to the short-time state in a state in which a large number of remaining fluctuations remain, and the player's willingness to play can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, the effect that performs the suggestion notification is configured to be executed even when the falling lottery is not won.

  In the present embodiment, the player is configured to determine whether the current gaming state is a probable change state or a short-time state by the above-described suggestion notification or confirmation notification. Other configurations may be used. For example, a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the probability variation state, or a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the short-time state. It may be configured to allow the player to predict the current gaming state according to the variation pattern of the special symbol that is provided and executed. In this case, the content of the variation pattern dedicated to the probability variation state and the variation pattern dedicated to the short-time state are not greatly different from each other. For example, the variation pattern may be provided with an error that varies by one second. Thereby, since the player can be notified of the current gaming state by an error of the fluctuation display time of a slightly uncomfortable degree, it is possible to make the player pay attention with a strong awareness of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be executed. Further, in this case, it is preferable to use 1 second of the error for a period until the third symbol variation is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example. However, the player can be notified of the current gaming state due to a slightly uncomfortable feeling that is slower or faster than usual.

  In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of the falling lottery associated with the other special symbol variation (lottery) is invalidated during the period when the jackpot variation is executed in one special symbol. . As a result, for example, the first special probability transition condition established based on the jackpot winning in FIG. 1 is established, so that the second special is not won in the falling lottery during the period when the latent probability state is set. It becomes possible to continue receiving lottery of symbols (special drawing 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent state that is more advantageous (easy to continue for a long time) than the latent state set by the establishment of other latent state transition conditions.

  In addition, in this 4th Embodiment, when special symbol fluctuation | variation (lottery) is performed, it is comprised so that a fall lottery may be performed collectively. That is, the falling lottery is executed when the execution condition of the special symbol variation (lottery) is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific entrance (for example, the first entrance) That the ball has entered the ball entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the general winning entrance 63), that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and that the execution condition for the normal symbol variation (lottery) has been established, The special symbol or the normal symbol may be the stop display timing, or the elapsed timing of the symbol determination period may be used as the trigger for the falling lottery, or if the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) execution condition is met, It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute, and to execute the falling lottery based on the determination result. Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to know at which timing the falling lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily perceiving the timing of winning the falling lottery.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the falling lottery is executed, the presence / absence of the falling is determined with the same probability every time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easy to fall in the falling lottery (winning It may be configured to provide a high probability state (easy) and a low probability state that is difficult to fall (it is difficult to win). In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability variation state and a low probability variation state are provided as probability variation states set after the end of the jackpot. In the high probability variation state, a low probability state of the falling lottery is set, and the low probability variation is set. In the state, a high probability state of falling lottery may be set. Further, the falling lottery state (high probability state, low probability state) may be varied based on the number of special symbol changes (lottery) executed after the probability variation state is set. The predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 10) after the state is set is configured such that a high probability state of the falling lottery that is easy to win the falling lottery is set, and then a low probability state of the falling lottery is set. May be.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a period during which it is easy to fall from a probable change state and a period during which it is difficult to perform, so that it is possible to provide a game with a sharpness for the player. Further, in the present embodiment, when winning the falling lottery, it is configured to execute the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. You may perform the process which transfers a high probability state to a low probability state. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the falling lottery is won, the special symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state. For example, the special symbol high probability state is changed to the medium probability state (the jackpot probability is high). The state may be configured to shift to a state that is lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state, and the medium probability state may be configured so as not to be transferred unless a falling lottery is won.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. In 4th Embodiment mentioned above, it comprised so that the fall lottery for changing the high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state (for falling) might be performed. By configuring in this way, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues can be varied according to the lottery result of the falling lottery. The game could be played while expecting to continue.

  However, in the configuration of the above-described fourth embodiment, since the falling lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player determines whether or not the falling lottery is executed by his / her own intention. There was a possibility that it could not be selected, resulting in a decrease in game motivation. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a winning device (a variable winning prize for small hits) that allows a ball to be won during a small hitting game executed when the lottery result of a special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result (small winning). Device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that a sphere has passed in a region (flow path) through which the sphere winning in the small winning variable winning device 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. A falling gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) to be transferred is provided.

  With this configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability of a normal symbol) in which a small hit game is frequently executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery. In the state), it is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player fires during the small hit game.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is different depending on the type (small hit type) when winning the small hit, Depending on the opening operation pattern to be performed, the ratio of the balls that have won the small hitting variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game passes through the fall gate 2650e3 is different.

  By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the special symbol high probability state from falling down and to perform a game aiming to acquire a privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. The game can be selected by the player.

  In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot variation, the other special symbol variation (lottery) is won in the small win Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is not shifted to the low probability state.

  As a result, in the state in which the latent state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult), and the high probability state of the special symbol is more likely to fall than the advantageous latent state. It is possible to set an unfavorable latency state.

<About the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 164. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), and the first variable winning device 65 is replaced. In addition, a point winning variable winning device 2650 is provided, and a winning device (small winning winning variable device 2650) that is opened during the small hitting game is provided upstream of the second entrance 640. Is different.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 161, the structure of the game board 13 of this 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. In the right area of the game board 13, a small winning variable winning device 2650 is provided. The small winning variable winning device 2650 includes a plurality of flow paths (a flow path for dropping a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state, a low probability state of a special symbol high probability state) The winning ball is made to flow down a different flow path according to the timing at which the ball wins the small winning variable winning device 2650.

  The internal structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650 will be described in detail. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the small winning variable winning device 2650.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is combined with an opening forming member 2650 b that protrudes from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650 b, A base member 2650c for screwing the variable prize winning device 2650 to the game board 13, and an LED is lit from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c. LED board 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 2650e holding the LED board 2650d with the base member 2650c, and a small winning prize opening (small hits) formed in the opening forming member 2650b Opening / closing unit 2650f having an opening / closing door 2650f1 for opening / closing 2650a A channel cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a channel and a channel formed by the back cover body 2650e and the channel cover body 2650g project to switch the channel of the game ball. The switching member 2650h, the link member 2650i locked to the switching member 2650h, the back cover body 2650j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, and fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j, A flow path solenoid 2650k that operates the link member 2650i and a fixing cover body 2650m that covers the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 2650j with screws.

  FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the small winning variable winning device 2650. FIG. 163 (c) is a top view of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and FIG. 163 (b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the small winning variable winning device 2650. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the small winning variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small winning winning port (small winning winning port) 2650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163 (b). A bottom surface that is inclined to the lower left is formed. A detection port 2650a1 configured with a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the opening of the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a can be entered by an opening / closing door 2650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side. Between the open state and the closed state where it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1, and the upper part of the opening / closing door is configured to be able to roll. In the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13) by retreating from the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a. ing.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the second winning ball It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (in the latent state), the ball can enter the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to the left-handed game during the latent state where the small hit game is frequently executed. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the small hitting variable prize winning device 2650, so that more gaming balls can be efficiently put into the small hitting prize opening (small (Winning winning opening) 2650a can be awarded. Therefore, during the small hit game, the ball can be awarded to the reliable variable game device 2650 for small hits, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 163 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 163 (b). As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration in which spheres guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 2650e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and a special discharge flow path 2650e2, which will be described later.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 for guiding a sphere. It is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the sphere guided from the detection port 2650a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged obliquely to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 2650e2. . The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down the fall route through which the inflowing sphere passes the fall gate (falling switch) 2650e3 and the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2, and the second normal gate (second 2 normal switch) 2650e6, and a fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 that can detect the passage of the sphere flowing into the special discharge flow path 2650e2. Then, it is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the fall switch 2650e3 described above detects a ball during the small hit game, that is, when the ball passes through the fall route, The high probability state is configured to shift (fall) to the low probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. Further, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through a fall gate (falling switch) 2650e3 or a fall as a flow path of a ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hit. This is for setting any flow path (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot pass through the gate (falling switch) 2650e3 (normal discharge flow path 2650e1), and by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164 (a)).

  In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow solenoid 2650k is set to OFF during normal play, and the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 has the special discharge flow channel 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, when an illegal state in which the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small winning variable prize-winning device 2650 is opened and the ball is won in spite of the fact that the small hitting game is not being executed is detected, It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

  In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF is maintained for a long time in the pachinko machine 10, and the flow path configuration that is disadvantageous to the player (the small winning variable winning device 2650) (A flow path configuration in which a winning ball can pass through the fall switch 2650e3) can reduce the power used by the pachinko machine 10, and can impose a penalty on a game in which an illegal game is played.

  In this way, it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is ended by the flow down route through which the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 flows down during the small hit game, so that even during the small hit game Can improve the interest of the elderly. In order to pass through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) from the small winning prize winning port (small winning prize winning port) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650. The required time is at least 1 second.

  In addition, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 2650e1. Thus, whether or not all the winning balls are discharged into the small winning variable winning device 2650 can be determined by the total number of detected balls of the normal switch 2650e4, the second fall switch 2650e6, and the fall switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls won in the small winning variable winning device 2650) and various switches provided in the three discharge areas (normal switch 2650e4, second fall switch 2650e6, fall switch) 2650e3) is compared with the number of balls detected (number of balls discharged from the small winning variable winning device 2650) to determine whether or not a ball remains in the small winning variable winning device 2650. can do.

  Note that the end timing of the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game (when the predetermined number (10) of winnings for the small hit variable winning device 2650 has been won or the opening scenario of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is In the case where all the game balls that have entered the small hitting variable winning device 2650 are not discharged at the timing at which the small hitting ending period is executed after the establishment) is established, the variable for small hitting is variable. It may be configured to determine that there is an abnormality inside the winning device 2650 and to notify the outside of the abnormality, or to stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. Thereby, it can suppress that a game advances in the state in which abnormality has generate | occur | produced in some pachinko machines 10, and secondary abnormality will generate | occur | produce.

  In this way, the ball that has won the small hitting winning opening (small winning winning opening) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650a is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, the winning ball (book) In the embodiment, 10 winning balls are paid out for one ball winning, and the detected ball (passed through the ball winning switch 2650c1) is used to pass the ball through the fall switch 2650e3. By configuring so as to be able to distribute whether or not, it is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small hit game. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated area for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state separately from the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165 and FIG. 166, the flow of the game in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 165, a description will be given of the flow of the game when winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, if the winning change is set in the lottery of FIG. 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set as in the fourth embodiment described above, the latent probability is changed during the jackpot fluctuation. The state is set (see FIG. 165 (a)). Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), by performing the right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured such that a frequently executed latent state game (RUSH game) is executed.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot variation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result) Is configured so that the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2). As a result, during the jackpot variation period of one special symbol (for example, Special Figure 1), the winner of the other special symbol (for example, Special Figure 2) will be won, and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol By starting the big hit game, it is possible to prevent the period during which the latent state is set from being shortened. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state game (RUSH game) is reliably performed during the latent state setting period (for example, the big hit fluctuation time in FIG. 1) that is set in advance when the latent state is set. ) Can be executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where a high probability state of a special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery The period until the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes the fall switch 2650e3 in the small winning variable winning device 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. And a period that does not shift (fall invalid period).

  Therefore, when the latent state is set during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 winning the jackpot, since the special figure 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period, the high probability state of the special symbol ends. A latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed without concern. Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set based on the jackpot winning in FIG. 1 (the latent probability state is set based on the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) to notify the player.

  By configuring to execute this invincible effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible to easily grasp that the falling invalid period is set in the currently set latent state, It is possible to play a latent state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Further, the fifth embodiment is configured such that the above-described invincible effect is not executed even in the latent state where the fall invalid period is set. By configuring in this way, in the latent state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalid period may actually be set. When the winning variable winning device 2650 is awarded, the falling rate can be reduced.

  When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed (see FIG. 165 (b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, when the small hit game is being executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game ends. By comprising in this way, it can suppress providing a game incomprehensible to a player because a big hit game is started during execution of a small hit game.

  The game state (normal state) that is the same as that during the jackpot game is set during the interruption period from when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot change shown in FIG. 165 elapses until the jackpot game is started. In the fifth embodiment, when the bonus game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot change has elapsed, the start of the jackpot game is suspended (postponed until the bonus game ends) However, it is only necessary to control so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time. For example, the special hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation has elapsed. In such a case, the small hit game being executed may be forcibly terminated.

  In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment as well, as in each of the embodiments described above, one of the special symbols (special drawing 2) is won and the bonus game is executed. During the period, the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol (Special Fig. 1) is interrupted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) set based on the jackpot winning of special figure 1 is set as the fall invalid period, a special symbol is given to the player. It is possible to entertain the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the end of the high probability state. Further, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the preset number of times is shortened in the state where the probability variation state is set as the game state. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time reductions are consumed during the probability change state.

  As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the subtraction of the time reduction number is performed at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the value of the counter (time reduction counter 203f) for continuously setting the time reduction state is When it becomes 0, the latent state is set from the fluctuation of the special figure 1 to be executed (see FIG. 166 (a)). In addition, as shown in FIG. 166, the latent probability state set by digesting a predetermined number of times is configured so that the falling lottery during the latent probability state period is effectively determined. Therefore, there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol is terminated by the ball that is won by the variable winning device (variable winning device 2650 for small hits) in the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH). There will be an unfavorable latency state.

<Regarding the contents of effects executed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, characteristic effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that the effects described in each of the above-described embodiments have been described with respect to the effects that are executed during the probability change state in order to suggest whether or not the latent state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Since it is the same as an aspect, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), description will be made on the contents of effects displayed when winning a small hit in a state where the latent state is set. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when winning a small hit in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is variably displayed is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Is displayed with a display mode ("341") indicating that the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) has been won in a small win. In the guidance display area Dm3, “right-handed” for guiding the gaming method in the latent state is displayed.

  The main display area Dm is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the character 811 has won a small hit, and a character “GET” is displayed. In the sub display area Ds, a comment “start a small hit game” indicating that a small hit game is started is displayed.

  When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167 (b) is displayed. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during the small hit game. According to the diagram shown in FIG. 167 (b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 has the same display mode as that of FIG. 167 (a) described above, that is, a display showing that the special figure 1 is variably displayed. Although the mode is displayed, in practice, the subtraction of the variation time in FIG. 1 is interrupted during the small hit game. Note that, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state in which special figure 1 is appropriately displayed in a variable state (the state in which the fluctuation time is subtracted) and the fluctuation display in special figure 1 are interrupted. The display state displayed in the special figure 1 display region Dm1 may be different from the state in which the change time is not subtracted.

  In the main display area Dm, an effect mode is displayed in which the character 811 runs from the left to the right and the treasure chest 812 appears from the traveling direction. In the present embodiment, an effect of opening the treasure chest 812 displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is executed during the small hit game, and the small display of this time depends on the display mode of the effect symbol 813 that appears from the treasure chest 812. The player is informed of the winning game result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168 (a) and FIG. 168 (b), display contents for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 (a) shows the display contents when the fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball and the high probability state of the special symbol is ended as a result of winning the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game. FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 168 (b) shows the display contents when the fall switch 2650e3 does not detect the ball as a result of winning the ball by the variable winning device for small hitting 2650 during the small hitting game. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example.

  In FIG. 168 (a), an effect symbol 813 indicating “X” is displayed from the treasure chest 812, and the character 811 indicates that the high probability state of the special symbol has shifted to the low probability state during the small hit game. The failure display mode shown in FIG. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment is displayed that guides that the latent state game (RUSH game) ends and the game method returns to the left-handed game. In other words, the game state is latent by changing the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the latent state of the RUSH game (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol). In order to shift from the state to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), a comment for the left-handed game to be executed is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (b), an effect design 813 indicating "V" is displayed from the treasure chest 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the RUSH game is continuously executed (ie, left Character 811 is displayed in a display mode of running from right to left.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) only by grasping the contents of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the ball that has won the small hitting variable prize winning device 2650 during the small hit game according to the type of the small hit game executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is the probability change switch 2650e3. The ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with is made different.

  Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of winning the small win shown in FIG. 167 (a), the player selects whether or not to allow the small winning game variable winning device 2650 to win a ball in this small hit game. To display a comment (for example, “RUSH ends if bad luck and bad luck”, “Stop launching if you are uneasy”), and a character displayed when winning a small hit The display mode of 811 may be configured to vary depending on whether or not the winning type that has been won this time is a small hit that is likely to end the latent state game (RUSH game).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to allow the small hitting variable winning device 2650 to win a ball during the small hitting game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent state is set only for a predetermined period (see Fig. 1 variation time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent state is limited. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game while thinking about whether to acquire a privilege (prize ball) during a small hit game or to avoid the end of a latent state game (RUSH game). Can provide sex.

  Further, the player may be informed of the type of the small hit game being executed by the display mode of the treasure chest 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hit game shown in FIG. 167 (b). Well, for example, it is better to configure so that the older tatter type 812 is displayed as the small hit type that is likely to end the latent state game (RUSH game) is displayed. It is good to comprise so that the comment according to the display mode of the treasure chest 812 may be displayed. Furthermore, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content that suggests the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation) won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It may be configured to notify the player of the contents (high reliability).

  With this configuration, for a player who has selected whether or not to allow the small hitting variable winning device 2650 to win a ball in this small hitting game based on the display screen displayed at the time of winning the small hitting. Since a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree can be shown, it is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not the game content selected for the player is correct.

  In this case, in particular, it is emphasized that a player who has chosen not to win the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end even if the ball is won. It may be configured to be able to be notified. Specifically, the small hitting type discriminating means for determining the type of the small hitting game this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hitting variable prize winning device 2650 during a predetermined period after the small hitting game is started. (Or means for determining that a right-handed game has been executed after winning a small win), and the determination result by the small hit type determining means is a small hit type that makes it difficult for the RUSH game to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won the small hitting variable prize winning device 2650 for a predetermined period after the start of the small hitting game, this small hitting game is more advantageous when the ball is launched. It is preferable to provide a display means for displaying a scolding comment (for example, “should have fired a ball”, “sissy”) indicating that it has been acquired.

  As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the player that he / she has lost the ball by not allowing the variable game winning device 2650 for small hits to win the ball, so that the small hit game is positively used during the small hit game. The variable winning device 2650 can be prompted to win a ball. In other words, if the RUSH game is ended by winning the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650, it is determined that the selection has failed with the game result even if the RUSH game is not executed. Although the player can be aware, the player who has made a selection that does not allow the small winning variable prize-winning device 2650 to win a ball cannot recognize whether or not the selection result of this time was advantageous. By displaying the evaluation, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether or not the current selection is successful.

  Further, a display mode for notifying a player who has selected not to win a ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 that the current small hitting type is a small hitting type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. (For example, “Stop firing, correct answer”, “I think you are good”) or even if the small hit type this time is a small hit type where RUSH games are easy to end, This small hit game may display a scolding comment (for example, “should have fired the ball”, “sissy”) indicating that the bonus could be obtained by firing the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display contents of the effect for informing that the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) in which the falling invalid period is set will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent state. As shown in FIG. 169, in the case where the currently set latent state is an advantageous latent state in which a fall invalid period is set, the same latent mode setting process (FIG. 154) as in the fourth embodiment described above. When the invincible mode is set as the current latent probability mode in S4451), an effect mode ("invincible mode") indicating that the latent state currently set for the player is an advantageous latent state. ) Is displayed.

  When entering the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is wrapped around). Then, “Lucky point × 0” is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 of the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (a command indicating the number of falls if no fall invalid period is set). A number is displayed. Thereby, the situation where the invincible mode worked favorably for the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Although not shown in the diagram of FIG. 169, the small hit count display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment described above may be displayed. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. Further, the non-game number measuring means for measuring the number of small hit games in which the player has not won the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the number of times measured by the non-game number measuring means are displayed on the display means. You may comprise so that it may do.

  By configuring in this way, for example, for all the small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games that the player executed the game, and the player playing the game Since it is possible to easily grasp the number of small hit games that have not been executed, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<About the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in that a small hitting type selection 5 table 202da is provided instead of the small hitting type selection table 202e. The difference is that an operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is won in the small win, and when the small win is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection 5 table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

  In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5. As shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set. Is defined in association with “small hit A” in the range of “0 to 14”. This “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set in an open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. In addition, after 1.5 seconds of the open state has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set. Since this ending period is the same for all types of small hits, in FIG. 171 (a) Omitted.

  Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “15 to 59”, “small hit B” is defined in association with it. This “small hit B” is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 0.1 second (first open setting) after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. This is a small hit type that sets an open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Note that after the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set. This ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “60 to 79”, “small hit C” is defined in association with it. This “small hit C” is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 0.5 seconds (first open setting) after the opening period of 0.1 second has elapsed during the small hit game. This is a small hit type for setting an open state for 0.1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Note that after the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set. This ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “80 to 99”, “small hit D” is defined in association with it. This “small hit D” is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 0.5 seconds (first open setting) after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. This is a small hit type for setting an open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. Note that after the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set. This ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which the operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during the small hit game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the small hit type to be executed. One operation scenario is set to execute.

  Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (b). FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), the operation scenario storage area 202db defines an operation scenario that is set in accordance with the start timing of the small hit game.

  Specifically, it is defined that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to OFF until 1.4 seconds have elapsed from the small hitting start timing, and from 1.4 seconds after the small hitting start to the small hitting end. During this period, the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined to be set to ON. The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a scenario in which the value is incremented by 1 every time the main process of the main controller 110 executed every 4 milliseconds is executed. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow channel 2650e2, whether or not the small hit type selected and the flow solenoid It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Furthermore, the sphere that has flowed down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is branched into a sphere that passes through the fall gate 2650e3 and a sphere that does not pass through (2nd normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650. It is configured.

  Specifically, in the small hit game in which “small hit A” is set as the small hit type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is the period during which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set off (1 from the start of the small hit). .4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the falling route, and the small hit game that is most advantageous to the player whose release period is set long is executed.

  In the small hit game in which “small hit B” to “small hit D” are set as the small hit type, the first release period is a timing at which the winning ball can pass the fall route. Furthermore, “small hit C” and “small hit D” have an opening period as short as 0.1 second (shorter than “small hit B”). Since the first opening period is 0.5 seconds long (because it is longer than “small hit B”), it becomes a small hit game in which the ball easily passes the fall route.

  In addition, the “small hit C” is the least disadvantageous for the player because the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened for the shortest period of 0.6 seconds in one opening operation. It becomes a hit game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the small hitting variable prize winning device 2650 and reach the sorting channel distributed by the channel solenoid 2650h. In this configuration, the symbol determination period of the special symbol at the time of winning the small hit is configured to be 0.5 seconds.

  Therefore, immediately after the third symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a small win (see FIG. 167 (a)), the right-handed game is stopped to start the small hit game. At the time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball launched before stopping the right-handed game wins the small winning variable winning device 2650.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a small win winning counter 203da, a fallen passing counter 203db, and a passing flag 203dc are added. doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The small hit winning counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and in the small hit entrance passing process (see S171 in FIG. 174), When it is determined that the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is on during the opening period for the small winning prize opening 2650a (S3302: Yes in FIG. 174), the value is incremented by 1, and after the addition A winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the counter value is cleared (in FIG. 176). S2571).

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, the latent probability state is continued on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small win winning counter 203da. Thus, the number of balls won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the set period is accumulated. Thereby, the number of balls won in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, whether or not the player has a game property for selecting whether or not to make the ball win the variable game device 2650 for small hits during the small hit game, Depending on the selection contents of the player, the cumulative value of the number of balls won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 may be greatly different even if the number of the same small hitting games is the same. Therefore, it is possible to provide a detailed game result by displaying the number of balls won in the small winning variable winning device 2650, not the number of times the small winning game is executed.

  It should be noted that both the number of balls won in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 and the number of times that the small hitting game has been executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or won in one small hitting game. You may comprise so that the average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small hitting type of the played small hitting game.

  The fall pass counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball in the fall gate pass process (see S172 in FIG. 175). In this case (S3402 of FIG. 175: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 (S3403 of FIG. 175), and a passing number command is set with information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 of FIG. 175). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the counter value is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

  In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when the advantageous latent state is set, the number of balls that have passed through the fall route is always counted. . As a result, if the “invincible mode” is set as the latent probability mode, it passes through the route (falling route) that causes the high probability state of the special symbol to shift to the low probability state when it is not in the advantageous latent state. The player can be notified of the number of balls played (see the cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

  The passage flag 203dc indicates that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a sphere when the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a sphere effectively (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off). This flag is set to ON to indicate that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a sphere.

  This passing flag 203dc is used when it is determined in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball has passed through the falling gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No), it is set to ON (see S3408 in FIG. 175). When the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. Thereby, the situation where the process for falling the high probability state of a special symbol is performed in multiple times during one small hit game can be suppressed.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above in that a winning number counter 223da and a passing number counter 223db. And are the same except that they are added. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game. In the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179), the main controller 110 When it is determined that a winning number command has been received from S8101 (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is incremented by 1, and a display winning for displaying information corresponding to the added value on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A number command is set (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

  Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the counter value is cleared. In other words, once the latent probability state is set, the winning number counter 223da is a ball that has won the variable prize winning device 2650 for small hits in a plurality of small hit games executed until the latent probability state ends. It is configured so that the number can be accumulated and measured.

  The passing number counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3, and it is determined that a passing number command has been received from the main controller 110 in the ball passing related process (see S4582 in FIG. 179). If this occurs (S8107 in FIG. 179: Yes), 1 is added if the current latent state is the advantageous latent state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. The control process of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment is a small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 55) instead of the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. 176), the small hitting entrance passage process (see FIG. 174), and the falling gate passage process (see FIG. 175) are different. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small hitting entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting entrance passage process (S171).

  In the small hitting entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the small winning prize opening is open (S3302). When it is determined that the small winning winning opening is being opened (S3302: Yes), a small winning entrance passing command is set (S3303). The small hitting entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Sent. 1 is added to the value of the small winning prize counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the process of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small winning prize counter 203da after the addition (S3305), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3302 that the small winning prize opening is not open (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is turned off (S3307). This process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the falling gate passage process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling gate passage process (S172).

  In the falling gate passage process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is a passage at the fall gate (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage at the tumbling gate (S3402: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a passage at the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passes is determined based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after the addition. A command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate passage effective period is in effect (S3406). If it is determined that the falling gate passage effective period is in effect (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set off (S3407), and the passage flag 203dc is set on (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that the falling gate passage effective period is not in effect (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the small hitting control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting control process 5 (S2271). The small hit control process 5 (S2271) is the process of S2511 with respect to the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above. ) This is different in that the values of the small win winning counter 203da and the falling passage counter 203db are cleared (S2571), and the passage flag 203dc is set to OFF (S2572). Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command process instead of the state command process (see FIG. 62) in contrast to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. 5 (see FIG. 177), a hit related process 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed in place of the hit related process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passing related process (see FIG. 179) is different. Is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 177, the state command process 5 (S4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the status command process 5 (S4291). The status command process 5 (S4291) executes the process of S4411 with respect to the status command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above, and then replaces the process of S4454 with the latent probability mode storage area 223cb, small The difference is that a process (S4471) for clearing the winning counter 223cc, the winning counter 223da, the passing counter 223db, the falling flag 223cd, and the time-notification flag 223ce is added. Since the other processes are the same as the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the hit related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) is different from the hit-related process (S4216) in the fourth embodiment described above in that a process related to passing a ball is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the hit-related process 5 (S4292), in the process of S4505, when it is determined that no prize ball command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not a ball passage-related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that a ball passing related command has been received (S4581: Yes), a ball passing related process (S4582) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage related command has not been received (S4581: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the ball passing related process (S4582) which is one process in the hit related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passage related process (S4582).

  In the ball passing related process (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a winning number command is received from the main controller 110 this time (S8101). If it is determined that a winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is read. Execute (S8103). Next, it is determined whether or not the latent mode read in the process of S8103 is an invincible mode (S8104). If it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8104: No), a suggestion effect that suggests the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a display winning number command is set (S8106), and the process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8104, when it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that no winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether a passing command has been received (S8107). When it is determined that the passage number command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S8108). Next, in the processing of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating a short time missing latency (S8109). If it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the short-term skip latency (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the process of S8109, when it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the short time missing latency (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8111.

  Next, the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is read (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8111 is an invincible mode (S8112). If it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8112: No), a suggestion effect that suggests the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display pass number command is set (S8114), and the process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8112, when it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is different depending on the type (small hit type) when winning the small hit. The ratio of the balls that have won the small hitting variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game passing through the fall gate 2650e3 is different depending on the opening operation pattern to be executed.

  By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the special symbol high probability state from falling down and to perform a game aiming to acquire a privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. The game can be selected by the player.

  In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot variation, the other special symbol variation (lottery) is won in the small win Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is not shifted to the low probability state.

  As a result, in the state in which the latent state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult), and the high probability state of the special symbol is more likely to fall than the advantageous latent state. It is possible to set an unfavorable latency state.

  In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the hour / hour counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of hour / hour reductions) is performed at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ) In a gaming machine capable of executing the first special symbol variation (lottery) and the second special symbol variation (lottery) simultaneously, for a predetermined number of times. The time-short game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set) is executed. For example, when the value of the time-short counter 203f is set to 100 (when the time-short number of times is set to 100) ), The period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation to the start of the 101st special symbol variation becomes a non-short-time state (low probability state of normal symbols). Was Tsu.

  During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even in the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol different from the special symbol, it will be a period in which the lottery (variation) advantageous to the player can be executed, The period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation to the start of the 101st special symbol variation, that is, the period from the execution of the special symbol variation of the number of times exceeding a predetermined number of times However, there is a problem that the player is uncomfortable by setting the non-time-short state.

  However, if the processing for updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (processing for subtracting the number of time reductions) is configured to be updated at the timing when the special symbol variation display ends (timing at which the symbol determination period ends), In a gaming machine that can execute the first special symbol variation (lottery) and the second special symbol variation (lottery) at the same time, a special symbol variation (lottery) more than a predetermined number of times is set in the short-time state. There was a problem of running in the state that has been.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, a time-shortening end condition for a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (the 100th time-shortening) executed when the value of the time-shortening counter 203f becomes 0 (First short-time end condition) is set, and the short-time end condition (second short-time end condition) is set for the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), and two of the set short-time end conditions are set. Of these, the time-short state may be ended based on the time-short end condition established first.

  Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 times of time reduction) is set as the period for setting the time reduction state, the special symbol change corresponding to the final change in the time reduction state (for example, the 100th time reduction) ends. The first short-time end condition that is satisfied by this, and the second short-time end condition that is satisfied when a condition for starting a special symbol variation (for example, the 101st special symbol variation) that is newly executed after the elapse of a predetermined period is satisfied. And when the first short-time termination condition is satisfied first, that is, before the 101st special symbol variation is started, the 100th special symbol variation period (or symbol determination period) is completed. In that case, the time saving state is terminated at that time.

  On the other hand, if the second short-time end condition is satisfied before the first short-time end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol variation period (or symbol determination period) ends (special When the starting condition for the 101st special symbol variation is satisfied (during symbol variation), it is preferable that the time-short state is terminated at the time before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

  By configuring in this way, in the state where the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, the maximum period is set while preventing the special symbol variation (lottery) from being executed more than a predetermined number of times. It can be set as a short time state. Therefore, a state advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible as the normal symbol lottery (variation).

  In each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203aa for measuring the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set and the time reduction counter 203f for measuring the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are provided. The counter value is subtracted and interrupted, but in each of the above embodiments, instead of the process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variation counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement), the time reduction counter A process for interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or the opposite process may be executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. The second embodiment described above is a so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, The game state is configured to vary during a symbol determination period (a period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying a special symbol lottery result. In other words, when the big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the jackpot) The game state is shifted from the probabilistic state to the latent state at the time when is displayed.

  By configuring in this way, the second special symbol in the latent state during the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 (the period from when the first symbol showing the jackpot is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed) (Special Figure 2) The game can be executed and the interest of the game is improved.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, in order to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game and the lottery game of the special symbol are performed at the same time and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game, The special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed while the game is executed (from the time when the jackpot game opening period is set until the end of the jackpot game ending period). In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not executed during the jackpot game, the player can be concentrated on the jackpot game. However, since the special symbol lottery (variation) is not performed during the entire jackpot game, the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed is limited, and the gaming efficiency (the number of special symbol lottery executions per unit time) is reduced. There was a problem of doing.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the special symbol variation on the side that has not won the jackpot is also during the period from when the jackpot game is executed until the round game is started (opening period of the jackpot game). It is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot is started (when the jackpot game opening period is set), during the opening period In addition, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed.

  In other words, even during the jackpot game, a round game in which a ball can be entered by the jackpot game (a period in which the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which it is easy to enter the ball) During a period other than (game) (for example, an opening period, an interval period, and an ending period), a special symbol lottery can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the jackpot game during the round game in the jackpot game and to pay attention to the special symbol variation during the other periods, so that an efficient game can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, the sixth embodiment is configured such that a jackpot is not won in a special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, it can suppress providing an excessive jackpot game to a player. In addition, the present embodiment is configured so that even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is off (other than the jackpot), a small amount of bonuses (prize balls) can be won for the jackpot that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player watch the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the big hit game.

  In the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as to have different probabilities of winning a small hit. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can be made different.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Here, an electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above in that an open scenario table 202ea is added, and other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which game contents in a big hit game or a small hit game (hereinafter referred to as a win game) are stored, and the scenario of the executed win game depends on the hit type. It is remembered. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from the start of the winning game to the start of the first round game, the length of the round game period, and the variable prize that is open in the round game The type of device, the number of times a round game is executed, the length of an inter-round game (interval period), and the length of an ending period set after completion of all round games are stored.

  It should be noted that information (winning game content) that is read out in order to execute a winning game corresponding to the winning big win or the small win may be determined in advance, using the open scenario table 202ea as in the present embodiment. Information may be stored, and the method used in each of the above-described embodiments may be employed.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the main controller 110RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above in that the big hit state flag 203ea, the small hit state flag 203eb, the special figure variable enable flag 203ec, and the big hit interruption flag 203ed. The difference is that a special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is added.

  The jackpot status flag 203ea is for indicating a status during the jackpot game, and the type of the special symbol won for the jackpot and the current jackpot game status (opening period, round game, interval period, ending period, It is a flag that is referred to when it is determined which of the middle). Here, the contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit status flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the jackpot state flag 203ea is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 4 bits.

  Specifically, the special symbol won this jackpot is the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are “0001” (FIG. 182 (a ) Is described as “01”), and during the round game (round), the lower 4 bits are “0010” (described as “02” in FIG. 182 (a)), and during the round game (interval) 4 bits become “0011” (described as “03” in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower 4 bits are expressed as “0100” (described as “04” in FIG. 182 (a)) during the ending period (ED). Become.

  The special symbol won this jackpot is the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are “0101” (in FIG. 182 (a) “ 05 ”), during the round game (round), the lower 4 bits are“ 0110 ”(described as“ 06 ”in FIG. 182 (a)), and during the round game (interval), the lower 4 bits are “0111” (described as “07” in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower 4 bits become “1000” (described as “08” in FIG. 182 (a)) during the ending period (ED).

  When the jackpot game is not being executed (when the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF), the lower 4 bits are “0000” as an initial state. The jackpot status flag 203ea is configured so that the value is updated according to the jackpot scenario to be updated in the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game. The jackpot state flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot and the content (bonus game state) indicated by the updated jackpot scenario.

  As described above, since the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea is configured to be updated based on the jackpot scenario, for example, means for storing the updated contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea and the stored contents A means for determining (past history), and a configuration for determining whether there is an abnormality in the jackpot game based on the determination result of the past history of the jackpot state flag 203ea may be used. Specifically, for example, from the values (values “01” to “04” shown in FIG. 182 (a)) that can be set when winning a big win by lottery in FIG. If it is determined that the value has been updated to the value that can be set when winning (the value of “05” to “08” shown in FIG. 182 (a)), it is determined that the game condition is abnormal, and It is good to comprise so that abnormality notification may be performed. This makes it possible to accurately determine that the player has played an illegal game during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot state flag 203ea is varied according to the execution contents of the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188), but the current jackpot game situation can be determined. For example, means for determining whether or not the current big hit is, means for detecting the open state of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), And the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea may be set based on the determination (detection) result of each means, or the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be determined. It is also possible to provide a means for determining the current jackpot gaming situation based on the determination result of the means.

  When the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is updated, a status command for indicating that is set and output to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the status command for indicating that the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea has been updated, thereby determining the current jackpot gaming situation and various effects according to the jackpot gaming situation. Is set.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special symbol type won in the jackpot is determined as the jackpot game situation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol type may not be determined. By comprising in this way, the number of classifications for classifying a jackpot game situation can be reduced.

  The small hit state flag 203eb is for indicating a state in which a small hit game is in progress, and which is the current small hit game status (opening period, round game, interval period, ending period) It is a flag that is referred to when discriminating. Here, the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the small hit state flag 203eb is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits.

  Specifically, the lower 2 bits are “01” (described as “01” in FIG. 182 (b)) during the opening period (OP) of the small hit game, and the lower 2 bits during the round game (round) Becomes “10” (indicated as “02” in FIG. 182 (b)), and the lower 2 bits become “11” (indicated as “03” in FIG. 182 (b)) during the ending period (ED). When the small hit game is not executed (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to OFF), the lower two bits are “00” (described as “00” in FIG. 182 (b)). .

  In the present embodiment, since the round game is executed only once as the small hit game, the value for indicating the interval period is deleted from the big hit state flag 203ea described above, and the first Since the lottery of one special symbol is configured not to win a small bonus, the value for determining the type of the special symbol won for the small bonus is also deleted. The value of the small hit state flag 203eb is configured to be set according to the updated content of the small hit scenario updated in the small hit control process 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193). When the value of 203eb is updated, a state command for indicating the value of the updated small hit state flag 203eb is set and output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  The sound lamp control device 113 receives a state command including information for indicating the value of the small hit state flag 203eb, thereby grasping the current small hit game situation and creating an effect mode according to the current state. Set.

  The special figure changeable flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether or not the current situation is a state in which a special symbol change can be newly executed, and is turned on when a new special symbol change can be executed. Is set.

  The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is a flag for interrupting the updating of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the updating of the jackpot scenario is interrupted. The big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to ON when, for example, a special symbol lottery result executed during the opening period of the big hit game is a small hit and the small hit game is executed.

  In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in a part of the state of the jackpot game (a state in which the round game is not executed). When winning a small hit, it is configured to execute a small hit game. During the small hit game, the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to ON so that the big hit scenario is not updated.

  By configuring in this way, for example, even when a small win is won during the opening period of the big hit game, the big hit round game is not started, and the small hit game can be reliably executed. In addition, even if you win a small hit within a predetermined period such as a jackpot opening period, subtraction of the jackpot opening period (update of the jackpot scenario) is not performed, so a lot of small hit games are executed The game can be performed eagerly.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed during the big hit game, the update of the big hit scenario is interrupted and the small hit game is surely executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, without interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario, the jackpot game is forcibly terminated based on the timing at which the jackpot round game is executed, or until the jackpot round game ends. May be temporarily interrupted.

  In the sixth embodiment, since the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON based on the timing at which the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot scenario is updated during the variation time of the special symbol won for the jackpot. Is done. This allows the player to play a game while expecting a variation pattern in which a variation time is set as short as possible, in addition to winning a small hit during a big hit game. On the other hand, the contents of the special symbol lottery (variation) can be watched.

  In this case, it may be configured to execute a variation time suggestion notification that suggests the set variation time regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is executed this time at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started. Thereby, since it can be suggested to the player whether or not a short variation time has been set, the effect of production can be enhanced. Moreover, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the next special symbol lottery can be immediately executed by setting a short fluctuation time. That is, the change time suggestion notification is a notification indicating whether the lottery result is advantageous to the player without indicating whether the special symbol lottery result is winning or losing (win / fail judgment result).

  In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, for example, the big hit interruption flag 203ed may be set to ON based on the timing at which the special symbol variation won in the big hit is executed. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the big hit round game is executed while the special symbol variation won in the small hit is being executed, and the game is difficult to understand for the player.

  In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and a means for determining the variation time of the special symbol are provided, and the special symbol lottery (variation) this time is the opening period. If it is determined that the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) will not end within the opening period after setting the effect mode based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (whether or not determination result) Further, it may be configured to set an effect mode corresponding to the case where the lottery result (whether or not determination result) of the special symbol lottery is off. By configuring in this way, even if the lottery result of the special symbol variation forcibly terminated by executing the jackpot round game is a small hit, the special symbol variation without giving the player a sense of incongruity Can be stopped.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 194, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. The control process of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment is a special symbol fluctuation stop instead of the special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above. Instead of the process 6 (see FIG. 183), the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 33), the first special symbol fluctuation start process 6 (see FIG. 185) and the second special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 39). Instead of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 186), instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53), the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 188), instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 54), the jackpot end Processing 6 (see FIG. 192), point that small hitting control processing 6 (see FIG. 193) is executed instead of small hitting control processing (see FIG. 55), variation condition determination processing (see FIG. 184), round execution processing (see FIG. 89 reference), with the difference that adds a small prize end processing (see FIG. 194). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 183, the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 (S181). In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), a variation condition determination process (S291) is added to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above, and the first special symbol variation start process. Instead of the first special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 185) instead of (see FIG. 33), the second special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 186) instead of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). Is different in that Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), first, a variation condition determination process (S291) is executed. Details of the variation condition determination processing (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292). If it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is not on (S292: No), the process proceeds to S202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292: Yes), the process proceeds to S204.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the fluctuation condition determination process (S291) which is one process in the special symbol fluctuation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation condition determination process (S291).

  In the fluctuation condition determination process (S291), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501). If it is determined that the special figure change prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure change enable flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is not on (S3501: No), it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 203o is on (S3502). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is on (S3502: Yes), the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not the information of the read jackpot state flag 203ea is “01” or “05”. That is, it is determined whether it is a jackpot opening period (S3504). If it is determined that the read information is “01” or “05” (S3504: Yes), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3504 that the read information is not “01” or “05” (S3504: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3506), and the process of S3507 is performed. Migrate to

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the big hit / medium flag 203o is not ON (S3502: No), it is determined whether the small hit / medium flag 203p is ON (S3507). If it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is off (S3507: No), the special figure variation flag 203ec is set to on (S3512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3507 that the small hitting medium flag 203p is on (S3507: Yes), the information set in the small hitting state flag 203eb is read (S3508). Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the small hit state flag 203eb read in the processing of S3508 is “01” (S3509). If it is determined that the information is “01” (S3509: Yes), the special figure variable enable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read information is not “01” (S3509: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to off (S3511), and this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 185, first special symbol variation start processing 6 (S293), which is one processing in special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293). The first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is different from the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) in the second embodiment in that the information of the big hit state flag 203ea is read. . Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), first, the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read (S391). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is “00” or “05”. That is, it is determined whether the opening period is the jackpot of the second special symbol or is outside the jackpot execution period (S392). When it is determined that the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is “00” or “05” (S392: Yes), the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is neither “00” nor “05” (S392: No), this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, second special symbol variation start processing 6 (S294), which is one processing in special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294). The second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) reads out the information of the big hit state flag 203ea with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (S210 of FIG. 39) in the second embodiment, and the first special symbol big hit A process for determining whether the period is the opening period or the round period is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), first, the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read (S971). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is “00” or “01”. That is, it is determined whether the first special symbol jackpot opening period is outside the jackpot execution period (S972). When it is determined that the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is “00” or “01” (S972: Yes), the process proceeds to S901. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is not “00” or “01” (S972: No), the processing of S902 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271).

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271), it is first determined whether or not there is a setting for opening (S3601). If it is determined that there is an open setting (S3601: Yes), the corresponding solenoid of the attacker is set to ON (S3602), the big hit state flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that there is no opening setting (S3601: No), it is determined whether there is a closing setting (S3603). If it is determined that there is a closing setting (S3603: Yes), the corresponding attacker solenoid is set to OFF (S3604), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that there is no closing setting (S3603: No), it is determined whether it is the closing timing of the closing scenario (S3605). If it is determined that it is the closing timing of the closing scenario (S3605: Yes), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S2272).

  In the jackpot control process 6 (S2272), first, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351). . When it is determined that the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2351: No), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302).

  Next, it is determined whether it is a big hit start timing (S2302). If it is determined that it is the big hit start timing (S2303: Yes), an opening command is set (S2304), a value corresponding to the big hit status flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is not the big hit start timing (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2305). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2305: Yes), a round execution process (S2353) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the round execution process (S2353) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round execution process (S2353).

  In the round execution process (S2353), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of the first round (S3701). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: Yes), the big hit interruption process is executed (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3703. Details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round in the process of S3701 (S3701: No), a value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3703), and a process corresponding to the jackpot scenario is set. (S3704), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 190, the big hit interruption process (S3702) which is one process in the round execution process (S2353) performed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 in 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit interruption process (S3702).

  In the big hit interruption process (S3702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hitting medium flag 203p is on (S3801). When it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is on (S3801: Yes), the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to on (S3802), a big hit interruption command is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the small hitting / medium flag 203p is not ON (S3801: No), an opening command indicating the start of the small hitting is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0, that is, whether the special symbol is changing (S3805). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is removed and stopped with the symbol (S3806), the special symbol variation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807), The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3805, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S3805: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S2307: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening is set (S2308), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2307 that it is not the end timing of the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the operation of special electricity (S2354). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the operation of the special electricity (S2354: Yes), the ending execution process (S2355) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the ending execution process (S2355) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) performed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 in 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending execution process (S2355).

  In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. In the process of S2354, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of special electricity (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the operation end timing of the combination operating device (S2356). When it is determined that it is the operation end timing of the combination operating device (S2356: Yes), jackpot end processing 6 (S2357) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2356, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the combination operating device (S2356: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 192, a jackpot ending process 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end process 6 (S2357). In the jackpot end process 6 (S2357), after setting the status command (S2406) with respect to the jackpot end process (S2312 in FIG. 54) of the second embodiment, “00” is set in the jackpot status flag 203ea. It is different in that processing (S2451) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the small hitting control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting control process 6 (S2272). In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), a process of setting a value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is added to the small hit control process (S2205 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment described above, The difference is that a small hitting end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), when it is determined in the processing of S2503 that the timing is the start of the small hit (S2503: Yes), an opening command is set (S2504), corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb. The value to be set is set (S2581), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2503 that it is not the small hitting start timing (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hitting round (S2505). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hitting round (S2505: Yes), the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) is executed, and a value corresponding to the small hitting state flag 203eb is set (S2582). Exit.

  In this embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the ending timing (S2509: Yes), an ending command is set (S2510), and a value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set ( S2583), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit end timing (S2511). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit end processing (S2584) is executed, and this processing is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 194, the small hit end process (S2584) which is one process in the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit end process (S2584).

  In the small hit end processing (S2584), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591). When it is determined that the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to off (S2592), and the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to on (S2593). Next, the update value of the big hit scenario is decremented by 1 (S2594), the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2595), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2591, when it is determined that the big hit interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2591: No), the processes of S2592 to S2594 are skipped, the process of S2595 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the special symbol variation on the side where the jackpot is not won even during the period from when the jackpot game is executed until the round game is started (opening period of the jackpot game) Is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot is started (when the jackpot game opening period is set), during the opening period In addition, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed.

  In other words, even during the jackpot game, a round game in which a ball can be entered by the jackpot game (a period in which the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which it is easy to enter the ball) During a period other than (game) (for example, an opening period, an interval period, and an ending period), a special symbol lottery can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the jackpot game during the round game in the jackpot game and to pay attention to the special symbol variation during the other periods, so that an efficient game can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, the sixth embodiment is configured such that a jackpot is not won in a special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, it can suppress providing an excessive jackpot game to a player. In addition, the present embodiment is configured so that even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is off (other than the jackpot), a small amount of bonuses (prize balls) can be won for the jackpot that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player watch the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the big hit game.

  In the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as to have different probabilities of winning a small hit. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can be made different.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each embodiment described above, the jackpot game is configured to be executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. The game is configured so that a big hit (so-called two types) game is executed.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, the first flow in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific region 650V is used as a path for the ball to flow toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is released during the small hit game. A path ta (see FIG. 196) and a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) through which a sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V are provided. Accordingly, the player pays attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hit game. Therefore, the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball is distributed to the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb described above by the opening / closing operation of the electric charge 3640a, the operation of the electric charge 3640a is performed. The player can be interested in the game. Further, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb that easily passes through the specific region 650V, the easiness of winning the ball to the V winning device 650 is made different according to the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

  Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol to be set is made different according to the set gaming state and the winning small category. By configuring in this way, when winning a jackpot corresponding to a jackpot to which a short-time state is given after the jackpot game ends, a gaming state (advantageous short-time) that makes it easy to pass a ball through the specific area 650V, and a jackpot end A game state (shortening disadvantageous time) that makes it easy to pass a ball through the specific area 650V can be set when a small win corresponding to a jackpot to which a short time state is given later is set.

  In the present embodiment, by using the above-described advantageous short-time and disadvantageous short-time configurations, when a big win is won once (first win), until a total of three big hits including the first win are executed. It is configured such that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. Thus, by making it possible to set a gaming state in which a large number of jackpot games are guaranteed to be executed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, although the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to be won by a lottery of the second special symbol. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so as to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 3640 that triggers the lottery. Then, based on the fact that the ball that has flowed down on the electric accessory 3640a has entered the second entrance 3640, the electric accessory 3640a moves to the closed state, and at that time, the electric accessory 3640a flows down on the electric accessory 3640a. The spheres are configured to be distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) that has flowed down.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the ball positioned on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb that is advantageous to the player, and continues. When the sphere is fired, the sphere is configured to easily flow into the second flow path tb.

  Therefore, in order to allow the ball to flow into the second flow path tb while the lottery of the second special symbol is being executed, it is necessary to continuously fire the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of obtaining an advantageous result by firing a sphere at a predetermined timing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 195, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment is different from the above-described configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment in that the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 is greatly different.

  Specifically, a point where a flow path unit 660 is provided in the right region of the game board 13, a point where a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the flow path unit 660, and a second variable In the winning device (V winning device) 650, there is provided a specific area 650v that can provide a jackpot game based on the passing of the ball, and a second variable winning device provided at the lower center of the game board 13. 650, the 2nd entrance 640, and the point which deleted the lower 1st entrance 64b2 to which the electrically-driven accessory 64a is attached differ greatly. The rest of the configuration is the same as the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configuration, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the flow path unit 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 196 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the flow path unit 660. FIG. 197 (a) is a plan view schematically showing a spherical flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (embedded state). FIG. 197 (b) is a perspective view schematically showing a spherical flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (embedded state). FIG. 198 (a) is a plan view schematically showing a sphere flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (projecting state). FIG. 198 (b) shows an electric accessory 3640a. It is the perspective view which showed typically the ball | bowl flow in the case of an open state (protrusion state).

  The terms indicating the variable state of the electric accessory 3640a used in the seventh embodiment will be described. The closed state of the electric accessory 3640a is a flow path for causing a ball to enter the second entrance 3640. It is a term used to indicate a state in which the (flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is closed, that is, a state in which the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the game board 13, and a functional expression In some cases, the term “restricted state” (a state where the entry of a sphere into the second entrance 3640 is restricted) is used.

  In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 3640a refers to a state in which a flow path (a flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) for causing the ball to enter the second entrance 3640 is open, that is, It is a term used to indicate a state in which the accessory 3640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, a term of an allowable state (a state in which a ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 3640) May be used.

  As shown in FIG. 196, the flow path unit 660 forms a first flow path 660a that forms the first flow path ta and a second flow path tb as a ball path that causes the sphere to flow down toward the V winning device 650. A second passage 660b, and a first inflow port 661 into which a sphere that has flowed down substantially in the center of the right region flows, and a sphere that has flowed in from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a. The first guiding path 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)), the second inlet 662 into which the sphere flowing down the left side of the right region flows, and the sphere flowing in from the second inlet 662 pass through the through gate 67. The third passage 660c flowing down toward the lower area of the game board 13, the third inlet 663 into which the ball flowing down the right side of the right area flows, and the ball flowing in from the third inlet 663 into the game board 13 Out for discharging outside A mouth 66, and a.

  The sphere flowing down the right region is a flow path unit that changes the flow path by a plurality of nails (for example, a nail 660k (see FIG. 195) that is a flow path variable member) disposed above the flow path unit 660. And about 55% of the sphere flowing down the right region flows into the first inlet 661, about 40% flows into the second inlet 662, and about 5% is the third. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663. The above-mentioned distribution ratio shows an average value when a right-handed game is performed. For example, among the firing strengths that allow a right-handed game, the ball is continuously fired at the weakest firing strength. In this case, the ratio of the spheres flowing into the second inflow port 662 increases. In this way, by allowing the player to control the firing strength in the right-handed game, the inflow rate to each inflow port disposed in the flow path unit 660 can be varied, so that the player can Therefore, it is possible to provide a fun of changing the firing strength so that an advantageous game is executed.

  In addition, the sphere that has flowed down the second inlet 662 is configured to be distributed to two flow paths formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the sphere distributed to the flow path on the near side (about 90). %) Flows down the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the balls (about 10%) distributed to the flow path (not shown) on the back side flow into the out port 66, and the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be discharged to the outside. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the position is close to both ends of the electric accessory 3640a that is opened (formed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state). Out ports 66 are disposed (positions close to the upstream end and the downstream end of the spherical flow path) (a partition wall for partitioning the space from the out port 66).

  By configuring in this way, the movable range of the electric accessory 3640a that is operated when the normal symbol hit game is executed can be easily understood by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the opening operation.

  In the schematic diagram shown using FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the out port 66 and the movable region of the electric accessory 3640a and the electric accessory 3640a are in contact with each other. The gap is less than half a sphere. Thereby, even if the opening operation | movement of the electrically-driven part 3640a is performed in multiple times, it can suppress that the electrically-driven part 3640a or a partition wall is damaged by friction. Moreover, since the size of the gap is less than half of the spheres, it is possible to prevent the sphere from falling down from the gap.

  Next, the ball flow of the right-handed game when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. As shown in FIG. 196, the sphere flowing in from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a. However, when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (embedded state), Without flowing down, it flows down to the first passage 660a provided below the first guiding path 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)). The first passage 660a is a passage in which the first flow path ta is formed. The first flow path ta is configured so that the time required for the sphere to pass is about 0.5 seconds, and the sphere is awarded the V prize in a shorter time than the sphere flowing down the second flow path tb described later. Device 650 can be reached.

  Further, most (about 90%) of the spheres flowing into the second inlet 662 pass through the through gate 67 without being related to the state of the electric accessory 3640a, and the front side of the second passage 660b described later. It flows down the third passage 660c formed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and is discharged to the lower area of the game board 13. Further, a part (about 10%) of the sphere flowing into the second inflow port 662 passes through a fourth passage (not shown) provided on the back side of the third passage 660c and flows into the out port 66.

  In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages using the space in the depth direction of the game board 13, the flow path through which the balls flow down can be formed three-dimensionally, so that the game area of the game board 13 Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of forming a larger number of ball passages within a limited range and realizing a ball flow that does not get bored by the player.

  Similarly to the second inflow port 662 described above, the ball that has entered the third inflow port is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the out port 66 without being related to the state of the electric accessory 3640a. . Here, with reference to FIG. 196 and FIG. 197 (a), the structure of the upper surface (spherical flow lower surface) of the electric accessory 3640a will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the electric accessory 3640a is configured to form a downward slope from the upper right direction toward the lower left direction from the perspective of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a. It is configured that the sphere that has reached the bottom flows by its own weight from the upstream side (upper right side) to the downstream side (lower left side) of the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a.

  A delay member is provided on the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a to delay the flow speed at which the sphere flows down the upper surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), a first delay member 3641 and a second delay member 3642 are provided, and a sphere flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is a first delay member 3641, A ball enters the second entrance 640 provided on the lower end side of the electric accessory 3640a while contacting the second delay member 3642. In the present embodiment, an installation member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the flow speed of the sphere flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

  This installation member 3643 is directly attached to the flow path unit 660, not the electric accessory 3640a. Therefore, it is always disposed at a fixed position without being related to the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. As described above, the delay members for delaying the flow speed of the sphere flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a are provided in the first delay member 3641, the second delay member 3642, and the flow path unit 660 attached to the electric accessory 3640a. When the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (projection state) (see FIG. 198 (a)), the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a is meandered by being configured with the attached installation member 3634. When the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (embedded state) (see FIG. 197 (a)), the sphere cannot flow down on the electric accessory 3640a. It can be made to function as a flow-down suppressing means to make it difficult.

  Here, the above-described flow suppression means will be specifically described. When the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (see FIG. 197 (a)), that is, when it is difficult to make the ball enter the second entrance. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), since the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the back of the game board 13, the first delay member 3641 on the electric accessory 3640a is connected to the game board 13 side. Will be located. As a result, the distance tc between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643 is reduced (the interval (about 5 mm) at which the sphere cannot pass between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643). Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the installation member 3643 is also an interval (about 7 mm) at which the sphere cannot pass.

  Thus, even if an act of placing the ball illegally on the electric accessory 3640a in the state where the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball enters the second entrance 3640. This can be suppressed. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to embed each delay member on the electric playing tool 3640a inside the game board 13 when the electric playing tool 3640a is opened (projected state), the electric playing tool 3640a is buried. The opening of the game board 13 to be provided can be narrowed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which dust and garbage enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10 from the opening of the game board 13.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, even when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the electric accessory 3640a is not completely embedded in the game board 13, but a part (the first delay member 3641, the first The state in which the 2 delay member 3642) is exposed is configured to be the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a. Thereby, even if the electric accessory 3640a is located in the closed state, the player can easily grasp the position where the electric accessory 3640a is disposed. Further, since each delay member provided on the electric accessory 3640a is exposed, how the sphere flows down on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (a protruding state). You can let the player know what to do.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of the ball that can be executed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (the sphere flow on the electric accessory 3640a) is the state in which the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the state in which the electric accessory 3640a is actually opened and the sphere is flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

  On the other hand, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (projection state), as shown in FIG. 198, the sphere that flows into the first inflow port 661 and flows down through the first guide path 661a is on the electric accessory 3640a. To reach. Then, the electric accessory 3640a flows down toward the second entrance 3640 while meandering along the slope and the shape of each delay member.

  Here, when the electric combination 3640a is in an open state (a protruding state), a spherical flow path formed on the electric combination 3640a will be described with reference to FIG. 198 (a). Is formed with a meandering sphere flow path until the sphere discharged from the first guide path 661a reaches the second entrance 3640. The time for the sphere to pass through the meandering sphere flow path is about 2 seconds, and passes through the flow path (flow path upstream portion ZA) from the discharge port of the first guide path 661a to the back side of the first delay member 3641. Is about 0.8 seconds, and the time required to pass through the flow path (flow path downstream portion ZB) from the back side of the first delay member 3641 to the second entrance 3640 is about 1.2. It is configured to be seconds.

  In the present embodiment, as the operation end condition of the electric accessory 3640a, the first general electric power end condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time after the operation to the open state (projecting state) is 3 seconds, and the second The second general electric power end condition that is established when one ball enters the entrance 3640, and when any of the general electric power end conditions is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state. It is configured to operate to (embedded state).

  When the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (embedded state), the sphere staying on the electric accessory 3640a is desired to be the first passage 660a below the electric accessory 3640a, Or, it is configured to fall into any one of the second passages 660b. That is, the movement distance (movement distance in the depth direction) when the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (embedded state) is at least one sphere (11 mm) or more. In this embodiment, the moving distance of the electric accessory 3640a is greater than one sphere (11 mm) and 15 mm smaller than two spheres (22 mm).

  With this configuration, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball located on the electric accessory 3640a can be surely dropped downward, and the two balls can be pachinko. Since it does not fall continuously in the depth direction of the machine 10, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of the balls inside the first passage 660a and the second passage 660b.

  A sphere staying in the upstream portion ZA (see FIG. 198 (a)) of the serpentine spherical passage stays in the first passage 660a and in the downstream portion ZB (see FIG. 198 (a)). The sphere is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In this embodiment, due to the inertia acting on the sphere flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a, the ball moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (embedded state) at a speed at which the sphere falls down. It is configured as follows.

  In the seventh embodiment, the electric charge 3640a is in an open state (a protruding state), and a ball is positioned between the second delay member 3642 and the second entrance 3640. When the ball moves to the closed state (embedded state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 that moves toward the second entrance 3640 and enters the second entrance 3640. It is composed. As described above, depending on the position of the sphere on the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of moving the electric accessory 3640a from the open state to the closed state is a guidance operation for guiding the sphere to the second entrance. be able to.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to launch 100 balls per minute, and when 100 balls are fired per minute in a right-handed game, the rate is about 1 in 2 balls. A sphere flows into the first inlet 661. That is, since spheres fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds flow into the first inlet 661 at a rate of one sphere to two, the interval at which the spheres flow into the first inlet 661 is about 1.2 on average. Second.

  And as above-mentioned, since the flow-path downstream part ZB is comprised so that 1.2 second may be required for passage of a ball | bowl, when the 2nd general electric power termination conditions mentioned above are satisfied, ie, 2nd entrance In the case where the electric accessory 3640a is moved to the closed state (embedded state) due to the ball entering 3640, when the ball is continuously launched into the right-handed region, the second entrance 3640 is obtained. Since the electric accessory 3640a is moved to the closed state in a state where the ball that has flowed into the first inlet 661 next to the ball that entered the ball is positioned in the downstream channel portion ZB, the ball is inserted into the second passage 660b. It can be made to fall easily.

  On the other hand, when a game is performed with the timing of intentionally firing a ball, it is difficult for another ball to fall into the second passage 660b in a state where the ball has entered the second entrance 3640. can do. Therefore, in order to make a ball enter the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to prompt the player to continuously fire the ball.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the short time state is set as the gaming state, as described above, 3 seconds is set as the first power transmission termination condition of the electric accessory 3640a, but the gaming state is the normal state. In this case, the first power transmission termination condition is set to 0.2 seconds. This 0.2 second is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 seconds) required to flow down the upstream portion of the meandering spherical flow passage formed on the electric accessory 3640a. Even if a right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the ball is not allowed to enter the second entrance 3640. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a privilege that is advantageous to a player who performs an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game during a normal state.

  In addition, since it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down to the second passage 660b, the sphere is caused to flow down to the second passage 660b in a state where the V winning device 650 is opened by any method, so that the specific region 650V is obtained. It is possible to suppress cheating that passes the ball.

  In the present embodiment, a right-handed game in a normal state or a player who has not played a right-handed game continuously in a short-time state passes the ball through the second passage 660b that is advantageous to the player. In order to make it difficult to do so, the second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the electric combination 3640a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the electric combination 3640a. In addition, there may be three or more passages for receiving the balls that have fallen from the electric accessory 3640a, or a plurality of reception openings for the balls that have fallen from the electric accessory 3640a may be provided. You may comprise so that the probability which passes the specific area | region 650V may differ. Further, a plurality of passages through which the ball that has fallen from the electric accessory 3640a can pass through the specific area 650V are provided, and the time required for reaching the specific area 650V through each passage (time required to win the V winning device 650) You may comprise so that it may differ.

  Returning to FIG. A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the flow path unit 660. As in the first embodiment described above, the first variable winning device 65 is opened when a special winning lottery is won in a special symbol lottery. Note that 90% of the balls fired in the right-handed game during the jackpot game (the balls that flowed into the first inlet 661 (50%) and the balls that flowed into the second inlet 662 (40%)) Since both are configured to win the first variable winning device 65, even if the flow path unit 660 is provided on the upstream side (above) of the first variable winning device 65, the big hit game can be executed smoothly. Can do. In addition, since the sphere that has flowed into the first inlet 661 and the sphere that has flowed into the second inlet 662 flow down different flow paths and reach the first variable winning device 65, a plurality of spheres are simultaneously added to the first inlet 661. It is possible to make it easy to win the 1 variable winning device 65.

<About production contents in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 199 to FIG. 202, the game play of the seventh embodiment will be briefly described before the characteristic effects executed in the seventh embodiment are described. In the seventh embodiment, when a big win is won by a special symbol lottery, or a small win is won by a special symbol lottery, and a ball is passed to a specific area (specific area 650V) during the small win game. In this case, the jackpot game is configured to be executed (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type).

  In addition, in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is configured not to win a small hit, only to win a small bonus in the lottery of the second special symbol. And the 2nd entrance 3640 used as the execution opportunity of the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is comprised so that a ball can enter only in the state where the time-short state is set as a game state. When the jackpot game is executed, the time-short state is set at a predetermined rate after the jackpot is completed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is opened in the small hit game, and the ball is passed to a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650. It has a difficult first flow path (first passage 660a) and a second flow path (second passage 660b) that is easy to pass through, and which flow path the ball flows down can be varied according to the game content. It is configured to be able to.

  Furthermore, the seventh embodiment has an advantageous small hit that is set for the short-time state after the end of the jackpot game that is set correspondingly, and an unfavorable small hit that is not set for the short-time state. The variable time set according to this is made variable. In addition, an advantageous short time state that makes it easier for a ball to enter the specific area 650V when winning in an advantageous small win as a short time state, and an adverse effect that makes it easier to enter a ball in the specific area 650V when winning in a small disadvantage The time-short state can be set.

  In the present embodiment, the second flow path (second passage 660b) that allows the ball to flow toward the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 based on the start of the variation of the second special symbol. It is configured to set a state in which the ball can flow down, and is configured to vary a variation time of a special symbol set at the time of winning a small hit between the short time state of advantage and the short state of disadvantage time. In the state where the advantageous short time state is set, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path when winning the advantageous small win wins the V winning device 650, and the second flow path when winning the disadvantage small hit It is configured so that a special symbol variation time corresponding to each small hit type is set so that the ball that has flowed down does not win the V winning device 650.

  By configuring in this way, when the advantageous short time state is set, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V even if winning the disadvantage small hit, so the short time state is set across the big hit game be able to. In other words, in the first special symbol lottery, if the winning big win (first win) is set after the jackpot ends, the bonus win game is executed at least twice (three times including the first win) be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 (a), a description will be given of effects that are executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won in the time-saving state. FIG. 199 (a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect that is executed when winning per normal symbol (second symbol) in the short-time state. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), while the time-short state is set, the characters “right-handed” are displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to cause the player to play the right-handed game. A symbol for displaying the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the variation area Dm5.

  The symbol displayed in the normal variation region Dm5 is variably displayed corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol (second symbol) executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). In synchronization with the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) stops, the display is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating the current lottery result. FIG. 199 (a) shows a display mode “a display mode imitating two circles” indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a win. In the embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is out of place, the “display mode simulating two cross marks” is stopped and displayed in the general symbol variation area Dm5, and the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ) Is displayed, the “display mode for variably displaying the circle mark and the cross mark” is displayed in the normal map change area Dm5.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), when a win is won in the general drawing lottery, an effect is performed in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses the bridge 851 and heads for the race venue 852. This effect is caused by causing the ball to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a that has been moved to the closed state (protruding state) based on what was won in the general drawing lottery and to enter the second entrance 3640. This indicates a game, and the operation state of the electric accessory 3640a is expressed using the bridge 851 erected state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640. The display content is set so as to express whether or not to play the ball by whether or not the character 811 reaches the race venue 852.

  In this way, by executing an effect reminiscent of actual game play using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to inform the player of complex game play in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the state of FIG. 199 (a), neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has started to change, and neither the special figure 1 display area Dm1 nor the special figure 2 display area Dm2 A display mode indicating that no special symbol variation is performed is displayed. In the sub display area Ds, the characters “Preparing for the race” are displayed, which suggests the contents of the future production.

  Here, a brief description will be given of the flow of effects performed during the time reduction state in the present embodiment, which is executed based on passing a sphere through the through gate 67 in a state where the time reduction state is set. When winning in the normal symbol lottery (ordinary symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ball is allowed to flow down onto the electric accessory 3640a in the open state (protruding state) to the second entrance 3640. An effect corresponding to the game for entering the ball (effect directed to the race venue) is executed.

  When a ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the second special symbol starts to change, the character 811 arrives at the race venue, and the race effect shown in FIG. 199 (b) described later is executed. The The content of this race effect depends on the lottery result of the second special symbol being executed (result of determination / decision, variation time) and the inflow state of the ball into the second passage 660b where the ball easily enters the specific area 650V. Is set.

  After that, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small hit game, an effect that the character 811 wears first as the race result is executed (see FIG. 201 (b)). In this way, each game executed during the short-time state, that is, a game that is won by winning a normal symbol, a game that causes a ball to enter the second entrance 3640, and a lottery of the second special symbol is won by a small bonus. The game result of the game for passing the ball to the specific area 650V during the game to be played and the small hit game can be notified to the player using a series of effects. Therefore, the player can grasp the game result by looking at the effect (race effect) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can provide an easy-to-understand game. .

  Here, the display screen during the race effect will be described by returning to FIG. 199 (b). In the state where the display shown in FIG. 199 (a) is executed, that is, the normal symbol (second symbol) is won during the short-time state, and the electric accessory 3640a is variably operated to the open state (allowable state). When the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a and enters the second entrance 3640, the race start screen shown in FIG. 199 (b) is displayed.

  On the race start screen, a display mode is displayed in which the character 811 simulating a rabbit executes a race with a rival 860 simulating a turtle. The state shown in FIG. 199 (b) is a state in which the first special symbol variation is executed for the first time after the time reduction state is set, and the second special symbol (special feature) is displayed in the special diagram 2 variation region Dm2. FIG. 2) displays a display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating that the variable display is being performed, and the characters “9 remaining race entries” are displayed in the remaining short time notification area Dm6 as the remaining short time. . Then, in the sub display area Ds, the characters “Go to the first place” are displayed in order to guide the result of the race effect corresponding to the game result advantageous to the player.

  Next, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is executed during the short-running state and the lottery result is out of place, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (a) is displayed. In FIG. 200 (a), a stop display mode of “3,4,6” indicating that the lottery result of FIG. 2 is out of place is displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation area Dm2, and in the main display area Dm. An effect mode (display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and cannot make a goal) indicating that the race effect has ended is displayed. In the secondary display area Ds, characters “Expect next time” are displayed to indicate that the current special figure 2 fluctuation was not a game result advantageous to the player and that the short-time state continues. .

  On the other hand, when the lottery shown in FIG. 2 is a win, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (b) or 201 (a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the present embodiment, the ball passage is configured such that two flow paths are formed to flow down the ball toward the V winning device 650 that is opened at the time of winning the small hit. The time required to reach the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hit game is varied depending on which flow path the ball passes through. Further, the easiness of passage of the sphere to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is made different depending on the flow path through which the sphere passes.

  Therefore, during the special symbol change in the case of winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2), the flow path in which the ball is flowing toward the V winning device 650 is detected, and the detection result It is comprised so that a production | presentation aspect may differ based on. Specifically, when the ball flows down the second passage (delay passage) 660b that is advantageous to the player during the small hit fluctuation of FIG. 2, the effect mode shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. When the ball flows down the first passage (normal passage) 660a which is disadvantageous to the player during the small hit fluctuation of FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second passage 660b), it is shown in FIG. 201 (a). An effect mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 200 (b), in order to show that the ball is likely to pass the specific area 650V in the small hit game executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed, the main display is shown as a race effect. An effect in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 in the area Dm is executed. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode (display mode in which the aura is displayed), and the player is informed that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will be first in the current race performance. In order to do so, the characters “speed up” are displayed. In addition, the “large chance” character is also displayed in the sub display area Ds as a comment to indicate that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will be first in the current race performance.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 201 (a), as the race effect, an effect mode in which the character 811 and the rival 860 aim for the goal while playing the dead heat is displayed. As described above, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is the same small hit type, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 depending on the flow path through which the sphere flows. Since it is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not the game result is advantageous to the player by changing the effect mode to be performed, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The player can be interested in the contents of a series of effects (race effects).

  When the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, that is, when it is determined that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, the effect mode shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, the rival 860 reaches the goal before the character 811 in the effect mode shown in FIG. The effect mode to be displayed is displayed.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the first short time state (short time state A) that is advantageous to the player as the short time state, and the second short time state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first short time state. The state (short-time state B) can be set, and when the short-time state A (first short-time state) is set, the small hit type of small hit corresponding to the jackpot game to which the short-time state is granted The ball is configured to pass to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 only when the winning is won.

  In other words, in the state where the short-time state A is set, when the big hit game is executed based on the small win, the short time state that is advantageous to the player after the big win game is surely set. doing.

  Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) the player that the time reduction state A has been set, the effect mode shown in FIG. 202B is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed. FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time reduction state A is set.

  As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the time reduction state A is set, an effect mode in which a seabed race in which a background showing the seabed is set is set. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment “Luxury prize confirmed when winning the race !?” is displayed, which suggests that the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. By suggesting that the short-time state A is set by changing the background when the race is executed in this way, it is possible to set an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand, and at the same time during the actual race Since the production can be made common, the volume of image data used for setting the production mode can be reduced.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, a plurality of background images can be set in addition to the normal background and the seabed background described above as the background of the effect during the race. You can set a background that mimics the background, a background that mimics the sea of trees, a background that mimics the city, and so on. Each background has a different ratio set according to the currently set time-short state (time-short state A, time-short state B). Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting which time-short state is currently set based on the background type set as the background of the effect during the race.

  Furthermore, a measuring means for measuring the number of times that the time-short state A has been set continuously is provided, and can be set only when the number of times that the time-short state A has been set continuously reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times). A background may be provided. As a result, it is possible to provide a sense of superiority by providing a sense of security that a short time state that is advantageous to the player is set, and notifying surrounding players that the game result is special. .

  The characteristic presentation mode executed in the seventh embodiment has been described above, but the above-described content is merely an example, and other presentation modes may be displayed. For example, in the production example described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, the production example in which the production mode corresponding to the game result is set is shown. However, the production mode is not limited to this, and the production mode can be easily set according to the game result. You may comprise so that it may differ.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a state where the effect mode of FIG. 199 (b) is displayed, that is, in a state where a ball has entered the second entrance 3640 during the short-running state (starting fluctuation of special figure 2). The display mode of the rival 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery this time. For example, the advantage small hit (small hit A) that is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 lottery. Rival 860 is displayed in the case of winning, in the case of winning in the disadvantaged small hit (C per hit), which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the advantageous small win, and in the case of not winning in the small hit (winning out) You may comprise so that the kind of character set as an aspect may differ.

  By configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, future game contents, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery and the information that can predict the winning type of winning are given to the player. Can be provided.

  In addition, at the time when the special figure 2 variation is started, if the production mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the current special map 2 variation is displayed (set), the content of the displayed production mode is grasped. However, there is a problem that the act of continuing the game is performed only when the lottery result is advantageous to the player, but in this embodiment, when the ball enters the second entrance 3640, If the ball is not fired, it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

  Thereby, even if the production mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the current special map 2 variation is displayed (set) at the time when the special map 2 variation is started, after confirming the display mode, Since it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not the V winning device 650 is to receive a ball during the small hit game, the above-described problem can be solved.

  In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199 (b) can be started from the timing at which the special figure 2 variation is started, the period during which the race is executed (the performance execution period during the race) can be lengthened. The production effect can be enhanced. Specifically, since the variation period of the special symbol can be included in the performance execution period during the race, for example, it is longer to win the win (big hit, small win) by the special symbol lottery than when it is out of place By configuring so that the variable period can be easily set, it can be assumed that the longer the effect execution period during the race is, the longer the period during which the effect is executed will be considered to have been won by the player. Thus, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the production (winning suggestion production) that suggests that the winner has been won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the start of the special figure 2 change until the end of the small hit game, the determination by the determining means (special figure 2) is executed, and then the determination result is a predetermined determination result. Using the specific game (small hit game) executed in the case of (small hit), the character 811 performs an effect (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)) for racing. When the race starts (see FIG. 199 (b)), a value (information) for indicating the remaining short number of times (remaining number of times excluding the special figure variation currently being executed) displayed in the remaining short number of times notification area Dm6 is raced. The display is continued until the end (FIG. 202 (a)), that is, until the small hit game executed after the special figure change (special figure 2 change) ends.

  In this way, even if the special figure change is finished and the small hit game is executed, the player can know the effect during the race by not changing the display mode of the remaining short time notification area Dm6. It can be easily notified.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a race is performed using a single special map change (lottery) and a period until the small hit game ends when the special bonus lottery is won. Since the medium production is configured to be executed, there is a problem in that the production execution period during the race is greatly different based on the special drawing lottery result. In other words, if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the small hit game is not executed, so the period during which the small hit game is executed cannot be included in the in-race production execution period, and the in-race production execution is performed. There was a problem that the period was shortened.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since there are at least a special symbol lottery result and a small win game result as elements for branching the production mode of the mid-race production, the mid-race production unless winning a small hit The stage of play set at the end of the game (see, for example, FIG. 200 (b) and FIG. 201 (a)) cannot be provided to the player, and the player is bored with the game before making the player enjoy a variety of effects. There was a risk of problems.

  In order to solve such a problem, for example, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variation time longer than the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is small hit, specifically, A variation pattern (gase effect variation pattern) in which a variation time that is similar to (the same as) the sum of the variation time set when winning a small bonus and the small bonus game time is set (the same variation) When it is configured to be configurable, and this variation pattern for the gasse effect is set, as a production during the race, it is won as a small hit with special symbol variation, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game It is good to comprise so that the production | presentation aspect (refer FIG. 202 (a)) which shows that may be set. Thereby, even when a small win is not won in the special drawing lottery, it is possible to allow the player to experience the production mode set at the end of the production during the race.

  In addition, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing lottery, set the same variation time as the variation time set when you win the small bonus, The opening operation of the jackpot game may be set so that the game is in the same opening operation mode. As a result, even if a big win is won in a special symbol lottery, the effect during the race can be executed, so that the player is provided with an effect mode in which the result of the effect during the race is advantageous to the player. Can be made easier.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to execute the effect during the race using a period (a special figure variation period, a small hit execution period) set based on one special symbol lottery. Without limitation, the effect during the race may be executed using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol lotteries. By configuring in this way, for example, when the lottery results of special symbols are out of continuity, it is possible to execute an effect during the race using the continuous special symbol fluctuation period.

  Therefore, even if the variation time set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is shorter than when the lottery result of the special symbol is win, it is set at the end of the production during the race. An effect mode can be provided to the player. In addition, in order to set one production mode using a plurality of deviation variations, a special design lottery corresponding to each special drawing lottery is shown to indicate to the player that the special symbol lottery was out. Compared with the case where it sets, the frequency | count that the effect which alert | reports to a player that special drawing lottery is removed can be reduced.

  As described above, the contents of the effect in the case where the short time state is set have been described, but besides that, for example, by winning the jackpot type in which the short time state A is set after the end of the big hit game by lottery of the first special symbol In this case, a special suggestion effect for notifying that effect may be executed. For example, a special display mode “VVV” is used instead of the display mode of the third symbol that is normally stopped and displayed. Three symbols may be stopped and displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to promptly notify the player that a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, so that the game can be performed with confidence for a long period of time.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 213. FIG. 203 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment includes a first random number 7 table 202fa, a first per type selection 7 table 202fb, a second random number 7 table 202fc, a variation pattern 7 table 202fd, A small hit type selection 7 table 202fe and an open scenario 7 table 202ff are provided. The configuration (table) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except “7” used for identifying that it was used in the seventh embodiment) ) Is the same as the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The first random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used in the same application as the first random number table 202a used in the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first When the random number 7 table 202fa matches the value of the random number that is a big hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types: a special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol. However, only the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol is set to a random number value that is a small hit (see FIG. 204). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that will be a small hit (by setting only one), the bonus to the player (big hit or small hit) for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery ) The degree of expectation for grant can be varied.

  Here, the contents of the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204 (b) is the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random table 202fa1. FIG. 204 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. In the first random number 7 table 202fa, a random value (determination value) determined to be a big hit and a random value (determination value) determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery are set. It is a table.

  Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, among the values of the first random number counter C1, “0 to 4” are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpots. It is defined as a judgment value (that is, deviation). Then, in the first special symbol lottery, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any one of “0 to 4”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, among the values of the first random number counter C1, “0-4” is defined as the jackpot determination value, and “5-504” is small. It is defined as a hit determination value, and “505 to 999” is defined as a determination value other than that (that is, a deviation). Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined. When the value is “0 to 4”, it is determined to be a big hit, and “5 to 504” In some cases it is determined to be a small hit.

  The first hit type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used for the same purpose as the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first hit type selection counter C2 Is used to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won with reference to the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 205 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 at the time of lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is a selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 at the time of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) . Thereby, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 is different from the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, or each of a plurality of types of jackpot types is selected. Different ratios can be used to provide players with different game characteristics between games using the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and games using the second special symbol (Special Figure 2). Can improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202fb1 used at the time of lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (b). FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, if the random value is any one of “0-9”, the big hit type is “big hit A”, and any of “10-49” The jackpot type is “Big Jack B”, and the jackpot type is “50 to 99”.

  “Big jackpot A” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds as a jackpot game is 15 rounds (R), and the game state after the jackpot is set to the short-time state (actual short-time number 10 times). Then, “time reduction A” that is advantageous to the player is set as the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot. This “big hit A” is set to “short time A” which is more advantageous even in the short time state where the game state after the big hit is advantageous for the player in addition to the large number of rounds of the big hit game, This is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random values for which “big hit A” is selected, so that the big win is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol (special drawing 1). In such a case, the ratio of selecting “big hit A” is 10%.

  In the present embodiment, when the short-time state is set, the second special symbol lottery (Special Fig. 2 lottery), which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (Special Fig. 1 lottery), The second entrance 3640 is configured so that a ball can easily enter, and in the short time state, the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure) 2) The number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) and the number of times (total number of times) reached 100 times, or the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 10 times. In this case, the time saving state is configured to end.

  By configuring in this way, even if the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1), which is disadvantageous for the player, is executed immediately after the time reduction state is set, the lottery of the special Fig. 2 is performed a specified number of times ( 10 times) can be executed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Thus, for example, when the time reduction state is terminated when the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation number of the special figure 2 in the time reduction state reaches a prescribed number (10 times). In order to prevent the special figure 1 change (lottery) from being executed when the short-time state is set after the jackpot, a game in which the special figure 1 hold is not secured (a game that does not fire a ball continuously) It is possible to prevent the so-called “stopping game”) from being executed and improve the operation of the game.

  “Big jackpot B” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds as a jackpot game is 5 rounds (R), and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the short-time state (10 times short-time). Then, “time reduction B”, which is disadvantageous to the player, is set as the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot. This “big hit B” has a smaller number of rounds of the big hit game than the “big hit A” described above, but since the gaming state after the big hit is set to a short time state that is advantageous to the player, the big hit is advantageous to the player. However, “Time B”, which is disadvantageous to the player, is set in comparison with the time saving state “Time A” which is set when “Big Jack A” is won.

  In other words, the jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which a short-time state is set after the jackpot ends, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of the short-time state set after the jackpot end are games that are more than the above-mentioned “big hit A” It is disadvantageous for the person. In other words, “big hit B” is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than “big hit A” described above. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 40 random number values for which “big hit B” is selected, so that the big win is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol (special drawing 1). In such a case, the ratio that “big hit B” is selected is 40%.

  “Big jackpot C” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five rounds (R) as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state (non-short-time state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, the “jackpot C” is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 random number values for which “big hit C” is selected, so that the big win is determined by drawing the first special symbol (special drawing 1). In such a case, the ratio of selecting “big hit C” is 50%.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 15 rounds (R) of jackpot games (bonanzas) at the rate of 10% when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) Short time A) is selected after the end, and 5 round (R) jackpot game (time B after the jackpot end) is selected at a rate of 40%. In other words, a jackpot is selected in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is shifted to the short-time state at a rate of 50%.

  In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and the time-saving state (time-shortening A that is advantageous after the jackpot is over). ) Is set, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot (5 rounds (R)) as the jackpot type that will be advantageous to the player, the type of the short-time state set after the jackpot ends, Are both jackpot type “jackpot B” that is more disadvantageous to the player than “jackpot A”, and the jackpot type “jackpot C” that is most disadvantageous to the player is not set after the jackpot is finished. Although it is configured to be possible, other jackpot types may be configured to be settable. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and the time-saving type The number of rounds of jackpot type and jackpot game for which “time-short B” is set is small (5 rounds (R)), but the jackpot type for which “time-short A” is set as the short-time type and the number of rounds of jackpot game It is also possible to set a jackpot type in which there is the largest number (15 rounds (R)) and the time reduction state is not set.

  In addition, as a concept of whether or not the jackpot type that is set is advantageous to the player, the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot is finished as in this embodiment The concept of advantage / disadvantage may be specified, the concept of advantage / disadvantage may be specified based only on the number of rounds of jackpot game, or the advantage / disadvantage may be determined only based on the gaming state set after the jackpot ends A concept may be defined.

  Next, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used at the time of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (c). FIG. 205 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of “0 to 89”, the big hit type is “big hit D” and the random number value is “90 to 99”. The jackpot type in the case of any of "" is defined as "jackpot E".

  “Big jackpot D” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds as a jackpot game is 15 rounds (R), and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the short-time state (actual short-time number 10 times). Then, “time reduction A” that is advantageous to the player is set as the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot. That is, the “big hit D” is a big hit type having the same contents as the “big hit A” described above, and is the big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 90 random number values for which “big hit D” is selected, so that the big win is determined by drawing the second special symbol (special drawing 2). In such a case, the ratio of “big hit D” being selected is 90%.

  “Big jackpot E” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds as a jackpot game is 15 rounds (R), and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the short-time state (actual short-time number 10 times). Then, “Time B”, which is more disadvantageous to the player than “Time A”, is set as the time saving state set after the big hit. That is, the “big hit E” is a disadvantageous jackpot type than the “big hit D” described above. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random value values for which “big hit E” is selected, so that the big win is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2). In such a case, the ratio of “big hit E” being selected is 10%.

  In other words, in this embodiment, when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, 15 round (R) jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot ends, a time reduction state is always set. ing. This provides a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player when winning the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery than winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery. 2 The lottery with special symbols is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is five, but is not limited thereto, and may be four or less, or may be configured to provide six or more. Also, different jackpot types may be selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if they are the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type that is executed with a larger number of rounds when a big hit is made with the second special symbol, the player with the second special symbol can be more successful It can be expected. Therefore, hitting in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the game preference in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the player wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be performed for a longer time.

  Further, the type of jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. You may comprise so that only a range may differ. As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The second random number 7 table 202fc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in the above-described embodiments, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is used to determine whether or not there is a winning combination with reference to the second random number 7 table 202fc.

  In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, when the normal symbol has a low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and when the probability of being a normal symbol is higher than the low probability (normal) The number of values corresponding to the win is set differently depending on the time period in which the symbol is in a short time state. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of operation patterns (opening operation patterns) of the electric accessory 3640a that is executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won. As a result, since the timing of opening the electric charge 3640a can be varied based on the normal symbol (second symbol), the timing at which the electric charge 3640a is released (the ball enters the second entrance 3640). It is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is fired by aiming at a timing at which the ball can be made.

  Here, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the second random number 7 table 202fc is configured so that “per common map”, “B per common map”, and “out” can be set as the second per category type. The second hit type is defined on the basis of the gaming state (normal probability high probability state or low probability state) and the acquired value of the second random number counter C4.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal symbol low probability state (normal state), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is defined as “0” and “A per ordinary figure” is defined as “1”. “Regular B” is defined, and “Out” is defined in the range of “2 to 99”. When the gaming state is a normal symbol high probability state (time-short state), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is defined as “0 to 79”, and “80 per game” is defined. “B” is defined in the range of “˜98”, and “Out” is defined in “99”.

  In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is 2% (2/100). In the case of winning the winning combination, “A per ordinary figure” and “B per ordinary figure” are selected at a rate of 50%.

  If the gaming state is a normal symbol high probability state (short-time state), the probability of winning in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is 99% (99/100), In this case, “A per common map” is selected at a rate of about 80% (80/99), and “B per standard map” is selected at a rate of about 20% (20/99). doing.

  In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the high probability state of the normal symbol is higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol so that the probability of winning is high. It is configured so that “A” is easily selected. In this way, a game is performed while expecting that a more advantageous gaming state is set for the player by changing the winning probability and the hit type of the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the gaming state. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a at the time of winning the second symbol is made different according to the gaming state and the hit type, and the first symbol is displayed in the low probability state of the normal symbol. An action pattern that is more advantageous to the player when winning the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol, that is, winning the symbol at the second entrance 3640 than when winning at the second symbol The operation pattern is set so that it can be easily performed. Thereby, winning in the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as a condition for giving a privilege advantageous to the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 206 (a), the contents of the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a different operation pattern is set according to the winning type selected, and when “A” is set in the high probability state, the opening period is set to 0.00. When an operation pattern of 1 second (S), an open period of 2 seconds (S), and an ending period of 3.5 seconds (S) is executed and “B per common map” is set, the opening period is 0.1. The operation pattern of second (S), open period is 2.5 seconds (S), and ending period is 3 seconds (S) is executed.

  Even if any of the operation patterns is executed, if one ball enters the second entrance 3640 while the electric accessory 3640a is in the opening operation (the opening period is being set), the closing condition is satisfied. It is established, and the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, as a condition for ending the open state of the electric accessory 3640a, a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined open period is reached, and a predetermined number are the second entrance Conditions that are satisfied when the player enters 3640 are set. As a result, when the winner of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is won, a large number of balls enter the second entrance 3640, and the player is given excessive benefits (prize balls). Can be suppressed.

  In addition, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, an ending period longer than the period (3 seconds) in which the sphere flows down the second passage (delay passage) 660b is set. Therefore, even if you win consecutively per winning figure, if you win a winning feature by the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the preceding winning figure, It is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which a ball that has flowed down the second passage 660b based on the usual figure wins the V winning device 650.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used so that the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game at an unintended timing based on a plurality of consecutive game results (ordinary drawing lottery results). It is configured so that an appropriate game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when winning continuously per normal game, a ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small hit game. You may comprise so that it may become easy to do. In this case, for example, as the hit type for the second hit (per common figure), the hit type for which the opening period (0.1 second), the open period (2 seconds), and the ending period (0.1 second) are set (normal C) per figure can be set, and if the win is won again for the next normal figure change won for the normal figure C, it will flow into the second passage 660b during the hit game corresponding to the next normal figure change. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a ball may pass the specific area | region 650V during the small hit game won by the special figure 2 lottery performed based on C per common figure.

  With such a configuration, an unexpected game can be provided to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when such a game is adopted, an effect during the race (FIG. 200 (b)) is executed in correspondence with C per ordinary figure, and then an effect that temporarily loses the race (FIG. 202 (a)). When the delay passage entrance switch 660e1 detects that the ball has flowed into the second passage 660b based on the next common figure, the reversion effect after losing the race is executed. It is better to configure as follows. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect corresponding to an unexpected game for the player.

  Furthermore, there is provided a general figure pre-discriminating means capable of discriminating in advance the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired when passing through the through gate 67, When it was determined that the general chart winning information to be won per C and the common chart winning information to be won per multi-drawing were continuously stored, it was supported for a plurality of consecutive standard winning prizes. You may comprise so that production (continuous production) may be performed. In this way, by performing the pre-reading process of the general drawing winning information, it is possible to set the production in a state in which the lottery result of the common drawing lottery (the second symbol lottery) has been determined in advance, so that the production has a high production effect. Can be executed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the winning combination 3640a is opened for a period in which a ball can enter the second entrance 3640 as a winning game that is executed when the winning is won. Although it is comprised so that only a winning game may be performed, it is not restricted to this, for example, a ball cannot be made to enter into the 2nd entrance 3640, but a ball is made to flow into the 2nd channel 660b It is also possible to configure the electric accessory 3640a to be in an open state for a period during which the electric power can be used (for example, 1 second).

  The variation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. Corresponding to the result of the lottery and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1, variation patterns in which different variation times are set are defined.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG. 208 (a) is defined in the first short-time variation pattern table 202fd2 defined by the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second short time variation pattern table 202fd3 defined by the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208 (a), the contents of the first time variation pattern table 202fd2 will be described. This variation pattern table 202fd2 for first time reduction is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the time reduction state A (time reduction A) is set as the gaming state, and is a second time variation variation pattern table 202fd3 (time reduction) described later. When winning a small hit (for example, small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player over the state B (change pattern table that is referred to when the time B is set), in the V winning device 650 The variation time is defined so that the variation time that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific region 650V is easily set.

  Here, the contents defined in the first time variation pattern table 202fd2 will be described in detail. When the special symbol type is Special Figure 1 and the lottery result is out, the obtained variation type counter CS1 is obtained. Regardless of the value of, if the fluctuation pattern is defined as "extra short deviation" (variation time of 0.5 seconds) and the lottery result is a big win, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1. “Super short hit” (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified. That is, when the time reduction state A (time reduction A) is set, that is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, it is always 0.5 seconds. A variation pattern is set.

  If the special symbol type is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of place, the fluctuation pattern is “extra short” (variation time 0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1. ) Is specified, and when the lottery results are small hit A and small hit B, the fluctuation pattern is defined as “long small hit” (fluctuation time 3 seconds). (Variation time 0.5 seconds) ”is defined. In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, when the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, “short jackpot (fluctuation time 1 second)” is defined as the fluctuation pattern, When it is in the range of “150 to 198”, “medium big hit (variation time 30 seconds)” is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

  With this configuration, when the first time variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, when the time variation A is set as the gaming state, a small variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is set. When the winning A or the small winning B is won, the ball is configured to easily pass the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. On the other hand, when winning a small hit C in which a variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is set, immediately after the ball enters the second entrance 3640 (the second special symbol lottery is executed). Short hitting game is executed immediately after), and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 ends before the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is discharged from the second flow path tb. Can be made difficult to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the big hit game executed based on the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the small hit game corresponding to the small hit C, the game state is given to the player. It is configured so that a normal state that is disadvantageous is set, and after the jackpot game that is executed based on winning other small hits (small hit A, small hit B), the game state A time saving state (time saving A or time saving B) that is advantageous to the player is set.

  As described above, when the time reduction A is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern is set with reference to the first time reduction fluctuation pattern table 202fd2, and the small hit that is advantageous to the player by the set fluctuation pattern. When winning a category, it is easy to execute a jackpot game via a small hit game, so it is easy to set an advantageous game state continuously after the next jackpot game ends, and to let the player play the game with peace of mind Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208 (b), the contents of the second time shortening variation pattern table 202fd3 will be described. FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second shortening variation pattern table 202fd3. The second short time variation pattern table 202fd3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the short time B is set as the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (b), the second time-varying variation pattern table 202fd3 is set when the first special time variation pattern table 202fd2 is won in a small win in the second special symbol lottery. The difference is that the variation pattern (variation time) is different, and the other elements are the same.

  Specifically, when the lottery result is a small hit A, the fluctuation pattern is defined as “long small hit” (variation time 3 seconds), and when the lottery is B, the fluctuation pattern “short short hit” (variation time) 0.5 seconds) is specified, and in the case of small hit C, when the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 169”, the variation pattern is “long small hit” (variation time 3 seconds) ) Is defined, and in the range of “170 to 198”, “short per minute” (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

  That is, when the variation pattern table 202fd3 for second time reduction is referred to, that is, in the state where the time reduction B is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state. Since a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is set when C is won, a game state in which a normal state is more easily set as a game state after the next big hit game than the state in which the time saving A is set as described above. Become.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot game is more easily executed based on the lottery result than the first special symbol. It is possible to set a short-time state that is easier to execute, and further, as a short-time state, a gaming state (short-time state) in which the game state (short-time state) that is advantageous to the player after the next jackpot ends is easily set again, and the next jackpot end A gaming state (short time B) in which the gaming state (short time state) that is advantageous to the player later is less likely to be set than the short time A is configured to be settable.

  With this configuration, when a gaming state (short time A) that is most advantageous to the player is set, the gaming state shifts to a normal state only by executing a single big hit game. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with peace of mind. In addition, even when the short time B is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than the short time A, the probability that the short time A is set after the jackpot game is set higher than when the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the aim of setting the time reduction A eagerly.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 208 (b), in the seventh embodiment, the ball is a V winning device 650 even in the case of winning the small hit C, which is set as the normal state as the gaming state after the big hit game is finished. Because it is configured to be able to select a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds) that is difficult to pass through the specific region 650V in the inside, not only the winning result of small hits, Can also interest players. In this case, for example, it may be configured to notify the player that the small hit C has been won, and then perform an effect of inquiring whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 650V. With such a configuration, a situation in which a game state that is disadvantageous to the player is set because the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V in spite of having won the player with an unfavorable small hit. This makes it possible for the player to be aware that it has been possible to avoid this, and to provide satisfaction.

  In addition, a means for measuring the number of times of winning a small hit that is disadvantageous to the player (the number of times winning of the small hit C) is provided, and the number of times that the execution of the big hit game based on the small hit C is avoided (the small hit of C The number of times that the ball has not passed through the specific area 650V during the game may be displayed. As a result, the player can be made to know more specifically that the situation in which the gaming state disadvantageous to the player is set can be avoided, and whether the currently set gaming state is the short time A. It can be made easier for the player to predict whether the time is B or not.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 208 (a) and 208 (b), a data table (variation pattern) that is referred to when a special symbol variation pattern is selected in accordance with the set short time state. Table), the game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific region 650V (time A) and the game state in which it is difficult to pass (time B) when winning a small hit that is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be settable. In other words, it is possible to set a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (short time B) and a game state in which it is difficult to pass (time short A) when winning a small hit that is disadvantageous to the player. ing.

  In addition, according to the seventh embodiment, the game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V and the game in which it is difficult to pass according to the type of the time saving state (time reduction A, time reduction B) that has been set. The state can be set. More specifically, when the time reduction A is set as the gaming state, the first time reduction variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the first short-time variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% at the time of winning the small hit (100% at the time of winning the small hit A and 100 at the time of winning the small hit B, 100% %) Is set such that the variation time during which the sphere can pass through the specific region 650V is set.

  On the other hand, when the time B is set as the gaming state, the second time shortening variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected. When selecting the special symbol variation pattern with reference to this second time variation pattern table 202fd3, about 28.5% at the time of winning the small hit (100% at the time of winning the small hit A and C winning at the small hit C The variation time during which the sphere can pass through the specific area 650V is set in about 85% of the time).

  In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set at the time of winning the small hit is made different according to the type of the short time state set and specified at the time of winning the small hit The region 650 </ b> V is configured to have a different ratio at which a variation pattern that allows a sphere to pass is selected. Therefore, the probability of executing the big hit game based on the small win is different during the short time state depending on the type of the short time state set.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, since the transition condition that the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 10 times is set as the transition condition (time shortening end condition) for transitioning the time shortening state to the normal state, the time shortening is performed. The transition condition can be more easily established when the time B is set as the type of state, because the time B is less likely to be executed when the small win is won.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above, it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning the small hit, which is advantageous to the player, and the short time when the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V when winning the small win. The short time A when the state is short, and the short time B when the ball is easy to pass through the specific area 650V at the time of winning the small hit, which is disadvantageous to the player, and the short time when the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V at the time of winning the small hit However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one small hit type is set, and a variation pattern that allows a sphere to pass through the specific area 650V when the small hit is selected is set. The variation pattern table to be referred to may be configured to be different according to the set time-short state type so that only the ratio is different.

  Also, depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, the transition condition (time-shorting end condition) for shifting the time-saving state to the normal state may be set differently. For example, the time-saving state advantageous to the player (For example, short-time end condition that is satisfied with a small number of special symbol fluctuations) May be set. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed during the period in which the short-time state is set greatly varies depending on the type of the short-time state to be set. Even if it is set, it is possible to play a game eagerly aiming for a big hit game.

  Furthermore, since the game content expected during the short time period can be made different according to the type of the short time state set, specifically, the short time end condition is easily established, and the specific area 650V at the time of winning the small win When the short time state is set so that it is easy for the ball to pass, it is expected to win a small win during the short time state, the short time end condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the specific area 650V is When the short time state is set in which it is difficult for the player to pass, it is possible to expect the ball to pass through the specific area 650V in the small hit won during the short time state, so that the player gets bored with the game early. Can be suppressed.

  The small hit type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used for the same purpose as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. This is referred to when selecting a small hitting type, and is configured such that a different small hitting type is selected according to the value of the acquired small hitting type counter C5.

  Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the small hitting type selection 7 table 202fe, three types of small hitting A to small hitting C as the small hitting types of the second special symbol are selected by the value of the small hitting type counter C5. It is prescribed as follows. Specifically, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of “0 to 19” is “small hit A (10R real time short 10 big hits when passing V)” And if it is one of “20 to 89”, the small hit type is “small hit B (10R real time short 10 big hits when passing V)” and any of “90 to 99” The small hit type is “small hit C (short passing big 10R when passing V)”.

  Then, when the jackpot based on the winning of “Small Bonus A” ends, “Time Loss A” is set as the gaming state, and when the jackpot based on the winning of “Small Bonus B” ends, “Time Shortened B” is set as the gaming state. Then, when the big win based on the winning of “Small C” ends, the “normal state” is set as the gaming state.

  Here, each small hit type (small hit A to small hit C) is executed after the small hit game ends when the ball passes the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of “Small Bonus A”, the 10R real short time 10-hit jackpot is set, and after the small hit A is executed, the jackpot that the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state is executed, After that, 10 time-short games (a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 100 times in total or the variation of the second special symbol is executed 10 times) are set as the time-shortening state.

  In addition, in the case of “Small B”, 10 rounds (R) real time short 10 times big is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state. The bonus game is executed, and after that, 10 time-saving games (a period until the special symbol variation is added 100 times in total or the second special symbol variation is executed 10 times) are set as the time-saving state. It is configured. In the case of “Small Bonus C”, the 10R hourless big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the jackpot is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state. After the big hit game, the short time state is not set, and the normal state is set.

  As described above, depending on the selected small hit type, the contents of the big hit game executed after the end of the small hit game and the game state set after the big hit game can be made different.

  Specifically, “small hit A” has a lot of rounds executed in the jackpot game (10R), and a short time state (short time A) that is most advantageous to the player after the big hit game ends is set. The jackpot B is set as the most advantageous jackpot for the player, and the jackpot B has a large number of rounds executed in the jackpot game (10R) and is set to be the same as the jackpot A described above. The time-short state that is set later is set as a small hit that is more disadvantageous than the small hit A because the “short-time B” that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time short A is set. “Small Bonus C” is set as the most unfavorable jackpot for the player because the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is large (10R), but the short-time state is not set after the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot game executed when the ball passes the specific area 650V during the jackpot game is configured to be a round game of 10 rounds (R) regardless of the type of the jackpot winning. Thus, during the jackpot game executed at the small hit opportunity, the player can easily understand the type of the jackpot won this time by grasping the number of round games (number of rounds) executed as the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a jackpot game having a different number of rounds may be set for each jackpot type. As a result, since the degree of advantage for each small hit type can be varied greatly, the game can be performed while expecting the player to win the most advantageous small hit type.

  In the present embodiment, as the termination condition for the short-time state, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is 10 times (first termination condition), or the number of times of variation of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. By configuring in this manner, when the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the short time state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special diagram 1 after the jackpot ends) ) Will not end the time-saving state. In addition, when the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is changed, the second termination condition described above is satisfied and the time-short state can be terminated. Therefore, any special symbol (second (Special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

  Next, the winning type won in the short time state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol) and the ball flow to the second entrance 3640 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the present seventh embodiment, the winning combination is won per universal drawing, and the electric accessory 3640a is changed to the protruding state (see FIG. 198), so that the electric accessory 3640a is moved over the ball. , The state where the ball easily enters the second entrance 3640 is constructed.

  When the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is established, the electric accessory 3640a performs the closing operation, and the ball that has flowed down on the electric accessory 3640a at that time is provided immediately below the electric accessory 3640a. It flows into the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb. Here, the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path ta reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660 after a flow-down period of 0.5 seconds, and has flowed down the second flow path tb. Reaches the V winning device 650 after a flow-down period of 3 seconds.

  Next, a case where a ball enters the second entrance 3640 will be described as a closing condition for the electric accessory 3640a. When the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied by the ball entering the second entrance 3640, the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed and the second special symbol lottery is executed. . Then, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, it is possible to set an advantageous time reduction (time reduction A) that is advantageous to the player as a time reduction state, and an disadvantageous time reduction (time reduction B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time reduction. A different variation pattern is set according to the state.

  The open scenario 7 table 202ff is a win type (a big win game, a small win game) that is executed when a win (big win, small win) is won in a special symbol lottery. If the winning table is won, the open scenario corresponding to the set hit type is read and the hit game is executed.

  Here, the contents of the open scenario 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario 7 table 202ff. This open scenario 7 table 202ff is a winning device (variable winning device) that allows a ball to enter in a special game (a jackpot game, a jackpot game) that is executed when a lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot or a jackpot 65, operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation of the V winning device 650) according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) won is defined.

  As described above, a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that is opened according to a winning result (big win or small win) and a winning type (big winning type, small winning type) or an opening operation content (opening scenario). ) Can be set in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big or small win, the player can enjoy what type of winning it can.

  In the opening scenario 7 table 202ff, the start interval period during the winning game corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) (the period from when the winning game is started until the winning device is first opened) ), The opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between rounds) The period in which the winning device set for the game is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (until the start of a new special symbol variation is allowed) Period)), respectively.

  Specifically, the winning type corresponding to “big hit A, D, E” corresponds to “2 seconds” as the start interval period and “variable winning device 65” as “15 rounds” as the opening operation mode of the winning device. In the release operation mode of “continuing 29 seconds” as one round game, “1 second” is defined as the interval period between rounds, and “4 seconds” is defined as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpot A, D, E, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is released for 15 rounds is executed, and a lot of winning balls are paid out to the player. It becomes a jackpot game. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is a jackpot A or D, the jackpot A or D is the most advantageous for the player because a short-time state is set, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends. It will be a big hit that will be granted.

  Next, corresponding to the big hits B and C, “2 seconds” is set as the start interval period, “variable winning device 65” is set to “5 rounds”, and one round game is set as the opening operation mode of the winning device. In the release operation mode in which “continue 29 seconds” is released, “1 second” is defined as the interval period between rounds, and “4 seconds” is defined as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot of B, C, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is released for five rounds is executed, and the player is given a jackpot A, D, E. This is a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of the corresponding jackpot game is paid out.

  Next, in response to the small hits A to C, the start interval period is “0.1 second”, and the winning device releasing operation mode is “V winning device 650” is opened to “first round”. When the ball passes through the specific area 650V (V passes) during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds that is set as the ball-making time after the opening operation is completed), “variable “Winning device 65” is released to “2nd to 11th round”, and as a round game, the first round is “continuous release for 1.5 seconds” and the 2nd to 11th rounds are “continuous release for 29 seconds”. In the release operation mode, the inter-round interval period is defined as “5 seconds” after the end of the first round, “1 second” is otherwise defined, and “4 seconds” is defined as the end interval period. That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, the big hit game for 10 rounds is executed thereafter.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game for opening the variable winning device 65 is executed from the first round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which an open scenario similar to the hits A to C is set may be provided. By configuring in this way, when the big hit Z is set, the V winning device 650 is operated in the same opening operation mode as the small hit in the first round. You can make it difficult to tell whether you win a big win or a small win.

  In this case, since the jackpot game has already been executed, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V while the V winning device 650 is being opened in the first round of the jackpot Z, Round games after the second round are executed. Therefore, when the big hit game in which the same opening operation mode as the small hit game is set is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to configure. Thereby, the game result of this time can make a player think that the big hit game was executed because the ball passed through the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

  In addition, the performance shown in FIG. 201 (b) can be executed when the player passes the specific area 650V during the small hit game and when the big hit Z is won. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which an effect result (see FIG. 201B) that is advantageous to the player is displayed. Therefore, expectation can be given to the production during the race.

  It should be noted that the symbol display device 81 displays whether the jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) for which the same opening operation mode as that for the jackpot game is set and the case of winning the various jackpots are displayed. In order for the same effect mode to be executed as the variable display (variable effect) and to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 showing the lottery result of the special symbol. The special symbol stop display timing is different from the stop display timing of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the special symbol stop display timing and the third symbol stop display timing are synchronized. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify the display of the third symbol at the stop display timing or the period before and after that, the display mode and display area are changed. At the stop display timing of the special symbol, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is switched from the third symbol to the effect normal symbol corresponding to the variation display of the normal symbol. Good. Thereby, it can be suppressed that whether the current lottery result is a small hit or a big win is easily grasped in the stop display mode of the third symbol.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (b). FIG. 203 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a short and medium total counter 203fa, a jackpot start flag 203fb, The jackpot flag 203o, the jackpot start flag 203fc, the jackpot flag 203p, the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd, the V flag 203fe, the hour / medium special 2 counter 203ff, the V passing flag 203fg, and the other memory area 203z are provided. . The configuration (flag) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except “7” used for identifying that it was used in the seventh embodiment) , Counter, and area) are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The time-short / intermediate sum counter 203fa is a counter for adding up the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time-short state and counting up to 100 times. At this time, the short / medium total counter 203fa is set to 0, which is an initial value when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, 1 is subtracted every time the change of the special symbol is completed during the time-shortening state (see S10202 in FIG. 217). The value of the short / medium sum counter 203fa is referred to when determining whether or not the short time end condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value is subtracted to 0 (S10207 in FIG. 217). : Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 100 times (first termination condition), or the second special symbol during the time reduction state. When any of the conditions that the number of symbol variations reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, the time reduction state is configured to end, and whether or not the first end condition is satisfied In order to discriminate between them, the time-short / intermediate sum counter 203fa is used. Note that the value of the short / medium sum counter 203fa is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a remaining short number of times command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining short time command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the short and middle sum counter 203fa is changed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 uses the remaining short time command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the short / medium sum counter 203fa is changed, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the first end condition of the short time state is satisfied. Can be obtained. As a result, the remaining short time count managed by the game state storage area 223fe of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual remaining fluctuation count counted by the short and medium sum counter 203fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has occurred, the deviation can be corrected by the remaining short time command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining short time number based on the remaining short time number command. However, the remaining short time number command corresponding to the value of the above-described short and middle sum counter 203fa, that is, the first in the short time state. Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is configured not to be transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being performed, the second end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied, and the time reduction state is shifted to the normal state. A situation in which the second end condition is satisfied in a state where the remaining number of fluctuations until it is satisfied is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a situation in which the time reduction state ends is suppressed.

  The jackpot start flag 203fb is a flag indicating the start timing of the jackpot game. When the change of the special symbol for which the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 in FIG. 215). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203fb is on and it is identified that the jackpot start timing is reached, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off (S10603 in FIG. 222). Note that the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is cut off.

  The jackpot medium flag 203o is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being played. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S10017 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is set to off (S10617 in FIG. 222). The big hit flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear. When a power interruption occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is backed up and retained. It is comprised so that. The jackpot / medium flag 203o has the same function as the jackpot / medium flag 203o used in the first embodiment described above.

  The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag indicating the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). If it is determined that the small hitting start flag 203fc is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hitting game, it is set to off (S10703 in FIG. 223). This small hitting start flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption or the like when the power interruption or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

  The small hitting flag 203p is a flag indicating that a small hitting game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds per end is completed), it is set to OFF (see S10717 in FIG. 223). The small hitting flag 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as a RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure when a power failure occurs. It is configured to be.

  The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a detection switch that detects that a ball that has won the V winning device 650 has passed the specific area 650V when a small hit game is being executed (the ball has passed the specific area 650V). This is a storage area for storing data for determining the jackpot type set in (when not shown) is detected). The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined jackpot type when the change of the special symbol whose judgment result is the jackpot stops (FIG. 218). S10302). When the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd. Is configured to be set to on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V passing big hit type storage area 203fd is cleared. This V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power interruption occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is backed up. It is comprised so that it may be hold | maintained.

  The V flag 203fe is a jackpot type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the detection switch. The corresponding flag is set on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223). If it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is turned on. The jackpot type to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game (open scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). The V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear. When a power interruption occurs, the V flag 203fe is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption. It is configured as follows.

  The time-short / medium special 2 counter 203ff is a counter for counting up to 10 times the number of times the second special symbol is changed during the time-short state. At this time, the short / medium special 2 counter 203ff is set to 0 which is an initial value when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 10 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, 1 is subtracted when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the time-shortening state (see S10204 in FIG. 217). The value of the time-short medium special 2 counter 203ff is referred to when determining whether or not the time-short state end condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (FIG. 217). S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 100 times (first termination condition), or the second special symbol during the time reduction state. It is configured so that the time-short state ends when any of the conditions that the number of symbol variations reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the second end condition is satisfied In order to discriminate between them, a short time medium special 2 counter 203ff is used. Note that the value of the short / medium special 2 counter 203ff is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the remaining short time command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining short time command is a command that is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the short and medium time special 2 counter 203ff is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining short number of times based on the remaining short number of times command, but the remaining short number of times command corresponding to the value of the above-described short and middle special 2 counter 203ff, that is, the first in the short time state. (2) Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is configured to be transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being performed, it is configured to shift the short-time state to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the short-time state. This is because the number of remaining fluctuations until the time-short state is ended is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  The V passing flag 203fg is a flag used to determine a state in which the V flag 203fe is set to ON during the small hit game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. Is done. In the present embodiment, the V passing process (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is set to ON (S10507 in FIG. 221).

  In the V passing process (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221). If it is determined that the V passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221: Yes). ), The processing of S10502 to S10508 in the V passing processing (see FIG. 221) is skipped. As a result, when a plurality of balls pass through the specific area 650V during one small hit game (a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball that has passed through the specific area 650V detects a plurality of balls) ), Only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected sphere is executed. Therefore, the processing executed during the small hit game can be simplified, and the V passing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passing management on the sound lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210 and FIG. 211, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the gaming state to be performed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and FIG. 211 schematically shows the operation flow of various devices executed during the small hit game. It is the timing chart shown automatically.

  In the seventh embodiment, a left-handed game in which a ball is fired aiming at the left region of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) and a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, and the game board It is possible to set a short-time state in which a right-handed game for launching a ball aiming at the right side area of 13 and a lottery of the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) is executed, which is more than the lottery of the first special symbol. The 2 special symbol lottery makes it easier to execute the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, as the time-saving state, either a time-saving state A (time-shortening A) that is advantageous to the player or a time-shorting state B (time-shortening B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state A is configured. ing. Here, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set (it is difficult to do) after the jackpot game ends. Yes. By configuring in this way, once the time reduction state A (time reduction A) is set, the normal state is not set as the gaming state unless at least two jackpot games are executed. Can be built.

  As shown in FIG. 210, in the state where the normal state is set, the game is executed for the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1). When the jackpot is a jackpot A (10% of the jackpot), the jackpot game is set to a bonus time A (temporary A) after the jackpot game ends, and is a jackpot B (40% of the jackpot) In this case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of “jackpot C” (50% of the jackpot), the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. The

  In addition, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the normal state, and the big win game is executed based on the big win or the small win winner, the normal state is set after the big win game is finished. It is composed. Thereby, the act which performs the lottery of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) illegally in a normal state can be controlled.

  In the state where the time reduction state A (time reduction A) is set, the special drawing 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special figure 2 lottery, as explained with reference to FIG. 205 (c), when winning a jackpot, a time-short state is always set after the jackpot game ends, so a time-short state A (time-short A) If the jackpot is won, the normal state is not set after the jackpot game ends.

  In addition, even if the small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, because the variation pattern defined in the first variation pattern table 202fd2 for reference that is referred to during the time reduction state A (time reduction A) is set, When the small hit type “small hit C” in which the normal state is set after the big hit game is won, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. Accordingly, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, a plurality of jackpot games can be executed before the game state is set to the normal state again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the advantageous gaming state immediately ends in spite of the setting of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and to allow the player to play the game with peace of mind. it can.

  In this state where the time reduction state A is set, if the time reduction end condition is satisfied (when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed 10 times), the time reduction state ends and the normal state is set. However, in the short-running state, winning a small hit with a probability of about 1/2, and since 80% of that is a small hit game that allows a ball to pass through the specific area 650V, it will continue. As long as a normal game in which a right-handed game is played is performed, the jackpot game can be executed before the short-time end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when a game that does not continue the right-handed game is executed in order to pass the ball to the specific area 650V when a specific small hit type is won, the special figure 2 fluctuation count is 10 times. It can be shifted to a normal state by reaching. Thereby, a penalty can be imposed on a player who played an inappropriate game during the short-time state.

  In the state where the time reduction state A (time reduction A) is set, when winning the small hit A (20%), after the big hit game based on the small win winning is executed, the time reduction state A (time reduction A) again Is set, and when the small win B (70%) is won, the short time state B (short time B) is set after the big hit game based on the small win is executed. If the small hit C (10%) is won, a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as shown in FIG. 208 (a), so the specific area 650V is set during the small hit game. The ball never passes.

  In addition, when winning the jackpot with the time-saving state B (time-shortening B) set, the jackpot D (90%) and the jackpot E (10%) are the same as the above-mentioned time-saving state A (time-shortening A). Is set. In addition, when the small hit is won, the second time variation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208 (b)) is referred to, and the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small hit A or the small hit C. ing.

  Therefore, when winning the small hit A (20%), after the jackpot game based on the small win winning is executed, the short time state A (short time A) is set, and when the small hit C is won, After the big hit game based on the small win is executed, the normal state is set. Similarly to the time reduction state A (time reduction A), when the time reduction end condition is satisfied (when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed 10 times), the time reduction state ends and the normal state is set. It is composed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the flow of operations of various devices during the small hit game will be described. 211 (a) to 211 (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (f), when the special figure variation display that is won by the small control by the control processing of the main control device 110 is executed, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81. The effect during the race (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)) is executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 seconds) elapses after the small hit game is started, the V prize opening solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds in accordance with a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

  A ball flowing down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and is detected for 4 seconds (V effective period t5) after 1 second from the start of the small hit game. When the switch detects the ball, the big hit game is executed after the end of the small hit game, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the big hit game, the first round game is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, the time-short state A, the time-short state B can be set as the gaming state, and the time-short state A is set and the time-short state B is set. The data table to be referred to when setting the variation pattern of the special symbol is different from that in the case of being changed.

  When the short-time state A is set, when a small hit (small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. A variation pattern is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, the flow path (second flow) that can pass through the specific region 650V when the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is executed in the short-time state. The variation time (0.5 seconds) set when the small hit C is won than the period (3 seconds) required for the sphere to flow down the path tb) and passing through the second flow path tb (3 seconds). ) And the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small hit game to the end of the V winning device 650 opening period (1.6 seconds) is configured to be shorter.

  In addition, when the short-time state B is set, when the small hit (small hit C) which is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball fluctuates so that the ball can pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. The pattern is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, even if the short-time state is set as the gaming state, the degree of advantage for the player can be greatly different only by changing the data table referenced when setting the variation pattern. Can be made.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 212 and FIG. 213, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a variation start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, an effect counter 223h, and an SW valid time. It has a storage area 223fd, a variation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay passage state flag 223ff, a long variation flag 223fg, a second entry flag 223fh, a normal hitting flag 223fi, and other memory areas 223z. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  The variation start flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the information (variation pattern command) indicating that the variation of the special symbol is started is received, and is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol is started. Is. This variation start flag 223fa is based on the information included in the variation pattern command received by the sound lamp control device 113, whether the current special symbol variation is the variation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), or the second special symbol. It is configured so that it can be determined whether the fluctuation is (special drawing 2).

  Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 223fa receives the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 which is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure 1 fluctuation is received and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure 2 fluctuation. And the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa2 which is set to ON in the case of.

  When the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S12001: Yes in FIG. 226), the variation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received variation pattern command is set to ON. (Refer to S12002 in FIG. 226), it is set to OFF when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 or S5108 in FIG. 231). When any of the fluctuation start flags 223fa is set to ON, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 225) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of the current special symbol variation is received from the main control device 110. Is set to ON when a stop type command transmitted from is received (see S12005 in FIG. 226), and is turned OFF when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 231). . When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to ON, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The gaming state storage area 223fe is an area for storing a gaming state corresponding to the state command when a state command related to the gaming state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223fe, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is stored in the game state storage area 223fe when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so that the data is erased when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Information indicating the current game state is also deleted. However, in this embodiment, since the status command is set in the startup process of the main control device (see FIG. 51) that is executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51), the gaming status storage area 223fe immediately after the power is restored. The information indicating the gaming state set before power-off is stored in. Therefore, in a state in which the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the gaming state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  The state command output from the main control device 110 is received when it is determined whether or not it has been received in the command determination processing 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) of the sound lamp control device 113 and received. The processing is performed so that the gaming state included in the state command is stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe, but in FIG. 226, the processing content is processed according to other commands (S12019 in FIG. 226). The detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The delay passage state flag 223ff is a flag for determining the state of the sphere flowing down the second flow path (delay flow path) tb in the flow path unit 660. Here, the contents of the delay path state flag 223ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the delay path state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay passage state flag 223ff is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the sphere flow state of the delay channel by the state of the lower 4 bits.

  Specifically, the delay passage entrance switch 660e1 for detecting a sphere flowing into the second passage (delay passage) 660b is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge for detecting the sphere flowing out from the second passage (delay passage) 660b. In a state where the switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, in a state where the sphere does not pass through the second passage (delay passage) 660b, the lower 4 bits are “0001” (described as “00” in FIG. 213), In the state where the delay path entry switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay path discharge switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, the ball is passing through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits Becomes “0010” (indicated as “01” in FIG. 213), the delay path entry switch 660e1 is set to OFF, and the delay path discharge switch 660e2 is ON. Have been set state, i.e., in the state where the balls are discharged from the second passage (delay path) in 660b, the lower four bits is "0011" (in FIG. 213 as "02").

  Here, the delay path entry switch 660e1 and the delay path discharge switch 660e2 are both configured by proximity sensors capable of detecting a sphere flowing down the second flow path tb formed in the second path 660b. It is configured to be set to ON when an object is detected continuously for a predetermined period. And it is comprised so that it may be set to OFF when a target object is no longer detected for a predetermined period.

  Here, when the setting status of the lower 4 bits of the delay path state flag 223ff is “0001”, “0010”, “0011” as described above, the sphere normally flows down the second path (delay path) 660b Therefore, it is determined as a normal ball flow-down state.

  On the other hand, when the delay path entrance switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay path discharge switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, when the sphere flows into the second path (delay path) 660b, the sphere is discharged. When the state is detected at the same time, the lower 4 bits are “0011” (described as “03” in FIG. 213), and the delay path entry switch 660e1 is in an abnormal state (described as “−” in FIG. 213). In the state in which the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, in the state in which the sensor that detects the ball flow down state in the second passage (delay passage) 660b has failed, the lower 4 bits are “0100” (FIG. 213, which is described as “04”), and is determined to be an abnormal ball flow-down state.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 224.

  FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example, instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  Of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 are the same as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those in S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 are executed.

  Further, in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 214), when the process of S103 is completed, the third symbol display apparatus 81 performs a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display apparatus 81 performs the third symbol display. The special symbol variation process 7 for setting the variation pattern is executed (S191), and then the process proceeds to S105. Details of the special symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218.

  After executing the process of S105, the normal symbol variation process 7 which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device is executed (S192), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S107. Details of the normal symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S107 is executed, a V entrance passing process associated with entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S193). Thereafter, the V passing process executed when the ball that has won the V winning device 650 passes the specific area 650V is executed (S194), and then the process proceeds to S110. The details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

  In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when a ball passes through a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, a process (2 for executing the big hit game after the small hit game ends) As the execution process per seed), a V entrance passing process (S193 in FIG. 214), a V passing process (S194 in FIG. 214), a process related to fluctuations in the first symbol (special symbol), and a second symbol ( This is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the detailed contents of the processing related to the variation of the normal symbols are different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the special symbol variation process 7 (S191) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 7 (S191). This special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the like performed in the first symbol display device 37 is performed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that in the special symbol variation process 7 (see S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, the same content as the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) in the first embodiment described above is executed. However, for convenience of explanation, the same contents are described with different reference numerals. Note that the modification contents described in the above-described embodiments can be naturally applied to elements having the same processing contents.

  In the special symbol variation process 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S10001). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S10001: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S10001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If it is determined that it is not (S10002: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003).

  When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003: Yes), the second entry command is set (S10004), the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop The values of the type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 are stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area (S10005). Next, a special symbol variation start process 7 for starting variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10011). The special symbol variation start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10003 that the ball has not entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S10006). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10007). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (not greater than 0) (S10007: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) ) Is subtracted by 1 (S10008), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set number-of-holding-balls command is configured to include information for indicating that it is a command for indicating the number of the holding balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The reserved ball number command set by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the device 110 is output to the voice lamp control device 113. Thus, the current number of reserved balls can be grasped for each type of special symbol on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). Thereafter, the process of S10011 is executed.

  In the process of S10002, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002: Yes), the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S10012). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it is determined that the period has not elapsed (S10012: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S10012, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S10012: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10013). The display mode of the stop symbol is preset by a special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 7 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot or not is determined according to the value of the first per-random number counter C1, and if the special symbol jackpot, The jackpot type (jackpot AC) is determined according to the value of C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, a blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. In addition, when it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the processing of S10013 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing 7 is displayed. Then, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S10014). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10014: Yes), a special winning opening release scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S10015), and then a jackpot start is set (S10016). Next, the big hit start flag 203fb and the big hit middle flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), the value of the hour / middle / total counter 203fa and the value of the hour / middle special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10018). Transition to processing. In the process of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10014, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10014: No), the time-short number update process (S10020) is executed to determine whether or not the current lottery result is a big hit. (S10021). The details of the short time update processing (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S10021, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10021: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S10022). Next, the processing of S10019 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S10021, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S10021: No), the small hit start setting process (see S10022) is skipped, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process ends. To do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win, the time reduction number update process (S10020) is executed, and then the current lottery result is displayed. Although it is configured so as to determine whether it is a small hit, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after executing the small hit start setting process (S10022), the short time update process (S10020) is performed. You may do it. Furthermore, for example, when the time-short count update process is executed and it is determined that the time-short count is ended by the current special symbol variation process, if the current special symbol lottery result is out of place, the time-short count update process execution timing The time-short state is terminated at (special symbol stop timing), and if the current special symbol lottery result is a small hit, the short-time state may be terminated at the timing when the small hit game ends. . Thereby, the time-short state can be set until immediately before the next special symbol variation is started. Further, even if a small win is won in the final change in the short time state, the small hit game can be executed in a state where the short time state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011). The special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area 203a, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot”, “special symbol jackpot”, or “special symbol miss” is performed, and the first symbol This is a process that is executed when information necessary for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  In the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011), first, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, And each value of the small hit classification counter C5 is acquired (S10101). Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 7 table 202fd corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10102). Specifically, if the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entrance to the first entrance 64, the value of the first per random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204 (b)) The random number value stored in the game is compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 3640, the value of the first random number counter C1 Are compared with the random number values stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204 (c)) to determine the big hit or the small hit.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S10103). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S10103: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202fb1 or the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2. Of the five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to E), it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 205 (b) or (c)).

  In the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value that is determined to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random values may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same number of jackpot random numbers. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpots. The number of random numbers to be determined may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  And the display mode at the time of the normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and the jackpot type is set (S10105). In the process of S10105, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37A) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to E). In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A to E) is set as the stop type.

  Thereafter, a jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process proceeds to S10113. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, among the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the variation pattern table of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the current game The value defined in the data table corresponding to the state is compared to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (see FIG. 207).

  In the process of S10113, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S10106 is set (S10113). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S10105 is set (S10114). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are executed in the external output process (S2201) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the variation display mode (effect mode) of the third symbol can be set in correspondence with the variation pattern (variation time) and stop type of the special symbol on the sound lamp control device 113 side. When the process of S10114 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7 (S191).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S10103: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S10107). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10107: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 acquired in the processing of S10101 is compared with the random value defined in the small hitting type selection 7 table 202fe, and the small hitting (small It is determined what is the small hit type among the hits AC) (see FIG. 206 (b)).

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, since it is configured not to win a small bonus in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1), when winning a small bonus in the special symbol lottery Does not execute the process of determining the type of the special symbol won in the small hit, since it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol this time is the lottery of the second special symbol, for example, the first special symbol, If any of the second special symbols is configured to win a bonus, after determining that the bonus is won, a process of determining the type of the special symbol corresponding to the current lottery is performed. It is good to comprise so that the process which selects a small hit type may be performed according to a result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set different types of small hits depending on whether the first special symbol is won or not and the second special symbol is won. Can have a width. In addition, it may be configured to change the selection ratio of each type of small hits without changing the type of small hits that can be set when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won by small hits. good.

  Next, a display mode at the time of small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10109), and a small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. Note that the processing executed in S10110 is different from the processing content of S10106 described above in that the lottery result of the target special symbol is replaced with a jackpot instead of a jackpot, but the set variation Subsequent processing (for example, processing to be output to the sound lamp control device 113) executed on the pattern is the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit in the process of S10107 (S10107: No), a display mode at the time of detachment corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. Next, the processes of S10113 and S10114 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7.

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the lottery result of the special symbol is determined in the order of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “displacement” may be preferentially determined. Such a configuration is effective for reducing the number of determinations repeatedly performed in various processes of the main controller 110 because the lottery result that is most likely to appear as a lottery result of the special symbol is “out”. It becomes.

  In the seventh embodiment, the special pattern fluctuation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216) is configured such that the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are set within the same process. The pattern command and the stop type command may be set at different timings. Further, even when setting within the same process, the stop type command is output after a predetermined period of time when the variation pattern command is output so that the timing to output to the sound lamp control device 113 is not the same. You may do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the time reduction number update process (S10020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the time reduction update process (S10020). The short time update process (S10020) is executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), updates the short time and sets the gaming state to the normal state. Process.

  In the time reduction number update process (S10020), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time / intermediate sum counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201). If it is determined that the value of the time-count / medium-total counter 203fa is not greater than 0 (0) (S10201: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, the time-save count is updated. Since there is no need, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the short / medium sum counter 203fa is greater than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the short time state, the number of time reductions is updated (subtracted). The process (S10202 to S10209) for executing the process is executed.

  In the process of S10202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the short / medium sum counter 203fa (S10202), and then it is determined whether the current special symbol variation is a variation of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) (S10203). If it is determined that the current variation is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) (S10203: Yes), the value of the short / medium special two counter 203ff is decremented by one (S10204), and the process proceeds to S10205. On the other hand, in the process of S10203, when it is determined that the current variation is not the second special symbol (is the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10205.

  In the processing of S10205, a remaining short-time count command indicating the value of the hour / middle counter (hour / middle sum counter 203fa and hour / middle special 2 counter 203ff) changed by calculation is set (S10205). The short remaining time command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice is transmitted during the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / middle special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206), and if it is determined that the value of the hour / middle special 2 counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), then It is determined whether the value of the sum counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). If it is determined in the process of S10207 that the value of the short / medium sum counter 203fa is not 0 (S10207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10206 that the value of the time-short / medium special counter 203ff is 0 (S10206: Yes), or in the process of S10207, it is determined that the value of the time-short / medium-total counter 203fa is 0. In the case (S10207: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S10208), and the values of the hour / middle special 2 counter 203ff and the hour / middle / sum total counter 203fa are both set to 0 (S10209), and this process ends. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and when any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the processing for ending the time reduction state (normal state) Is configured to execute the process of setting the. Specifically, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (total number of fluctuations) obtained by adding the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the time-shortening state reaches a predetermined number, that is, The time-short end condition that is satisfied when the value (for example, 100) set in the short / medium sum counter 203fa when the state is set is subtracted every time the special symbol variation is executed and becomes 0. When the number of changes of the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches a predetermined number of times, that is, when the time reduction state is set, the value (for example, 10) set in the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is the first 2 Special symbol (special 2) is subtracted every time a change is executed, and the time-short state is terminated when one of the time-short-term termination conditions is met, and the time-short termination condition is met when the value becomes 0. It is configured to do.

  By configuring in this way, the lottery of the second special symbol in which the lottery advantageous for the player over the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time reduction state is set. ) Can be executed reliably. In the present embodiment, the two short-time end conditions described above are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more short-time end conditions may be set. Moreover, in the jackpot winning of the special symbol that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the value for satisfying the time shortening condition may be varied according to the type of winning jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when any one of the time-shutdown end conditions is satisfied, the time-shutdown state is terminated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An end condition may be set in advance, and the time-short state may be ended when two of the time-short end conditions are satisfied. By setting the conditions for ending the short-time state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the short-time state (advantageous game state advantageous to the player) will continue, A game with tension can be performed.

  In addition, as described above, when setting a plurality of short-time end conditions, as an effect of notifying the player of the period until the short-time state ends, a value corresponding to the short-time end condition that is most likely to be established is used. What is necessary is just to perform the effect to alert | report. In the present embodiment, in the state in which the time reduction state is set, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed by the right-handed game. Is configured to notify the value until the time-short end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) among a plurality of time-short end conditions (FIG. 199 (b)). ) Refer to the remaining short time notification area Dm6).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the small hitting start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start setting process (S10022). This small hit start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214). ) To set the start of the small hit game (game content (action scenario) of the small hit game to be executed this time).

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, when the small hit game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which the ball can be won (easy), and the ball that has won the V winning device 650 is changed. By passing through the specific area 650V, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

  That is, the game state in which the small win game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a winning ball can be obtained), and a big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where the possibility increases.

  In the small hit start setting process (S10022), first, an open scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set with reference to the open scenario 7 table 202ff based on the small hit type set with reference to the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe at the time of winning the small hit.

  Thereafter, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, the big hit type at the time of passing V (big hit D to E) is determined based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe. As described above with reference to FIG. 206 (b), if the small hit type is small hit A, it is determined that the V hit big hit type is “10 rounds, 10 big hits, shorter A”. If the type is small hit B, it is determined that “10 rounds short 10 big hits, time B”, and if the small hit type is C, it is determined “10 rounds no big hit” (FIG. 206). (See (b)).

  Next, based on the small hit type, the start of the small hit is set (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hitting medium flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process 7 (S192). This normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device and the second entrance 3640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 3640a.

  In the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the normal symbol (second symbol) hit types, and the operation pattern (open scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a is set according to the set hit types. Are configured to be different. As a result, when the normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 3640a can be opened and closed with a plurality of operation patterns, so that it is difficult for the player to predict when the electric accessory 3640a is operating. be able to.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the electric accessory 3640a is in operation, it is easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 3640 (more easily than when the electric accessory 3640a is not operating). ), And the sphere flowing down on the electric power tool 3640a at the timing when the operation of the electric power tool 3640a is finished differs depending on the flow position (first flow path ta, second flow path). tb) (see FIGS. 195 to 198).

  The sphere that has flowed down the second flow path tb is more likely to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game than the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path ta. . As described above, in the present embodiment, the easiness of entering the ball into the second entrance 3640 can be varied by changing the opening operation content of the electric accessory 3640a (second entry) A first open state in which a ball easily enters the mouth 3640 and a second open state in which the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 3640 than in the easy-to-enter state). The ease of passage of the sphere can be varied (a first guidance state in which the sphere easily passes to the specific area 650V, and a second guidance state in which the sphere is less likely to pass to the specific area 650V than the first guidance state; Can be set).

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the normal symbol (second symbol) hit types, and the operation pattern (open scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a according to the set hit types. Since the ease of establishment of each condition can be made different for each of a plurality of conditions for having a privilege for a player by making different, one variable means ( The player can be interested in the operation content of the electric accessory 3640a).

  In addition, as a configuration for making the ease of establishment of a plurality of game conditions different from this, a configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used. For example, a variable means in which a plurality of operation patterns are set is electrically operated. Instead of the accessory 3640a, a winning device (for example, a variable winning device 65) in which an operation pattern is set at the time of winning the jackpot may be used.

  In this normal symbol variation process 7 (S192), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S801). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device is displaying the hit, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S802: No), it is next determined whether or not data (value of second random number counter C4) is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (S803).

  In the processing of S803, when it is determined that no data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area, that is, a new condition for starting the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not satisfied (S803: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball possible area, that is, when it is determined that the condition for starting the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly established (S803). Next, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area is acquired (S804).

  Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the second random number 7 table 202fc, the lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S805). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As described above, if the current gaming state is a normal symbol high probability state (time-short state), if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is If it is determined that it is within the range of “80 to 98”, it is determined that it is B per common figure, and if it is a value of “99”, it is determined that it is out. Further, if the current gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is a value of “0”, it is determined that it is A per universal symbol, If the value is “1”, it is determined to be B per ordinary figure, and if it is “2 to 99”, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 206A).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S805 is a normal symbol hit (A per common symbol or B per common symbol) (S806), and it is a normal symbol hit. If it is determined (S806: Yes), the winning display mode is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S807, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is lit up so that the winning type can be identified as the stop symbol (stop display mode) of the second symbol. Set as follows.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S806 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S806: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S808). In the processing of S808, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

  When the processing of S807 or S808 ends, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (short-time state) (S809), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state ( If it is a short time state (S809: Yes), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol (S809: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this process is performed. finish.

  In the seventh embodiment, a shorter variation time is set as the variation time of the second symbol when the time reduction state is set than when the time reduction state is not set (when the normal state is set). It is configured as follows. Thereby, since the number of lotteries for the second symbol per unit time can be increased in the time-saving state than in the normal state, the time-saving game can be executed efficiently.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the time reduction state is set, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is set higher than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be shorter. By shortening and making the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 3640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more easily executed than in the normal state. However, it is sufficient that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more easily executed in the short time state than in the normal state, for example, the short time state than in the normal state. The normal symbol (2nd symbol) shortens the change time of the normal symbol, otherwise it may be the same. The normal state (second symbol) has a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the normal state. It can be the same or normal The operation pattern of more electric combination of even time reduction conditions 3640A, spheres into the second ball entrance opening 3640 so as to facilitate ball entrance, otherwise may be the same.

  On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S810 or the processing of S811 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S812, if the variation time has not elapsed (S812: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S812 (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the process of S813, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S807, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S808, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When stop display is set by the process of S813, the second symbol display is performed when the second symbol display update process (see S2208) of the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. The variable display in the apparatus is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or S808.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) is a normal symbol win (S814). If the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S814: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol (S815).

  In the process of S815, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in a normal symbol high probability state (short time state) (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is set to 0.2 seconds. And the number of releases is set to 1 (S816), and the process proceeds to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (short-time state) (S815: Yes), a common command per command is set (S851), and the hit type set this time and the current gaming state are set. The operation pattern of the corresponding electric accessory 3640a is set (S817), and the process proceeds to S818.

  In the process of S818, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is set (S818), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 3640a is set by the processing of S818, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 is executed, The opening / closing control of the object is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed.

  Next, the V inlet passage process (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this V-entrance passage processing (S193). This V inlet passage process (S193) is a flowchart showing the V inlet passage process (S193) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 214).

  In the V entrance passing process (S193), first, it is determined whether or not a ball passing sensor (not shown) for detecting that a ball has won the V winning device 650 is ON (S10401). This ball passage sensor is a detection means that is turned on when a ball passes. Specifically, it is composed of proximity sensors arranged close to the sphere flow path so that the period required for the sphere to flow down the detection area of the sphere passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). The proximity sensor is configured to be turned on (output an on signal) when an object is detected continuously for 30 milliseconds. Thereby, for example, even if a state in which a sphere is detected at an interval of less than 30 milliseconds appears due to noise generated in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress a problem that the state is determined as a state in which the sphere has passed. can do.

  In the process of S10401, when it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S10401: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10401, when it is determined that the ball passage sensor is on (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402).

  In the process of S10402, when it is determined that the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402: Yes), a V entrance passing command is set (S10403), and this process ends. The V-entrance passing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice is transmitted during the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the spheres that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the passage of the V entrance to the display control device 114. Thereby, the effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 can be executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is not in the open period (S10402: No), it is a case where the ball has won the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, an error command is set. (S10404) Then, this process is complete | finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the V passing process (S194) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S194). This V passing process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

  In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203fg is on (S10501). If it is determined in step S10501 that the V-pass flag 203fg is on (S10501: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that the V-pass flag 203fg is not on (S10501: No), it is determined whether there is a V-pass (S10502). That is, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that there is no V passage (S10502: No), this process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S10502, if it is determined that there is V passing (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passing effective period is in effect (S10503). When it is determined that the V passing effective period is in effect (S10503: Yes), the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S10504), and the acquired V passing jackpot is obtained. The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set to ON (S10505). Then, a V passing command is set (S10506).

  Next, the V passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), and thereafter, the time / intermediate sum counter 203fa and the time / intermediate special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10508), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10503, if it is determined that the V passing effective period is not in effect (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and this process ends. If the ball passes the V winning switch 650e3 when it is not during the V validity period, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won to the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S10505, an error output is executed, and an illegal act can be found.

  Next, a jackpot control process 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 (S2282). This jackpot control process 7 (S2282) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (S2204) in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot control process 7 This is a process for executing various effects and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning apparatus 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650).

  In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 222, S2282), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S10601). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON by the processing of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S10601, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S10601: Yes), an opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S10603), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the process of S10601 (S10601: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S10604). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S10604, if the special symbol is not big hit (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S10604: Yes), the process of S10605 is executed. In the processing of S10605, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S10605). In the process of S10605, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S10605: Yes), based on the release scenario 7 table 202ff, the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the The V winning opening 650a) of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set (S10607). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Become. Therefore, the number of rounds accumulated in the jackpot that is continued on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the process of S10605 (S10605: No), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning apparatus 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650). It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning apparatus 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) win the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S10608, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning award (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding winning The mouth (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S10609), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning apparatus 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) is not satisfied (S10608: No), the ending effect starts. It is determined whether it is timing (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball throwing time has elapsed. It is determined as

  In the process of S10610, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: Yes), an ending command is set (S10611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10610, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612). In the process of S10612, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is a big hit C (S10613). In the process of S10613, when it is determined that it is not big hit C (5R time short no big hit) (S10613: No), 100 is set to the short time medium total counter 203fa, 10 is set to the short time medium special 2 counter 203ff (S10614), The process proceeds to S10615. On the other hand, in the process of S10613, if it is determined that the big hit C (5R time short hit big hit) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10615.

  In the process of S10615, a state command corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set (S10615). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S10616), the jackpot medium flag 203o is set to OFF (S10617), and then this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 223, the small hit control process 7 (S2283) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the small hitting control process 7 (S2283). This small hit control process 7 (S2283) is executed instead of the small hit control process (S2205) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small hit state. In the case of the above, for performing various effects according to the small hits, and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning apparatus 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) It is processing.

  In the small hit control process 7 (S2283 in FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol small hit is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the special symbol small hit is started. In the process of S10701, when the special symbol small hitting is started (S10701: Yes), an opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to OFF (S10703), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10701, if the special symbol small hit is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is small hit (S10704). During the special symbol small hits, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small hits (including during the special symbol small hit game), Includes a special symbol during the predetermined time after the small hit game ends. In the process of S10704, if the special symbol is not being hit (S10704: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10704 that a special symbol is being hit (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the processing of S10705, it is determined whether it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705). If it is determined in the processing of S10705 that it is the V winning opening release timing (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is released based on the release scenario 7 table 202ff. (S10706), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not the V prize opening opening timing in the process of S10705 (S10705: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the corresponding V prize opening (V prize opening 650a of the V prize winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707). . Specifically, the closing condition is satisfied when the open scenario set corresponding to the small hit game ends or when a predetermined number (for example, a total of 10 balls) wins the V winning device 650. Is determined.

  In the process of S10707, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning port (V winning device of the V winning device 650) is determined. The mouth 650a) is closed (S10708), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709). In the process of S10709, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: Yes), an ending command is set (S10710), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect in S10709 processing (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711). If it is determined in the processing of S10711 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: No), this processing ends.

  In the process of S10711, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set on (S10712), and the V flag 203fe is not set on. (S10712: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712: Yes), an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), the jackpot start flag 203fb, the jackpot The middle flag 203o is set to ON (S10714), the V flag 203fe is set to OFF (S10715), the V pass flag 203fg is set to OFF (S10716), and the small hitting / medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S10717). This process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224, the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281). This electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed in place of the electric accessory opening / closing process (S2207) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801). If it is determined that the opening / closing control setting of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640a is not in progress (S10801: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640a is being set (S10801: Yes), the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is determined. It is determined whether or not there is (S10802). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is opened (S10803), A bonus release command is set (S10804), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10802 that it is not the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10802: No), then the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 3640 is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the object 3640a (S10805). When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is closed (S10806). An accessory closing command is set (S10807), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10805: No), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is performed. It is determined whether it is the end timing of (S10809). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10809: Yes), an end command per common figure is set (S10810), and then this processing is ended. To do. Also, in the process of S10809, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10809: No), this process is ended.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 225 to 233, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 225, the main process in the seventh embodiment will be described. This main process is executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). 59)) for performing the same process.

  Among the main processes (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are the main processes (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those in S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. In the seventh embodiment, in the main process (see FIG. 225), the effect update process is executed after the process of S4111 is executed (S4181). This effect update process (S4181) is for performing a process for changing the content of the currently executed effect (already set fluctuation display) during the effect execution.

  After performing the effect update process (S4181), the command determination process 7 is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S4182). Details of the command determination processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S4183. In the process of S4183, the variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the variation display setting process 7 (S 4183), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the variation display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after executing the change display setting process 7 (S4183), the ball passage monitoring process is executed (S4184). Details of the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the execution of the current processing of S4101 (S4101). If 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S4101: No) ), The process proceeds to S4182 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111, and S4181.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the command determination process 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and determines the command received from the main control apparatus 110 as described above. To do. In this process, when a winning information command is received from the main controller 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start a continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process 7 (S4182), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and changed from the main controller 110. It is determined whether a pattern command is received (S12001). When the variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type is received from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12003), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S12001: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12004). When the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12007). Then, when the held ball number command is received (S12007: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 ( The number N1) of the variable display hold in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the first special symbol hold ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S12008). In the processing of S12008, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. After the process of S12008 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S12008. It can be set to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to noise or the like, At the time of detection or special symbol lottery, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. it can. When the process of S12008 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S12007, if no pending ball number command has been received (S12007: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12009). When it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S12009: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010), and then the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12009 that no winning information command has been received (S12009: No), it is then determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S12011), and a winning-related command is received. If it is determined that it has been made (S12011: Yes), the hit-related process 7 is executed (S12012), and this process ends. The winning association process 7 (S12012) causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big win or the small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. The process corresponding to the various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when the big win or the small win is won is executed.

  Here, the contents of the hit-related process 7 (S12012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process 7 in the seventh embodiment. When this hit-related process (S12012) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S12101). When it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S12102), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ) Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S12103). If it is determined in step S12103 that a round number command has been received (S12103: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S12104), and the process ends. In the seventh embodiment, since the information indicating the round number is transmitted as the round number command from the main controller 110, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the main control device 110, if the configuration is such that information indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the sound lamp control device 113 side is based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the current number of rounds and configure the display round number command. It may be.

  If it is determined in step S12103 that a round number command has not been received (S12103: No), it is then determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S12105). In the process of S12105, when it is determined that a jackpot end command has been received (S12105: Yes), a display jackpot end command is set (S12106), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S12105 that a jackpot end command has not been received (S12105: No), it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S12107).

  In the process of S12107, when it is determined that a small hitting start command has been received (S12107: Yes), the small hitting start process is executed (S12108), and this process ends. Details of the small hitting start process (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the contents of the small hitting start process (S12108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing details of the small hitting start process in the seventh embodiment. When this small hitting start process (S12108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long variation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12201), and it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on. In this case (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is “01” (S12203). If it is determined in the process of S12203 that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is “01” (S12203: Yes), a display small hitting start command indicating a small hit with a high V expectation is set (S12204). Thereafter, the process returns to the hit-related process 7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is not on in the process of S12201 (S12201: No), the process proceeds to S12205. Also, in the process of S12203, when it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not “01” (S12203: No), the process proceeds to S12205.

  In the process of S12205, a display small hitting start command indicating a normal small hit is set (S12205), and then the process returns to the hit related process 7.

  Returning to FIG. 227, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S12107 that a small hitting start command has not been received (S12107: No), it is determined whether a small hitting end command has been received (S12109). In the process of S12109, if it is determined that a small hitting end command has been received (S12109: Yes), a display small hitting end command is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game (S12110), This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S12109: No), it is determined whether or not a V-entrance passing command has been received (S12111). If it is determined in the process of S12111 that a V-entry passage command has been received (S12111: Yes), a display V-entry passage command is set (S12112), and this process ends. If it is determined in step S12111 that a V-entry passage command has not been received (S12111: No), it is then determined whether a V-pass command has been received (S12113).

  In the process of S12113, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S12113: Yes), a display V effect command for indicating an effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set ( S12114), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12113, when it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (S12113: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in step S12011 that a hit-related command has not been received (S12011: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S12013). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S12013: Yes), the third symbol stop display is set (S12014), and then it is determined whether or not the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015). If it is determined that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the long fluctuation flag 223fg is set to off (S12016), and then the process returns to the main process. If it is determined in step S12015 that the long variation flag 223fg is not on (S12015: No), the process returns to the main process without executing the process in S12016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12013 that a stop command has not been received (S12013: No), it is then determined whether or not a time-saving effect-related command has been received (S12017). If it is determined that the time-related effect-related command has been received (S12017: Yes), the time-shortage effect-related process is executed (S12018), and then the process returns to the main process. Details of the short-time effect related processing (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12017 that a time-shortening effect related command has not been received (S12017: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S12019), and then the processing returns to the main processing.

  Next, the contents of the time reduction effect-related process (S12018) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the short-time effect related process (S12018). The short-time effect related process (S12018) is a process executed in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

  When the time-shortage effect related process (S12018) is executed, first, the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe is read (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-shortening state (S12302). ). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state (S 12302: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the command determination process 7 (S 4182 in FIG. 226).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S 12302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S 12302: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a command for hitting a normal figure has been received (S 12303). When it is determined that a winning command has been received (S12303: Yes), the current type of hitting map is analyzed based on the received hitting command (S12304), and a time reduction effect corresponding to the type of hitting map is executed. For this purpose, a short-time display start command for display is set (S12305), the normal hitting flag 223fi is set to ON (S12306), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12303, when it is determined that the command per hit is not received (S12303: No), it is then determined whether or not the second incoming command is received (S12307). If it is determined that the second incoming command has been received (S12307: Yes), the second incoming flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), and a display effect command for updating the short time effect is set (S12309). Thereafter, the process returns to the command determination process 7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12307 that the second incoming command has not been received (S12307: No), it is then determined whether or not an end-of-usual command has been received (S12310). When it is determined that the end command per common command is received (S12310: Yes), the end processing per normal diagram is executed (S12311), and then the process returns to the command determination processing 7. If it is determined in the process of S12310 that an end command per unit is not received (S12310: No), the process directly returns to the command determination process 7. Further, the details of the process at the end of the normal drawing (S12311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the process at the time of the end of the normal figure (S12311) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end processing for the normal figure (S12311). The process at the end of the normal figure (S12311) is a process executed in the time-saving effect related process (see FIG. 229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

  When the normal hitting end process (S12311) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second incoming flag 223fh is on (S12401). If it is determined that the second entry flag 223fh is on (S12401: Yes), the second entry flag 223fh is set to off (S12402), and the process proceeds to S12404. If it is determined that the second entry flag 223fh is not on (S12401: No), a display effect command for ending the time-saving effect is set (S12403), and the process proceeds to S12404.

  In the process of S12404, the normal hitting flag 223fi is set to OFF (S12404), and then this process is terminated, and the process returns to the time-shortage effect related process (S12018 of FIG. 229).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 7 (S4183). This variation display setting process 7 (S4183) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation effect. Is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 is not on (that is, is off) (S5101: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is set to off (S5102), and then the display control device 114 is notified. A display variation pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S5181). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started. When the process of S5181 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the process proceeds to S5107.

  In the process of S5107, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5107). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, is off) (S5107: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Transition to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 is performed. Is executed (S5183). Details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S5183 is completed, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110), and the process proceeds to S5111.

  In the process of S5111, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag fb1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag fb2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, is off) (S5111: No), the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Since there is no state, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to OFF. Then (S5112), the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5113), and then this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183). This special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. is there.

  In the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183), first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-saving state. It is determined whether or not (S12502). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S12502: No), the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S12510), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12502 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S12502: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S12503). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot is set (S12504), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12503 that the lottery result is not a big win (S12503: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S12505). When it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S12505: No), a variation pattern command indicating the end of the time-shortening effect is set (S12506), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12505 that the lottery result is a small hit (S12505: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the small hit variation pattern is a long variation (S12507). When it is determined that the small variation pattern is a long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the process proceeds to S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, when it is determined that the small hit fluctuation pattern is not a long fluctuation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12509.

  In the process of S12509, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit is set (S12509), and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the ball passage monitoring process (S4184). This ball passage monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the 3rd symbol display device 81 produces a variable effect. In order to execute, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether or not a delay passage ball entry switch (not shown) is on (S12601). If it is determined that the delay path entry switch is on (S12601: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the normal hitting flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12602). If it is determined that the normal hitting flag 223fi is not on (that is, it is off) (S12602: No), the process proceeds to S12611.

  In the process of S12602, if it is determined that the normal map hit flag 223fi is on (S12602: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12603), and then the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is “ It is determined whether it is “00” (S12604). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is “00” (S12604: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to “01” (S12605), and the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12604, when it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12610.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12601 that the delay path entry switch is not on (ie, is off) (S12601: No), then, whether or not the delay path discharge switch (not shown) is on. Is determined (S12606). If it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12606: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the delay path discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delay path status flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then whether or not the value of the delay path status flag 223ff is “01”. Is discriminated (S12608). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is “01” (S12608: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to “02” (S12609), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12608 that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not “01” (S12608: No), the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay path state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then this process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball has the specific area 650V during the small hit game. By passing, it is configured so that a big hit (so-called two types) game is executed.

  In addition, as a path for causing the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is released during the small hit game, the first flow path ta (see FIG. 196) where the ball does not easily pass through the specific region 650V. ) And a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) through which the sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V. Accordingly, the player pays attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hit game. Therefore, the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball is distributed to the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb described above by the opening / closing operation of the electric charge 3640a, the operation of the electric charge 3640a is performed. The player can be interested in the game. Further, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb that easily passes through the specific region 650V, the easiness of winning the ball to the V winning device 650 is made different according to the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

  Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol to be set is made different according to the set gaming state and the winning small category. By configuring in this way, when winning a jackpot corresponding to a jackpot to which a short-time state is given after the jackpot game ends, a gaming state (advantageous short-time) that makes it easy to pass a ball through the specific area 650V, and a jackpot end A game state (shortening disadvantageous time) that makes it easy to pass a ball through the specific area 650V can be set when a small win corresponding to a jackpot to which a short time state is given later is set.

  In the present embodiment, by using the above-described advantageous short-time and disadvantageous short-time configurations, when a big win is won once (first win), until a total of three big hits including the first win are executed. It is configured such that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. Thus, by making it possible to set a gaming state in which a large number of jackpot games are guaranteed to be executed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, in the present seventh embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640 that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so as to make it easier to enter the ball. Then, based on the fact that the ball that has flowed down on the electric accessory 3640a has entered the second entrance 3640, the electric accessory 3640a moves to the closed state, and at that time, the electric accessory 3640a flows down on the electric accessory 3640a. The spheres are configured to be distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) that has flowed down.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the ball positioned on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb that is advantageous to the player, and continues. When the sphere is fired, the sphere is configured to easily flow into the second flow path tb.

  Therefore, in order to allow the ball to flow into the second flow path tb while the lottery of the second special symbol is being executed, it is necessary to continuously fire the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of obtaining an advantageous result by firing a sphere at a predetermined timing.

  In the seventh embodiment, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path tb, that is, the sphere distributed to the flow path that is advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a, is directed toward the V prize winning device 650. Although it is configured to flow down, it may be configured such that a ball that has flowed down a flow path that is advantageous to the player can enter the general entrance 63. Thereby, many prize balls can be provided with respect to a player.

  Furthermore, a V-winning device 650 is provided with a valve member that can be changed between a first state in which a sphere can pass through the specific region 650V and a second state in which passage is difficult, and when the valve member is in the first state, The variation time for winning the device 650 and the variation time for winning the V winning device 650 in the second state may be varied according to the set short time state.

  Also, instead of the V winning device 650, a V-attacker that is opened during the big hit game is provided, and a certain change state (a high probability state of a special symbol) is given by the ball passing through a specific area in the V-attacker. The pachinko machine 10 may be applied.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 259. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the gaming state is set. Based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, making it easy to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol when the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set It was configured to generate small hit games frequently.

  As described above, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, that is, in order to frequently play a small hit game in the second special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the normal symbol, similarly, the low probability state of the normal symbol It is necessary to use a configuration in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed even in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol). Further, in order to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being frequently executed in the normal state, the variation time of the second special symbol set in the normal state is long (for example, 10 minutes). It was necessary to set a variation pattern.

  In this way, if a long variation time is executed in the second special symbol where the lottery is easily executed, the player mistakenly executes the lottery of the second special symbol. Since the next special symbol lottery is not executed until the variation pattern is completed, the game will be hindered. In the first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the first The lottery (fluctuation) of two special symbols can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, during the big hit game or during the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, the execution chance of the second special symbol The second entrance 640 is configured such that a sphere can enter (is easier to enter). As a result, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be prevented from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol as in the first embodiment described above. Even if it does not use the configuration that executes (variation) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), the small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state Can be generated frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Furthermore, according to the winning type (big hit, small win), it is possible to set a hit type that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and a win type that makes it difficult to enter the ball. When winning a win (big hit, small win), not only the size of the benefits (the number of award balls) that can be acquired during a win game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the win game The player can be interested in whether or not.

  In addition, in the present eighth embodiment, a ball enters the second entrance 640 when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol and when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the ratio at which the hit type that is easy to set is set is different. Specifically, it is easier to set a hit type that makes it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 when winning a win with the second special symbol than when winning a win with the first special symbol. It is composed.

  By configuring in this way, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is shifted to a state where it can be executed, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be continued and easily executed. Although the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (the mode in which the drawing of the special drawing 2 can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately ended, and the player is uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more likely to win a win (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the jackpot winning (1/400 at low probability) is set without winning the jackpot, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big win is won. The probability of (1/400 at low probability) is the same as that of the first special symbol described above, but is set to win (300/400) even for small wins. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set so that the probability of winning the small bonus is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more likely to win the winning (big hit, small win) than the lottery.

  As a result, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance 640, it can be won with a high probability (big hit, small win), The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

  Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the winning game is more likely to be made to enter the second entrance 640 with a higher probability in the case of winning the jackpot than in the case of winning the jackpot. doing. As a result, when a small win is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed again after the winning game ends.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) is configured to be capable of storing a plurality (four) of rights (holding storage), and depending on the winning type selected Thus, the opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game eagerly to secure more reserved memory by one hit game. Here, in the present eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is opened (the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path through which a part of the spilled sphere from the second opening / closing door 3650f can enter the second entrance 640 when the state is changed to the closed state (a state where the sphere cannot be guided to the second specific prize opening 3650a). It is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring so that the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 that is released during the winning game can enter the second inlet 640, 2 The player can watch the movement of the ball to enter the specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 234, the configuration of the game board 13 in the present eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment in that the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 is greatly different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, a first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right area of the game board 13, and a second attacker 3650 is provided at a substantially central position in the right area. A point where a guide passage 3660 is provided at a position below the second attacker 3650, and a point where a second entrance 640 accompanied by the electric accessory 640a is provided at a position where the outlet of the guide passage 3660 faces. , Is very different. The rest of the configuration is the same as the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configuration, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the ball flow during the right-handed game in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be briefly described. During normal times (except when the second attacker 3650 is opened), a ball fired toward the right region of the game board 13 by the right-handed game is opened and closed in the closed state (embedded state) 3650f. Passing through and passing through the game area on the right side of the guide passage 3660, the player flows down to enter the general entrance 63.

  The general entrance 63 (the general entrance 63 disposed on the right side of the second entrance 640) has one award ball set as a privilege given when the ball enters. Yes. Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase.

  On the other hand, during the game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, the open / close door 3650f is in an open state (a protruding state), that is, a ball can flow down on the open / close door 3650f toward the second specific prize opening 3650a. In this case, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the opening / closing door 3650f and wins the second specific winning opening 3650a. Then, the closing condition of the second attacker 3650 (elapse of a predetermined opening period, or the number of balls won to the second specific winning port 3650a reaches a predetermined upper limit winning number) is established, and the opening / closing door 3650f. Is changed to the closed state (embedded state), the sphere that has flowed downstream of the open / close door 3650f flows into the guide passage 3660.

  In other words, in the eighth embodiment, even when a right-handed game is performed in a normal time (other than a hit game when the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball flow path that can enter the second entrance 640 The ball is configured not to flow down in the guide passage 3660 in which is formed. With this configuration, since the ball that has flowed down in the guide passage 3660 does not enter the second entrance 640 unless the second attacker 3650 is opened by the winning game, the lottery of the second special symbol Can be limited in duration.

  Further, a through gate 67 is disposed between the opening / closing door 3650f and the inlet of the guide passage 3660 so that the sphere flowing into the guide passage 3660 passes through the through gate 67 and then flows into the guide passage 3660. It is configured. The guide passage 3660 is configured so that a period required for the sphere to flow down the guide channel is about 2.5 seconds. In this way, the sphere flowing down the flow path that can enter the second entrance 640 is configured to necessarily pass through the through gate 67, and reaches the second entrance 640 from the through gate 67. Is configured so that the time until the time is constant (about 2.5 seconds), whether the ball passing through the guide passage 3660 enters the second entrance 640 by the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol Whether or not can be easily varied.

  Here, in the present eighth embodiment, the variation time of the set normal symbol is varied according to the set gaming state. Specifically, a 2 second variation time is set in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, latent state), and a normal symbol high probability state (short time state, probability variation state) is 0.1 second variation time. Is configured to be set. Thus, when the normal symbol low probability state is set and the ball passes through the guide passage 3660, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the normal symbol high probability state is If the ball passes through the guide passage 3660 when set, the ball can hardly enter the second entrance 640.

  Next, the configuration of the open / close door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 235 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the open / close door 3650f in the open state (projecting state), and FIG. 235 (b) is the open / close in the closed state (embedded state). It is the top view which showed the door 3650f typically. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the opening / closing door 3650f of the present embodiment follows the inclination of the opening / closing door 3650f (see FIG. 234) from the right upper surface 3650y1 of the opening / closing door 3650f via the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening / closing door 3650f. It is comprised so that it may flow out toward the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth 3650a.

  The first delay member 3650fa, the second delay member 3650fb, and the third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the spheres meander the upper surface 3650f1 of the open / close door 3650f, and the flow-down period during which the sphere flows down the open / close door 3650f is one. It is configured to be 2 seconds. This flow-down period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) in which the second attacker 3650 maintains the open state when the second attacker 3650 is opened by the hit game (big hit B, big hit C, small hit). It is comprised so that it may become. With this configuration, the ball can be awarded to the second specific prize opening 3650a in the winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning game for releasing the second attacker 3650 is executed, a scenario of the releasing action is set so that the ball can win the second specific winning opening 3650a in all winning games. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as an opening operation scenario set during a winning game, an opening operation scenario in which a ball can easily win the second specific winning port 3650a, and a ball flows into the guide passage 3660. An easy opening operation scenario may be set.

  In this case, for example, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, a period during which the sphere flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the open / close door 3650f flows down to the position facing the guide passage 3660 (downstream position ZD of the upper surface 3650f1) The opening operation scenario may be defined so that 5 seconds) is a period for maintaining the open state of the opening / closing door 3650f when the opening operation is performed. When the opening operation scenario defined in this way is set, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second specific prize opening 3650a during the winning game, and the ball that has flowed down the upper surface 3650f1 of the open / close door 3650f flows into the guide passage 3660. It becomes easy to do.

  Accordingly, for example, when the winning game end condition is set to the upper limit number of winning balls for the second specific winning opening 3650a and the upper limit opening period of the open / close door 3650f, the second specific winning opening 3650a. Since the opening operation in which the ball is difficult to win is executed, the winning game can be continued for a long time. Therefore, the number of balls flowing into the guide passage 3660 during one hit game can be increased, and more special figure 2 reserved memory can be acquired.

  Next, when the closing condition of the open / close door 3650f is established, the state shown in FIG. 235 (a) is changed to the closed state (embedded state) shown in FIG. 235 (b). In this state, the sphere located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the sphere located at the upstream position ZC also passes through the right region.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the time for the upper surface sphere of the open / close door 3650f to flow down is 1.2 seconds (the upstream position ZC is 0.5 seconds and the downstream position ZD is 0.7 seconds). The door 3650f is configured to open for 1.5 seconds in a single small hit game. As a result, when the ball that has flowed down first wins the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, the next ball can be positioned at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when the small hit game is executed, the ball can be surely passed through the guide passage 3660.

  Note that the following configuration may be used instead of the configuration of the present embodiment. In other words, the position of the detection switch 3650Z that detects the ball that won the second attacker 3650 is positioned on the back side of the second attacker 3650 (the position of the modified example in FIG. 235), and from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z. The distance ZE is preferably configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds for the sphere to pass. With this configuration, even if the distance of the open / close door 3650f is shortened, the ball that flows down next can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

  Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns of the opening / closing door 3650f effective in the small hit game are prepared, and the second attacker 3650 is not won, but the small hit game in which the open period during which the ball can pass through the through gate 67 is set can be executed. You may comprise. That is, it is possible to execute a game for causing the second attacker 3650 to win a ball and a game for acquiring the reserved memory of FIG. 2 using the small hit game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, the ball flow in the right region of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing a sphere flow when the second attacker 3650 is in an open state (protruding state), and FIG. 237 is a sphere when the second attacker 3650 is in a closed state (embedded state). It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow.

  As shown in FIG. 236, when the open / close door 3650f is in the open state (projecting state), all the balls launched by the right-handed game are received by the open / close door 3650f (the right region of the game board 13). An open / close door 3650f is provided (so as to shield the screen). With this configuration, when a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is released is executed, it is possible to easily win a ball to the second specific winning opening 3650a simply by performing a right-handed game.

  When the opening / closing door 3650f is in the open state (projecting state), the inlet / outlet of the guide passage 3660 is blocked by the opening / closing door 3650f so that the sphere cannot flow into the guide passage 3660 (difficult). It is configured. In other words, in the eighth embodiment, the opening / closing door 3650f that is opened by the winning game restricts the flow of the ball to the guide passage 3660 and the function for making the second specified winning port 3650a easier to win the ball. It is used as a means having a function for.

  Next, when the open / close door 3650f is in a closed state (embedded state), the ball launched into the right-handed region in the right-handed game flows down the right-hand region of the guide passage 3660 (see the arrow in FIG. 237). . Here, in the eighth embodiment, a ball that has flowed down the right-handed area by the right-handed game executed when the open / close door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state) is prevented from flowing into the guide passage 3660 (difficulty). It is configured so that.

  Specifically, in the right region of the game board 13, the nail K1 planted above the open / close door 3650f is installed below the open / close door 3650f so as to form the inlet of the guide passage 3660. It is configured to be located on the right side (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 237) by a distance Kz (about 10 mm) from the nail K2. The nail K1 and the nail K2 are configured such that the distance in the height direction is one ball (about 15 mm). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball that has flowed down the right side of the nail K1 by the right-handed game from flowing into the inlet of the guide passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

  Further, with respect to the arrangement position of the second specific winning port 3650a where the ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the opening / closing door 3650f can win, the distance in the height direction is shorter than the distance in the width direction from the nail K1. Therefore, when the open / close door 3650f is in a closed state (embedded state), a ball is not won in the second specific winning opening 3650a. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 3650f is configured to change the state in which a ball can be awarded to the second specific prize opening 3650a and the state where it is impossible (difficult) to win, For example, a variable member that can be changed between an open position for opening the opening of the second specific prize opening 3650a and a closed position for closing the second specific prize opening 3650a and the open / close door 3650f. The variable member may be variably controlled so as to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the opening / closing door 3650f.

  In this case, for example, when the open / close door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state), that is, when the ball is not won in the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable member is variable so as to be positioned at the closed position. When the open / close door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, when the ball is allowed to enter the second specific winning port 3650a, the variable part is positioned at the open position. Variable control is good. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which a ball is awarded to the second specific prize opening 3650a at an unintended timing.

  Furthermore, when the configuration of the above-described example is used, it is preferable that the variable member and the opening / closing door 3650f are driven using a single drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid). As a result, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. In addition, the variable member may be configured to be delayed by a grace period in consideration of the flow time of the sphere with respect to the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing door 3650f. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the sphere that has flowed down to the downstream end of the opening / closing door 3650f cannot win the second specific winning opening 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the flow of the sphere when the sphere flows down on the upper surface 3650 f 1 (see FIG. 235 (a)) of the open / close door 3650 f and the open / close door 3650 f changes to the closed state (embedded state) will be described. do. As shown in FIG. 237, a nail K2 is planted below the opening / closing door 3650f and in the vicinity of the position 1/3 downstream of the opening / closing door 3650f, and the right and left sides of the nail K2 have different flows. A road is formed. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the range of the upstream side 2/3 of the opening / closing door 3650f flows down the area on the right side of the guide passage 3660 when the opening / closing door 3650f changes to the closed state (embedded state). On the other hand, the sphere flowing down the range of 1/3 downstream of the opening / closing door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (embedded state), and passes through the guide passage 3660. Flow into.

  The guide passage 3660 used in the eighth embodiment is formed in a meandering shape so as to lengthen the time until the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (flowing time). The time required for the sphere to flow down the flow path ty from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is configured to be about 2.5 seconds.

  When the ball passing through the through gate 67 and flowing down the flow path ty reaches the second entrance 640, if the electric accessory 640a is open, the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the electric If the accessory 640a is closed, it flows down toward the out port 66 without entering the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right region, but is not limited thereto, and may be provided below the guide passage 3660. Thereby, the spheres flowing down the plurality of flow paths can enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

  Furthermore, you may comprise so that the delay member for delaying the flow velocity of a sphere may be provided in the spherical flow lower surface of the guidance path 3660 used in this embodiment.

<About production contents in the eighth embodiment>
Next, characteristic effects executed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 241. In the present eighth embodiment, it is configured so that the right of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved memory) can be easily acquired during the period in which the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is being executed. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to make it easier to win a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol. In other words, in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by the left-handed game, the winner is won, the right-handed game is executed when the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot game is released. A game for acquiring the right of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved memory) while winning the prize ball (privilege) by winning the ball by operating the attacker (first attacker 650a, second attacker 3650) Is done.

  Then, when the special figure 2 holding memory is acquired during the winning game, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed after the winning game is finished, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit. If so, the winning game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit with high probability, once the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, the lottery of the special figure 2 is repeatedly executed. It becomes a game state that is easily played.

  Therefore, in the present eighth embodiment, an effect is provided to suggest to the player whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed (whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 has been executed). It is configured to be. Thereby, the player can play the game while confirming the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the hit game (the hit operation in which the second attacker 3650 is released) is executed, the special figure 2 reserved memory can be acquired. As shown in (a), during the execution of a winning game (a winning operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), an effect is urged to acquire special figure 2 reserved memory. FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the jackpot game when winning the jackpot C, which is a jackpot for the second attacker 3650 to be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C is started, in the guidance display area Dm3, in order to guide the player to perform the right-handed game during the jackpot game, “Right-handed” is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 collects the key 871 is executed. This key 871 is set in a production mode so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is collected, and when the character 811 collects many keys 871, This suggests (informs) the player that the number of reserved memories in FIG. 2 is large.

  In the main display area Dm, a comment “Collect treasure keys” for explaining the game characteristics of the effect is displayed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired (the key 871 is collected), and the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed after the jackpot game is finished, The treasure chest 873 (see FIG. 239) is opened using 871, and the effect of notifying the player in the form of the contents of the treasure chest 873 is executed.

  Further, an acquisition display area Dm12a in which a value related to the number of winning balls acquired during the jackpot game is added and displayed, and a round number display area Dm12b indicating the current number of round games are formed below the main display area Dm. . Since the example shown in FIG. 238 (a) is immediately after the jackpot game is started, “00000” is displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a, and no winning ball is acquired during the jackpot game. Is shown. In the round number display area Dm12b, “Round 1” is displayed.

  Further, in the effect during the jackpot game, acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for informing the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the effect executed in the present embodiment, since one key 871 is collected every time one reserved memory of FIG. 2 is acquired, the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are the maximum. Four keys 871 are displayed. The acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are also display areas for indicating the number of reserved balls in FIG.

  Further, in the sub display area Ds, a comment is also displayed as “continue right-handed” for showing the game contents to the player, and a second guidance display area formed below the guidance display area Dm3. A diagram schematically showing the configuration near the second entrance 640 is displayed at Dm11. As described above, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to obtain the reserved memory of FIG. 2 by continuously firing the ball, so other effects are provided so as not to provide a disadvantageous game to the player. A comment for indicating the game content is displayed in a display mode (display mode in which the character size is increased) that is emphasized more than the display mode used for the game. In this way, by using the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds to explain in detail the game contents aimed at during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  Then, after the display of FIG. 238 (a) is executed, when the jackpot game is executed and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is acquired, the contents of the effects shown in FIG. 238 (b) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 238 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a part of the contents of the effect displayed when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the main display area Dm. An effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed as an effect for notifying the player that the reserved memory in FIG. 2 has been acquired), and a comment “congratulations” is displayed.

  Further, in the acquired display area Dm10a, a key 871 is displayed to display that one key 871 has been acquired. In the second guidance display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position imitating the second entrance 640 in order to visually notify the player that a ball has entered. In the acquisition display area Dm12a, “00085” is displayed as the number of winning balls acquired during the jackpot game, and in the round number display area Dm12b, “2” indicating that the current round is the second round is displayed. Yes.

  Then, when the jackpot game ends, the screen shown in FIG. 239 (a) is displayed. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the jackpot game ending period. During this ending period, a main display is a notification mode (display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for notifying the player of the total number of reserved memories acquired in the special figure 2 acquired during this jackpot game. In addition to being displayed in the area Dm, a comment “Continue right-handed” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the right-handed game is continued even after the big hit game ends.

  Further, even if the jackpot game is over, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is used as the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 in order to allow the player to continue the right-handed game (FIG. 238 (a A display mode that is more emphasized than in () is set. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the right-handed game must be continued even after the jackpot game ends.

  Thereafter, when the jackpot game ends and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is executed, the key 871 collected during the jackpot game is used as shown in FIG. 239 (b). The effect of opening the treasure chest 873 is executed. FIG. 239 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed when the special figure 2 change is executed after the jackpot game ends.

  Since FIG. 239 (b) is a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed, the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows a fluctuation display indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being displayed in a variable manner. Aspect is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (special figure 2 hold) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d is reduced from two at the end of the jackpot to one.

  In addition, while the effect that has been continued since the big hit game is being executed, the acquisition display area Dm12a is always displayed, and when winning a small hit by special figure 2 lottery, the second attacker 3650 wins the ball to win Information regarding the number of winning balls is also displayed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous period) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed.

  Further, the round number display area Dm12b is continuously displayed in the same manner as the acquisition display area Dm12a described above, and the characters “Round Extra” are displayed while the game based on the special figure 2 fluctuation is being performed. Thus, it is possible to easily inform the player that the advantageous state has been extended and set even after the big hit game is over.

  In the present embodiment, the characters “Round Extra” are displayed for the game period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A summing means is provided for summing up the number of prize balls acquired during an executable game period, and the number of prize balls summed by the summing means is a prize ball that can be obtained in one round game executed during the jackpot game. When it is determined that the number has been reached, it may be configured to add 1 to the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot game. The number of rounds displayed during the big hit game when the small hit number measuring means for measuring the number of times is provided and the small hit number measured by the small hit number measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). 1 It may be configured so as to be calculated.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being extended and executed. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the effect of opening the treasure chest 873 using the key 871 (see FIG. 239 (b)) is executed while the jackpot game is being executed. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the current game is a big hit game from the effect being executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the previous game.

  If the win shown in FIG. 239 (b) is being executed, a winning is performed as shown in FIG. 240, in which the treasure chest 873 is opened and the contents of the treasure chest 873 are exposed. FIG. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of effects displayed when winning a small hit when the normal state is set as the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, when a low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of a normal symbol is set as compared with a case where a high probability state (probability change state, short-time state) of a normal symbol is set as a gaming state It is configured so that the special figure 2 reserved memory is easily acquired during the small hit game. In the example shown in FIG. 240 (a), it is shown that a small hit game that can acquire special figure 2 reserved memory is executed because a small hit is won in a state where the normal state is set. “V” is displayed as the display mode of the contents of the treasure chest 873.

  There are a plurality of display modes other than “V” indicating the contents of the treasure chest 873. For example, if the lottery result of FIG. 2 is out of place, “x” is displayed, and the lottery result of FIG. A display mode imitating “?” Is set for a small hit that is difficult to acquire. In addition, a pre-determination process for pre-determining the winning information of the second special symbol stored on hold is executed in advance, and the determination result of the pre-determination process is a jackpot or player in the hold information stored on hold. In the case of a determination result indicating that there is a small hit that is advantageous to the other, other changes executed until the change of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) corresponding to the hold information is executed Using the display mode showing the lottery result of FIG. 2, a display mode that suggests that a big hit or a small win that is advantageous to the player is included in the hold information stored on hold is set. It may be configured.

  Here, as a result of the fluctuation of the special figure 2, if the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player, that is, if the big win winning the normal symbol high probability state (for example, the short-time state) is set after the big hit game ends, FIG. As shown in (b), a display mode imitating “skull” is set as the display mode indicating the contents of the treasure chest 873.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the key 871 and the display mode of the treasure chest 873 may be varied based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 being executed this time or the prior discrimination result for the hold information stored on hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 241 (a), it may be configured to display a display mode (rusted key and tattered treasure box) that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place. Thereby, since the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol this time before opening the treasure chest 873, the interest of the game can be improved.

  After repeatedly executing the effects shown in FIG. 238 (a) to FIG. 241 (a) described above, when the key 871 is lost (the reserved memory in FIG. 2 is lost), the advantageous period advantageous to the player ends. Therefore, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241 (b) is displayed. In this ending screen, a value (value displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a) acquired during the advantageous period (a period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the special figure 2 variable period) And the number of times won is displayed. Then, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the game method to the left-handed game is variably displayed as “left-handed”, and “return to left-handed” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. "Is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is changed so that the game method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game at the timing when the reserved memory in FIG. ing. In other words, in the state where the short-time state is set as the gaming state, when there is a special figure 2 hold, a right-handed game is guided, and when there is no special figure 2 hold, a left-handed game is guided. ing. Thereby, an appropriate game can be executed without the player executing an unfavorable game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing a flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are five types of jackpot types (jackpots A to E) set when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, There are three types of jackpot types (big hits F to H) that are set when a big jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.

  The game state set after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the jackpot type set at the time of the jackpot winning and the game state set at the time of the jackpot winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shift each game state in a complicated manner in a game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In addition, a semi-advantageous game state is set by providing a game state (semi-advantageous game state) that is easy to shift to an advantageous game state (latency probability state) that is most advantageous to the player and a game state that is difficult to shift. In this case, since the player can continue to play the game, the operation of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 242, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state is executed. And if you win the jackpot of Special Figure 1, the probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (bonus A, B winning), the short time state is set with a probability of 25% (bonus E winning), with a probability of 10% The normal state is set (winning C, D win).

  Among them, when the jackpot C is won (5%), the second attacker 3650 is released in a part of the jackpot game, so that it becomes possible to acquire the reserved memory of FIG. 2 during the jackpot game. .

  Therefore, out of the cases where the jackpot for which the normal state is set after the jackpot game is won, the jackpot D (5%) is executed again for the game of drawing the special drawing 1 and the jackpot C (5%) is A game for drawing the special drawing 2 is executed. Special figure 2 wins a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and in a small hit game executed in a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, the reserved memory of special figure 2 is stored during the small hit game. Since it is configured to be able to be acquired, when the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in the normal state, a special game period in which the special figure 2 game can be continuously executed as long as the special FIG. Become.

  When the normal state is set as the gaming state, if the big win is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 to be executed, the probability variation state is set with a probability of 30% (bonus F win), with a probability of 35% A latent state is set (big hit G win), and a short time state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit H win).

  Next, when the probability variation state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small win is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the holding storage of the special figure 2 However, it is configured such that a new reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the small hit game (difficulty). Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the probability variation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the short-time state as the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol is high. Even if a small win is won in the lottery in FIG. 2, a new reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired, and the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player.

  In the state in which the probability variation state is set, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of Fig. 1, the probability variation state is set again with a probability of 35% (winning jackpot A winning), and the latent probability state is set with a probability of 30% ( A normal state is set with a probability of 10% (bonus C, D win) and a short-time state is set with a probability of 25% (bonus E win). And if you win the jackpot in the lottery of Special Figure 2, the probability change state is set again with a probability of 30% (bonus F win), the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (bonus G win), 35% A short-time state is set with probability (hit a big hit H).

  Next, when the latent state is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 In such a case, the reserved memory of the new special figure 2 can be acquired during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the latent state is a state where the special symbol jackpot winning probability is high and the special symbol 2 has a holding memory, and when the special symbol 2 lottery is won. Since it is possible to acquire the new reserved memory of FIG. 2, the gaming state is most advantageous to the player.

  In the state where the latent state is set, if the big win is won in the lottery of Fig. 1, the latent state is set again with a probability of 65% (winning A, B win), the normal state is with a probability of 10% It is set (bonus C, D win), and a time reduction state is set with a probability of 25% (bonus E win). And if you win the jackpot in the lottery of Special Figure 2, the probability variation state is set with a probability of 65% (bonus F, G winning), the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (bonus G winning), 35% A short time state is set with a probability of (hit a big hit H).

  Finally, if the short-time state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the winning in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is won However, it is configured such that a new reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the small hit game (difficulty). Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the short-time state is a state in which the special symbol jackpot winning probability is low and the special symbol 2 has a reserved memory, even if the special symbol 2 lottery is won, Since the reserved memory shown in FIG. 2 cannot be acquired, the gaming state is most disadvantageous to the player.

  In the state where the short-time state is set, when winning the jackpot in the lottery of Fig. 1, the probability variation state is set with a probability of 65% (winning A, B winning), and the normal state is set with a probability of 10% ( The jackpot C, D win), the short-time state is set again with a probability of 25% (bonus E win). And if you win the jackpot in the lottery of Special Figure 2, the probability variation state is set with a probability of 30% (bonus F winning), the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (bonus G winning), the probability of 35% The time-short state is set again with (Big win H win).

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that a ball cannot be newly entered into the second entrance 640 regardless of the game state in the state where there is no reserved memory in FIG. ing. Furthermore, it is configured so that the variation time of the first special symbol does not change between the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the state where there is no reserved memory of the special figure 2, even if the state of the normal symbol is changed, the advantage to the player does not change.

  That is, in the state in which the variation (lottery) of the special symbol 1 is executed, the low probability state (normal state, short-time state) of the special symbol has the same advantage, and the high probability state (probability variation state, latent state) of the special symbol The probability state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the low probability state of the special symbol as the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased.

  In addition, in the state with the reserved memory of the special figure 2, the high probability state of the normal symbol cannot acquire the new reserved memory of the special figure 2, so the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability change state, short time state) The game state is more advantageous to the player in the low probability state (normal state, latency state) of the normal symbol than the player. Therefore, the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is the latent state, and the most unfavorable gaming state is the short-time state.

  Furthermore, in the case of winning the jackpot, the ratio of shifting to the most probable latent state for the player will be described. The proportion of the latent state set based on the lottery in FIG. High (30%). Therefore, the probability variation state becomes a semi-advantageous game state in which it is easy to shift to the most advantageous advantageous game state (latency probability state).

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 243 to 250, an electrical configuration according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes a first per random number 8 table 202ga, a first per type selection 8 table 202gb, a second per random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. And an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. Note that the configuration (table) is the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except “8” used to identify that it was used in the eighth embodiment). ) Is the same as the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes a first per random number 8 table 202ga, a first per type selection 8 table 202gb, a second per random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. And an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The configuration (table) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except “8” used to identify that it was used in the eighth embodiment) ) Is the same as the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The first random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used in the same application as the first random number table 202a used in the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first When the random number 8 table 202ga matches the value of the random number that is a big hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  Further, in this first random number 8 table 202ga, the number of random numbers that are big hits is defined in the same way for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the random numbers that are only small lotteries for the second special symbol lottery (See FIG. 243 (b)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are small hits (only one special symbol is set), a bonus for the player in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol ( The degree of expectation for grant can be varied.

  Here, the contents of the first random number 8 table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 8 table 202ga. This first random number 8 table 202ga defines a random value (determination value) determined to be a big hit and a random value (determination value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The data table is referred to when the lottery result is acquired in the special symbol variation start process 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

  The first random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 1” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243 (b)), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out of place. “2 to 399” is defined as a range of determination values (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)).

  Also, “2 to 99” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the determination value determined as the small hit of the second special symbol “100 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243 (b)). In addition, in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, “0-19” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga4 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the first special symbol is out of place. “20 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)). Further, “20 to 99” is defined as a determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)), and “100” is determined as a determination value determined as a small hit in the second special symbol. ˜399 ”(see 202ga6 in FIG. 243 (b)).

  When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning matches with one of the determination values corresponding to the jackpot defined in the first per-random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)) In addition, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, and if it matches one of the determination values corresponding to the small bonus, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection 8 table 202gb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection 8 table 202gb. In the eighth embodiment, there are five types of jackpot types (hit A to jackpot E) that are set when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1), and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2). There are three types of jackpot types that are set when the jackpot is won in the lottery (hits F to jackpot H). Depending on the jackpot type, an open action scenario (action scenario) set during the jackpot game or The game state set after the jackpot game ends is varied.

  Specifically, when the symbol type won in the jackpot is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the acquired determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 34”, the jackpot type is “jackpot A”. Is set. This “jackpot A” is a 10-round probability variation jackpot, and the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario). The specific contents defined in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge described in FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is defined that the game state set after the jackpot game is different according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and when winning the jackpot A, when winning the jackpot The game state is normal (low probability of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol), probable state (high probability of special symbol, high probability of normal symbol), or short time (low probability of special symbol) State, high probability state of normal symbol), the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) For example, it is defined that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  When the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is “35 to 64”, “big hit B” is set as the big hit type. The “big jackpot B” is the same jackpot game as the “big jackpot A” described above (a jackpot game in which the action A is set as an open action scenario (action scenario) with a 10-round probability big hit) Different game states are set after the jackpot game ends.

  Specifically, when winning the jackpot B, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), or the short time state (low probability of the special symbol) State, high probability state of normal symbol), the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), or In the case of a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), it is defined that a latent state is set after the jackpot game ends.

  In this way, by providing a jackpot type with the same game content (action scenario) of the jackpot game and having different game states set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to win a jackpot for the player who is running the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the game state set after the game from being grasped in advance (until the jackpot game is completed). In addition, by making it difficult to predict the game state set after the jackpot game is finished depending on the game content of the jackpot game, for example, during the jackpot game, the suggestion effect to suggest the game state set after the jackpot game ends It is advisable to provide suggestion effect execution means for executing the above. By configuring in this way, the player pays attention to the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this case, the suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game based on the game state set after the jackpot game and the game contents of the jackpot game are provided. It is good to configure. Specifically, the game content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game are ranked in an order that is advantageous to the player, and each rank corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is merged ( It is good to comprise so that one production | presentation aspect may be set from several production | generation aspects based on the value (information) made to add. Accordingly, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game contents of the jackpot game become clear), it becomes easier to predict the game state set after the jackpot game ends based on the effect mode of the suggested effect to be executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the suggestion effect for a long period of time during the jackpot game, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  When the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is “65 to 69”, “big hit C” is set as the big hit type. This “jackpot C” is a game in which 10 rounds of jackpot game are executed in the same manner as “jackpot A” described above, but the contents of the set operation scenario are different, and the first attacker 650 and the second attacker This is a jackpot in which the scenario of the action B in which the game content for releasing both of the 3650 is defined is set. And it is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

  Specifically, when winning the jackpot C, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), short-time state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latency state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is defined that the normal state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  Next, when the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is “70 to 74”, “big hit D” is set. The action scenario of the action A is set so that the game content of the jackpot game is the same as the “jackpot A” described above. Then, as in the case of the “big hit C” described above, it is a normal big hit in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit game ends.

  Specifically, when winning the jackpot D, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), short-time state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latency state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is defined that the normal state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  When the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is “75 to 99”, “big hit E” is set. This “jackpot E” is a game in which the same jackpot game as the “jackpot D” described above is executed (a jackpot game in which the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario) in 10 rounds of a normal jackpot), Only the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is different from the “jackpot D”.

  Specifically, when winning the jackpot E, the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), short-time state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latency state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is defined that the time-short state is set after the jackpot game ends.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type won in the jackpot is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the obtained determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 29”, “jackpot F” is set as the jackpot type. The The “big hit F” is a big hit game with the same game content as the “big hit A” described above, that is, a 10 round probability variable big hit, and the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario). And the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), short time state (special symbol) Low probability state, normal symbol high probability state) or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, the probability change after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot It is defined that the state is set.

  When the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 64”, “big hit G” is set. The “big hit G” is a two round probability variable big hit in which a two round big hit game is executed, and an operation scenario of an action C in which a game content for opening the second attacker 3650 is defined is set. And if you win the “big hit G”, the game state at the time of the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, normal symbol of the normal symbol) High probability state), or short-time state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) after the jackpot game ends If it is set and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent probability state, it is defined that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  Finally, when the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is “65 to 99”, “big hit H” is set. This “big hit H” is a 10 round normal big hit in which the action scenario of action A is set so that the big hit game having the same game content as the “big hit D” described above is executed. And if you win the “big hit H”, the game state at the time of the big win is the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probable change state (high probability state of special symbol, normal symbol of High probability state), short time state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), or latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), that is, a game when winning a big hit Regardless of the state, it is stipulated that the short-time state is set after the jackpot game ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed (a state where the reserved memory of the special symbol 2 is secured), the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, latent state) Is set so that a game advantageous to the player can be provided as compared to a case where a high probability state (probability change state, time-short state) of a normal symbol is set.

  Specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and when winning the small hit, the second attacker 3650 (opening / closing door 3650f ) Is opened. Then, when the second attacker 3650 is opened by the small hit game, a state in which a ball easily passes through the through gate 67 and flows into the guide passage 3660 (see FIG. 243) is provided. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the normal symbol variation time (2 seconds) suitable for the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 is set. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to easily enter the second entrance 640.

  On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the normal symbol variation time (0.1 shorter than the time required for the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640). In detail, a game per game (electric component 640a) executed based on the fact that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the through gate 67 before reaching the second entrance 640. The fluctuation time is set to be short enough to complete the opening operation. Accordingly, the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to be difficult to enter the second entrance 640.

  By configuring in this manner, the number of reserved memories acquired for the second special symbol during the small hit game can be made different according to the game state set when the small hit is won. If you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the jackpot game, so regardless of the game state set when you win the jackpot, the second special It is possible to make it easy to acquire a reserved memory of symbols.

  The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table that defines the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the gaming state is a big hit or a small win. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines, for each scenario type, whether or not the operation content and the special figure 2 hold acquisition during the operation can be acquired.

  Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 is opened 10 rounds when the jackpot is scenario A and the scenario type is A. Therefore, when the scenario A is set, the second attacker 3650 is not released, so that the reserved memory shown in FIG. 2 cannot be newly acquired during the jackpot game. Next, when the jackpot and the scenario type is B, the second attacker 3650 is opened for 1 to 2 rounds, and the jackpot game to be opened for the first attacker 650 for 3 to 10 rounds is defined. Yes. Therefore, when the scenario B is set, the second attacker 3650 is released, so that the reserved memory shown in FIG. 2 can be newly acquired during the jackpot game.

  Next, in the case of a jackpot and the scenario type is C, a jackpot game that is opened for the first two rounds of the second attacker 3650 is defined. Therefore, when the scenario C is set, the second attacker 3650 is released, so that the reserved memory shown in FIG. 2 can be newly acquired during the jackpot game. In the case of a small hit, the second attacker 3650 is opened for one round. Therefore, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of FIG. 2 during the small hit game.

  Here, the contents of each scenario defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). FIG. 245 (b) shows the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245 (b), when scenario A is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and the first attacker 650 is set for 30 seconds as one round game, or Open until the number of winnings reaches 10 balls. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. When the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds are set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

  When scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed by releasing the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times, or It is set until the number of wins reaches 3 balls. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. When the interval period after the second round game has elapsed, the first attacker 650 is released for 30 seconds or until the number of winnings reaches 10 balls as the third round game. When the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds are set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

  When scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed by releasing the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times. Alternatively, it is set until the number of winnings reaches 3 balls. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. When the second round game ends, 4 seconds are set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

  In the scenario set during the small hit game, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small hit game, and one round game releases the second attacker 3650 once for 1.5 seconds. It is set until it is executed or the number of winnings reaches one ball. When one round game ends, 4 seconds are set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, a part of the big hit game (big hit B, big hit C) and the hit game for opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game are executed. Yes. Therefore, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67 during the winning game, and the ball can enter the second entrance 640. In addition, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), when the second attacker 3650 is opened in the big hit game, the number of times the second attacker 3650 is opened is smaller than in the case where the second attacker 3650 is opened in the small hit game. Since the number is set so as to increase, in a single hit game, more balls can enter the second entrance 640 than in the small hit game.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the normal symbol high probability state (short time state, probability variation state) is set, even if the sphere is passed through the through gate 67, the guide passage 3660 It is configured so that the ball that has flowed down cannot enter the second entrance 640 (becomes difficult), and when a big hit game is executed, a low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the small hit game is When executed, the small hit game is executed in the game state at the time of winning the small hit. Therefore, the big hit game is a win game that makes it easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

  The second random number 8 table 202gc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in the above-described embodiments, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is used to determine whether or not there is a winning combination with reference to the second random number 8 table 202gc.

  Here, the contents of the second random number 8 table 202gc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 8 table 202gc. The second random number 8 table 202gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, “0 to 237” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc1 in FIG. 246). Further, “0 to 238” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second random number 8 table 202gc are referred to. However, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  In addition, “238, 239” is defined as a determination value that is out of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc2 in FIG. 246). In addition, “239” is defined as a judgment value that is out of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc4 in FIG. 246).

  The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the type of the special symbol on which the lottery is executed, Corresponding to the result of the lottery and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1, variation patterns in which different variation times are set are defined.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. FIG. 248 (a) is defined in the normal / latency probability 8 table 202gd1 defined by the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. FIG. 248 (b) schematically shows the contents specified in the time reduction / probability change 8 table 202gd2 specified by the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. It is a schematic diagram.

  Here, the contents of the normal / latency 8 table 202gd1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal / latent probability 8 table 202gd1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the normal state / latent probability state is set as the gaming state. Or a variation time table that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the second entrance 640 or the second attacker 3650 than the variation pattern table (referred to when the probability variation state is set). The fluctuation time is defined as follows.

  The contents defined in the normal / hidden probability 8 table 202gd1 will be described in detail. If the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of place, the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Regardless, when “out-of-range variation” (variation time 30 to 120 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern and the lottery result is a big hit, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is within the range “0 to 99”. As a variation pattern, “per normal variation” (variation time 30 seconds) is defined. On the other hand, a “hit super fluctuation” (fluctuation time 60 seconds) is defined for the range “100 to 179”, and a “hit special fluctuation” (fluctuation time) as a fluctuation pattern for the range “180 to 198”. 120 seconds).

  If the special symbol type is Special Fig. 2 and the lottery result is out of the range, “out-of-range variation” (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a small hit, regardless of the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern is defined as “small hit fluctuation” (fluctuation time 5 seconds), and if the lottery result is a win, it is acquired. Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the “variation per hit” (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal / latent state, the variation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 248 (b), the contents defined in the time reduction / probability change 8 table 202gd2 will be described in detail. If the special symbol type is Special Figure 1 and the lottery result is out of place, “outside middle fluctuation” (variation time 30 to 60 milliseconds) is used as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a big hit, and the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 39”, “winning normal fluctuation” (fluctuation time 30 milliseconds) is prescribed as the fluctuation pattern. . In the case of “40 to 119”, “hit super fluctuation” (variation time 60 milliseconds) is defined. In the case of “120 to 198”, “hit special fluctuation” (fluctuation time of 120 milliseconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

  If the special symbol type is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of place, the fluctuation pattern is “out of short fluctuation” (variation time 1 millisecond) regardless of the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result is a small hit, regardless of the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1, “short hit fluctuation” (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and the lottery result is won In this case, regardless of the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1, “winning short fluctuation” (fluctuation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the short-time state or the probability variation state, the variation time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 of the eighth embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol reserved ball storage. Number counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, probability variation flag 203g, variation time counter 203gc, big hit middle flag 203o, small hit middle flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory areas 203z. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  The other memory area 203z of the present embodiment has a data area that can store the currently set gaming state, and has a special symbol high probability state, a low probability state, or a normal symbol high probability. The state and the low probability state can be stored, and further, the condition until each state is completed (transition to another state) and the current state with respect to the condition can be updated. Since the specific contents are the same as the control processing for the probability variation flag, the probability variation counter, and the time reduction counter in each of the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga differs from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the second entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. The detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The fluctuation time counter 203gc is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. In the variation time counter 203gc, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set (see S11011 in FIG. 252). Also, the fluctuation time counter 203gc is decremented by 1 in the special symbol fluctuation processing 8 (see FIG. 251) (see S10914 in FIG. 251), and whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc. Is determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 250, an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 250A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (a), the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment is configured with the same electrical configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, It has a stop type selection flag 223fb, a variation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a big hit effect extension flag 223gb, and other memory areas 223z. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the second entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. The detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is a flag for indicating that the effect during the jackpot game (see FIG. 238 (a)) is to be continuously executed after the jackpot game ends, and continues after the jackpot game ends. It is set to ON when it is determined to execute (extend the jackpot effect). This jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is received from the main controller 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command indicates that the number of held balls is If it is determined that the command is 0, it is turned off (S12906 in FIG. 258). When the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on, the jackpot extension effect is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239 (a)).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the special symbol variation process 8 (S9001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 8 (S9001). This special symbol variation process 8 (S9001) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is performed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In the special symbol variation processing 8, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether either the big hit / medium flag 203o or the small hit / medium flag 203p is on. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol is being jackpoted or jackpoted (S10901: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S10901, when it is determined that the special symbol is neither big hit nor small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902), If it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203gb (the number N2 of the variable display hold based on the lottery of the second special symbol) Is acquired (S10903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is greater than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is decremented by 1 (S10905) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is set (S10906). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. Store in 223ga.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S10906, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S10913.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10904, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number) Fluctuation display hold count N1) based on lottery is acquired (S10908), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol hold ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10909).

  In the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), both the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to change. Since this is a state that cannot be performed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10909, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S10910), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10911). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S10907 (S10909), and the process proceeds to S10913. Transition. In the process of S10913 executed after the process of S10907 or S10912, the special symbol fluctuation start process 8 for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10913), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol variation start process 8 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902: Yes), the value of the variable time counter 203gc is updated by subtracting 1 (S10914), and the updated variable time counter is updated. Based on the value of 203gc, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter 203gc updated in the process of S10914 has become zero. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S10915 (S10915: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display pattern of the stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to H is determined.

  After the process of S10916 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 8 is displayed when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S10918). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10918: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S10919), a special symbol jackpot start is set (S10920), and the process proceeds to S10921. To do. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S10919, if the main processing (see FIG. 52) jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and an opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S10918, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S10918: No), the processes of S10919 and S10920 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S10921.

  In the special symbol variation process 8 (see S9001 in FIG. 251) in the eighth embodiment, the technical idea and the control contents for stopping the special symbol for a predetermined period as in the second embodiment described above are shown. You may comprise so that it may add. Thereby, the lottery result of the specific symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913). This special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga, a lottery (decision of success or failure) of “special symbol big hit” or “special symbol outage” is performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the one symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process 8, first, a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203ga. Each value of C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S11001).

  Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain probability variation state (S11002). In the processing of S11002, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the probability of the special symbol is changed, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol has a low probability state (not the probability variation state). In the process of S11002, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (S11002: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S11001 and the first for high probability time Based on the winning random number 8 table 202ga, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S11003). If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S11005.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11002 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a probabilistic state (a low probability state of a special symbol) (S11002: No), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S11001 is Based on the first per-random number 8 table for low probability (see FIG. 243 (b)), a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S11004). If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S11005.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S11003 or S11004 is a special symbol jackpot (S11005). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S11005: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S11001, the display mode for the big hit is set (S11006).

  In the processing of S11006, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to H). In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A to H) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S11007). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S11007, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247), and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed). Time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11005 that the special symbol is out (including small hits) (S11005: No), the display mode at the time of out (small hit) is set (S11008). In the processing of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off (small hit) symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, As the stop type to be displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, or small hit.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probabilistic state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S11001 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing (small hit) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off (small hit) symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S11007, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (Variation time) is determined.

  When the processing of S11007 or the processing of S11009 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S11007 or S11009 is set (S11010). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 203gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S11006 or S11008 is set (S11012). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 52). When the process of S11012 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 8.

  In the special symbol variation start process 8 of the eighth embodiment (see S10913 in FIG. 252), when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit (S11005: Yes in FIG. 252), it is not a big hit (losing, or In the case of small hit) (S11005: No in FIG. 252), the processing content to be executed is configured to be different, but as used in any of the above-described embodiments, it is determined that it is not a big hit. In this case, the control process is executed for losing, and in this case, it is configured to determine whether the current lottery result is losing or small hitting. The processing contents to be executed may be different from each other. Note that the detailed contents of the control process executed in this case are the same as in any of the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the start winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 8 (S9002). This start winning process 8 (S9002) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first and second entrances 64 and 640. And, when there is a start winning, this is a process for executing a hold process of values indicated by various counters.

  When the start winning process 8 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S11101). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S11102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S11103).

  If the ball has not won the first entrance 64 (S11101: No), or the ball has won the first entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process proceeds to S11107. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S11101: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S11104). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S11105).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S11105, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Each value is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process proceeds to S11107. . In the process of S11106, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S11107, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the second entrance 640 (S11107). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S11101, the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( In step S11108, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S11109).

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S11107: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203gb is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S11109: No), the process proceeds to S11113. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (S11110). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb changed by the calculation is set (S11111).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. Store in 223ga.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S11111, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga of the RAM 203, it is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S11112), and the process proceeds to S11113. In the process of S11112, as in the process of S11106, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S11113, a prefetch process for prefetching the success / failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S11113), and this process is terminated. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S11113). In this pre-reading process (S11113), first, it is determined whether or not a new entry to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 has been detected in the current start winning process 8 (see FIG. 253). However, if a new incoming ball is not detected (S11201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11201 that a new ball has been detected (S11201: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (ie, 4) If it is determined that the upper limit value is reached (S11202: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S11202, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S11202: No), whether or not the timing for starting the variable display based on the entered ball is in the probability variation state of the special symbol. Is discriminated (S11203). In the processing of S11203, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in a probable change state according to the current game state and the pre-read result of the held ball held before the current entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the holding ball, the current gaming state coincides with the timing at which the fluctuation display based on the currently detected ball starts, so that the current gaming state is a probable state. It is determined that In addition, when the jackpot is included in the holding ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, when the probable jackpot is on hold, the system shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is held, the system shifts to a normal state after the jackpot. Taking these into account, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the fluctuation display based on the currently detected incoming ball is in a state of probability variation.

  In the processing of S11203, when it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the detected entry is the special symbol probability variation state (S11203: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the entry and the high probability The lottery result based on the current entry is acquired based on the first random number 8 table 202ga for use (S11204), and the process proceeds to S11206. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start time is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S11203: No), the type of the entrance that detected the entrance, the first random number 8 table 202ga for the low probability, Based on this, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S11205), and the process proceeds to S11206.

  In the process of S11206 executed after the process of S11204 or S11205, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that detected the current entrance and the lottery result obtained in the process of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), the process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the normal symbol fluctuation process 8 (S9003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003). This normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the normal symbol (second symbol) variation display or second incoming ball performed in the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the mouth 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S11301). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of the display showing the hit and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S11301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S11301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S11302: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S11303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S11304: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S11305).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the process of S11306, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S11307).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time-short state) (S11308). In the processing of S11308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a high probability state based on information included in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203.

  In the process of S11308, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in a high probability state (S11308: Yes), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S11307 and the second per-random number 8 for high probability time. Based on the table 202gc (see FIG. 246), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202gc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 238”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “239”, it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 246).

  In the process of S11308, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in a high probability state (S11308: No), the process proceeds to S11310. In the process of S11310, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot game or the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the second random number counter acquired in the process of S11307 Based on the value of C4 and the second per random number 8 table 202gc for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number 8 table 202gc for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 237”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “238, 239”, the normal symbol is off. (See FIG. 246).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S11309 or S11310 is a normal symbol win (S11311), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S11311: Yes), The display mode for winning is set (S11312). In the process of S11312, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the short time state (high probability state) (S11314). If the normal symbol is in the short time state (high probability state) (S11314: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Is set to 0.1 second (S11315), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (high probability state) (S11314: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this process is performed. finish.

  Also, in the processing of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is discriminated (S11317). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S11315 or the processing of S11316 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S11317, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S11317: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S11317 (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the process of S11318, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S11312, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S11313, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S11318, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is stopped and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of S11313 or S11318.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S11319). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S11319: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in a short time state (high probability state) (S11320), and in a short time state (high probability state). Otherwise (S11320: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are set to “0.9 seconds × 1 time” (S11321), and the process is performed at S11323. Migrate to On the other hand, in the process of S11320, when it is determined that the normal symbol is short in time (high probability state) (S11320: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 and the opening are released. The number of times is set to “one second × one time” (S11322), and the process proceeds to S11323.

  In the process of S11323, the opening time determined in the process of S11321 or S11322 and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening are set (S11323), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S11323, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S11321 or the process of S11322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S11319: No), each process of S11320 to S11323 is skipped, and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 to 259. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment is different from the control process of the seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the command determination process is changed. Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. For convenience of explanation, the same processes as those in the above-described embodiments may be given different reference numerals, but the processes with the same names are used for the same purposes.

  First, the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 8 (S4191). This command determination processing 8 (S4191) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process to do.

  In the command determination processing 8, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether it has been received (S12701). In the process of S12701, when it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S12701: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12703), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12701 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S12701: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S12704). If a stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12704 that a stop type command has not been received (S12704: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12707). . And when it determines with having received a reserve ball number command (S12707: Yes), a hold ball number related process is performed (S12708), and this process is complete | finished. Details of the reserved ball number related processing (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol are obtained by the processing of S12708. The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb. Therefore, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga of the voice lamp control device 113 are affected by noise and the like, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 is set. Even if it deviates from the value of 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are detected when a start winning is detected or when a special symbol is drawn. The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110.

  When the process of S12708 is executed, the display holding ball for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga. A number command is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S12707, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S12707: No), it is then determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12709). And when it determines with having received the state command (S12709: Yes), the data of the game state storage area 223fe are updated according to the received command (S12710). Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12709 that no status command has been received (S12709: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S12711). In the process of S12711, when it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S12711: Yes), information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S12711 that no winning information command has been received (S12711: No), then commands related to winning (big hit, small winning) (opening command, round number command, ending command for each win) ) Is received (S12713). If it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S12713: Yes), a hit-related process 8 for executing control corresponding to the type of the hit-related command is executed (S12714). This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12713, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot is not received (S12713: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S12715), and this process is terminated. In the process of S12715, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223. If the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the retained ball number related process (S12708), which is one process in the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control apparatus 113, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number related processing (S12708).

  In the reserved ball number related process (S12708), first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command related to the reserved ball number of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been received (S12801). If it is determined that a special figure 2 related command has been received (S12801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received special figure 2 related command is a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (S12802). If it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), the information in the gaming state storage area 223fe is read (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the information in the read game state storage area 223fe is a big hit or a small hit (S12804). When it is determined that the jackpot or the jackpot is being hit (S12804: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is on (S12805). When it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to on in order to set the extension of the effect executed during the jackpot (S12806). A jackpot extension effect is set (S12807), and the process proceeds to S12808. On the other hand, in the process of S12805, if it is determined that the jackpot extension flag 223gb is on (S12805: Yes), it is not necessary to set the jackpot extension effect, so the processes of S12806 to S12807 are skipped and the process of S12808 is skipped. Transition to processing.

  By configuring in this way, when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired while the winning game is being performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery) is executed after the jackpot game is finished. A jackpot extension effect can be set. That is, since the effect executed after the winning game is ended is set based on the presence / absence of the reserved memory in FIG. 2 instead of the gaming state set after the winning game is finished, as shown in the eighth embodiment, a specific Since it is possible to easily set the production mode corresponding to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure 2 that can be executed only under the conditions, it is possible to execute the production that is easy for the player to understand.

  In S12808, the key display mode (display mode of acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the process proceeds to S12811. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12804 that the current gaming state is not big hit or small hit (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809), and the process proceeds to S12810. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S12802, when it is determined that the special figure 2 related command received this time is not a command indicating an increase (S12802: No), the process at the time of decrease is executed (S12813), and the process proceeds to S12811. To do.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 258, the process at the time of decrease (S12813), which is one process in the reserved ball number related process (S12708) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control apparatus 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this decrease processing (S12813).

  In the decrease process (S12813), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the command received this time and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, whether the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the process of S12902, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902: Yes), it is the timing of the jackpot end, A display effect command indicating the end of the extra round is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left-handed is set (S12904). Next, the right-handed command is set to OFF (S12905), the big hit effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12906), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12902 that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S12902: No), a key display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set (S12907). This process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. When the process of S12801, S12810, or S12813 ends, the process proceeds to S12811. In the process of S12811, it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). In the process of S12811, it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). If it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has not been received (S12811: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of the winning association process 8 (S12714) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart schematically showing the content of the hit relation process 8 (S12714). This hit related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a hit related command (a command related to a big hit or a small hit) is received.

  When the hit-related processing 8 (S12714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a jackpot-related command (S12151), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot-related command (S12151: Yes). The corresponding display command is set (S12152), and this process is terminated. The various display commands set in the process of S12152 are set by the same process as the process executed when the jackpot related command is received in the command determination process executed in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12151 that the hit-related command received this time is not a jackpot-related command (S12151: No), it is next determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a small hit start command. (S12107) When it is determined that the command is a small hitting start command (S12107: Yes), the small hitting start process 8 is executed (S12158), and this process ends.

  This small hitting start process 8 (S12158) is the content of the display command that is set in the normal symbol high level compared to the process executed in the small hitting start process 7 (S12108) of the seventh embodiment described above. It is different in that the display command executed when the probability state is set and the display command executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set are determined and set, Since other than that is the same, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the process of S12107, when it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a small hit start command (S12107: No), it is then determined whether a small hit end command has been received (S12109), and the small hit end is completed. If it is determined that a command has not been received (S12109: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12109 that a small hitting end command has been received (S12109: Yes), then the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to off (S12153), and then the second special symbol holding ball It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is greater than 0 (S12154). That is, in the process of S12154, the presence / absence of reserved storage in FIG. 2 is determined at the timing when the small hit game is completed.

  In the process of S12154, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is greater than 0 (S12154: Yes), since the special figure 2 change is executed after the small hit game ends, this process is continued. Exit. On the other hand, in the processing of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is not greater than 0 (0) (S12154: No), then the big hit effect extension flag 223gb is turned on. (S12155: Yes), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to off (S12156), and this process ends.

  As a result, if the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed after the small hit game, that is, if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the small hit game, the big hit extension effect is executed after the small hit game ends. Can be prevented. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the winning association process 8, when a small hitting end command is received (S12109: Yes), if the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No), at the end of the small hit game, the end screen of the jackpot extension effect (see FIG. 241 (b)) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the jackpot extension effect will end.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol is executed during the big hit game or during the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. It is configured so that a ball can enter (is easy to enter) the second entrance 640 serving as an opportunity. As a result, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be prevented from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol as in the first embodiment described above. Even if it does not use the configuration that executes (variation) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), the small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state Can be generated frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Furthermore, according to the winning type (big hit, small win), it is possible to set a hit type that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and a win type that makes it difficult to enter the ball. When winning a win (big hit, small win), not only the size of the benefits (the number of award balls) that can be acquired during a win game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the win game The player can be interested in whether or not.

  In addition, in the present eighth embodiment, a ball enters the second entrance 640 when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol and when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the ratio at which the hit type that is easy to set is set is different. Specifically, it is easier to set a hit type that makes it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 when winning a win with the second special symbol than when winning a win with the first special symbol. It is composed.

  By configuring in this way, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is shifted to a state where it can be executed, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be continued and easily executed. Although the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (the mode in which the drawing of the special drawing 2 can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately ended, and the player is uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more likely to win a win (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the jackpot winning (1/400 at low probability) is set without winning the jackpot, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big win is won. The probability of (1/400 at low probability) is the same as that of the first special symbol described above, but is set to win (300/400) even for small wins. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set so that the probability of winning the small bonus is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more likely to win the winning (big hit, small win) than the lottery.

  As a result, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance 640, it can be won with a high probability (big hit, small win), The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

  Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the winning game is more likely to be made to enter the second entrance 640 with a higher probability in the case of winning the jackpot than in the case of winning the jackpot. doing. As a result, when a small win is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed again after the winning game ends.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) is configured to be capable of storing a plurality (four) of rights (holding storage), and depending on the winning type selected Thus, the opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game eagerly to secure more reserved memory by one hit game. Here, in the present eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is opened (the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path through which a part of the spilled sphere from the second opening / closing door 3650f can enter the second entrance 640 when the state is changed to the closed state (a state where the sphere cannot be guided to the second specific prize opening 3650a). It is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring so that the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 that is released during the winning game can enter the second inlet 640, 2 The player can watch the movement of the ball to enter the specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, as in the seventh embodiment described above, inflow detection means for detecting that a sphere has flowed into the flow path (guide passage 3660) that allows the sphere to flow down when a specific condition is satisfied, and the sphere from the flow path A discharge detecting means for detecting that the discharge has occurred, and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode based on the detection result of each detection means, or based on the detection result of each detection means. An operation limiting means for limiting the gaming operation may be provided.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 266. In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the second special symbol (special diagram 2) are configured to be dynamically displayed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Variation type). Furthermore, in order to efficiently execute the special symbol discrimination, it is possible to set a gaming state (a normal symbol high probability state) in which the electric accessory 64a can be easily opened, and a normal symbol high probability state (for example, a short time state). Is continued for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of times of special symbol discrimination (fluctuation) reaches 100 times after the end of jackpot).

  In the first embodiment described above, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are configured to be able to execute discrimination (variation) at the same time (in parallel), the high probability state of the normal symbol is determined in advance as described above. In order to prevent the period from being set longer than the predetermined period, refer to when determining the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continued at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts. The time reduction information (for example, the time reduction counter 203f) is updated (see FIG. 36).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the time-shortening information is updated at the timing of starting the variation of each special symbol. Therefore, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, the number of special symbol discrimination (variation) is increased. Even if the time reduction number is set based on this, it is possible to prevent the time reduction state from being set exceeding the predetermined time reduction number.

  However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, depending on the discrimination (variation) timing of each special symbol, the period in which the short-time state is set is shortened, and the player is uncomfortable. There was a problem.

  Specifically, for example, as the determination (variation) of the first special symbol, the determination (variation) of the second special symbol is performed immediately after the special symbol variation at the 100th rotation (the final number of time reductions) is executed. , When the special rotation of the 101st rotation is executed, the time-saving state can be terminated at the timing when the special rotation of the 100th rotation is executed (immediately before the execution of the special rotation of the 101st rotation). When the special figure variation at the 101st rotation is not executed in the state in which the special figure variation at the 100th rotation (the shortest number of times) is executed, the player does not feel uncomfortable. In the case where the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is started after the special figure fluctuation is completed, the time-short state ends at the timing when the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation is executed. The state of the normal symbol during the special map change There is a problem that uncomfortable feeling to the player for.

  On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, when the special figure variation number of times (for example, 100 times) is set as the short-time end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the short-time end condition is satisfied. End timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation) that is executed first after the short-time end condition is satisfied And the time-short state is terminated based on the timing executed first out of any one of the timings.

  By comprising in this way, the high probability state of a normal symbol can be set longer, and it can suppress that the situation which gives discomfort to a player generate | occur | produces.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed, the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is satisfied can be determined. The time reduction state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-short state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time-shortening times and the special symbol lottery to be executed in the time-short state.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure fluctuation in which the short-time end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation in which the short-time end condition is satisfied, the first is satisfied. The time reduction state is configured to end based on the timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time reduction is based only on the timing at which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change that satisfies the time reduction end condition. You may comprise so that a state may be complete | finished.

  With this configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period from when the special drawing fluctuation at the 100th rotation is completed until the special drawing fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed, that is, the special drawing at the 100th rotation. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the change is over, the short state can be continued even during the idle period, so the gaming state advantageous to the player (high probability state of normal symbol) is more Can be set longer.

  In this case, when a game for allowing a ball to pass through the through gate 67 for starting a normal symbol variation is performed, a ball launched by the game starts a special symbol variation. The game area of the game board 13 may be configured so that a ball can enter the mouth. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the game which starts only the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol is performed, without starting the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol.

  Further, when the winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol discrimination (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is opened so that the ball can easily enter the ball entry means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game in which only ordinary symbol discrimination (lottery) is executed for a long period of time.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 64a is opened and a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2. Although it is configured so as to be easy (see FIG. 2), it is not a entrance for starting the variation of special symbols as an entrance that makes it easier for a ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. A predetermined number of award balls may be awarded based on the fact that the ball has entered.

<Electrical Configuration of Ninth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described. The ninth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are changed, and the other electrical configurations are the same. About the same element, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 included in the main controller 110 of the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 260, the RAM 203 of the ninth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a short-time end standby flag 203ha is added.

  The short time end standby flag 203ha is a flag for indicating a standby state for ending the short time state, and is set to ON in a standby state for ending the short time state. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (short-time end timings) for ending the short-time state are set based on the number of times of special symbol fluctuations (number of special-figure fluctuations). When either timing is reached, the time reduction state is configured to end.

  And when it will be in the state (standby state) where several short time end timings may be materialized, the short time end standby flag 203ha is set to ON. Specifically, the game state update process (S308) in the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) and the second special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 39) in the main controller 110. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is determined to be 0 (S604: Yes) in the gaming state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263) executed instead of (), it is set to ON (see S691). ).

  Next, when the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264), second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266)) is executed, or a new Special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S395 in FIG. 261), second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S991 in FIG. 265)), and waiting for a short time end. When the flag 203ha is set to ON, the time-saving end process (see S492 in FIG. 262) for ending the time-saving state is executed, and the time-saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404).

  With this configuration, when the short-time end waiting flag 203ha is set to ON (that is, in the standby state), when any short-time end timing arrives, it is ensured according to each timing. It is possible to execute a short-time end process. In addition, when the short-time end process (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, the short-time end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the short-time end process from being executed at multiple timings. can do.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. The control process of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment is a first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. In place of the symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), the game state update process (see FIG. 36), the game state update process 9 (see FIG. 263), the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) In place of the first special symbol variation stop process 9 (see FIG. 264), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 265), the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 265) The second special symbol variation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 45), and the time reduction end process (see FIG. 262) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 261, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S491 and S492 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395), after obtaining the execution area data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S401), whether the short-time end standby flag 203ha is on, that is, this time It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start is a time-short end timing (S491). If it is determined that it is time to end the time (S491: Yes), the time reduction end process is executed (S492), and the process proceeds to S402. Details of the time-shortening process (S492) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S491, if it is determined that the short-time end standby flag 203ha is not on, that is, the current fluctuation start is not the short-time end timing (S491: No), the process proceeds to S402.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the short time end before acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring before the lottery result is acquired in this way, the time reduction can be set as the gaming state until the end of the fluctuation that is the timing of the time reduction end.

  Next, the short time end process (S492) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing details of the time saving end process (S492). In the time saving end process (S492), a process for setting the gaming state after the time saving end is executed.

  In the time saving end process (S492), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is on (S11401). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating a latent probability state is set (S11402), and the process proceeds to S11404. On the other hand, in the process of S11401, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (S11401: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S11403), and the process proceeds to S11404. In the process of S11404, the short-time end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the gaming state update process 9 (S396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing details of the game state update process 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, after subtracting the value of the hour / hour counter 203f from the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment (S602), it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is zero. In this case (S604: Yes), it is different in that a process (S691) for setting the short-time end standby flag 203ha to ON is added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the first special symbol variation stop process 9 (S297) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment is different from the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 of FIG. 38) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S891 and S892 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process 9 (S297), after the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S809), the short-term end waiting flag 203ha is turned on, that is, the current fluctuation. It is determined whether or not the stop timing is a time-short end timing (S891). In the process of S891, when it is determined that the short-time end standby flag 203ha is off (S891: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S891 that the short-time end standby flag 203ha is on, a short-time end process for ending the short-time state is executed (S892), and this process ends. Note that this short-time end process (S892) executes the same process as the short-time end process (S492, FIG. 262) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 265) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 266), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) and (1) Addition of a control process that performs the same short time end process (see FIG. 262 when the short time end standby flag 203ha is ON) as the change to the special symbol variation stop process 9 (see FIG. 264) Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time-short end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time-short end condition The end timing of the special figure fluctuation that satisfies (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation) that is executed first after the short-time end condition is satisfied The start timing can be discriminated, and the time reduction state is configured to end based on the timing executed first among any of the timings.

  By comprising in this way, the high probability state of a normal symbol can be set longer, and it can suppress that the situation which gives discomfort to a player generate | occur | produces.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed, the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is satisfied can be determined. The time reduction state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-short state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time-shortening times and the special symbol lottery to be executed in the time-short state.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure fluctuation in which the short-time end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation in which the short-time end condition is satisfied, the first is satisfied. The time reduction state is configured to end based on the timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time reduction is based only on the timing at which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change that satisfies the time reduction end condition. You may comprise so that a state may be complete | finished.

  With this configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period from when the special drawing fluctuation at the 100th rotation is completed until the special drawing fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed, that is, the special drawing at the 100th rotation. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the change is over, the short state can be continued even during the idle period, so the gaming state advantageous to the player (high probability state of normal symbol) is more Can be set longer.

  In this case, when a game for allowing a ball to pass through the through gate 67 for starting a normal symbol variation is performed, a ball launched by the game starts a special symbol variation. The game area of the game board 13 may be configured so that a ball can enter the mouth. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the game which starts only the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol is performed, without starting the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol.

  Further, when the winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol discrimination (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is opened so that the ball can easily enter the ball entry means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game in which only ordinary symbol discrimination (lottery) is executed for a long period of time.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 64a is opened and a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2. Although it is configured so as to be easy (see FIG. 2), it is not a entrance for starting the variation of special symbols as an entrance that makes it easier for a ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. A predetermined number of award balls may be awarded based on the fact that the ball has entered.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 278. Each embodiment mentioned above has two kinds of special symbols (the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special symbol), and when the lottery of each special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (for example, big hit or small hit) , A bonus game (a jackpot game, a jackpot game) for operating a variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is configured to be executed.

  In this way, when a special game is executed in accordance with the special symbol lottery, since the special game is executed when the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result, the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result. Although it was possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, even if a special symbol lottery is executed multiple times, the lottery result may not be a specific lottery result. No special benefit can be given to the player who executed the game.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined that a ball has entered, a variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is activated. A ball means (specific entrance 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable winning device to operate only by entering the specific entering means, a privilege is directly given to the player's game content (ball launch result). Therefore, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 267, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above with respect to the second entrance 640 and the first variable winning device 65. The electric accessory 64a and the lower first entrance 64b2 are deleted, and an entrance 464 is provided instead of the upper first entrance 64b1, and a new specific entrance 4640 and its specific entrance The difference is that a specific accessory 4640a associated with 4640 and a small attacker 4650 are provided. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the detailed description of the same configuration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, among the game areas formed on the game board 13, the left area (the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view) and the left area The game-related devices are concentrated in the lower area (the area on the lower side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80) where the ball that has been fired flows down, and causes the player to fire the ball in the left area. It is configured to play left-handed games.

  Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left side region, and a ball entrance 464, a specific ball entrance 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided in the lower region in order from the top. It has been. Here, the flow of the game when the left-handed game is performed with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  Most of the balls launched by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the lower region. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, normal symbol discrimination (lottery) is executed based on detection of the passage (detected by a detection switch (not shown)). In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol is won, a winning game is executed in which a specific accessory 4640a described later is released.

  The entrance 464 is arranged so that one out of 20 spheres reaching the lower region enters the entrance 464. When it is detected that a ball has entered the entrance 464 (detected by a detection switch (not shown)), a lottery for a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed based on the detection. In addition, four prize balls are awarded to the player for each entry. Then, the balls that have not entered the entrance 464 flow down toward the specific entrance 4640, the small attacker 4650, and the second variable prize device 650 provided below the entrance 464.

  Here, the specific entrance 4640 is a specific accessory that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. 4640a is attached, and it is configured such that the ease of entering a sphere varies depending on the variable situation of the specific accessory 4640a. This specific accessory 4640a is variably controlled by variable control means (normal symbol variation processing (refer to S106 in FIG. 48) executed by the main control device 110) so that the state varies according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. In the case of winning a normal symbol lottery executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67, the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 so that the ball is easy to enter. Variable control.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is mentioned later, in this embodiment, it becomes a state (specific symbol high probability state) in which the specific actor 4640a is likely to be in an open state as a gaming state, and an open state rather than the high probability state of the normal symbol. Although it is possible to set a difficult state (ordinary symbol low probability state), even if the normal symbol low probability state is set, the ball enters the specific entrance 4640. Configured to get.

  Returning to FIG. When the specific combination 4640a is in an open state at the timing when a ball that has not entered the entrance 464 reaches the specific entrance 4640, the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 and is specified. When the accessory 4640a is in the closed state, the accessory 4640a passes over the closed specific accessory 4640a and flows down toward the small attacker 4650.

  When a ball enters the specific entrance 4640, a special symbol (first special symbol) is drawn and one prize ball is awarded for one prize. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights that are executed when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 can be reserved.

  In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13 so that a ball flowing down the game area is guided to a position where various devices in the lower area are arranged by the plurality of nails. To flow down. Further, in the lower area, a device (for example, the second variable winning device 650) provided below the number of balls guided toward the device (for example, the entrance 464) provided on the upper side. ) Is configured so that the number of spheres guided toward the

  Specifically, of the balls launched by the left-handed game, approximately one out of four balls is guided to a position where it can enter the entrance 464 (above the entrance 464), of which 5 1 ball (that is, about 1 ball in 20 balls launched by the left-handed game) enters the entrance 464.

  Then, the specific entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are configured such that one ball is guided to about two of the balls launched by the left-handed game. The specific entrance 4640 flowed down without entering the entrance 464 despite being guided to a position where it can enter the entrance 464 (above the entrance 464). Spheres and spheres that could not be guided to the entrance 464 at the stage of flowing down the left region are included. Finally, the second variable winning device 650 is configured so that substantially all of the balls launched by the left-handed game are guided.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, it is possible to perform a right-handed game, and a ball fired by a right-handed game is more than a ball fired by a left-handed game. The ball entrance 464, the specific entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650 are difficult to be guided, and are guided to the second variable winning device 650 at an equal ratio.

  In this way, by making the ease of entering each entrance different depending on the position at which the player launches the ball, the player can play the game while competing for the skill. Can be prevented from getting bored early.

  The configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment is not limited to, for example, making it easier for the small attacker 4650 to guide the ball in the right-handed game than in the left-handed game. You may comprise. This allows the player to perform a game whose game method (left-handed or right-handed) is varied according to the game result (whether or not a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640). Can be motivated to play games.

  Returning to FIG. The small attacker 4650 is provided with a small opening / closing door 4650a which is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult to enter a ball and an open state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. The small opening / closing door 4650a is configured so that the ease of entry of the sphere varies depending on the variable state of the small opening / closing door 4650a. The small opening / closing door 4650a has specific variable control means (specific ball entry processing executed by the main controller 110 (see S196 in FIG. 278) so that the state changes when a ball enters the specific ball opening 4640. )) Is variably controlled. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640, the value of the counter (first per-type counter C2) that is randomly updated and the set game are set. The small opening / closing door 4650a is configured to have different opening patterns based on the state.

  Specifically, the period from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small opening / closing door 4650a opens (open waiting time) is made different. Thereby, for example, in a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a period (open waiting time) from when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened is set to a unit time The number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 at the time of winning can be suppressed, and a game state in which the period from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small opening / closing door 4650a opens is easily set (for example, In the (latent state), the number of winning balls for the small attacker 4650 per unit time can be increased.

  In the tenth embodiment, when a ball wins a small attacker 4650, ten winning balls are given to one winning ball. More prize balls than the ball opening 4640 are provided. Therefore, by changing the number of balls awarded to the small attacker 4650 per unit time according to the gaming state, for example, the number of balls won to the player by winning the ball to the small attacker 4650 is larger than the number of balls fired. The number of balls can be awarded as a prize ball.

  By configuring in this way, in addition to the game based on the lottery of the special symbol, it is possible to cause the player to play a game based on the ball entering the specific ball entry means (specific ball opening 4640). The interest of the game can be improved.

  Finally, the ball that has not won the small attacker 4650 also flows down to the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attacker 4650. Similar to the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is a variable means that operates when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery (operates during a big win game). Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted. The ball that has not won the second variable winning device 650 flows into the out port 66 formed at the lowermost position of the game area of the game board 13 and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10.

  In this embodiment, the ball can be launched into the right area of the game area (right-handed game is possible). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a game in which a ball is launched into the right handle area of the game area. The right area may be completely eliminated so that (right-handed game) cannot be executed. In the tenth embodiment, all the games (from the game in the normal state) can be executed only by the left-handed game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the through gate 67 and the specific entrance 4640 may be provided in the right region, and the game content may be varied according to the game state.

<About production contents in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, characteristic effects executed in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the period (determined period) from when the special symbol for indicating that the jackpot is won until the jackpot game is executed after the special symbol is displayed is a jackpot type. It is specified differently depending on

  In the tenth embodiment, a gaming state (latent probability state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily opened during the fixed period is set. In other words, a game (so-called small hit RUSH) in which the small attacker 4650 is continuously released can be executed by using a special symbol fixed period for indicating that the jackpot has been won.

  By configuring in this way, the small hit RUSH can be executed before the big hit game is executed. Since the technical idea of executing the small hit RUSH before the jackpot game is executed is the same as that of the second embodiment described above, a detailed description thereof and a derivation that can be conceived based on this technical idea The plan and other plans are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the tenth embodiment, the same special symbol determination period as that in the second embodiment is used as the period for executing the small hit RUSH. You may use the period used in order to make a hit game run frequently. For example, as in the above-described sixth embodiment, a period (opening period) from when the jackpot game is started to when the round game is started may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery results of special symbols. A latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) may be set as a gaming state, and a small hit RUSH may be performed during the latent state.

  Returning to FIG. 268, the description will be continued. FIG. 268 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbol is stopped, and FIG. 268 (b) is executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol. It is the figure which showed an example of the produced effect screen.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the special symbol jackpot is won, “777” is stopped and displayed in the special display 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Is displayed. In this embodiment, since the left-handed game is executed in all gaming states, “left-handed” is always displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Note that when the same game method (left-handed) is always executed as in the present embodiment, the player does not need to change the game method, so the guidance display area Dm3 is displayed. You may comprise so that it may not.

  In the main display area Dm, a character 811 is displayed, and a comment “Aim for RUSH” is displayed to indicate to the player that a game period in which the small attacker 4650 is frequently released starts. In the sub display area Ds, a comment “chance zone entry” indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player has been set is displayed.

  In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, if a special symbol jackpot is won in a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), the special winning that jackpot is won. A latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set during a symbol determination period. When the game state is set to the latent state, an operation pattern is set that has a short period (open waiting time) from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 until the first attacker 650 is released. Since it is configured so as to be easy, a game that can increase the number of balls won to the small attacker 4650 per unit time per player (RUSH game) ends the fixed period of special symbols. It is executed until.

  Further, the tenth embodiment is configured such that the special symbol determination period varies depending on the winning jackpot type. Therefore, winning a jackpot type with a long special symbol determination period can lengthen the period during which a RUSH game can be executed, which is a jackpot advantageous to the player.

  Here, in each embodiment mentioned above, the stop display mode of the 3rd symbol for showing that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, whether or not the game content during the jackpot game is advantageous to the player ( It is configured to be set according to whether or not the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be given to the player during the jackpot game is advantageous to the player and the game state set after the jackpot game is over For example, if the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set with the same odd number (for example, “777”) and is not advantageous to the player (disadvantageous). When the jackpot is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set with the same even number (for example, “222”).

  On the other hand, in the present tenth embodiment, as the stop display mode of the third symbol, whether or not the game content during the jackpot game described above is advantageous to the player (can be given to the player during the jackpot game) In addition to whether the game status set after the end of the bonus game is advantageous to the player, whether the length of the symbol determination period is advantageous to the player It is configured to set accordingly.

  By configuring in this way, by grasping the stop display mode of the 3rd symbol, the RUSH game executed before the jackpot game, the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game is finished, and the three game contents You can play games while predicting. In this case, for example, the period during which the RUSH game is executed (symbol determination period), the game content of the jackpot game, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are all advantageous to the player. It is preferable to provide a stop display mode (for example, “VVV”) of the third symbol that is set only for. Thereby, a game can be performed while giving satisfaction to a player.

  Further, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be configured to change at every predetermined timing. For example, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. Among the stop display modes, a stop display mode (for example, “222”) indicating that the player is disadvantageous to the player is set. After that, “777” is displayed during the symbol determination period (RUSH game). “VVV” may be configured to vary the stop display mode of the third symbol so as to indicate that the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is gradually won.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting that the stop display mode of the third symbol changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set by combining the magnitudes of a plurality of benefits given to the player based on the jackpot winning, but not limited to this, The size may be displayed in a different manner.

  For example, the type of stop display symbol (number) of the third symbol is set according to the game state set after the jackpot game is ended, and the size of the third symbol is changed according to the game content during the jackpot game. In addition, the color of the third symbol may be varied and set according to the length of the symbol determination period. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in detail of the contents of the game to be executed in the future.

  Furthermore, in the present tenth embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state during the symbol determination period, an efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol determination period. In this case, that is, when the winning state is won when the gaming state is the normal state or the short-time state, an inefficient RUSH game is executed. Therefore, when setting the stop display mode based on the length of the symbol fixed period as the stop display mode of the third symbol, the stop display mode of the third symbol set based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is variable. It is good to constitute so that. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the game contents to be executed in the future in an easy-to-understand manner.

  After entering the symbol determination period after the display of FIG. 268 (a), the display screen shown in FIG. 268 (b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), during the period in which the RUSH game is being executed, “in the chance zone” is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the symbol determination period "Remaining time 30 seconds" is displayed. This remaining period display mode is configured to update the number of seconds displayed in accordance with the elapsed time, and notifies the player of the remaining period of the chance zone (symbol determination period). In addition, in the sub display area Ds, a comment “Aim for a small attacker” is displayed to indicate the game content in the chance zone (during the symbol determination period).

  Note that the number of seconds displayed in the remaining period display mode may be set to indicate all of the remaining remaining period when entering the chance zone, or a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol determination period. May be set so that a new number of seconds is added to the number of seconds in the remaining period display mode displayed as time passes. In addition, it is set so as to indicate a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol determination period, and after the set period has elapsed, the remaining period display mode is set to “? Seconds”, and the remaining period is the player. You may make it not understand.

  In the tenth embodiment, the remaining period display mode is set so as to indicate the remaining period of the symbol determination period in seconds. However, the player can grasp that the remaining period is decreasing. For example, it may be configured to suggest the remaining period using an animation until the character 811 is captured by the enemy, or the period until the container containing the liquid is emptied may be used. You may comprise so that a remaining period may be suggested. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the remaining period by using an animation showing the process of the story instead of the number of seconds.

<Electrical Configuration in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 269 to 273, an electrical configuration according to the tenth embodiment will be described. The tenth embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are different. Other electrical configurations are the same, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 269 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the outage type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the second embodiment described above. A second hit random number 10 table 202ia is provided instead of the second hit random number table 202c, a big hit type selection 10 table 202ib is provided instead of the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, and a new specific entry motion pattern table 202ic is newly added. Is different.

  The second per random number 10 table 202 ia is the second per random number table 202 c (see FIG. 15 (c)) that is determined to be a hit in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and the rest is the same, so detailed description is omitted.

  Here, the contents defined in the second random number 10 table 202ia will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 270, in this second random number 10 table 202 ia, there are 231 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state, in the latent state) of the normal symbol as the gaming state The range is “0 to 230”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be hit is 231. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “231/233”.

  On the other hand, there are 232 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (in the probability variation state and the short time state), and the range is “0 to 231”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be hit is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is “232/233”. As described above, the tenth embodiment is configured such that the random value that is a normal symbol hit has a high probability (231/233) even in the low probability state of the normal symbol.

  By configuring in this way, even in a gaming state in which a normal symbol low probability state is set (normal state, latency state), a gaming state in which a normal symbol high probability state is set (probability change state, time reduction) State), it is possible to make it easier to win a normal symbol lottery. The probability that the normal symbol high probability state wins slightly higher than the normal symbol low probability state is slightly higher than the normal symbol low probability state. The state is more advantageous. In addition, the opening pattern of the specified role 4640a executed in the winning game executed when winning in the normal win is higher in the normal symbol higher probability state than in the normal symbol low probability state winning win. The winning pattern is set so that the ball can easily enter the specific entrance 4640, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the low probability state of the normal symbol. Yes. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the specific entrance 4640 executed in the normal symbol winning game is not the normal symbol state (high probability state, low probability state) when winning in the normal symbol lottery, but the winning game You may comprise so that it may set according to the state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the time of performing.

  The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting a jackpot type when winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and is similar to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2.

  Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. The same elements as those defined in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the second embodiment described above (for example, the time reduction counter 203f and the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad) are assigned the same reference numerals. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 271, in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2, and are set in the hour / hour counter 203f for each jackpot type. The value to be set, the setting state of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value set to the fixed time counter 203ad are defined.

  Specifically, for the jackpot A jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which a round game of 15 rounds is executed, the time counter 203f is set regardless of the game state when it is selected (when the jackpot is won). It is specified that the value “10000” is set, and the probability variation flag 203g is specified to be set to ON. In other words, when jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is selected as the jackpot type, a probabilistic state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set until the next jackpot is won. It prescribes. In the present tenth embodiment, it is configured to set “10000” as the value of the hour / short counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next jackpot is won, but it is not limited to this. For example, a flag that is set to ON until the next big hit is won may be used.

  Furthermore, as the symbol determination period for special symbols, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to “5 seconds”, the jackpot A2 is set to “60 seconds”, and the jackpot A3 is set to “150 seconds”. The jackpot A1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is “0 to 19”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in “24”. That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed in 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, of which 80% (20/20 25) is jackpot A1, 16% (4/25) is jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is jackpot A3.

  In other words, in the tenth embodiment, even if the jackpot game that is most advantageous for the player (15 round jackpot game) is won, the period for displaying the lottery result on the player in a stopped state (symbol) When a short symbol determination period is selected as the (determination period), the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is shortened. Therefore, with respect to the special symbol lottery, not only the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, but also the length of the symbol determination period can be watched by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the tenth embodiment, the symbol defining period is associated with the jackpot type and defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot action content (jackpot type); You may comprise so that the lottery for selecting a symbol fixed period may be performed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined with a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide gameability that is difficult for a player to predict.

  Next, similarly to the jackpots A1 to A3 described above, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, jackpots D1 to D3 are respectively defined.

  Specifically, when the jackpot B (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the game content of the jackpot game (5-round game), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, is set (when the jackpot is won) It is specified that the value of “10000” is set in the hour / hour counter 203f when the game state is normal (low probability state of normal symbols), and the value of “10” is set when the time is shorter or probability change. The probability variation flag 203g is specified to be turned on.

  In other words, when the jackpot B is won, a jackpot game that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A is executed. However, if a short-time state or a probable change state is set as the gaming state, the player is notified after the jackpot game ends. It is defined to be able to provide a state in which an advantageous gaming state can be set (a gaming state in which a high probability state of a special symbol ends with a special symbol variation of 10 times until the next jackpot). Yes. Therefore, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are jackpots in which the jackpot A is more advantageous as the contents of the jackpot game, but the jackpot B can be more advantageous as a gaming state set after the jackpot ends.

  Furthermore, as the symbol determination period for special symbols, it is stipulated that the jackpot B1 is set to “30 seconds”, the jackpot B2 is set to “90 seconds”, and the jackpot B3 is set to “120 seconds”. The jackpot B1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is “25 to 29”, the jackpot B2 is defined in the range of “30 to 44”, and the jackpot B3 is defined in “45 to 49”. Yes.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the big hit operation corresponding to the big hit B (big hit B1 to B3) is executed in 25% when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, of which 20% (5 / 25) is a jackpot B1, 60% (15/25) is a jackpot B2, and 20% (5/25) is a jackpot B3. Here, the symbol determination period that can be set in the case of jackpot A and the symbol determination period that can be set in the case of jackpot B will be described. The maximum value of the symbol determination period in jackpot A is larger than that in jackpot B. The jackpot B is specified to be longer than the jackpot A, but the average value of the symbol determination period set is longer.

  Thus, the maximum value of the symbol determination period that can be set is large, but the jackpot type (high risk high return) with a small average value and the maximum value of the symbol determination period that can be set is small, but the jackpot type with a large average value (Risk Low Return), and the symbol determination period is set rather than setting the symbol determination period completely random by configuring the symbol determination period based on the selected jackpot type. On the other hand, it can be assumed that the player has some kind of law. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the tendency of the symbol determination period that can be set according to the big hit type (big hit A to big hit C) is different, it is not limited to this, and the big hit type of each big hit type ( In the jackpot A to jackpot C), a high risk / high return symbol determination period selection group and a low risk / low return symbol determination period selection group may be provided. Moreover, although the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set is the same, from among a plurality of symbol determination period selection groups in which the maximum value and the minimum value of the symbol determination period that can be set are different, The player may be configured to be able to select a desired symbol determination period selection group, and may be configured to set the symbol determination period using the symbol determination period selection group selected by the player.

  Returning to FIG. 271, the description will be continued. As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot B3) that sets the probability variation flag 203g on after the jackpot game ends, that is, the ratio at which the so-called probability variation jackpot is selected is 50% (50/100). The remaining 50% is selected as a jackpot type for setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF after the jackpot game ends, so-called normal jackpot.

  Specifically, in the jackpot C (jackpot C1 to jackpot C3) in which the same jackpot game content (15 round games) as the jackpot A described above is set, when it is selected (when the jackpot is won) Regardless of the gaming state, it is specified that the value of “50” is set in the hour / hour counter 203f, and the probability variation flag 203g is specified to be set off.

  In other words, if the jackpot C is won, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed in the same way as the jackpot A, but after the jackpot game is finished, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set, and the 50 short-time states Is defined to be set. Therefore, the jackpot C is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B described above, but the jackpot that is disadvantageous than the jackpot A and jackpot B described above as the gaming state set after the jackpot ends. It is a type.

  Furthermore, as a symbol determination period for special symbols, the jackpot C1 is set to “5 seconds”, the jackpot C2 is set to “60 seconds”, and the jackpot C3 is set to “150 seconds”. The jackpot C1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is “50 to 54”, the jackpot C2 is defined in the range of “55 to 64”, and the jackpot C3 is defined in “65 to 74”. Yes.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot C (jackpot C1 to C3) is executed in 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, of which 20% (5 / 25) is jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is jackpot C3. Here, the jackpot C is the same as the jackpot A described above, and the types of symbol determination periods (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds) that can be set are the same, but the selection ratio is defined differently. It defines that the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set is larger than the jackpot A. As a result, the jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A in the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends, but the symbol decision time that the RUSH game is executed is a jackpot The jackpot type is more advantageous than A.

  Finally, in the jackpot D (jackpot D1 to jackpot D3) in which the same jackpot game content (5 round games) as the jackpot B described above is set, the gaming state when selected (when the jackpot is won) Regardless of this, it is specified that the value of “50” is set in the time-shortage counter 203f, and the probability variation flag 203g is specified to be set to OFF.

  In other words, when the jackpot D is won, the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed in the same manner as the jackpot B, and after the jackpot game is finished, the gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set similarly to the jackpot C. Has been. Therefore, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player among the above jackpot types.

  Furthermore, as a symbol determination period for special symbols, it is stipulated that the jackpot D1 is set to “30 seconds”, the jackpot D2 is set to “90 seconds”, and the jackpot D3 is set to “120 seconds”. The jackpot D1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is “75 to 84”, the jackpot D2 is defined in the range of “85 to 94”, and the jackpot D3 is defined in “95 to 99”. Yes.

  In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot D (jackpots D1 to D3) is executed in 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, of which 40% (10 / 25) is a jackpot D1, 40% (10/25) is a jackpot D2, and 20% (8/25) is a jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is the same as the jackpot B described above, and the types of symbol determination periods (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds) that can be set are the same, but the selection ratio is defined differently. It is defined that the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set is larger than the big hit B.

  In this way, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in any of the jackpot game contents, the game state set after the jackpot game is ended, and the symbol determination time during which the RUSH game is executed.

  The specific entry motion pattern table 202ic is a data table in which the contents of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 executed when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650 is released. Until the time (open waiting time), and the opening operation content of the small attacker 4650 are defined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the gaming state at the time when the ball enters.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents defined in the specific entry motion pattern table 202ic will be described. FIG. 272 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the specific entry motion pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined regardless of the game state, and the same operation content is defined, and the game state and the value of the first per category counter C2 are Accordingly, the waiting time for opening is specified to be different.

  Specifically, as an operation content of the small attacker 4650, an opening operation in which the opening / closing door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once is set. Continue until the number of winning balls reaches 10. The ending period in which the opening operation is completed and the open / close door 4650a is closed is set to 0.5 seconds.

  Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first hit type counter C2 is defined as “0 to 89”, and “normal 1” with an opening waiting time of 20 seconds is defined as “90 to 98”. “Normal 2” with a waiting time of 2 seconds is defined, and “Normal 3” with a waiting time of 0.5 seconds is defined as the value “99”. In addition, when the gaming state is the short-time state or the probability-changing state and the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 39”, “open time 1” with an opening waiting time of 10 seconds is defined, and “40 to 89” "Time reduction 2" with an opening standby time of 5 seconds is specified in the range "", and "Time reduction 3" with an opening standby time of 2 seconds is specified in the value "90 to 99". Further, “latency 1” with an opening waiting time of 0.5 seconds is defined in the range where the gaming state is the latent state and the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 89”. ”Is defined as“ latency 2 ”with a release waiting time of 0.2 seconds, and“ 98 to 99 ”is defined as“ latency 3 ”with a release waiting time of 2 seconds.

  As described above, the tenth embodiment is configured such that the waiting time for opening differs greatly depending on the gaming state. When the normal state is set as the gaming state, a ball is placed on the small attacker 4650. Even if the player enters the ball, the player's ball does not increase. On the other hand, when the latent state is set as the game state, the small attacker 4650 is frequently released, so The sphere can be increased.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 (see FIG. 95) of the second embodiment described above in the second special symbol execution area 203b, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, and the jackpot. Flag 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability variation counter 203aa, special figure 2 symbol determining flag 203ac, special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae Is deleted, and a probability variation flag 203g, a specific entering ball flag 203ia, and a specific entering invalid flag 203ib are added. Since other elements are the same as those of the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, since the probability variation flag 203g has the same contents as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The specific entry flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640. Is. The specific entry flag 203ia is used when a specific entry process (see S196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110 causes a ball to enter the specific entry port 4640. When it is determined that it has been performed (S11501 in FIG. 278: Yes), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

  Then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether it is set to ON (see S496 in FIG. 276), and if it is determined to be ON (in FIG. 276). (S496: Yes), a process for forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol executed this time is executed (see S412 in FIG. 276). Next, it is set to OFF when the specific pitching operation is completed.

  As described above, the tenth embodiment is configured such that the small attacker 4650 is opened when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640, and the specific entrance for opening the small attacker 4650 is achieved. When the operation scenario is set, a process for forcibly removing the first special symbol so that the lottery result does not become a big hit is executed. Thereby, since the big win of the first special symbol is not won during the period when the small attacker 4650 is opened, it is possible to prevent the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 from being performed repeatedly. . Furthermore, in order to make the variable ball entry means (small attacker 4650, second variable prize winning device 650) in which the ball is difficult to enter (closed state) in a normal state easy to enter the ball (open state). It is possible to suppress that the above control is executed simultaneously (overlapping).

  The specific entry invalid flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific entry invalid period) during which an operation for releasing the small attacker 4650 is not performed when a ball enters the specific entry port 4640. It is set to ON when the specific entry invalid period is set.

  The specific entry invalid flag 203ib is determined in the first special symbol variation stop process 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) when the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 277: Yes). ) Is set to ON (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific entry process (S196 in FIG. 278), the setting status is determined (S11502 in FIG. 278), and when it is determined that the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S11502 in FIG. 278). Yes), the process (S11504 in FIG. 278) in which the specific entry operation scenario is set is skipped. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the small attacker 4650 from being released based on the ball entering the specific entrance 4640 during the period when the big hit game is being executed.

<Regarding Control Processing in Tenth Embodiment>
Here, the control processing in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 278. In the tenth embodiment, since the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted and the configuration of the specific entrance 4640 is added to the above-described second embodiment, the contents of the control process to be executed are also included. The control process relating to the lottery (discrimination) of the second special symbol is deleted, and a control process that is executed when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 is different. Moreover, the control process accompanying the difference of the control process mentioned above is different.

  Specifically, instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above, the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) is replaced with the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97). In place of S154), the special symbol variation process 10 (see S195 in FIG. 275) is replaced with the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98), and in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395 in FIG. 276). ) Is replaced with the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99), the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) is executed, a specific ball entry processing (FIG. 278) The difference is that S196) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition to the above-described contents, the specific contents of the control process (for example, the process contents related to the second special symbol variation) may be changed in correspondence with the configuration of the tenth embodiment. Except for the parts described above, the difference is simply that the corresponding processing is deleted, and those skilled in the art can easily conceive them, so that detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the timer interrupt process 10 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing details of the timer interrupt processing 10. In the tenth embodiment, the subroutine of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) for the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment. Is different in that the subroutine of the specific entry process (S196) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process 10 is executed, similarly to the timer interrupt process described above, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed, and then the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed. This special symbol variation process 10 (S195) can cause the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) described above to delete the variation process related to the second special symbol and execute a new special symbol variation. The difference is that the processing content for determining whether or not it is possible is changed. The detailed contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 274, the description will be continued. When the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is completed in the timer interrupt processing 10, the same processing of S105 to S108 as the above-described special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed, and then the specific entry After executing the process (S196), other processes (S109) are executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, the specific entry process (S196) is a process that is executed when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 (see FIG. 267). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the small attacker 4650 is to be opened or whether or not the current incoming ball is to be handled effectively, and processing is performed for setting based on the determination result. Specifically, the detailed contents of the specific entry process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) in the tenth embodiment. When the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed, it is first determined whether the current gaming state is a big hit or a specific entry (S295). In the process of S295, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is set to ON, it is determined that the current big hit flag is set, and if it is determined that the specific incoming flag 203ia is set to ON. It is determined that the current entry is in a specific ball.

  In the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a big hit or a specific entry (S295: Yes), the special figure variation process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S154 in FIG. 97). The same processes of S202 and S203 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not a big hit or a specific entry (S295: No), the special figure variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above. The processing of S204, S205, S206, and S251 that is the same as that of the reference is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S251 that the special symbol 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is not set to ON (set to OFF), the first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is executed. This process is terminated. The first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is a first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. Reference) is different in that the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). Since this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is the same except for this, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S206, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the process of S251, the special figure 1 symbol determining flag 203ab is set to ON. If it is determined (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 10 (S296) is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), the current state is a high probability state with a special symbol compared to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above. When determining whether or not to execute the lottery (big hit determination) of the first special symbol this time, reference is made to the probability variation flag 203g instead of the probability variation counter 203aa. The difference is that instead of the big hit flag 203i, the specific entering flag 203ia is referred to. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

  When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) is executed, first, the same processing of S401 as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S495). If it is determined in the process of S495 that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, the current lottery result is based on the first per-random number table 202a for the high probability because the current state is a special symbol high probability state. Is acquired (S403).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S495 that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON, the current state is a low probability state of a special symbol, so the current random number table 202a for the low probability time is A lottery result is acquired (S404). Next, when the above-described processing of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the specific in-going flag 203ia is set on (S496), and when it is determined that it is set on (S496: Yes), That is, when it is determined that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640 and the specific entrance operation is being executed, the processing (S407 to S410) based on the determination of the special symbol being executed (big hit determination) is skipped. And after performing the process of S412 same as the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (refer S356 of FIG. 98) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the process of S496, when it is determined that the specific entering flag 203ia is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above. The same processing of S406 to S410 as the big hit determination processing 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol variation stopping process 10 (S296) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stopping process 10 (S296). The first special symbol variation stop process 10 (S296) deletes the update process related to the probability variation counter 203aa with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. Partially changed the contents of the processing executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is set to ON, and the control for setting the status command according to the setting status of the hourly counter 203f and the probability variation flag 203g is added. Is different.

  Specifically, when the first special symbol variation stop process 10 (S296) is executed, first, the same S851 as the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. The process of S854 is executed. Also, in the process of S853, even when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation stop of the second embodiment described above. The same fixed time processing (S860) as processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed.

  When the processing of S854 is completed, next, a state command is set according to the setting status of the time reduction counter 203f and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g (S891), and then indicates that the fixed period of the first special symbol has ended. A special figure 1 confirmation period end command is set for this purpose (S858). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S801: Yes), the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S892) A specific entry invalid command for indicating that the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON is set (S893). The command set here is the sound lamp control device by the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 in the same manner as the command set in the other control processing of the main control device 110. It is output to 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the specific entry invalid command to determine a period during which the specific entry operation is not executed even if a ball enters the specific entry port 4640, and the third result is based on the determination result. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be variably set.

  When the process of S893 is completed, the same processes of S805 and S807 as the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above are then executed, and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the processing for setting the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g to off (S894) is provided between the processing in S805 and the processing in S807. Since only the target of the process executed for the probability variation counter 203aa in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above has been changed to the probability variation flag 203g, details thereof will be described. The detailed explanation is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific entry process (S196). This specific ball entry process (S196) is executed in the timer interruption process 10 (see FIG. 274) repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110. Various processes are executed when it is determined that a ball has entered.

  Specifically, when the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a ball winning (ball) in the specific ball opening 4640 (S11501). In the processing of S11501, discrimination is performed with reference to the detection result of a detection switch (not shown) for detecting that a ball has entered the specific entrance 4640. In the process of S11501, when it is determined that there is no winning (entry) of a ball at the specific entrance 4640 (S11501: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11501 that a ball has won (entered) the specific entrance 4640 (S11501: Yes), it is then determined whether the specific entrance invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S 11502), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S 11502: No), that is, in a period in which the specific entry operation based on the winning (entrance) of the ball to the specific entrance 4640 is not executed at present. If there is, this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S11502 that the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S11502: No), next, based on the specific entry operation pattern table 202ic Then, the current specific entry pattern is determined (S11503).

  Here, the contents executed in the processing of S11503 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific entry motion pattern table 202ic includes a plurality of specific entry patterns (specific entry patterns) corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 and the current gaming state. In the process of S11503, the current gaming state is read from the gaming state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first type counter C2 is obtained. By acquiring this, the current specific entry pattern is determined.

  When the processing of S11503 is completed, next, a specific pitching operation scenario corresponding to the determined specific pitching pattern is set (S11504), and the specific pitching flag 203ia is set to ON (S11505). Then, a specific entry command for indicating that the specific entry operation scenario is set is set (S11506), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the tenth embodiment, since the specific entrance 4640 is provided to perform the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 when the ball enters, the player receives the ball. It is possible to make it easier to keep a close watch on the flow situation.

  In addition, a period (waiting period) from when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small attacker 4650 is released is set to the gaming state set when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640. Since it is configured so as to differ depending on the game state, it is possible to set a state in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open and a state in which it is difficult to make the small attacker 4650 open. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the currently set gaming state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win is stopped (the symbol determination period) An advantageous gaming state (latency probability state) advantageous to the player is set, and when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 with this advantageous gaming state being set, The opening operation is configured so that the period (waiting period) from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small attacker 4650 is opened is shorter than the state in which the gaming state is set. Yes.

  As a result, the winning period of the special symbol jackpot, the period from when the symbol (special symbol, the third symbol) for indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is started, that is, the player wins the jackpot. It is possible to execute a special game that can frequently open the small attacker 4650 during a period from when the winning is notified until the big hit game is actually started.

  In the tenth embodiment, a gaming state (latent probability) in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win is stopped (the symbol determination period). (State) is set, but a game state (latency state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open at other timings may be set. As in the first embodiment, it may be set during the change display of the special symbol for showing that the jackpot is won, or the round game is started after the jackpot game is started as in the sixth embodiment. You may set to the period (opening period of jackpot game) until it is performed. Furthermore, it may be set to any one of the above-described periods, or may be set by combining a plurality of periods.

  Further, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the special game that can frequently open the small attacker 4650 may be executed before notifying the player that the current lottery result is a big hit. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to predict that the jackpot game will be executed after the end of the special game due to the execution of the special game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

  Further, when the special game and the jackpot game are configured to be continuously executed as in the tenth embodiment, at least a part of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is It is good to comprise so that it may become a series production which straddles a special game and a jackpot game. In this case, for example, a period during which a special game can be executed, that is, information regarding the length of the symbol determination period set this time, information regarding the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and a game set after the jackpot game ends. Based on the information regarding the state, it is preferable to set the effect mode of the series of effects described above. Thereby, it will be executed in the future based on the game contents (game contents of special game, game contents of jackpot game) that are executed while the series effects are displayed, and the contents of the effects of the series effects being displayed. It becomes possible to make the player predict the contents of the game.

  Further, when the jackpot game is continuously executed after the end of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the jackpot game are notified to the player as one jackpot game. An effect mode may be set. By configuring in this way, the content of the jackpot game on the production can be a combination of the setting content of the special game and the setting content of the jackpot game, so the game content of one jackpot game Can be set in various ways.

  In the tenth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the jackpot game is executed when the fixed display period of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is over (elapsed), but the present invention is not limited to this. When a ball passes through a specific area after the fixed display period has elapsed, the jackpot game is configured to be executed until the ball passes through the specific area after the fixed display period of the special symbol has elapsed. You may comprise so that the game state (latency probability state) which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open | release during a period may be set.

<Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 279, a modified example of the above-described tenth embodiment will be described. In the present modification, a start gate 670 is provided at a position where a sphere that has flowed down the left side area of the game board 13 (the left side area when viewed from the front of the variable display device unit 80) can pass through the tenth embodiment. And the point at which the specific entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are arranged are different. Other configurations are the same as those in the tenth embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

  In the tenth embodiment described above, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period set as a variable display period, and the special symbol is set as a symbol fixed period after the predetermined period has elapsed. The jackpot game was configured to be executed after the period was stopped. On the other hand, in this modified example, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a specific period set as the symbol determination period, and then the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the ball has passed through the start gate 670. It is configured.

  And, in the period from when the special symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed, that is, in the total period of the symbol determination period and the start period until the ball passes the start gate 670 after the symbol determination period elapses. The advantageous gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

  According to this modified example configured as described above, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a period that is not a predetermined period. Therefore, the game can be performed while expecting the player to continue the advantageous gaming state for a longer time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 279, in the present modification, a ball that is launched to execute a special game that causes the small hitting attacker 4650 to win a ball, that is, a ball that is launched by a left-handed game can pass through. Is provided with a start gate 670. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the special game from being performed without passing the ball through the start gate 670 during the start period described above.

  Further, in the present modification, the time from when the ball passes through the start gate 670 until the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the big hit game, the ball passing through the starting gate 670 is the second variable winning device 650. It is configured to be shorter than the time required to reach As a result, when the ball that has passed through the start gate 670 reaches the second variable winning device 650, the second variable winning device 650 can be opened, so that the big hit game can be efficiently performed. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the ball flow direction is changed by a plurality of nails planted on the game board 13, and the flow direction passes through the start gate 670. Since the ball passes through the start gate 670 when it is changed in the direction, it makes it difficult for the player to know how long the start period will continue, and the game area of the game board 13 Although it was possible to make the player interested in the flow of the individual balls that flow down, the starting period lasts for a long time because the flow direction of the balls varies irregularly by multiple nails. In some cases, it ended immediately.

  Therefore, in the game area of the game board 13, the area where the ball can flow down toward the start gate 670 can be regularly distributed in the first direction and the second direction. The sphere that has flowed down the other flow path (the second direction flow path) is directed toward the start gate 670 rather than the one flow path (the first direction flow path) distributed by the distribution means. You may comprise so that it may flow down easily.

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to give a predetermined regularity to the flow of the ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13, so that the ball immediately passes through the start gate 670 during the start period. It can suppress that the situation which will end.

<Modification of the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 280 to 284, a modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment described above, a V winning device 650 which is operated to release a ball into the second entrance 3640 and a small hit game by a single hit game of the second symbol (ordinary symbol). The presence / absence of the passage of a sphere to the specific area 650V is settable.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, in addition to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the ball entering the second entrance 3640 and the small entrance by the hit game of a plurality of second symbols (ordinary symbols) The difference is that it is possible to set whether or not the ball passes to a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the winning game. Furthermore, a maximum of four values of the second random number counter C4 that can be acquired by passing through the through gate 67 can be reserved and stored. Note that the detailed configuration and control contents for storing the second per-random number counter C4 on hold are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 280, description will be made on the contents of the effect specific to this modification executed by using the configuration of this modification. FIG. 280 schematically shows an example of the rebirth effect that is executed when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is continuously won and the ball can pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 280, when the resurgence effect is executed, the character 811 is revived from the losing effect in the in-race effect described above with reference to FIG. 202 (a), and the effect of winning is executed. During the revival effect, an effect is performed in which the character 811 runs wildly by skipping the rival character 860 and the goal of the effect during the race in the main display area Dm. Here, the conditions for executing the revival effect will be briefly described. In this modified example, a predetermined winning game is executed in a state where the short-time state is set, and immediately after that (in the next general drawing lottery executed without a gap), the normal state is set. When a specific winning game is executed, a ball enters the second entrance 3640 by the previously executed winning game, and the small figure won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the incoming game. During the hitting small hit game, the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) by the next executed hit game can pass through the specific area 650V, and such a state occurs. The status of possible wins, that is, the results of the consecutive drawing lottery (the result of determining the drawing winning information included in the usual drawing hold in advance) is a specific winning result, and each winning result Games when winning games are executed State satisfies a predetermined condition, further, among the per game continuous, when the sphere to the second passage 660b at least the following (the second time) per game is flowed, revived effect described above is executed.

  In this way, it is possible to provide a game result that is advantageous to the player (a state in which the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game) based on a plurality of drawing lotteries. It is possible to provide a certain game, and to prevent the game from getting bored at an early stage. Furthermore, the production effect can be enhanced by making it possible to execute an unexpected production (resurrection production) corresponding to the above-described unexpected game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the present modification will be described. This modification is a modification of the above-described seventh embodiment, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from the above-described seventh embodiment will be described, and the other description will be omitted. 281 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the high probability second random number 11 table 202ja, and FIG. 281 (b) is a low probability second random number 11 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed | regulated to 202jb.

  As shown in FIG. 281 (a), the second probability random number 11 table 202ja for high probability is referred to when determining whether or not the second symbol is true in the normal symbol high probability state. In the process of obtaining the lottery result (see S805 of FIG. 219) in the normal symbol variation process 7 (see S192 of FIG. 219) of the seventh embodiment, the currently set gaming state is equivalent to the high probability state of the normal symbol. Referenced in some cases.

  The high probability second random number 11 table 202ja is different from the seventh embodiment in that the second hit type (type per common figure) is increased. Specifically, C is defined per common figure in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is “80 to 98”. Note that the second per type of common figure A and B per common figure are the same as in the seventh embodiment described above except that the corresponding range of the value of the second random number counter C4 is different. Therefore, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Furthermore, the selected second hit type (common hit type) is set so that the action content of the hit action to be executed differs according to the gaming state set at the timing at which the hit action is executed. .

  The hitting operation of A per universal symbol and B per universal symbol, which is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, is omitted because it is the same as that in the seventh embodiment described above. The winning operation is that the opening period is 0.1 second, the opening period is 2.5 seconds, the ending period is 1 second, and one ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the opening period. A hit operation is executed when the opening period ends.

  In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, by setting an ending period that is longer than the time (3 seconds) required for the sphere to pass through the second passage 660b, it is based on the fluctuation of the special figure 2 due to one common figure. While the small hit game executed is configured so that the sphere that has flowed down to the second passage 660b based on other hits does not pass through the specific area 650V, In the winning game (winning action) corresponding to C, the ending period is set to be shorter than the time (3 seconds) required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b (0.1 second), and is executed immediately after Based on the result of the drawing lottery, the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

  Specifically, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed by the winning action based on the C winning per common figure, the next general figure lottery can be executed 0.1 seconds after the start of the special figure 2 lottery. If you win the A per common figure by the standard drawing lottery, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640 in the shortest (1.3 seconds) during the A per common figure, the per C The ball flows into the second passage 660b after 1.4 seconds from the start of the special drawing 2 lottery.

  In such a case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed by the winning action based on the C winning per common figure is a small hit, and when the small hit game is executed, Based on the winning A winning, it is possible to construct a state in which the sphere that has flowed into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific region 650V.

  As described above, in the present modification, immediately after winning a specific hit type (C per common figure), a predetermined hit type (A / B per common figure) is won, so The game state advantageous to the player (passing the ball to the specific area 650V during the small hit game) can be provided by the special drawing 2 lottery executed over the two and the ball flow down to the second passage 660b. .

  The second probability random number 11 table 202jb for low probability is referred to when the success / failure determination of the second symbol is executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation process 7 of the seventh embodiment described above. In the process (see S805 in FIG. 219) of acquiring the lottery result (see S192 in FIG. 219), it is referred to when the currently set gaming state is a normal symbol low probability state.

  This low probability second random number 11 table 202jb differs from the seventh embodiment described above in that different power transmission operation patterns are defined in accordance with the second hit type (type per common figure). Yes. Specifically, A per normal is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is “0 to 19”. If the game state at the time of winning the normal figure A and executing the hit action is a low probability state, the winning period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 1 second, and the ending period is 0.1 seconds. Is specified to be executed.

  Further, B is defined as the value of the second random number counter C4 being “20”. If the game state at the time of winning the normal game B and executing the hit operation is a low probability state, the game is executed with an opening period of 2 seconds, an open period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds The second per random number counter C4 is set to a value of “21”, and C per normal is specified. If the game state at the time of winning the normal game C and executing the hit operation is a low probability state, the winning game is executed with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds It is prescribed to be. Then, “out” is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is “22 to 99”.

  Here, when the normal symbol is set to the low probability state and the winning symbol is won, the electrification game is operated only for a period during which the ball cannot enter the second entrance 3640 by the winning game. The combination 3640a is configured not to be opened. Among them, the opening period of the electric combination 3640a is set to be long (1 second) only for hit games based on A per game. When the 1-second opening period is set, the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a and flows down to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

  Then, when the opening period has elapsed for 1 second, the electric accessory 3640a is closed, and the ball flows into the second passage 660b and flows down toward the out port 66 as it is. In the normal state, since the ball does not enter the second entrance 3640, the V winning device 650 is not opened.

  In this way, in the hit game executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the operation pattern (general power operation pattern) of the electric accessory 3640a is made variable according to the set second hit type (type per common figure). Thus, by changing the passages through which the balls flow down, for example, it becomes possible to win the balls that have passed through the plurality of flow paths to the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big hit game. It becomes possible to win a plurality of balls at a time.

  Furthermore, in this modification, a hit game based on C per common figure is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and immediately after that, a low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the A per common symbol is set to A. When the corresponding hit game is executed, the sphere that has flowed down the second passage 660b by the hit game corresponding to A per base in the low probability state is based on C per base executed in the high probability state. During the small hit game executed in this way, the specific area 650V can be passed.

  As a result, it is possible to execute a jackpot game based on the small hit game even though it has once shifted to a low probability state of the normal symbol, so that an unexpected game can be provided to the player. In addition, it is possible to make the player play the game eagerly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the contents of the control processing executed by main controller 110 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process 11. The through-gate passing process 11 is acquired (stored) when a sphere passes through the through-gate 67 with respect to the through-gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. It is different in that a process for discriminating (predicting) a game result in advance based on the values of various counters is executed.

  When the through gate passing process 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1905 as the through gate passing process (see S107 of FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above are executed, and then Based on the counter value stored by the processing of S1905, whether or not the normal symbol lottery is selected and the type per common symbol are predicted (S1951). Then, a win prize information command including information indicating the predicted success / failure and the type per hit is set (S1952), and this process is terminated.

  The detailed contents of the processes executed in S1951 and S1952 are obtained by replacing the target of the processes in S1707 and S1708 of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) executed for the special symbols with ordinary symbols. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the contents of the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 11. This command determination process 11 is a command (indicated by a command indicating normal symbol winning information in addition to special symbol winning information as winning information, in contrast to the command determination processing 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that a process (see S12051) for discriminating that a common figure winning information command) is received and a process (see S12052) executed when a common figure winning information command is received are added. Are the same. About the same element, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 283, when it is determined that a winning information related command (winning information command, ordinary winning information command) has been received (S12051: Yes), based on the received winning information command (ordinary winning information command). The winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010). Here, the winning information storage area used in this modification is configured to be able to store the received winning information not only in the special symbol reserved ball storage area but also in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area. Then, when the processing of S12010 is finished, the ordinary drawing effect setting processing (S12052) is executed, and this processing is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the general drawing effect setting process (S12052) will be described. The general drawing effect setting process (S12052) determines each information stored in the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received general symbol winning information command, and a specific condition is established. If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, a process for specifying that the special effect can be executed is executed.

  When the ordinary drawing effect setting process (S12052) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the prize-related information received this time is the ordinary figure winning information command (S13001). It is determined whether or not information indicating C per highly accurate common map is included (S13002). In the process of S13002, when it is determined that information indicating C per highly accurate universal figure is included (S13002: Yes), the universal figure C winning flag is set to ON (S13003), and this process ends.

  This ordinary figure C winning flag is set to ON when information (command) indicating C per highly accurate universal figure is received, and is set to OFF when the next figure winning information command is received. Is. Thus, it is configured to be able to discriminate the received common figure winning information command after the common figure winning showing C per highly accurate common figure.

  On the other hand, in the process of S13002, when it is determined that information indicating C per high-accuracy general map is not included (S13002: No), it is determined whether information indicating A per low-accuracy general map is included ( If it is determined that it is not included (S13004: No), the common chart C winning flag is set to OFF (S13007), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S13004 that information indicating A per low-accuracy universal chart is included (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether the universal figure C winning flag is set on (S13005) and turned on. If it is determined that it has been set (S13005: Yes), the special effect allowance information is set in the corresponding ordinary figure winning information (S13006), the ordinary figure C winning flag is set to OFF, and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S13005 that it is not set to ON (S13005: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to predict in advance that the low-accuracy map A will be executed next to the high-accuracy map C, and it is possible to set a special effect according to the prediction result.

  In addition, as in this modification, when a privilege that is advantageous to the player across the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol is granted, for example, the number of times of winning the small winning (small winning The high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated based on the number of times the game is executed. As a result, the first general drawing lottery is executed in a high probability state, and the special drawing 2 lottery is executed according to the winning game, so that a small bonus is won. Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the timing when the small hit game is executed.

  Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next ordinary drawing lottery is executed in the high probability state. And after the elapse of the fluctuation time at the time of winning the small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, after the start timing of the small hit game to be executed, so that the winning game based on the next normal drawing lottery is executed Sets the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation in the probability state. With this configuration, the winning game based on the next general drawing lottery can be easily executed with the operation pattern in the low probability state.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 to 296, a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. Among the embodiments described above, in the embodiment using the technical idea of the first embodiment, in the state where the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the first When a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbol (Special Fig. 1), the game state in which the big hit is changed is set to be a latent probability state, and the second special symbol ( By making it easy to execute the lottery of the special figure 2), the small hit game is easily executed.

  In the embodiment configured as described above, a game in which a small hit game is frequently generated (so-called RUSH game) can be provided to the player using the period during which the big hit of FIG. It is possible to continuously provide a plurality of different privilege games (RUSH game, jackpot game) to the player, so that the player can aim for the jackpot winning more eagerly, Can improve the interest of

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, in order to suppress that the special symbol jackpot winning is duplicated and the player is given an excessive privilege, it is based on the fact that the jackpot was won in the lottery of the special figure 1 In the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the big hit variation, the big hit is not won. Thereby, even if the special figure 2 lottery is executed a plurality of times during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, the big hit of the special figure 2 is not won. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot fluctuation in FIG. 1 to the start of the jackpot game (the jackpot fluctuation period in FIG. 1) can be set as the RUSH game period.

  In addition, in the first embodiment described above, it is defined that the length of the variation time (60 seconds at the shortest and 600 seconds at the longest) that can be set when winning the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is widened ( In the state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won, that is, when the RUSH game is executed, FIG. As described above with reference to the third symbol display device 81, the effect symbol 813 for suggesting the current jackpot variation period is stopped and displayed. Then, the display of the effect symbol 813 that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 is started in accordance with the variation time of the special figure 1 set this time or the type of the jackpot that has been won. It was comprised so that an aspect could be varied.

  In this way, the player can be configured to stop the display of the effect symbol 813 on the third symbol display device 81 and suggest the length of the set special symbol variation time instead of determining whether the special symbol lottery is successful or not. On the other hand, it was possible to give interest by the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the production effect could be enhanced.

  However, in the production of the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot fluctuation of Special Figure 1 is started (when the RUSH game is started), it is executed after the length of the current RUSH game period or after the RUSH game ends. Therefore, depending on the suggested contents, there is a possibility that the willingness to play during the RUSH game may be reduced. Specifically, for example, a short fluctuation period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the RUSH period (Special Figure 1 fluctuation period), and the winning jackpot type is more disadvantageous to the player than other jackpot types In the case of the type (for example, jackpot D), the jackpot winning of the special figure 1 this time is a lottery result that is not very advantageous to the player by grasping the display mode of the stop-displayed effect symbol 813. There was a problem that the interest of the game during the RUSH period would be reduced.

  Here, if the display form of the effect symbol 813 is not related to the length of the RUSH game period and the contents of the jackpot game executed after the RUSH game ends, the above-described problem occurs. However, since there is no pleasure of predicting future game development (RUSH game period or jackpot game content) based on the display mode of the effect symbol 813, it is not an effective measure.

  On the other hand, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1, the lottery result (fluctuation time, jackpot game contents of the special figure 1 being changed) , A game state set after the end of the jackpot game) is suggested. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect may be changed with the result (presence / absence) of the special figure 2 lottery performed during the fluctuation period of special figure 1, and the frequency | count.

  By configuring in this way, the more the special drawing 2 lottery is executed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1, the easier it is to predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is changing. The special figure 2 lottery can be executed eagerly for the player during the period.

  Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the RUSH game is executed by the special figure 2 lottery during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 in which the latent state is set. Thus, the special drawing 2 lottery can be more eagerly executed during the fluctuation period of the special drawing 1.

  The modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment using the configuration of the first embodiment described above in that a part of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed and executed. However, the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<About the production contents in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 285 and FIG. 286, characteristic effects executed in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, during the RUSH game period (during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation period in which the latent probability state is set), the current special figure 1 big lottery is based on the special drawing 2 lottery. The fourth embodiment described above is configured to be different from the fourth embodiment described above in that a suggestion effect for suggesting a result is executed.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestion effect, an effect that suggests to the player the jackpot game contents corresponding to the winning jackpot type and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished is configured. ing. And in order to show the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode of the 3rd symbol stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the combination of numbers can be changed, or during the RUSH period The suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the effect during the RUSH indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery (the effect of displaying the effect symbol 813 from the treasure box 812).

  Next, an example of actual production contents will be described. Here, 110 seconds is set as the jackpot variation time of the special figure 1, and 15 round round games are executed as the jackpot game, and a jackpot (jackpot (jackpot () that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends) An example in the case of winning 15R probability variation)) will be described. FIG. 285 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a small win is won during the RUSH period, and FIG. 285 (b) is displayed when the winning is lost during the RUSH period. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 285 (a), in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the remaining time of the current RUSH game period is displayed on the display screen (FIG. 7 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. The remaining time display 851 is different from that displayed in the present RUSH game period in that it is configured to display a small hit count display 825 indicating the number of wins in the small hit, and the rest is the same. . The same elements (display contents) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 285 (a) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after 10 seconds from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the remaining time display 851 is “100 seconds”. A value obtained by subtracting 10 seconds that have already passed from the fluctuation time of 110 seconds is displayed, and “1” indicating that the number of small hits won during the RUSH game period is 1 is displayed in the small number of hits display 825. Yes. Since the value of the small hit count display 825 is configured to be updated (added by 1) at the timing at which the small hit game is started, the state shown in FIG. This indicates a state where the second small hit is won (stopped display) in a state where the small hit game is being executed.

  Next, the contents of the effect related to the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286 (b). FIG. 286 (b) shows a display screen when the lottery result in FIG. In this symbol 286 (b), “95 seconds” is displayed as the remaining time display 851. Note that, in the present modification, as in the first embodiment described above, during the period in which the small hit game is being executed, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is not subtracted, so FIG. 286 ( The state shown in b) is a state where 5 seconds have passed since the small hit game has ended from the state shown in FIG. 286 (a) described above. Therefore, the value of the small hit count display 825 is incremented by 1 from FIG. 286 (a), and “2” is displayed.

  As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the display mode (the display mode of the third symbol or the effect symbol 813) for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is used. Thus, the player is instructed to indicate to the player the result of the special figure 1 lottery that is currently displayed in a variable manner.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285 (b), as a suggestion display mode, the stop display mode (Kanji) of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special map 2 that is stopped and displayed in the special map 2 display area Dm2. Display mode) is different from the normal stop display mode (the display mode shown in FIG. 285 (b)), or as an effect design 813 displayed from the treasure chest 812, it is different from the normal display mode. The gorgeous display mode is displayed.

  In this manner, the lottery result of FIG. 2 and the lottery result of FIG. 1 are configured by suggesting the lottery result of FIG. 1 using the display mode for indicating the lottery result of FIG. Can be discriminated by the display mode of one symbol, so that the player can be interested in the display mode of the symbol that is stopped and displayed to the player.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, the configuration is such that, as the remaining period of the RUSH game period decreases, an effect mode in which the lottery result in FIG. Therefore, in any period during the RUSH game period, by executing the special drawing 2 lottery, it is possible to play the game eagerly to grasp the lottery result of the special drawing 1 in advance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the effect contents of the jackpot content suggestion effect will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 285, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the symbol (the third symbol or the production symbol 813) for indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period. The display mode is configured to display a suggestion display mode that is variable according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 during the variable display. In addition to this, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed during the RUSH game period (for example, the number of small wins has reached 10) In the case), the jackpot content suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of FIG. 1 is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

  Thereby, since the player will eagerly execute the special figure 2 lottery while expecting that the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed during the RUSH game period, the operation of the game can be improved.

  Here, specific contents of the production will be described. FIG. 286 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display content displayed during the jackpot content suggestion effect, and FIG. 286 (b) is an example of display content where the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed. FIG. In FIG. 286 (a), “10” is displayed as the small hit count display 825. In order to notify the player that the number of small hits has reached 10 is the execution timing (establishment condition) of the big hit content suggestion effect, the display mode of the small hit number display 825 is changed to a normal display mode ( A highlighted display mode different from that shown in FIG. 285 (b) is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed, the next jackpot notice 865 is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the game of the outline of the effect currently being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, and the main display area Dm Three treasure chests (treasure chest 812, treasure chest 860, treasure chest 870) are displayed. Among these three treasure chests, the treasure chest 812 is used to display the effect symbol 813 for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 as described above with reference to FIG.

  Then, the treasure chest 860 suggests to the player whether or not the gaming state after the next jackpot is ended (after the jackpot based on the currently variable display of FIG. 1) is advantageous to the player ( (Notification), and is displayed in a display form with a letter of “certain” to indicate that. The treasure chest 870 is used to suggest (notify) the content of the jackpot game to be executed next time (number of rounds, etc.), and is attached with a letter “R” to indicate that fact. Are displayed in the display mode. As a result, even if a plurality of treasure chests are displayed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily grasp what treasure chest is what is suggested (notified), thereby providing an easy-to-understand presentation. can do.

  In the secondary display area Ds, a “RUSH” indication to indicate that the current RUSH game is in progress, and a comment “Open the box with the power of V” to guide the jackpot content suggestion effect are displayed. Is done. This jackpot content suggestion effect is executed independently of the effect (the effect using the treasure chest 812) for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 286 (a). During the period when the jackpot content suggestion effect is being executed, the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed with priority (highlighted) rather than the effect for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2. Yes. Specifically, the treasure chest (treasure chest 860, treasure chest 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed in a larger display mode than the treasure chest (treasure chest 812) used for the effect for showing the lottery result of FIG. It is constituted so that. By comprising in this way, it can make it easy for a player to pay attention to the jackpot content suggestion effect.

  Then, when it is time to show the effect of the jackpot content suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure box 860 and the treasure box 870 are opened, and a display mode showing the contents of the next jackpot is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure box 860 is opened and "lucky" characters are displayed as the gaming state suggestion display 861, and the treasure box 870 is opened and "odd" characters are displayed as the round number suggestion display 871. The

  Further, the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect executed during one RUSH game period is displayed on the suggestion history display 880 as a history. In this modification, the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect can be satisfied a plurality of times during one RUSH game period, and the reliability of the suggestion content increases as the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion effect increases. It is configured to be higher (so that the player can easily grasp the actual lottery result).

  By using the suggestion history display 880 in this modified example configured as described above, an effect that is easy to understand can be provided to the player by displaying the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect as a history. The suggestion history display 880 is a multi-stage display mode (“cross mark”, “triangle mark”, “circle mark”) based on the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect and the actual special figure 1 lottery result. Because it is configured to display, even if the display mode that shows the results of the jackpot content suggestion effect to diversify in order to prevent the player from getting bored early in the effect, it is easy to understand as a history The result can be notified.

  In this modification, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 is configured to correspond to the production result of one jackpot content suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, The suggestion history display 880 may be configured to be in a specific display mode only when a jackpot content suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times during the RUSH game period, and each effect result is a specific combination. By configuring in this way, even if the first jackpot content suggestion effect is an effect result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, an effect result suggesting that the number of round games is a small jackpot), the next time The game can be motivated so that the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed.

  Although details will be described later, the display content (display mode) indicating the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect includes a strong suggestion display that is easy for a player to predict, and a weak suggestion display that is more difficult to predict than the strong suggestion display, Is set, and based on the lottery result of FIG. 1, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 (the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect already executed), and the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion effect Thus, the selection ratio between the strong suggestion display and the weak suggestion display is different. Further, only when the specific condition is satisfied, an effect that confirms and notifies the next jackpot content and a bonus effect different from the suggestion of the jackpot content are executed.

  By configuring in this way, the player who has already determined the content of the next jackpot content by the already executed jackpot content suggestion effect is willing to continue to establish the conditions for the jackpot content suggestion effect. A game can be performed.

  In this modification, the treasure chest (treasure chest 812) used for the production for showing the lottery result of FIG. 2 and the treasure chest (treasure chest 860, treasure chest 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion production are configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect for showing the lottery result of Special Figure 2 and a jackpot content suggestion effect may be executed using one treasure box. In this case, it is good to comprise so that the production | presentation aspect of a jackpot content suggestion effect may be varied so that the timing which displays the production | presentation symbol 813 and the timing which displays the production result of a jackpot content suggestion production differ. Thereby, even if one treasure box is used, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand presentation, and to make it seem that the lottery in FIG.

  In addition, in this modification, a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the game state after the end) for indicating the contents of the jackpot as an effect result of the jackpot contents suggesting effect are individually displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of them may be displayed as an effect result of one big hit content suggestion effect. In this case, you may comprise so that a player can select which element to perform the jackpot content suggestion effect with respect to which element.

  Further, in the present modification, the effect result for a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the game state after the completion) for displaying the jackpot content as the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect is configured to be displayed simultaneously. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be performed with the timing shifted. In this case, it is possible to discriminate an element that is a lottery result advantageous to the player and an element that is a lottery result unfavorable to the player, and to determine an element to be displayed first based on the discrimination result. good. Specifically, it may be configured such that an element that is a lottery result advantageous to the player is displayed later. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly so that many jackpot content suggestion effects are executed.

  In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, the jackpot is based on the number of wins for the small bonus and the number of times the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Although it is configured so that the execution condition of the content suggestion effect is established, in addition to this, for example, the jackpot content suggestion that the number of times of winning by the special drawing 2 lottery has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) It may be set as a performance execution condition. Thereby, even when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a lottery result (disappearance) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation. Moreover, you may comprise so that not only the result of the special figure 2 lottery in one RUSH game period but the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect may be set so that it may straddle several RUSH game periods. By configuring in this way, even after the content of the next jackpot game is found to be unfavorable to the player, the willingness to easily execute the jackpot content suggestion effect during the next RUSH game period Can be made to play games.

  Moreover, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the game state after the end) are indicated as a result of the jackpot content suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect result obtained by fusing the plurality of elements described above may be suggested. In addition, it is configured so that the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period, and the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period, that is, the remaining variation time of FIG. It may be configured.

<Electrical Configuration of Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289, an electrical configuration in a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. About another point, it is the same as that of 4th Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 287 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287 (a), the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that a suggestion mode selection table 222ja is provided and a suggestion effect selection table 222jb is provided.

  The suggestion mode selection table 222ja has a second special symbol (special diagram 2) during the RUSH game executed when the latent state is set as the gaming state during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1). It is referred when setting the suggestion mode which suggests the lottery contents (game content set after the end of the jackpot game) of the special figure 1 during the jackpot change using the production mode to show the lottery result of This is a data table.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 288, the contents defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja will be described. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 288, the suggestion mode selection table 222ja corresponds to the acquired value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 223jb, the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc. Thus, it is defined that a plurality of suggestion modes are selected.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode type defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is “normal” in which the suggestion mode is not set, and the suggestion content is weak, that is, the player draws a special drawing 1 “Suggested weak” that makes it difficult to discriminate the lottery result (bonus content) and “Suggested strong” that makes it easier for the player to discriminate the lottery result (bonus content) of the special drawing 1 lottery than “weak suggestion” When “normal” is selected as the suggestion mode, a normal performance mode (see FIG. 285 (a)) is displayed as the performance mode for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery.

  In addition, when “suggested weak” is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery cannot be specifically determined by the player, but is the lottery result advantageous to the player? An effect mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) that suggests whether or not is displayed. Further, when “suggested strong” is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the suggestion mode (for example, the lottery result of FIG. In the production mode, the number of rounds executed in the winning jackpot game and the suggestion mode with identification information for indicating the game state set after the jackpot game is finished are displayed. . As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, since the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is used to select one type from a plurality of types of suggestion modes having different suggestion levels, the RUSH game period is selected. It is possible to play the game eagerly so that the suggestion mode is displayed a plurality of times.

  The specific contents for the plurality of suggested mode types described above will be described in detail. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb is “1 to 5”, and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is as follows. If it is “within 10 seconds”, “normal” is defined regardless of the range of the value of the obtained suggestion effect counter 223jc, and if the remaining time information is “11 seconds to 90 seconds”, it has been acquired. “Normal” is defined in the range of the suggestion effect counter 223jc in the range of “0 to 89”, and “Suggested weak” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. When the remaining time information is “91 seconds or more”, “normal” is defined regardless of the range of the obtained suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

  Further, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is “6 to 39” and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is “within 10 seconds”, the obtained suggestion effect counter “Normal” is defined in the range of 223jc “0-59”, “Suggested” is defined in the range of “60-89”, and “Suggested” is defined in the range of “90-99”. ing. When the remaining time information is “11 seconds to 90 seconds”, “normal” is in the range of “0 to 89” of the obtained suggestion effect counter 223jc, and “weak suggestion” is in the range of “90 to 99”. Is defined. If the remaining time information is “91 seconds or more”, “normal” is defined in the range of “0 to 59” or “90 to 99” of the obtained suggestion effect counter 223jc, and “60” “Weak suggestion” is defined in the range of “˜89”.

  In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is “40 or more” and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is “within 10 seconds”, the obtained suggestion effect counter “Normal” is defined in the range of “0 to 59” for the value of 223jc, and “Suggested strength” is defined in the range of “60 to 99”. Further, when the remaining time information is “11 seconds to 90 seconds”, the obtained suggestion effect counter 223jc value is “0 to 89” in the range “0 to 89” and “90 to 99” is in the range “90 to 99”. "Strong" is prescribed. When the remaining time information is “91 seconds or longer”, “suggested strength” is defined regardless of the value of the obtained suggestive effect counter 223jc.

  As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb increases according to the specified contents of the suggestion aspect selection table 222ja, the lottery of the special figure 1 during the big hit fluctuation is lottery. Since it is possible for the player to easily grasp the contents, it is possible to execute as many special figure 2 lotteries as possible.

  Further, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is “1 to 5” and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p indicates that the remaining time is within 10 seconds, the suggestion mode Is configured not to be selected. In other words, in the state where the RUSH game is being executed, if the special figure 2 lottery number is small and the remaining time is short, it is possible that the RUSH game is not actively performed. In order to suppress easily suggesting the contents of the game to the player, the suggestion mode is not easily selected. By comprising in this way, special figure 2 lottery can be performed eagerly to grasp the lottery result of special figure 1 which is changing now.

  In addition, the modification of the fourth embodiment is configured such that as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb during the RUSH game period increases, the suggestion mode that the player can easily identify is easily selected. ing. By comprising in this way, a player can be made to play a game more eagerly.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode is selected based on the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb and the information of the remaining time storage area 223p. For example, you may comprise so that the ratio by which a suggestion aspect is selected may be changed according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is fluctuating, for example, the jackpot classification (for example, jackpot A which becomes advantageous to a player) ) May be configured to make it easier to select a suggestion mode than when winning a jackpot type (for example, jackpot D) that is more disadvantageous to the player than jackpot A. Further, in this case, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is a predetermined value (for example, 39) or less, the ratio in which the suggestion mode is selected is the same (including a similar concept including some errors), It is good to comprise so that the ratio from which a suggestion aspect is selected may be varied when larger than a predetermined value (for example, 39). By comprising in this way, a player can be made to play a game more eagerly.

  Furthermore, in this modification, it is configured to suggest the contents of the next jackpot game to the player based on the display contents by displaying the suggestion mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. The frequency at which the mode is displayed is varied according to the winning jackpot type (the jackpot game to be executed), and the player is suggested the contents of the next jackpot game depending on how many times the suggestion mode is displayed. It may be configured.

  This suggestion mode selection table 222ja is a suggestion mode setting process (FIG. 295) that is executed when it is determined that the latent state is set in the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294). When the suggestion mode is selected, a display mode corresponding to the set variation pattern of the special figure 2 and the selected suggestion mode type is set (see FIG. 295). (See S14204). Thereby, when the variation pattern of the corresponding special figure 2 is out of the way, it is suggested that the display mode of the design (the third design, the production design 813) indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out is selected. Since the display mode corresponding to the mode can be changed and displayed, it is possible to provide the player with the notification of the lottery result of FIG. 2 and the suggestion of the lottery result of FIG. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 287 (a), description will be continued. The suggestion effect selection table 222jb is a second special symbol (special drawing 2) during the RUSH game executed when the latent state is set as the gaming state during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol (special drawing 1). When the lottery result of the game satisfies a predetermined condition, it is referred to when setting a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery contents (special game contents, game state set after the jackpot game is ended) of the special figure 1 during the jackpot change. It is a data table.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 289, the suggestion effect selection table 222jb is won by the value of the acquired small hit number counter 223cc, the suggested information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the lottery of FIG. It is defined that a plurality of suggestion effects are selected in correspondence with the information indicating the jackpot type and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect type defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb is “failure” in which the suggestion effect is not executed, and the suggestion content is weak, that is, the player draws the special drawing 1 lottery. It is difficult to discriminate the lottery result (bonus content) of the player, and “suggested weak” that makes it easier for the player to discriminate the lottery result (bonus content) of the special figure 1 lottery than “weak suggestion”. On the other hand, “confirmation” for notifying the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery (contents of jackpot) and “privilege effect” executed when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery has already been informed to the player, “Sounding production” is defined as a production that includes no content.

  This suggestion effect selection table 222jb is displayed when it is determined that the execution condition of the suggestion effect (the number of times of winning the small hit is a multiple of 10) is satisfied in the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) (FIG. 292). (S4753: Yes) In the suggested effect setting process to be executed (see S14001 in FIG. 293), if it is determined that the remaining time of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or more (S14102: Yes in FIG. 293), the suggested effect is executed. Therefore, it is referred to (S14106 in FIG. 293).

  When “failure” is selected as the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is executed (although the display screen of FIG. 286 (a) is displayed), the failure effect that the effect ends without opening the treasure chests 860 and 870. Is executed. In other words, an effect that does not suggest any lottery results in FIG. 1 to the player is executed. When “suggested weak” or “suggested strong” is selected as the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure box 860, 870 is opened as the suggestion effect result, and the lottery result of FIG. Comments (game state suggestion display 861, round number suggestion display 871) suggesting (content of jackpot) appear. The content of this comment is variably set corresponding to the suggestion effect type selected as the suggestion effect.

  When “determined” is selected as the suggestion effect, an effect in which a comment for informing the lottery result of FIG. 1 appears from the treasure chests 860 and 870 is executed as the suggestion effect result. In this modification, “confirm” is selected as the suggestion effect only when the lottery result is most advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, when “privilege effect” is set as the suggestion effect, an effect that is difficult to see elsewhere (for example, an effect in which a character congratulates the player with a special costume) is executed. Thereby, even for a player who has already grasped the contents of the next jackpot during the RUSH game period, it is possible to cause the game to be eager to continuously execute the suggestion effect.

  In addition, when “pounding effect” is set as the suggestion effect, the result of suggesting the jackpot content to the player is not displayed as in the case of the failure effect described above, but treasure chests 860 and 870 (see FIG. 286 (b)). ) Will be executed until the opening. In this way, a process in which the same effect mode as the effect in which the effect result that suggests the jackpot content to the player is displayed as an effect that does not display the effect result that suggests the jackpot content to the player (gasse effect) is executed. By making it possible to set different gaze effects, it is possible for the player to keep an eye on the content of the suggested effects until the end.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of presentation modes (contents of comments displayed from each treasure box) are stored in correspondence with the types of suggested presentation modes selected using the suggested presentation selection table 222jb. Means (not shown), and one effect mode is set from among a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of suggestion effects than the number of suggestion effect types defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. Further, the suggestion effect history displayed on the suggestion history display 880 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with a display mode corresponding to the type of the suggestion effect mode selected using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. It is configured to be. Thereby, even if various suggestive effects are executed, after the suggested effects are executed, it is possible to easily notify the player of the suggested effect history.

  The specific contents for the plurality of suggested effect types described above will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is “10”, that is, when the execution condition of the suggested effect is satisfied for the first time during the RUSH game period. , The suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), and the value of the suggested effect counter 223jc is in the range of "0 to 59" without being related to the jackpot type of the special figure 1. “Failure” is defined, and “weak suggestion” is defined in the range of “60 to 99”.

  When the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is “20”, the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“−”), that is, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is “10”. ”Is selected in the suggestion effect that is executed, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is within the range of“ 0 to 59 ”, regardless of the jackpot type in FIG. ”,“ Strong suggestion ”is defined in the range of“ 60 to 89 ”, and“ failure ”is defined in the range of“ 90 to 99 ”.

  On the other hand, when the suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("Yes"), that is, when the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10", When “Weak” is selected, the jackpot type in FIG. 1 is “A”, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is defined as “0 to 59”, and “60” to “89” is defined. “Suggested strength” is defined in the range of “90”, and “Failure” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. Also, in the special figure 1, the jackpot type is “B to D”, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is defined as “0 to 89”, “failure” is defined, and the range of “90 to 99” is “suggestion”. "Strong" is prescribed.

  When the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is “30”, the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“−”), that is, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is “10”. ”And“ 20 ”, when“ failure ”is selected in the suggestion effect executed, the jackpot type in FIG. 1 is“ A ”, and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is“ 0 ”. “High suggestion” is defined in the range of “59”, and “weak suggestion” is defined in the range of “60 to 99”. Further, the jackpot type of special figure 1 is “B to D”, and “suggested weakness” is defined in the range where the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is “0 to 99”.

  On the other hand, when “suggested weak” (present, weak) is stored as the suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the value of the suggested effect counter 223jc is “0” regardless of the jackpot type in the special figure 1. “Suggested strength” is defined in the range of “˜59”, and “Failure” is defined in the range of “60-99”. Further, when “suggested strong” (yes, strong) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is “A, B” and the suggested effect counter 223jc “Failure” is defined in the range of “0 to 59”, “determined” is defined in the range of “60 to 89”, and “failure” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. Further, when the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is “C, D”, “failure” is defined regardless of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

  When the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is “40” or more and a multiple of 10, “confirmed” is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and When the jackpot type in FIG. 1 is “A, B”, “privilege effect” is defined in the range of suggested effects “0 to 99”, and “pounding effect” is defined for all other cases. Has been.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect execution condition is that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a predetermined value (multiple of 10), but other requirements are used as the suggestion effect execution condition. May be set. In addition, in this modification, the suggestion effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times during one RUSH game period, and the suggestion effect having a lower suggestion level than the suggestion effect executed in the past is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with a suggestion effect until the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 287 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287 (b), the fourth implementation described above in that the suggested information storage area 223ja, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb, the suggested effect counter 223jc, and the suggested effect flag 223jd are provided. It is different from the form.

  The suggested information storage area 223ja is a data area for temporarily storing the content of the executed suggestion effect (see FIG. 286), and is a suggestion effect executed during one RUSH game period. A history can be stored. In the suggested information storage area 223ja, information indicating the suggested presentation mode selected in the suggested presentation setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is stored (S14108 in FIG. 293), and the next suggested presentation mode is selected. Is read (S14104 in FIG. 293). Then, the stored information is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the jackpot game is started) (see S4692 in FIG. 291). The suggestion history display 880 is displayed based on the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the RUSH game period. In the process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294), when it is determined that the latent state is set (S5303: Yes in FIG. 294), the counter value is updated by 1 (see S5393 in FIG. 294). The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is referred to when setting the suggestion aspect indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 being changed using the effect form for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 (FIG. 295). S1421). Then, the counter value is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the jackpot game is started) (see S4691 in FIG. 291).

  The suggestion effect counter 223jc is a counter that is referred to when the above-described suggestion mode or suggestion effect is selected, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The detailed configuration is the same as that of the effect counter 223h described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The suggestion effect flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the suggestion effect is being executed, and is set to ON while the suggestion effect is being executed. The suggestion effect flag 223jd is set to ON when the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is executed (S14109 in FIG. 293). Then, it is referenced in the special figure 2 variation display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) (see S5391 in FIG. 294). Here, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is being performed (S5391: Yes in FIG. 294), a special display variation pattern command for setting the variation effect of the special figure 2 is set in parallel with the suggestion effect (see FIG. 294, S5394). When the display variation pattern command is set, the variation effect (effect having a lower effect than the suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 286 is executed. Then, in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296), when it is determined that it is time to end the suggestion effect (S14302: Yes), it is set to off (see S14303 in FIG. 296).

<Regarding Control Processing in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 290 to 296, a control process in a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 290) is replaced with the command determination process 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) for the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. S14182) is replaced with jackpot-related processing (see S4502 in FIG. 64), jackpot-related processing 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) is replaced with jackpot-related processing 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) 11 (refer to S14574 in FIG. 292) is replaced with the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (refer to S5175 in FIG. 160), and the liquid crystal display effect is executed. The point that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296) is executed instead of the management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), suggesting effect A constant processing (see S14001 in FIG. 293), with the difference that adding the suggested mode setting process (see S5392 of FIG. 295). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 290, the command determination process 11 (S14182) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 11 (S14182). The command determination process 11 (S14182) determines that a hit-related command has been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4215 with respect to the command determination process 4 in the fourth embodiment described above (see S4182 in FIG. 152). In this case (S4215: Yes), the difference is that the winning association process 11 (S14574) is executed instead of the winning association process (S4216). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process 4 (S4182) in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, the hit-related process 11 executed in S14574 is a jackpot instead of the jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64) executed when a jackpot-related command is received with respect to the hit-related process (S4216) described above. The difference is that the related process 11 (S4592 in FIG. 291) is replaced with the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) and the small hit related process 11 (S14574 in FIG. 292) is executed. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 291, a hit-related process which is one process in the command determination process 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) will be described. FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 11 (S4592). The jackpot related process 11 (S4592) is different from the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the process executed when the jackpot start command is received are changed. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Detailed description of elements having the same processing content is omitted.

  When the jackpot related processing 11 (S4592) is executed, it is first determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4601). If it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), the display jackpot start is started. A command is set (S4602), and then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb is cleared (S4691), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (the suggested effect executed during the RUSH game period) (History information) is cleared (S4692), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4601 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), the same S4603 to S4613 processes as the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64) described above are executed and The process ends.

  That is, in the jackpot related process 11 (S4592), a process of initializing each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game executed before the jackpot start is executed at the jackpot start timing. Thereby, even if the RUSH game is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to reliably suppress the setting of the effect mode during the RUSH game based on the information related to the past RUSH game.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, since the RUSH game is executed during the jackpot fluctuation of FIG. 1, the end of the RUSH game and the start of the jackpot game are at the same timing. Initialization processing of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game is used as the start timing of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a determination means for determining that the RUSH game has ended is provided. If it is determined that the RUSH game has ended, an initialization process for each parameter may be executed. In addition, since the condition in which the RUSH game can be executed is the case where the latent state is set as the gaming state, it is determined that the determination result of the gaming state determination unit that determines the current gaming state is not the latent state. In this case, the initialization process of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game may be executed.

  Furthermore, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, each parameter is initialized every time a RUSH game is finished. However, a RUSH game is again executed within a predetermined period after the jackpot game. When executed, the information (value) of each parameter may be continuously updated. Thereby, a game can be performed eagerly so that a plurality of RUSH games may be continuously executed. In this case, there is provided an elapsed period determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of executions of the special drawing lottery is performed 30 times) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the initialization process for each parameter may be executed when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 292, hit-related processing which is one processing in the command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. 11 (refer to S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 11 (S14574). The small hit related process 11 (S14574) is different from the small hit related process 4 (S4574 in FIG. 156) in the fourth embodiment described above in changing the content of the process executed when the small hit start command is received. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Detailed description of elements having the same processing content is omitted.

  When the small hit related process 11 (S14574) is executed, it is first determined whether a small hit start command has been received (S4701). If it is determined that a small hit start command has been received (S4701: Yes), The same processing of S4741 to S4753 as the small hit related processing 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) of the fourth embodiment is executed, and it is determined in the processing of S4753 that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10. If so (S4753: Yes), suggestion effect setting processing is executed (S14001). Thereafter, a display small hit start command is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4701, when it is determined that the small hitting start command has not been received (S4701: No), the same S4703 as the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) of the fourth embodiment described above. ˜S4710 is executed and this process is terminated.

  The suggestion effect setting process executed in the process of S14001 is a process for setting the effect aspect of the suggestion effect. That is, the process of S4753 described above serves as a determination unit that determines whether or not an execution condition for executing the suggestion effect is satisfied. In this modification, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is set to a predetermined value (a value that is a multiple of 10) as an execution condition for executing the suggestion effect, but other elements are used as the execution condition. For example, it may be set as an execution condition that the number of special figure 2 lotteries executed while the latent state is set becomes a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 20). good. In this case, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb may be read and determined.

  Further, in this modified example, since the suggestion effect is set based on the number of small hits won in the latent state (during the RUSH game period), the small hit related process 11 (S14574) sets the suggestion effect. The process (S14001) is configured, but when the execution conditions of the suggestion effect are changed, the corresponding process may be configured to include the suggestion effect setting process. Further, when setting multiple execution conditions for the suggestion effect, if one suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied, the other suggestion effect execution conditions are within a predetermined period (for example, the number of lotteries in FIG. 2 is 5). It is preferable to provide a restricting means for restricting establishment within a period until reaching or within 30 seconds. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that several different suggestion production | presentation execution conditions are materialized in a short time, and the production | generation of an indication production | present frequently occurs. In addition, in the case where the above-described limiting means is provided, it is preferable to vary the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the order in which the plurality of suggestion effect execution conditions are established. Thereby, not only the suggestion effect is executed to the player, but also the suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied, so the effect can be further enhanced. .

  In addition, as an execution condition of the suggestion effect executed during the RUSH game period, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the number of small wins, and the cumulative number of missed winnings are set to predetermined values. In addition to the cumulative value condition that can be satisfied when it has been reached, a continuous winning condition that can be satisfied when the number of consecutively winning winnings reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5 times) may be set. Furthermore, an operation condition that is established when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be provided. As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means during the RUSH game period, and the willingness to participate in the game can be increased. Further, the execution condition of the suggestion effect may be established based on the game result other than the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period. For example, the number of balls entered into the entrance is predetermined. The number of balls that have entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (so-called over winning balls) reaches the predetermined number when the number reaches the upper limit or the reserved memory number reaches the upper limit. In this case, the execution condition of the suggestion effect may be established.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001 in FIG. 293) executed in the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001). In this suggestion effect setting process, a process for setting the effect aspect of the suggestion effect executed during the RUSH game period is executed.

  When the suggestion effect setting process (S14001) is executed, first, the time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, that is, the remaining time of the RUSH gaming period is acquired (S14101), and the acquired time information is 5 seconds. It is determined whether a longer time is indicated (S14102). Here, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, a suggestion effect for 5 seconds is configured to be executed. Therefore, in the process of S14102, if it is determined that the remaining period of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or less, the RUSH game period ends at the end timing of the suggestion effect, and therefore no new suggestion effect is executed. It is configured as follows.

  In this modification, the suggestion effect time is fixed to 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a suggestion effect of a plurality of effect times may be executed. In this case, the effect time of the suggestion effect to be executed first is determined, then it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the RUSH game period is longer than the determined effect time, and the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result It may be configured to determine the presence or absence. Alternatively, the remaining period of the RUSH game period may be determined first, and the suggestion effect may be set from the effect times that can be executed within the remaining period.

  In the process of S14102, when it is determined that the remaining time is 5 seconds or less (S14102: No), this process ends because there is no period in which the suggestive effect can be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time is longer than 5 seconds (S14102: Yes), then the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is read (S14103), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ( (Information indicating the type of suggestion effect already executed during the current RUSH game period) is read (S14104), and then the lottery result of the currently running special figure 1 lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b is shown. Information (information indicating the jackpot type) is acquired (S14105).

  Next, based on each information acquired (read out) in the processes of S14103 to S14105, an effect mode of the suggested effect to be executed this time is selected using the suggested effect selection table 222jb (S14106), and the selected suggested effect mode is selected. A corresponding display suggestion effect command is set (S14107). Here, in this modification, it is configured such that a plurality of effect modes are set for the suggested effect mode selected in the process of S14106, and the process of S14107 corresponds to the selected suggestive effect mode. A display suggestion effect command corresponding to one effect mode is set from the plurality of effect modes (S14107).

  When the processing of S14107 is completed, information indicating the suggested presentation mode selected this time is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14108), the suggested presentation flag 223jd is set to ON (S14109), and the process is terminated. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the special display variation display setting process 11 (S5195) will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation display setting process 11 (S5195). This special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 11 (S5195) is a process for setting a fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2, and is the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation display setting of the fourth embodiment. The process of setting the display variation pattern command when the suggestion effect is being executed and the process of setting the suggestion mode during the RUSH game period are added to the process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160). Is the same except for the above. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) is executed, first, the same S5301 to S5351 as the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above. Execute the process. Then, when the processing of S5351 is finished, it is determined whether or not the suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391). In the process of S5391, when it is determined that the suggestion effect flag 223jd is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is not executed (S5391: No), The same process of S5352 as the above-described variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175 of FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment is executed, and the process proceeds to S5392.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5391 that the suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391: Yes), the second special symbol (special illustration) is based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent probability mode. The display suggestive during-effect latent variation pattern command of 2) is set (S5394), and the process proceeds to S5393. That is, in the latent state, the variation effect of FIG. 2 is set differently depending on whether the suggestion effect is executed or not. Specifically, when the suggestive effect is not executed, the variable effect shown in FIG. 2 is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 285 (a)). On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is executed, in order to emphasize the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is executed using the majority of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the special part using the remaining part is used. 2 is executed (see FIG. 286 (a)).

  By comprising in this way, the effect which should pay attention most to a player can be alert | reported easily. In this modification, as described above, the display command set in the sound lamp control device 113 is made different based on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. The same display command is set, and the display command received by the display control device 114 and the area for displaying the variation effect of FIG. 2 are made variable based on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. Also good. As a result, when only the display position (the size of the display mode) is changed without changing the contents of the fluctuation effect in FIG. Can be easily reduced.

  When the process of S5352 is completed, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, and then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is incremented by 1 (S5393), and this process is terminated. In the process of S5392, a process for setting a suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 lottery being executed (fluctuating) using the special figure 2 fluctuation effect of this time is executed.

  In the present modification, as described above, when the suggestion effect flag 223jd is set to ON, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is not executed. In other words, during the period in which the effect that suggests the lottery result (bonus content) of the special figure 1 is executed by the suggestion effect, the lottery result (bonus content) of the special figure 1 is suggested using the variable effect of the special figure 2. The production is configured not to be executed. Thereby, it can suppress that a some suggestion production | generation produces | generates simultaneously and provides a production which is hard to understand for a player.

  Next, the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392). When the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is read (S14201), and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated). Display information) (S14202), and based on the counter value read in the process of S14201 and the storage information read in the process of S14202, the current aspect mode is selected using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja (S14203). ). Then, a display command corresponding to the set variation pattern command and the selected effect mode is set (S14204), and this process is terminated.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 using the fluctuation production of the special figure 2 when setting the fluctuation production of the special figure 2. A player can be notified (suggested) of a plurality of information (the lottery result of Fig. 2 and the lottery result of Fig. 1) with one variation effect, and can cause the player to watch the variation effect. it can. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestion mode using the variation effect of the special figure 2, the display mode of the effect design 813 (see FIG. 285 (b)) or the third design Although the stop display mode for indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery such as the suggestion mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) for changing the display mode is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode using the variable display mode is used. A mode may be set. For example, when the third symbol is variably displayed, the background color can be varied to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol 1, or the display mode of the treasure chest 812 in which the effect symbol 813 is stored can be varied. By doing so, the lottery result of Special Figure 1 may be suggested. Further, not only the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also the voice output device 226 provided on the pachinko machine 10 or the lamp display device 227 can be used to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1. You may do it. Specifically, the sound output during the period when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is executed is varied, or the light emission mode of the lamp during the period when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is executed is varied. By doing so, the lottery result of Special Figure 1 may be suggested.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160), the suggested effect is compared to the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment described above. This is different in that a process for determining whether or not it is in the execution period is added, and is otherwise the same.

  Briefly describing the above-described liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), it is always possible to determine the effect period of each effect set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the update period of the effect being executed. Processing is executed. Specifically, the timekeeping means (timer) possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the set production scenario (production scenario being executed) are always managed, and the production being executed is terminated. A process for managing the timing and the timing for switching the effect mode is executed.

  When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to on (S14301), and if it is determined that it is set to off (S14301: No), the process proceeds to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14301, when it is determined that the suggestion effect flag 223jd is set to ON (S14301: Yes), it is determined whether the present suggestion timing is ended (S1432). If it is determined in the processing of S1432 that the suggestion effect end timing is reached (S1432: Yes), the suggestion effect flag 223jd is set to OFF (S14303), and the process proceeds to S14304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S14302 that it is not the suggestion effect end timing (S1432: No), the processing of S14303 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S14304. In the process of S14304, other liquid crystal effect execution management is executed (S14304), and this process ends.

  The processing of S14302 will be described. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect for 5 seconds is configured to be executed. It measures using the time measuring means which 113 MPU221 has, and discrimination | determination is performed based on the measurement result. Note that any processing other than the above-described processing may be used as long as it is possible to determine the end timing of the suggestion effect. And the end timing of the suggestive effect may be determined when the value of the counting means becomes a value indicating the lapse of 5 seconds.

  As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the variation is based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) executed during the variation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1). Since the suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the lottery result of FIG. 1 to the player can be executed, it is possible to cause the player to predict the lottery result of FIG. 1 in advance. . Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the suggestion effect described above is executed using the variation effect for indicating the lottery result of FIG. 2, the lottery result of FIG. 2 and the lottery result of FIG. Since it can be suggested (notified) to the player, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the suggestion effect is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed eagerly by the player. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, since the suggestion effect is more easily executed as the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed, the player's willingness to play can be further increased.

  That is, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) executed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) suggests the lottery result of the special symbol 1. For this reason, it is configured to have both a role for establishing the execution condition of the suggestion effect and a role for executing the suggestion effect. Thereby, the player can be interested in whether the suggestion effect using the variation display of the special figure 2 is executed or whether the suggestion effect different from the fluctuation display of the special illustration 2 is executed.

  Furthermore, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect (strong suggestion) in which the player can easily predict the lottery result of FIG. 1 and the lottery of FIG. 1 than the suggestion effect The suggestion effect (weak suggestion) that is difficult to predict the result is configured to be at least settable, so that the effect aspect of the suggestion effect can be watched. Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of suggested effects can be executed during one special figure change period, and the lottery of special figure 1 is increased as the number of executions of the suggested effects increases. It is configured so that a suggestion effect (suggestion strength) for easily predicting the result is easily set. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly so that more suggestive effects are executed.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the above-described suggestion effect is executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery during the special figure 1 fluctuation, but a plurality of lotteries that can be executed simultaneously are used. For example, the suggestion effect described above may be executed based on the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) during the special symbol 1 variation, or the special symbol (second symbol) during the normal symbol (second symbol) variation. The suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol may be executed based on the lottery of (one symbol). Moreover, you may comprise so that the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of special figure 1 or special figure 2 may be performed based on the normal symbol lottery in which special figure 1 and special figure 2 are fluctuating simultaneously.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of Special Figure 1 is configured to suggest the contents of the jackpot won based on the Special Figure 2 lottery during the jackpot variation in which the jackpot is won. In addition to the above, the remaining variation time in FIG. 1 may be suggested. Further, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when one special symbol of a plurality of special symbols is won by a big win (including during the variation of the big hit win), the other special symbol is selected by lottery. It is configured not to win a jackpot. Therefore, since the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 jackpot change does not win the jackpot, even if the lottery result (bonus content) of the special figure 1 is suggested, the jackpot game different from the suggested content A situation in which (a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the special drawing 2 lottery) is executed can be suppressed.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 won in the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The suggestion effect may be executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 that has not won the jackpot. Thereby, it can be made to think that the special figure 1 which is fluctuating has won the jackpot by performing the suggestion effect.

  Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot variation, It is configured so that the second lottery is easily performed. Thereby, since special figure 2 lottery can be performed more during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation, it can be made easy to provide a suggestion effect to a player. Further, in the state in which the latent state is set, the special figure 2 lottery can be easily won in the small win different from the big win, so that the special figure 2 lottery can be more easily executed.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot game of the special figure 1 provides the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1. The suggestion effect may be executed in a period other than this, but for example, the technique of the present modification is applied to the above-described sixth embodiment, and FIG. Based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the jackpot game, the lottery result of FIG. 1 (the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends) may be suggested.

  Further, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery only during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1. The suggestion effect may be executed on the basis of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the deviation deviation. Thereby, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not the changing special figure 1 lottery is a big hit.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is added to the fourth embodiment. Although an example has been shown, the suggestive effect used in the modification of the fourth embodiment may be added to the other embodiments described above, for example, added to the third embodiment. You may comprise.

  In the third embodiment, a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the jackpot ends, and a predetermined transition condition (a jackpot winning, When a small win and special symbol 4th draw) are established, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set to the specified end condition (4th lottery result of special symbol) Is set so as to be set for a period of time until it is established.

  When the suggestion effect described above in the third embodiment configured as described above is executed, the special drawing 2 of FIG. It is good to comprise not only a lottery result but the suggestion effect which suggests the opportunity (transition condition) to which the latent state was set.

  That is, in the third embodiment, a plurality of transition conditions for setting the latent state are defined, and the period in which the latent state is set differs depending on the established transition condition. Since the specific contents are described above with reference to FIG. 112, the description thereof is omitted. Further, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, the player shifts to the current latent state until the change in the special figure 1 in which the condition for transition to the latent state is established is stopped and displayed. It was not possible to report what the opportunity was.

  Therefore, by adding the suggestive effect described using the modification of the fourth embodiment to the configuration of the third embodiment, during the transition of the special figure 1 in which the condition for transition to the latent state is established Based on the executed special figure 2 lottery, it becomes possible to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 being changed. By comprising in this way, it becomes possible for a player to predict the transition opportunity to this latent state by seeing the suggestion effect to be performed.

  That is, it is possible to set a first gaming state (for example, a latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state and a second gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the transition condition is established, the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state is possible, and the variation of the special figure 2 executed during the variation of the special figure 1 when the first gaming state is set. Based on the (lottery), it is preferable that the suggestion effect for suggesting to the player what the transition condition for which the current first game state is to be set is executable.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment described above, by performing the lottery of the special figure 2 during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 (during the RUSH game period), the small hit game (RUSH game) is frequently executed. In a configuration in which a prize ball can be awarded to a player without executing a jackpot game, the lottery result of FIG. Since the suggestion effect suggesting the remaining fluctuation time of one change is executable, a special figure 2 lottery during the RUSH game period can have a plurality of meanings. Specifically, the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH gaming period is expected to win a small win to obtain a prize ball, and the lottery result advantageous to the player as the drawing result of the special drawing 1 in the changing state It can be expected that a suggestion effect suggesting that

  In such a configuration, for example, when one of the meanings of the special drawing 2 lottery has a meaning that is disadvantageous to the player, the other is controlled to have a meaning that is advantageous to the player. good. Specifically, for example, as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery, it is possible to set a small hit (for example, a small hit A) with a long variation time and a small hit (small hit B) for which the variation time is shorter than the small hit A. To do. In this case, in order to execute many small hit games within a limited period of the RUSH game period, it is necessary to select a lottery result with a short variation time as the lottery result of FIG. That is, when winning the above-described small hit A, the lottery result is more disadvantageous to the player than when winning the small hit B.

  In such a case, it is preferable that the winning effect is more easily executed when winning the small hit A than when winning the small hit B. As a result, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery which is disadvantageous to the player can be provided, it is possible to easily provide another added value (proposed effect), and the player's willingness to play is significantly reduced. This can be suppressed.

  In addition to the above-described example, for example, the first small hit game that is advantageous to the player as the game mode of the small hit game executed when winning the small hit, and the player than the first small hit game It is possible to set a second small hit game in which a disadvantageous small hit game is executed, and to provide another added value (implicit effect) when winning a small hit game that is disadvantageous to the player You may comprise so that it can do.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 316. In the first embodiment described above, when the probability variation state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) In addition, the game state during the big hit variation is set to the latent probability state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent probability state is set.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, and in the probability variation state, when the normal symbol time-short state ends first (when the time-short number of times ends) and in the case of winning the jackpot, an advantageous latent probability state It is set as the structure which shifts to. Note that in game states other than the latent state, even if a big hit is made, the rate at which the latent state is set is configured to have a very low probability (for example, 5%). Most of the transition from the state to the latent state is when the normal symbol time-short state ends in the state of probability change.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, after winning the jackpot is set in the case of winning the probability variation jackpot again in the relatively advantageous time-saving state or the probability variation state again than in the case of winning the probability variation jackpot in the disadvantageous normal state. It is configured such that the termination condition of the time reduction state is easily satisfied in the probability variation state (a small number of time reductions are easily set). As a result, even if the normal symbol time-short state cannot be terminated (that is, it is not possible to shift to the latent state), even if it is won by a probable big hit, it shifts to the latent state. Since the possibility that it will become easy becomes high, the player's sense of expectation for the latent state can be further improved. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above is that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 The control process executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the gaming state in the eleventh embodiment will be briefly described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 306, four types of gaming states are provided in the eleventh embodiment. That is, a normal state that is most disadvantageous for the player, a short-time state that has a higher degree of advantage than the normal state, a probability change state that has a higher degree of advantage than the short-time state, and a latent state that is most advantageous to the player are provided. ing.

  In the short-time state (the probability change state of the special symbol and the short-time state of the normal symbol), similarly to the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is easily opened, and the lower first Since it is easy to enter the entrance 64b2, it is possible to execute the first special symbol lottery more efficiently by performing the left-handed game as compared with the normal state. That is, since the number of game balls to be launched and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the lower first entrance 64b2 etc. are substantially the same, the first special symbol is not reduced without reducing the number of possessed balls. An advantageous state in which the lottery can be executed is formed. In addition, the probability variation state (the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol) will be a short time state of the normal symbol, in addition to the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery, so than the short time state Further advantageous. In addition, in the latent state (the probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the variation time when the second special symbol lottery is executed is significantly shorter than the other game states (10 minutes) → 1 second), when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is a high probability (59/60) and is a small hit (a kind of losing, the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is predetermined) The result is a lottery result that gives the opportunity to win a prize ball for a period of time. Therefore, simply by executing a right-handed game aiming at the second entrance 640, the game ball is moved to the first specific prize entrance 65a. It becomes a very advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to enter frequently and keep winning prize balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 297 to FIG. 301, characteristic interesting effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the most advantageous latent state when the short-time state ends in the relatively advantageous probability change state. For this reason, in the probable change state, rather than being a big win in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery will be continuously lost over the set number of times and the transition to the latent state will be made. It is possible to provide innovative game play that makes you expect more strongly. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the state shifts to the probability change state, the effect that suggests the remaining number of lotteries until the transition to the latent state is performed by the display effect. As a result, when the state changes to the probability changing state, the player can check the remaining number of lotteries until the state shifts to the latent state only by checking the third symbol display device 81. Convenience can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 297 (a), a display mode of an ending effect executed in a jackpot game ending period in which a probability change state or a time saving state is set after the jackpot will be described in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), when the ending effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed, the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (above the character 811 imitating a rabbit) is displayed. A display area HR1 is formed in which the characters “RUSH confirmed if maximum 3 rivers are broken !?” are displayed. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the transition to the RUSH (latent probability state) is confirmed when the character 811 breaks through the river up to three. Since the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the ending effect in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a big hit type (big hit A11, big hit H11) that directly shifts to the latent state (RUSH) after the big hit ends is also provided. Although illustration is omitted, in the case of a jackpot type, a latent state (RUSH) entry is notified during the ending period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 297 (b) to FIG. 299, description will be given of a display effect executed during the time-short state of the normal symbol (that is, during the probability variation state or the time-short state) in the eleventh embodiment. . As will be described in detail later, while the normal symbol time-short state is set, the normal symbol time-short state is terminated each time a special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (25 times or 15 times). The player will decide whether to move to the most advantageous latent state, or to end the normal symbol time-short state and move to the most disadvantageous normal state, or to continue (maintain) the normal symbol time-short state An effect to suggest (notify) is executed. That is, a river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) that can suggest (notify) the game state after the end of the change is executed depending on whether or not the character 811 breaks through the river. In addition, the period at which the river breakthrough effect is executed is set to the number of fluctuations that may cause the time-saving state to end. In other words, if the winning state is a big hit in the normal state and the probability variation state or the normal symbol time-short state is set, the time-saving number of times of 25, 50, or 75 is set. In addition, when the probability variation state or the short time state becomes a big hit and the probability variation state is set, the number of time reductions of 10, 25, or 40 times is set. A game that is expected to be notified of the transition to the latent state every time the river breakthrough effect is executed by executing the river breakthrough effect every time the number of fluctuations that may cause the short-time state to end. Can be performed. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 297 (b), an effect mode (display mode) before a river breakthrough effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 297 (b), until the river breakthrough effect is executed, the effect that the character 811 runs in the right direction in the front view is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a display region HR2 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is formed in the right direction of the character 811 when viewed from the front. In this display area HR2, characters (display mode) indicating (indicating) the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols until the character 811 reaches the next river are displayed. FIG. 297 (b) illustrates a state in which the characters “20 times remaining until the first river” are displayed. This display makes it easy for the player to understand that it is a chance to move to an advantageous latent state by continuously losing over 20 more special symbols. Can do. Since other display contents are the same as the chance zone mode (see FIG. 6B) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted. Here, the “chance zone” in the eleventh embodiment indicates a state during which the short time state of the normal symbol is set.

  Next, display contents at the start of the river breakthrough effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298 (a), when the river breakthrough effect is started, the effect that the character 811 finds the river image KG simulating the river is executed. In addition, the characters “Reach the first river! Jump over the river!” Are displayed in the display area HR1 formed (displayed) at the top of the display screen. With these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that there is a possibility that the short-time state of a normal symbol may end (that is, the number of short-time times elapses) in the variation. That is, it is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state and a transition to an adverse normal state. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the river breakthrough effect.

  FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the river breakthrough is successfully achieved and the continuation of the short time state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298 (b), when the success is notified by the river breakthrough effect, the character 811 jumps and the effect of landing on the opposite bank of the river image KG is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 298 (b), a signboard image 815 that imitates a signboard is displayed at the tip (opposite bank) beyond the river. This signboard image 815 is displayed in order to suggest (notify) a privilege due to the character 811 jumping over (breaking through) the river image KG. FIG. 298 (b) shows an example in which the word “continue” is displayed, which indicates that the normal symbol time-saving state continues after the next variation display (the number of time reductions remains). In addition, in accordance with the display of the signboard image 815, the characters “First river breakthrough! Chance zone continuation !!” are displayed on the display area HR1 formed at the upper center of the screen. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the short state of the normal symbol continues to shift to the next variation display. Therefore, by continuing the divergence until the next river break-through effect, the game can be performed while having the purpose of wanting to get the chance to shift to the latent state, so the player's interest in gaming is improved Can be made. In addition, when the short time state of the normal symbol continues, the special symbol lottery result is lost. Therefore, in the small area Dm1 for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol, a third symbol (for example, a combination of “8”, “1”, and “5”) indicating a detachment is displayed.

  Note that there is a time lag (for example, 1) between the time when the character 811 succeeds in jumping over the river image KG and the time when the signboard image 815 is displayed (that is, a privilege for breaking through the river is suggested). Second). Thus, the player can be expected to be notified of the transition to the latent state (RUSH) as a privilege due to jumping over the river image 811 during this one second. Therefore, every time the river breakthrough effect is successful, it can be expected that the latent state is informed for at least one second, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 299 (a) shows a display when the river breakthrough is successful and the transition to the latent state (RUSH) is notified (the normal symbol time-short state is terminated in the state of probability change). It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. As shown in FIG. 299 (a), even when the transition to the latent state is notified, the character 811 is the same as the case where the continuation of the short time state of the normal symbol is notified (see FIG. 298 (b)). The effect of jumping over the river image KG and landing on the opposite bank is executed. On the other hand, when the transition to the latent state is notified, the characters “RUSH” are displayed on the signboard image 815, and “first river breakthrough !! RUSH” is displayed on the display area HR1. The text “Enter!” Is displayed. Further, the characters displayed in the small area Dm3 are switched to “right-handed”, and the display content of the sub-display area Ds is switched to the display content “RUSH rush! With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the player has shifted to the most advantageous latent state (RUSH) and that a right-handed game may be performed.

  FIG. 299 (b) shows an example of a display mode in the case where the river breakthrough has failed in the river breakthrough and the transition to the normal state is notified (the normal symbol time-short state is terminated in the time-short state). FIG. As shown in FIG. 299 (b), when the transition to the normal state is informed, the character 811 jumps toward the opposite bank of the river image KG, but cannot jump over the river image KG and the river image KG. The effect that falls toward the is performed. In addition, characters “breakthrough failure ... chance zone end ...” are displayed on the display area HR1, and characters “chance zone end !!!!” are displayed on the sub display area Ds. The With these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the player has shifted to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 300, in the eleventh embodiment, a game when the chance zone is set after the jackpot ends (that is, the probability variation state or the time-short state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends). The transition of the state and the production mode will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 300 (a), the transition of the gaming state and the production mode when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state will be described. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 303. The jackpot C11 is a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot is set to the probability variation state, the number of time reductions is set to 50, and the probability variation count is set to 100. It is a type. In other words, if a special symbol lottery is lost 50 consecutive times after the jackpot ends, then an advantageous latent state will be maintained until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends unless the jackpot is won. It is a jackpot of the type.

  As shown in FIG. 300 (a), when winning the jackpot C11 in the normal state, the short-time state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times after the jackpot ends, and the 50th special At the timing when the symbol lottery is executed, the short time state of the normal symbol is terminated and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, the probability change state of the special symbol continues even if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or more (continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300 (a), as an effect mode, a river breakthrough effect (FIG. 298) in which continuation is notified during execution of variable display based on the fact that the 24th special symbol lottery has been executed. (See (b)), and during the execution of the variable display based on the fact that the 49th special symbol lottery has been executed, the river breakthrough effect in which the transition to the latent state is notified (see FIG. 299 (a)) ) Is executed. Thereafter, the RUSH effect indicating that the state is in the latent state is executed in the same display manner as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7B). In addition, when the number of time reductions becomes the probability variation big hit (big hit D11) set to 25 times, the transition to the latent state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is a probable big hit (big hit B11) set to 75 times, the continuation of the normal state time reduction (chance zone) is notified in the first and second river breakthrough productions. In the first river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect executed in the variable display based on the fact that the 74th special symbol lottery has been executed), the transition to the latent state is notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 300 (b), the transition of the gaming state and the production mode when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state will be described. Here, the jackpot F11 is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the short-time state and the number of time-savings is set to 50 times. In other words, if the special symbol lottery is lost 50 consecutive times after the jackpot is over, it is a jackpot of the type that becomes an unfavorable normal state thereafter.

  As shown in Fig. 300 (b), when winning the jackpot F11 in the normal state, the short-time state of the normal symbol continues until the 50th special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends, and the 50th special At the timing when the symbol lottery is executed, the short time state of the normal symbol is terminated and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. The special symbol state is maintained at the low probability state of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the game state shifts to the normal state by executing the 50th special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300 (b), as an effect mode, a river breakthrough effect (FIG. 298) in which continuation is notified during execution of variable display based on the fact that the 24th special symbol lottery has been executed. (B)) is executed, and during the execution of the variable display based on the 49th special symbol lottery executed, the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (b)) in which the river breakthrough is failed. This is executed to notify the transition to the normal state. Thereafter, the normal effect for the normal state is executed. In addition, when the number of time reductions becomes the normal jackpot (big hit G11) set to 25 times, the transition to the normal state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions becomes the normal jackpot (big hit E11) set to 75 times, the continuation of the short time state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the first and second river breakthrough productions. In the first river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect executed in the variable display based on the fact that the 74th special symbol lottery has been executed), the transition to the normal state is notified.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probabilistic state or the short-time state, every time the number of times that the normal symbol's short-time state is likely to end is reached, By executing the breakthrough effect, whether the normal symbol's short-time state continues, whether the normal symbol's short-time state is terminated and transitions to the latent state, or the normal symbol's short-time state is terminated and transitions to the normal state It is set as the structure which alert | reports regularly whether the special symbol lottery is drawn every 25 times or every 15 times. By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (ordinary symbol time-short state) is set, let the player play the game in one fun that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed Can do. In addition, at least until the next river break-through effect, it is possible to realize a novel game that desires to be removed continuously by drawing a special symbol. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration that may shift to the normal state due to failure in the river breakthrough production, the continuation of the short-time state was informed in the river breakthrough production (the state changed to the latent state after breaking through the river) Even if it was not), it can be made to think that it is better than notifying the normal state. That is, even if the latent state is not notified, it can be suppressed that the player is discouraged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 301, the small hit effect that can be executed in the latent state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, when a plurality of effects having different aspects are provided as the small hit effects, and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the lottery of the first special symbol that is changing Run to suggest results. Note that, in the latent state, when the first special symbol variation display is being executed, the normal symbol time-short state is terminated mainly in the probability variation state in which the retained balls of the first special symbol are likely to accumulate, and the first special symbol is displayed. This is a case where the state shifts to the latent state with the holding ball of the symbol. In this case, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variation display based on the retained ball of the first special symbol that has been suspended is being executed, the variation display of the first special symbol The variation display of the second special symbol is executed in an overlapping manner. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested by the small hit effect in the case of the small bonus in the lottery of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 301 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a small hit effect (small hit effect for high expectation) that suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit. When the small expectation effect for high expectation is executed, as shown in FIG. 301, the effect symbol 816 having a flashy display mode as compared to the effect symbol 813 in the normal small hit effect (see FIG. 7B). Is displayed. In the effect symbol 816, as shown in FIG. 301, the character color “V” for indicating a small hit is set to a character color (yellow) different from the character color (black) in the effect symbol 813, and “ The effect around the letter “V” looks flashy. By these display modes, it is possible to make the player easily understand that a small hitting effect different from the normal small hitting effect (see FIG. 7B) is executed, which is a big hit. The player can have a sense of expectation for this.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the eleventh embodiment, the degree of expectation is medium in addition to the normal hitting effect (low hitting effect for low expectation) and the small hitting effect for high expectation. Are also provided (a small hit effect for medium expectation). By configuring in this way, the second special symbol is displayed in a period in which the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display are likely to be executed redundantly, such as immediately after the transition to the latent state. It is possible to realize a novel gameability that predicts the lottery result of the first special symbol according to the type of the small hit effect. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result each time a special symbol lottery result is executed is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of the symbol variation display effect, various interest effects that suggest the lottery result of the special symbol are executed, thereby improving the interest of the player. However, in a gaming machine having a specification capable of executing a plurality of variable displays at the same time, while paying attention to the effect aspect associated with one of the variable displays, the problem is that the effect aspect of the other variable display effect is missed. There was a point. In particular, in a type of gaming machine that displays one variation display in a form that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect form in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to visually recognize), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the jackpot is started in a state where the player is not paying attention.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol that is mainly executed in the latent state is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol that is difficult to execute. If the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in combination with the display of the first special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is selected by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variable display). The structure suggests the result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small special effect of the second special symbol is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being simultaneously executed is a big hit. It is not limited. For example, it is good also as a structure which suggests the lottery result of a 1st special symbol by the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation performed during the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol. In addition, for example, a configuration that suggests (notifies) the expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit by the display mode of the normal symbol variation display in the second symbol display device. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to visually recognize only by confirming the variable display effect on the side that is easy to visually recognize. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration of Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 304. The ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15 (a)), the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a, the prescribed contents of the small hit random number table 202b, The difference is that the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. Since the other configuration is the same as the configuration of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A), the detailed description thereof will be described later.

  First, the details of the first per-random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302 (a). FIG. 302 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the first random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a data table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set.

  As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 302 (a)) in the eleventh embodiment has random numbers (counter values) determined to be big hits in a low probability state of a special symbol. ) Are specified as two random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol. The random value of is specified. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/240 (2/480), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the special symbol is 1/60 (1/480).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 302 (b), the small hit random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 302 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment. As with the small hit random number table 202b in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15B), the small hit random number table 202b is set with a random value (counter value) determined to be small hit in a special symbol lottery. It is a table that was made. As shown in FIG. 302 (b), in the small hit random number table 202b according to the eleventh embodiment, no random number value for the small hit is specified for the lottery of the first special symbol. In other words, in the lottery of the first special symbol, no win is won. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, 472 random values (counter values) of “8 to 479” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is made with a probability of 59/60 (472/480). That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, a big win or a small win is obtained. Therefore, the advantageous degree of the latent state can be further increased.

  Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment is similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 16 (a)), and the determination value for determining the jackpot type is a special symbol type. Is a data table stored in

  As shown in FIG. 303, in the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment, seven jackpot types “Big Jack A11” to “Big Jack G11” as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1). Is stipulated. On the other hand, three jackpot types from “big jackpot H11” to “big jackpot J11” are defined as jackpot types for the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, and the jackpot type is “big hit A11”. It is defined in association. The “big jackpot A11” is a jackpot type (8 round probability variation jackpot) of which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. Note that whether or not the short time state of the normal symbol is set varies depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. More specifically, when the “big hit A11” is won in the normal state, the time reduction state, and the probability variation state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0). In other words, when the “big hit A11” is won in the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. At this time, since the probability variation count is set to 100 times (100 is set to the probability variation counter 203j), a maximum of 100 special symbol lotteries are executed after the “big hit A11” is completed. During this time, an advantageous latent state continues. On the other hand, if the “big hit A11” is won in the latent state, the number of hour / hours is set to 50 (the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is set to 50). Until 50 is executed 50 times, a relatively advantageous probability change state is obtained. Therefore, “big hit A11” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous in terms of gaming state when winning in a gaming state other than the latent state. On the other hand, when winning in the latent state, it becomes a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of gaming state (disadvantageous than the jackpot type in which the latent state is set, but more advantageous than the jackpot type in which the short time state is set) Become).

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit A11”, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is a big hit, the ratio at which the “big hit A11” is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 303, “big hit B11” is defined as a big hit type in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “5 to 14”. This “big hit B11” is a big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) of the type in which the number of big hits is 8 and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In the normal state, when the “big hit B11” is won, the number of time reductions is set to 75. On the other hand, when the “big hit B11” is won in the time reduction state and the probability variation state, the time reduction is set to 40 times. Is done. In other words, when the “big hit B11” is won in the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability variation state. On the other hand, when “big hit B11” is won in the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, “big hit B11” is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of gaming state when winning in a gaming state other than the latent state. On the other hand, when winning in the latent state, the jackpot type is the most advantageous in terms of gaming state.

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit B11”, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is a big hit, the rate at which “big jackpot B11” is determined is 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, “big hit C11” is defined as a big hit type in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “15 to 69”. This “big jackpot C11” is a big jackpot (8 rounds probable variation jackpot) of the type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot. In the normal state, when the “big hit C11” is won, the number of time reductions is set to 50. On the other hand, when the “big hit C11” is won in the time reduction state and the probability variation state, the time reduction is set to 25 times. Is done. In other words, since the number of time reductions is set smaller than in the case of winning the “big hit B11” in the above three gaming states, it becomes easier to shift to the latent state (continuation of losing until the normal symbol time reduction state ends) Easy to do). Therefore, in the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state, the “big hit C11” is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the “big hit B11”. On the other hand, when “big hit B11” is won in the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, “big hit C11” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous in terms of gaming state when winning in the latent state.

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 55 random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit C11”, so the first special symbol lottery In the case where a big hit is made, the ratio at which the “big hit C11” is determined is 55% (55/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “70 to 79” as “hit D11” as the big hit type. This “big hit D11” is a big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) of the type in which the number of big hits is 8 rounds and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In the normal state, when the “big hit D11” is won, the number of time reductions is set to 25. On the other hand, when the “big hit D11” is won in the time reduction state and the probability variation state, the time reduction is set to 10 times. Is done. That is, in the above three gaming states, since the number of time reductions is set smaller than that in the case of winning “big hit B11” or “big hit C11”, it becomes easier to shift to the latent state (the normal symbol time reduction state ends. It will be easy to continue to come off). Therefore, in the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state, the “big hit D11” is a big hit type that is more advantageous than the “big hit B11” and the “big hit C11”. On the other hand, when “big hit D11” is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, “big hit D11” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous in terms of gaming state when winning in the latent state.

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit D11”, so the first special symbol lottery In the case where a big hit is made, the ratio at which “big hit D11” is determined is 10% (2/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “80, 81” as the big hit type in association with “big hit E11”. This “big jackpot E11” is a big jackpot (8 round normal jackpot) of the type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is eight and the special symbol is set in a low probability state after the jackpot ends. In the normal state, when the “big hit E11” is won, the number of time reductions is set to 75. On the other hand, when the “big hit E11” is won in the time reduction state, the probability variation state, and the latent state, Set to 100 times. The time-short state is a kind of jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player because it only shifts to the normal state (it does not shift to an advantageous latent state) even if the number of time-shorts has elapsed.

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are two random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit E11”, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is a big hit, the ratio at which the “big hit E11” is determined is 2% (2/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “82 to 98” as the big hit type in association with “big hit F11”. This “big jackpot F11” is a big jackpot (8 round normal jackpot) of the type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is eight and the special symbol is set in a low probability state after the jackpot ends. In the normal state, when the “big hit F11” is won, the number of time reductions is set to 50. On the other hand, if the “big hit F11” is won in the time reduction state, the probability variation state, and the latent state, the time reduction number is set. Set to 100 times. Therefore, “big hit F11” is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than “big hit E11” in the normal state, and is a big hit with the same degree of advantage as “big hit E11” in the short-time state, the probability variation state, and the latent state. .

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 17 random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit F11”, so the first special symbol lottery When the big hit is made, the ratio at which “big hit F11” is determined is 17% (17/100).

  As shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as being associated with “99” as the jackpot type in association with “big hit G11”. This “big hit G11” is a big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) of the type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the special symbol has a low probability state after the end of the big hit. In the normal state, when the “big hit G11” is won, the number of time reductions is set to 25. On the other hand, when the “big hit G11” is won in the time reduction state, the probability variation state, and the latent state, Set to 100 times. Therefore, “big hit E11” and “big hit F11” are more disadvantageous than “big hit E11” and “big hit F11” in the normal state, and “big hit E11” and “big hit F11” in the short-time state, the probability variation state, and the latent state. Is a big hit with the same degree of advantage.

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit G11” is one, so the lottery of the first special symbol When the jackpot is a big hit, the ratio at which the “big hit G11” is determined is 1% (1/100).

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, as the jackpot of the first special symbol, when the winning is performed in the normal state, the probability variation jackpot ("big jackpot B11" ~ "Big jackpot D11") and normal jackpots ("Big jackpot E11" to "Big jackpot G11") in which the number of time reductions of 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times are set are provided. That is, the timing at which the short time state of the normal symbol ends is set to three patterns of 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times after the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, every time the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times, 50 times, and 75 times after the normal symbol time-short state is set, the state shifts to the latent state. Can be expected. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot ratio at which the number of time reductions is set to 25 is normally very low (1%). Therefore, since it is difficult to determine the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous for the player (there is a small number of times and there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state), it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it can suppress that the motivation with respect to a player's game falls. Further, the ratio of the normal jackpot (big hit E11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 75 is also configured to be relatively low (2%). Thereby, when the number of time reductions exceeds 50 (that is, when continuation is notified by the second river breakthrough effect), it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for being in a probabilistic state. Therefore, even if the transition to the latent state is not notified in the second river break-through effect (that is, even if continuation is notified), the expectation for the next (that is, the third) river break-through effect is further increased. Can be improved.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, in the short-time state or the probability variation state, when the probability variation jackpot is won (that is, consecutive play), the number is smaller than the case where the normal state is a jackpot (that is, so-called first hit). The number of time reductions is set. In other words, it is configured such that the winning condition for the normal symbol in the short time state is more easily established in the case of winning in the short time state or the probability variation state in which the probability variation big hit is won than in the normal state. In other words, it is configured such that a person who wins a probable big hit during the short time state of a normal symbol is more likely to shift to a latent state. This allows the player to feel as if he is approaching the latent state as he wins the jackpot in the short time state of the normal symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

  It should be noted that, when the jackpot is normally won in the time-saving state or the probability variation state, 100 times are set as the number of time-savings regardless of the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of a normal big hit that is disadvantageous in the short-time state or the probability-changing state (that is, the normal symbol does not shift to the latent state even if the termination condition of the short-time state is satisfied). Therefore, in the case of a promising big hit and in the case of a normal big hit, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage when a so-called rengo is generated rather than a so-called initial hit, so a rengo is generated. In this case, the player's expectation can be further improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 1), the jackpot type is “Big jackpot H11” with respect to the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 74”. "Is defined in association with each other. This “big hit H11” is a big hit (16 rounds probable big hit) of the type in which the number of big hits is 16 rounds and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In addition, when the “big hit H11” is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times, whereas when the “big hit H11” is won in the latent state, the time reduction number is set to 0. Is set. In other words, if a “big hit H11” is won in a gaming state other than the latent probability state, the gaming state after the big hit is set to a promiscuous state, while if “big hit H11” is won in the latent state, after the big hit ends The game state is set to the latent state.

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 75 random value values (counter values) associated with “big hit H11”, so the second special symbol lottery In the case where the jackpot is won, the ratio at which the “jackpot H11” is determined is 75% (75/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 303, “big hit I11” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “75 to 79” as the big hit type. This “big jackpot I11” is a big jackpot (16 rounds probable jackpot) of the type in which the jackpot round number is 16 rounds, and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot is finished. In addition, when the “big hit I11” is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times, while when the “big hit I11” is won in the latent state, the time reduction number is set to 50 times. Is set. In other words, when the “big hit I11” is won, regardless of the game state at the time of the win, the game state after the big hit is set to the probability change state.

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit I11”, so the lottery of the second special symbol When the jackpot is a big hit, the ratio at which the “big hit H11” is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, “big hit J11” is defined as a big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “80 to 99”. This “big jackpot J11” is a big jackpot of 16 types (16 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the big jackpot is 16 rounds and the special symbol is set to a low probability state after the big jackpot ends. In addition, when the “big hit J11” is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, while when the “big hit J11” is won in the latent state, the time reduction is set to 100 times. Is set. In other words, if “big hit J11” is won in a gaming state other than the latent state, the normal state is set after the big hit, while if “big jack J11” is won in the latent state, the gaming state after the big hit is changed. Set to short-time state.

  Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random value values (counter values) associated with “big hit J11”, so the second special symbol lottery When the jackpot is a big hit, the ratio at which the “big jackpot J11” is determined is 20% (20/100).

  As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the game state after the jackpot is relatively unfavorable when the second special symbol wins in the game state other than the latent state. . This is intended to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed game is performed and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed even though it is not in a latent state. In other words, in the jackpot of the second special symbol won in the gaming state other than the latent state, if the same gaming state as the latent state is set, the second special symbol lottery is intentionally made by right-handed According to the gaming method to be executed, the game is shifted to the most advantageous latent state at a high rate of 75%, which is excessively advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, even in the gaming state in which the left-handed game should be performed, even if a right hit is made and a big hit is made, there is no possibility that the probability change state (that is, the number of time reductions) (Probability change state in which the probability change state ends at the same time) is set, or the most disadvantageous normal state is set, so it is disadvantageous for the player to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery . Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed game is performed in a gaming state in which a left-handed game is to be performed.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202f determines a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 in the same manner as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment. It is a data table for doing. In the eleventh embodiment, in the variation pattern selection table 202f, the specified contents of the time / probability changing table 202f2 and the latent probability table 202f3 are partially changed. Specifically, the time reduction / accuracy changing table 202f2 in the eleventh embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), shorter than the time reduction / accuracy changing table 202f2 (see FIG. 19 (a)) in the first embodiment. The variation time when the first special symbol is hit is shortened (10 seconds to 20 seconds). In addition, the fluctuation pattern when the first special symbol is off includes a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a super fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the short-time state or the probability variation state, and to diversify the variation pattern at the time of disconnection. Further, since the average variation time is shorter than that in the normal state (see FIG. 18), it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the gaming state in which the normal symbol time-short state is set. Note that the variation pattern of the second special symbol is configured such that 60 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, as in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to deteriorate the game efficiency when a right strike is made in a short-time state or a probable change state where left-handed game should be performed. It is possible to suppress the game method.

  As shown in FIG. 304 (b), in the latent probability table 202f3j according to the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol is the same as that of the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2. On the other hand, for the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a variation pattern of 1 second is set regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, if the game shifts to the latent state and a right-handed game is performed, a small hit game is executed at a relatively short interval (approximately one second interval), and therefore the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened. , You can win prize balls frequently. Therefore, the player's degree of advantage in the latent state can be improved.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the latent state is reached, the jackpot probability is increased, and the first specific winning opening 65a is opened at intervals of one second, which is a very advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the goal of shifting to the latent state. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 305, in the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, a probability variation counter 203ja is added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) instead of the probability variation flag 203g. It is different in point.

  The probability variation counter 203ja is a counter for counting the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols until the probability variation state of the special symbol is completed. If the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is probable, and if the value is 0, it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. The probability variation counter 203ja has an initial value set to 0, and is set to 0 when a big hit is won. If the winning jackpot is a promising jackpot, 100 is set as the value at the end of the probable jackpot. While the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, every time a special symbol lottery is newly executed, the value is subtracted and updated by 1 (see S623 in FIG. 310). When a special symbol lottery is executed, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is referred to determine whether or not the probability variation state is present, and a table for performing a jackpot determination (the first random number for high probability) A table or a first random number table for low probability) is selected.

  Next, referring to FIG. 306, a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 306. explain. FIG. 306 is a diagram illustrating a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 306, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is roughly divided into four gaming states. That is, the normal state shown at the top of FIG. 306, the probability change state shown at the center left side of FIG. 306, the time-short state shown at the center right side of FIG. Is provided.

  As described above, the normal state indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of a big hit is low, and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be released (the game ball is lower). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to enter a gaming state. In addition, as described above, the probability variation state indicates the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol. The probability of jackpot is high. Since the game ball frequently enters 64 (the electric accessory 64a is frequently released), the game state is relatively advantageous to the player. The short-time state indicates a low-probability state of a special symbol and a short-time state of a normal symbol. Although the jackpot probability is low, by performing a left-handed game, as in the probability variation state, Since game balls frequently enter the entrance 640, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is formed. Furthermore, as described above, the latent state indicates the probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol. When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in addition to the high probability of jackpot Since the set variation time is significantly shorter than the other three gaming states (from 60 seconds to 1 second), the second special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed by performing a right-handed game. Can do. And as described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, since the first specific winning opening 64a is opened with a high probability (59/60) and the first special winning opening 64a is opened, The game balls frequently enter the two entrance holes 640 and the first specific prize opening 64a, thereby forming a very advantageous gaming state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained without going through a big win. Therefore, the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state only when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, when the jackpot A11, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (decided), the latent Transition to a certain state. Therefore, since the big hit A11 is directly shifted to the most advantageous latent state, in the normal state, the big hit A11 is the type of jackpot most pleasing to the player. In addition, if any of the jackpots B11 to D11, which is determined as a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it becomes a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends. Transition. Furthermore, when one of the jackpots E11 to G11, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected, the system shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot is finished. As described above, when the probability variation state and the short time state are set as the gaming state after the jackpot, it is configured so that it is difficult to recognize which gaming state is set (which gaming state However, the river breakthrough effect is executed at the same timing). Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect.

  In addition, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility that a transition from a certain probability change state to another state may be made into another gaming state when the normal symbol time-short state ends in addition to the case where a big win is given. is there. Specifically, when the jackpot A11 is selected, which is a jackpot in the probability variation state and is determined at a rate of 5%, the system shifts to an advantageous latent probability state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the short-time state of the normal symbol ends before winning the jackpot, it shifts to the most advantageous latent state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is any of jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set again to the probability change state ( Loop through the probabilistic state). In other words, in the probability variation state, even if the jackpot is won, only the low probability (a rate of 5%) shifts to the advantageous latent state, so it is more It can be felt that it is easy to shift to a state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that expects the continuation of the deviation over the set number of times. In addition, as described above, the transition is based on winning the probability variation jackpot in the probability variation state or the short time state, rather than the probability variation state (probability variation state transitioned after the first hit) based on winning the probability variation jackpot in the normal state. The probability variation state (probability variation state that has shifted to after the occurrence of the consecutive resorts) is configured such that the average value of the set number of time reductions is reduced. In other words, the average of the number of time reductions set at the time of first hit is 50 times, whereas the average of the number of time reductions set at the time of consecutive homes is 25 times. Therefore, since it is easier to pass the number of time reductions at the time of the consecutive house occurrence, even if you win a big hit before passing the time reduction number in the probability variation state, even if you loop the probability variation state, Since there is a high possibility that the short time count (low time short count) that is easy to shift to the latent state is set, the disappointment of the player can be eased. Therefore, it can suppress that the motivation with respect to a player's game falls.

  In addition, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility that a shift from the short-time state to another state may shift to another gaming state when the normal symbol's short-time state ends in addition to the case of a big hit. is there. Specifically, when the jackpot A11 is selected, which is a jackpot in the short-time state and is determined at a rate of 5%, the state shifts to an advantageous latent state after the jackpot is completed. When jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probable change state. On the other hand, if the short-time state of the normal symbol ends before winning the jackpot, it shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is any of jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot is again set to the short-time state ( Loop through the short state). In other words, in the short-time state, even if the number of time-savings of the normal symbol has passed, it shifts to an unfavorable normal state, so it is advantageous to win a jackpot. As described above, it is difficult to distinguish whether the normal symbol time-short state is set or the probability variation state is set from the contents of the production, etc., so the time-short state is set. In the meantime, it can be expected to be in a probable state. In other words, it can be expected that the short time of the normal symbol will elapse. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility that, from the latent state to another state, the game state may be shifted to another game state when the number of times of probability change has passed in addition to the case where a big hit has occurred. Specifically, in the latent state, when the second special symbol lottery is won and the jackpot I11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the state shifts to the probability change state after the jackpot is completed. When jackpot J11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time-short state. On the other hand, if the number of probable changes ends before winning the jackpot, the transition to the most disadvantageous normal state is made. On the other hand, when the big win H11 is determined at a rate of 75% when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the gaming state after the big win ends is set to the latent state again ( Loop through the latent state). In other words, in the latent state, since the advantageous latent state is looped at a high ratio (ratio of 75%) by winning the jackpot before the number of probability change passes, after the transition to the latent state, Can play games while expecting a big hit.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to realize the gameability that can be expected to continue to come off in the probability variation state, while realizing the gameability that can be expected to become a big hit in the latent state. can do. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 307 (a). FIG. 307 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment is smaller than the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22 (a)), and a small hit effect selection table 222ja and a winning prize. The difference is that a sound selection table 222jb is added.

  The small hit effect selection table 222ja is a data table that is referred to in order to select the type of the small hit effect during the execution of the small hit game when winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery. As described above, when the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (simultaneously), such as immediately after the transition to the latent state, this small hit effect is displayed. Depending on the type, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested. Details of the small hit effect selection table 222ja will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to in order to select a winning sound to be output when a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected during the small hit game. In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested (notified) even by a winning sound output during the small hit game. Accordingly, the game can be performed with attention to not only the small win effect but also the winning sound, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described later with reference to FIG. 308 (b).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 308 (a), details of the above-described small hit effect selection table 222ja will be described. FIG. 308 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit effect selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 308 (a), in the small hit effect selection table 222ja, the type of the winning information of the first special symbol (data stored in the storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b). The range of the counter value of the effect counter (effect lottery counter) 223h and the effect mode of the small hit effect are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when the data indicating the big hit is stored in the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (that is, the variation of the first special symbol being executed) When the display is a big hit), a normal effect mode (see FIG. 7B) is defined in association with the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 69”, and “70 to 89”. A medium-expected degree production mode is defined in association with the range of “90”, and a high-expected degree production mode (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range “90 to 99”. Yes. Therefore, the ratios in which the effect mode for medium expectation, the effect mode for medium expectation level, and the effect mode for high expectation level are selected during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol are 70% (70/100) and 20%, respectively. (20/100) and 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when winning data for the first special symbol is stored in the area other than the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (the big ball is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol) And when the data indicating the super fluctuation is stored in the execution area (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol being executed is super display fluctuation), the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 84”. A normal production mode (see FIG. 7 (b)) is defined in association with the range, and a production mode for medium expectation is defined in association with the range "85 to 97". An effect mode for high expectation (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range of “98, 99”. Therefore, when the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol, or when the first special symbol out-of-shift fluctuation is being executed, the normal effect mode, the medium expectation level effect mode, and the high The proportions in which the production mode for the degree of expectation is selected are 85% (85/100), 13% (13/100), and 2% (2/100), respectively. That is, it is configured such that the selection ratio of the production mode for the high expectation level and the medium expectation level is decreased and the selection ratio of the normal performance mode is increased as compared with the case where the first special symbol is in the big hit variation. Has been. Therefore, when the change display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the effect mode for the high expectation level and the effect mode for the medium expectation level are executed, the change display of the first special symbol indicates a jackpot. Therefore, it can be expected more strongly that the display is variable. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the small hit effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not being executed, the supermarket fluctuation is not being executed, and the holding ball of the first special symbol does not include the jackpot Is defined in association with a normal production mode (see FIG. 7B) for a range of the production counter 223h of “0 to 94”, and for a range of “95 to 98”, An effect mode for medium expectation is defined in association with it, and an effect mode for high expectation (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with “99”. Therefore, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not being executed, the supermarket fluctuation is not being executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the normal effect mode, the medium expectation degree The ratios for which the production mode for high and the production mode for high expectation are selected are 95% (95/100), 4% (4/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively. That is, the selection ratio of the production mode for the high expectation degree and the medium expectation degree than when the big hit fluctuation or the supermarket fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, or when the big hit is included in the hold Is reduced, and the selection ratio of the normal performance mode is increased. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the production mode for the high expectation level and the production mode for the medium expectation level are executed, and when the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists The game can be played in the hope that the variable display during execution will be a big hit or that the hold includes a big hit. Therefore, every time a lottery is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to realize the game nature of predicting the lottery result of the first special symbol from the effect mode of the small bonus effect, so that the player's interest in the game Can be improved.

  Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result each time a special symbol lottery result is executed is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of the symbol variation display effect, various interest effects that suggest the lottery result of the special symbol are executed, thereby improving the interest of the player. However, in a gaming machine having a specification capable of executing a plurality of variable displays at the same time, while paying attention to the effect aspect associated with one of the variable displays, the problem is that the effect aspect of the other variable display effect is missed. There was a point. In particular, in a type of gaming machine that displays one variation display in a form that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect form in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to visually recognize), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the jackpot is started in a state where the player is not paying attention.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol that is mainly executed in the latent state is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol that is difficult to execute. If the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in combination with the display of the first special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is selected by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variable display). The structure suggests the result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small special effect of the second special symbol is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being simultaneously executed is a big hit. It is not limited. For example, it is good also as a structure which suggests the lottery result of a 1st special symbol by the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation performed during the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol. In addition, for example, a configuration that suggests (notifies) the expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit by the display mode of the normal symbol variation display in the second symbol display device. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to visually recognize only by confirming the variable display effect on the side that is easy to visually recognize. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Next, details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to in order to select a winning sound to be output when a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected during the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 308 (b), the winning sound selection table 222jb has an effect counter for each type of winning information in the execution area of the first special symbol (variation type of variation display of the first special symbol being executed). The range of the counter value of (effect lottery counter) 223h and the type of winning sound (any one of three types of normal sound, chance sound, and final sound) are defined in association with each other. The normal sound is composed of a relatively short and plain sound (for example, a sound “charin”), and the chance sound is longer than the normal sound and a flashy sound (for example, “jakin”). The deterministic sound is composed of the most flashy sound (e.g., “Dockern” sound) among the three types. Although the details will be described later, the definite sound is a special sound that is output only when a game ball enters (wins) the first specific winning opening 65a during the big hit fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is being executed, the normal sound is selected as the winning sound for the range of the effect lottery counter 223h being “0 to 79”. A chance sound is defined in association with a range of “80 to 98” as a winning sound, and a definite sound is defined in association with “99” as a winning sound. Therefore, when the winning for the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the final sound being output is 80%, 19%, And 1%. As described above, the definite sound is a special sound that is selected only during execution of the jackpot variation. Therefore, when a definite sound is output, great joy can be given to the player. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the first special symbol out-of-shift fluctuation is being executed, the winning lottery counter 223h has a value of “0 to 89” as a winning sound. A normal sound is defined in association with each other, and a chance sound is defined in association with a range of “90 to 99” as a winning sound. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the definite sound. Therefore, when a winning for the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the first special symbol deviation super variation, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound and the final sound being output is 90% and 10%, respectively. , And 0%. That is, the rate at which the chance sound is output is reduced (about half) and the rate at which the normal sound is output is increased as compared with the case where the jackpot is fluctuating. And there is no possibility that a definite sound is output.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not being executed or the supermarket fluctuation is not being executed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is within the range of “0 to 94”. Thus, a normal sound is defined in association with the winning sound, and a chance sound is defined in association with the range of “95 to 99” as the winning sound. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the definite sound. Therefore, when a winning for the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the first special symbol deviation super variation, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound and the final sound being output is 95% and 5%, respectively. , And 0%. That is, the output ratio of the chance sound is further decreased and the output ratio of the normal sound is increased as compared with the case where the deviation super fluctuation is being executed. Therefore, when the chance sound is output, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the big hit fluctuation is being executed. Further, since the definite sound is output, it is determined that the big hit variation is being executed, so that the player can have great joy. Therefore, the game can be played with attention to not only the small hit effect but also the winning sound output during the small hit game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 307 (b), details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22 (b)). The difference is that 223jb is added.

  The variation count counter 223ja is a counter for counting the variation count (lottery count) of the special symbol. This variation counter 223ja has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the variation display effect starts (that is, every time a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110). (See S5121 and S5125 in FIG. 314). In addition, it is reset to 0 at the end of the jackpot (see S4422 in FIG. 312). In the game state (probability change state, time reduction state) in which the normal symbol time-saving state is set, it is determined whether or not the river breakthrough effect can be executed with reference to the value of the variation counter 223ja (S5132, S5133 in FIG. 315). reference).

  The first hit flag 223jb is a flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol set after the first hit is in a short time state. If this initial hit flag is on, it means that the normal symbol set after the first hit is in the short-time state, and if it is off, it means that it is not in the short-time state after the first hit. In the short time state of the normal symbol, the initial hit flag 223jb is referenced every time the start timing of the variable symbol display effect of the special symbol, so that it is the short time state after the first hit, It is determined whether it exists. If the time is short after the first hit, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 24th, 49th, and 74th fluctuation display after the big hit (see S5132 in FIG. 315). On the other hand, if the time is short after the consecutive villas are generated, a river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 9th, 24th, and 39th fluctuation display (S5133 in FIG. 315). As described above, this is because the normal symbol's time-short state set after the first hit and the normal symbol's time-short state set after the retreat can change the normal symbol's time-short state. This is because the number of symbol lotteries) is different.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 309, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the first embodiment. Similar to the big hit determination process (see FIG. 34), based on the set gaming state based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing the probability variation counter 203ja instead of the probability variation flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, among the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, in the processes of S401, S403 to S410, and S412, the first special symbol jackpot in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S401, S403 to S410, and S412 of the determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S401 ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is a value greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more). (S421), if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S421: Yes), the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S421: No), the process proceeds to S404.

  Although illustration is omitted, the same changes are made to the control contents in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 310, the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the gaming state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment. This game state update process 12 (S322) is a process executed instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating various flags and counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the gaming state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the control contents are changed by providing the probability variation counter 203ja instead of the probability variation flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, among the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the game state update process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36) in each of the processes S601 to S604, S606, and S607. The same processes as those of S601 to S604, S606, and S607 are executed.

  In the gaming state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the hour / counter counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604: Yes), then the probability change It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621: Yes), the process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S621: No), the process proceeds to S607.

  In the gaming state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S606 or S607 ends, it is next determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than zero. (S622) If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (ie, 1 or more) (S622: Yes), then the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is decremented by 1 and updated. (S623) A remaining probability variation number command indicating the updated value of the probability variation counter 203ja is set (S624). When the processing of S624 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update by the processing of S623 has become 0 (S625), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja has become 0 ( (S625: Yes), a state command indicating that the state has shifted to the normal state is set (S626), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S622 that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S622: No), and in the process of S625, it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not 0. Ends this processing as it is.

  Next, the details of the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment. The second winning process 12 (S2521) is a process executed in place of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for performing control in accordance with winning in the first specific winning opening 65a detected during the execution of the small hit game.

  Of the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, the processes of S2701 to S2707 are the same as the processes of S2701 to S2707 of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S2704 ends, the sound lamp control that the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the small hit game is executed. A small winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2705.

  The small winning prize command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp control is performed. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the small win winning command, it refers to the winning information of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h from the winning sound selection table 222jb (see FIG. 308 (b)). Select a sound and set the output of the selected winning sound. As a result, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol can be suggested by the type of the winning sound every time the first special winning port 65a is won in the second special symbol small hit game. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 316. First, with reference to FIG. 312, the state command process 12 (S4231) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. The state command process 12 (S4231) in the eleventh embodiment is a process executed in place of the state command process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment, and the state command process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment. This is a process for setting the current gaming state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110 in the same manner as in FIG.

  Of the state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, in steps S4401 to S4406, S4410, and S4411, the state command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 62), S4401 to S4406, The same processes as those in S4410 and S4411 are executed. Further, in the state command process 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S4401 ends, next, whether or not the current state command is a state command for indicating the gaming state after the jackpot is ended. Is determined (S4421), and if it is determined that the command is a state command for indicating the gaming state after the jackpot (S4421: Yes), the value of the variation counter 223ja is reset to 0 (S4422).

  When the processing of S4422 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of the big win (the gaming state determined in the processing of S4401) is the normal state (S4423), and the gaming state at the time of the big win is the normal state (S4423: Yes), the first hit flag 223jb is set to ON (S4424), and the process proceeds to S4436. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4423 that the gaming state at the time of the big win is not the normal state (S4423: No), the initial hit flag 223jb is set to off (S4425), and the process proceeds to S4426. .

  In the process of S4426 executed after the process of S4424 or S4425, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is set in the state setting area 223j (S4426), and the process proceeds to S4402. On the other hand, in the process of S4421, when it is determined that the state command received this time is not a state command for indicating the gaming state after the jackpot (S4421: No), each process of S4422 to S4426 is skipped, The processing moves to S4402.

  By executing this state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312), whether the jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot won in the normal state) or the consecutive jackpot (the jackpot won in the gaming state other than the normal state) Accordingly, the initial hit flag 223jb can be appropriately updated. Therefore, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) can be executed at an appropriate timing (the number of times that the normal symbol time-short state may end).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 313, details of the small hit related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the small hit related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment. This small hit related process 12 (S4521) is a process executed instead of the small hit related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, and the small hit related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for executing control according to the type of command related to the small hit.

  Of the small hit-related processing 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, the respective processes of S4701 to S4710 are the same as the respective processes of S4701 to S4710 of the small hit related processing (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. The same process is executed. Further, in the small hit related process 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4701 that the small hit start command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a small winning prize command has been received (S4721). If it is determined that a small winning prize command has been received (S4721: Yes), then a winning sound selection table 222jb (FIG. 308 (b)). (See S4722), and in the winning information storage area 223b, the winning sound corresponding to the execution area data of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h is selected and the output is set (S4723). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4721 that no small winning command has been received (S4721: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the variable display setting process 12 (S4121) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variation display setting process 12 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment, and the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment. Similarly, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed based on the first or special diagram 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for setting a change pattern command for use and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

  Of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, the processes in steps S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113 are the variable display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 69). ) S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S511 to S5113 are executed. Further, in the fluctuation display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the fluctuation is then performed. The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5121), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5102).

  When the processing of S5102 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current state is a normal symbol time-short state (S5122). In the process of S5122, it is determined whether or not the data set (stored) in the state setting area 223j is data indicating either the probability change state or the time-short state. If it is determined in the process of S5122 that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S5122: Yes), the short-and-medium-time effect setting process for setting the effect mode (for example, the river breakthrough effect) in the normal symbol in the short-time state is executed. In step S5123, the process proceeds to step S5106. Details of the short / medium stage effect setting process (S5123) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5122 that the normal symbol is not in the short-time state (S5122: No), the first special symbol is displayed, which indicates the variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command. A variation pattern command is set (S5124), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  In the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S5107 that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), then the variation The value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the number counter 223ja (S5125), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S5108). Next, instead of the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 12 is executed (S5126), and the process proceeds to S5110. Details of the special figure 2 variation display setting process 12 (S5126) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the details of the above-described time-shortage effect setting process (S5123) will be described. The short / medium effect setting process (S5123) is a process for setting the effect mode in the short time state of the normal symbol as described above. When the short and medium effect setting process (S5123) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the initial hit flag 223jb is on (S5131), and when it is determined that the initial hit flag 223jb is on (S5131). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 223ja is any one of 24, 49, and 74 (that is, the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the first hit). (S5132). In the process of S5132, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223jb is any one of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: Yes), a process for setting the production mode of the river breakthrough effect (S5134- Each process of S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5132, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223jb is different from any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: No), it means that it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect. Therefore, the process (each process of S5134-S5137) for setting the production mode of the river breakthrough effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5139.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5131, when it is determined that the initial hit flag 223jb is off (S5131: No), whether the value of the variation counter 223ja is any one of 9, 24, and 39 It is determined whether or not (i.e., whether it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the consecutive villas are generated) (S5133). In the process of S5133, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223ja is any one of 9, 24, and 39 (that is, the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive resorts) (S5133: Yes), the process (each process of S5134-S5137) for setting the production mode of the river breakthrough effect is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5133, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223ja is not any of 9, 24, and 39 (that is, it is not the execution timing of the river break-through effect after the occurrence of consecutive villas) (S5133: No), the process (each process of S5134-S5137) for setting the production mode of the river breakthrough effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5139.

  In the process for setting the production mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining short number of times is 1 (S5134), and the remaining short number of times is not 1 (2 (S5134: No), it is determined to execute the river breakthrough effect in the mode indicating the continuation of the chance zone (see FIG. 298 (b)) (S5135), and the process proceeds to S5139. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5134 that the remaining short time is 1 (S5134: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change state (S5136). In the process of S5136, if it is determined that the gaming state is a probable change state (S5136: Yes), it means that the game state shifts to the latent state at the start of the next fluctuation, so that the RUSH rush is reported. The execution of the effect (see FIG. 299 (a)) is determined (S5137), and the process proceeds to S5139. On the other hand, in the process of S5136, when it is determined that the state is not the probability variation state (that is, the state is the short time state) (S5136: No), it means that the state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the next variation. The execution of the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (b)) in a mode that fails to break through is determined (S5138), and the process proceeds to S5139. In the process of S5139, based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern command, the first special symbol display fluctuation pattern command is set (S5139), and this process ends.

  By executing the time-shortage effect setting process (see FIG. 315), while the time-short state of the normal symbol is set, the breakthrough effect is executed every time the number of fluctuations that the time-short state may end is reached. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the details of the above-described variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (S5126) will be described. The variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (S5126) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation display setting process for special figure 2 (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, and the special figure in the first embodiment. Similar to the variation display setting process for 2 (see FIG. 71), this is a process for setting the variation display mode of the second special symbol.

  Of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, each of the processes of S5301 to S5303 and S5309 is the special figure 2 variable display setting process (see FIG. 71), the same processes as those in S5301 to S5303 and S5309 are executed. Also, in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is a latent state (S5303: Yes), then Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a small hit (S5311). In the process of S5311, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S5311: Yes), the small hit effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 308 (a)) is read (S5312), and the winning information storage area 223b is read. An effect mode corresponding to the data corresponding to the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h is specified (S5313). Next, a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol indicating the specified effect mode is set (S5314), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5311, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S5311: No), the process proceeds to S5309.

  By executing this special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316), every time the second special symbol is lottery, it is being executed according to the effect mode of the variable display effect indicating the small hit. Alternatively, the lottery result of the first special symbol being held can be suggested. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the latent probability state when the number of time reductions has elapsed in the probability variation state. In the latent state, the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened with a high probability of winning a small hit (the opportunity to win a prize ball is often obtained) and compared with a big win Since the same state is repeated (looped) at a high rate, a gaming state that is very advantageous for the player is formed. For this reason, in the probability variation state, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that plays a game with the goal of shifting to the latent probability state after a lapse of the number of times of normal symbols, so that the player's game Interest can be improved. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is won in the probability variation state or the short time state, rather than the probability variation state (probability variation state shifted after the first hit) based on winning in the normal state. The probability variation state that has been shifted based on the probability variation state that has been transitioned after the occurrence of consecutive resorts is configured such that the average value of the set number of time reductions is reduced. In other words, it is easier to establish the condition for shifting to the latent state in the probability variation state set at the time of occurrence of the extended game than the probability variation state set at the time of first hit (continuous deviation over the set number of times) It is easy to make it happen.) Therefore, since it is easier to pass the number of time reductions at the time of the consecutive house occurrence, even if you win a big hit before passing the time reduction number in the probability variation state, even if you loop the probability variation state, Since there is a high possibility that the short time count (low time short count) that is easy to shift to the latent state is set, the disappointment of the player can be eased. Therefore, it can suppress that the motivation with respect to a player's game falls.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, when the game state after the jackpot is set to the probabilistic state or the short-time state, the river breakthrough effect is produced every time the normal symbol time-short state is likely to end. Whether the normal symbol's time-short state continues, the normal symbol's time-short state is terminated and then the latent state is entered, or the normal symbol's time-short state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Are periodically notified (every 25 times or every 15 times for special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (ordinary symbol time-short state) is set, let the player play the game in one fun that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed Can do. In addition, at least until the next river break-through effect, it is possible to realize a novel game that desires to be removed continuously by drawing a special symbol. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration that may shift to the normal state due to failure in the river breakthrough production, the continuation of the short-time state was informed in the river breakthrough production (the state changed to the latent state after breaking through the river) Even if it was not), it can be made to think that it is better than notifying the normal state. That is, even if the latent state is not notified, it can be suppressed that the player is discouraged.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, it is output when a winning aspect with respect to the first special winning opening 65a is detected during execution of the small special hit variation of the second special symbol and the small hit game. Depending on the type of winning sound, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the other special symbol variation (variable display of the first special symbol) is a big hit. Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result each time a special symbol lottery result is executed is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of the symbol variation display effect, various interest effects that suggest the lottery result of the special symbol are executed, thereby improving the interest of the player. However, in a gaming machine having a specification capable of executing a plurality of variable displays at the same time, while paying attention to the effect aspect associated with one of the variable displays, the problem is that the effect aspect of the other variable display effect is missed. There was a point. In particular, in a type of gaming machine that displays one variation display in a form that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect form in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to visually recognize), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the jackpot is started in a state where the player is not paying attention. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol that is mainly executed in the latent state is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol that is difficult to execute. If the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in combination with the display of the first special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is selected by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variable display). The structure suggests the result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small special effect of the second special symbol is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being simultaneously executed is a big hit. It is not limited. For example, it is good also as a structure which suggests the lottery result of a 1st special symbol by the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation performed during the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol. In addition, for example, a configuration that suggests (notifies) the expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit by the display mode of the normal symbol variation display in the second symbol display device. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to visually recognize only by confirming the variable display effect on the side that is easy to visually recognize. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the probability variation number is set to 100, but the probability variation number is not limited to 100, and may be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of times of the probability change, the degree of advantage for the player is lowered, so that gambling can be suppressed. On the other hand, by increasing the number of times of probability change, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the most advantageous latent state, so that the game will be played with a strong expectation of shifting to the latent state Can do. Similarly, the number of time reductions can be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of time reductions, it becomes easier for the player to shift from the probability-changing state to the latent state, which can be advantageous for the player, and by increasing the number of time reductions, it is difficult to move to the latent state. It is possible to suppress the euphoria.

  In the eleventh embodiment, it is easy to shift to the latent state depending on whether it is a first win (a jackpot won in the normal state) or after a consecutive home (a jackpot won in a state other than the normal state). Although it has been configured such that the ease of establishment of the end condition of the short time state of the normal symbol is different, it is not limited to this. For example, as the number of consecutive resorts increases, the number of time reductions set after the end of jackpot may be reduced. This allows the player to feel as if the player is approaching the latent state every time a consecutive game occurs even if the player cannot move to the latent state. Interest can be improved. In the eleventh embodiment, when the big win is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the “big hit A11” is determined at a rate of 5%, and an advantageous latent state is set after the big hit ends. In this sense, it can be said that even in the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above, the possibility of shifting to the latent state increases as the number of consecutive resorts increases.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol is drawn in a lottery state in the latent state, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the fact that the first special symbol is in a big hit variation is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the expectation degree which is the jackpot type which transfers to a latent state may be shown. Thereby, since the expectation with respect to an advantageous latent state continuing can be improved, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports (improves) the expectation degree that the big hit is not included in the hold | maintenance at the time of shifting to a latent state during the change production of a 2nd special symbol. That is, even if the game is shifted to the latent state, if the first special symbol is a lottery, the latent state is terminated relatively early and the player may be disappointed. Therefore, the player may feel that he does not want to win the jackpot of the first special symbol in the latent state. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that suggests that the jackpot is not included in the hold, the player can understand that the latent state will not be terminated at least by the jackpot of the first special symbol. It can be expected that the latent state will continue for a long time. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Furthermore, the expectation level (pinch degree) for the pinch that is normally won in the big win in the first special symbol lottery in the latent state is changed during the changing effect of the second special symbol (and during the small hit game). It is good also as a structure to alert | report (improve). With such a configuration, when an effect with a high pinch degree is executed, the game can be performed with a sense of tension, so that the game can be sharpened. In this case, when a specific type of small hit game is started in the lottery of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be able to forcibly stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. That is, it may be configured such that the latent state can be extended by converting the normal jackpot into being out of place. By configuring in this way, a specific type of small hit game is executed after an effect with a high degree of pinch is executed, so that the player can have a great sense of relief. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 339. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the latent state is configured as an advantageous game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed and the small hit game is frequently executed. In addition, the transition to the latent state is assumed to be when the normal symbol's time-short state ends in the probability-changing state. It was configured to make it possible to realize innovative gameplay.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is configured as an advantageous game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed, and the latent probability state Was configured as the most unfavorable gaming state. And it was set as the structure which transfers to the most advantageous normal state by ending the frequency | count of probability change in a latent state. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the most disadvantageous gaming state can be directly shifted to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. By configuring in this way, in the most unfavorable latent state, it is possible to play a game with one goal being to elapse the number of times of probability variation.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is partially changed, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the gaming state in the twelfth embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal mode is configured as the most advantageous gaming state, and the latent state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Further, the short-time state and the probability change state are configured as gaming states having a higher degree of advantage than the latent probability state. Since a special specification that the normal state is advantageous is adopted, the advantageous normal state is referred to as “long-run mode” in the description of the transition. The disadvantageous latent state is referred to as “normal mode”, and the relatively favorable probability change state and the short time state are referred to as “chance mode A” and “chance mode B”, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the board surface structure of the game board 13 in this 12th Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 317, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the board surface configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 are deleted, and a central first entrance 64c is provided instead. In addition, a small attacker 4650 is provided below the central first entrance 64c that is opened when the first special symbol is a lottery. Since the small attacker 4650 is surrounded by the nails and the central first winning opening 64c on the left and right and above, it is extremely difficult to enter a game ball during the small hit release period of the first special symbol. . In the twelfth embodiment, the small bonus of the first special symbol is provided because the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive resort mode, and the second special symbol is long. This is because it is mounted for the purpose of forcibly ending the long fluctuation in the case where the change has been made, and not for winning a prize ball. In other words, even if the second special symbol fluctuates for a long time, if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (475/480). The second special symbol that has been fluctuating long can be forcibly stopped with a stop symbol that is out of place. Therefore, even if the player enters the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode and the long variation of the second special symbol is started, it is easily long by returning to the left-handed game. Variations can be terminated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the game board 13, a second entrance (through gate) 67 and a right first entrance provided downstream of the through gate 67 are provided. The right electric combination 64ra capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the mouth 64r, the right first entrance 64r, and the upper surface of the right electric combination 64ra while the right electric combination 64ra is closed And a second entrance 640 provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through can be entered. As shown in FIG. 317, the flow path of the game ball is such that only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second entrance 640 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed. Is set. In other words, even if the right hand is made in the short time state of the normal symbol where the right electric accessory 64ra is likely to be opened, almost all game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first entrance 64r. Since the ball is formed, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640. By configuring in this way, the game can be progressed by right-handed game even in the probability variation state (chance mode A) and the short time state (chance mode B).

  As shown in FIG. 317, in the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is deleted, and only the first variable winning device 65 is provided. As a result, the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened in both cases of a big win and a small win of the second special symbol. That is, the chance mode A and the chance mode B in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the most advantageous resort mode in which a small hit frequently occurs by entering a game ball into the second entrance 640, and The big hit state is configured to be able to proceed by right-handing all. In other words, all the states other than the gaming state (latent probability state) that is the most disadvantageous for the player (a state advantageous for the player in some aspect) can be progressed by right-handed. This makes it possible to separate the right-handed game into an advantageous state and the left-handed game into an unfavorable state, so that it is possible to realize a game that is easier for the player to understand.

  It should be noted that the normal state of the normal symbol is set during the jackpot game, so when a right-handed game is attempted to win a prize ball by entering the first specific winning port 65a during the jackpot, Four or more game balls enter the second entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit. Thereby, after the jackpot game is over, the variation of the second special symbol is almost started. However, as described above, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the variation display of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated with a high probability, so that after the jackpot ends Even if a game state other than the normal state is set as the game state, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the game can proceed without any problem.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 318 to FIG. 320, characteristic various interesting effects in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 318, an example of an effect mode in the normal mode (latent state) will be described. As described above, the twelfth embodiment is configured to shift directly to the most advantageous extended resort mode (normal state) by passing the number of times of probability change in the latent state. For this reason, in the normal mode, an effect that aims at the latent state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (a), an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs up a rocky mountain. In the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, the characters “Aim for the top!” Are displayed, and in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811, the normal mode is displayed. The display content suggesting the remaining number of times of change until is finished (the number of times of certain change elapses) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 318 (a), the case where the characters “remaining 50 m” are displayed in the display area HR2 is illustrated. The remaining meter display up to the top is displayed by subtracting 1 meter each time the variable display is executed once. Therefore, the remaining meter (distance) up to the top is changed to the villa mode for the player. It can be easily understood that it is the remaining number of fluctuations until the transition.

  FIG. 318 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the number of times of probability change has elapsed in the normal mode (it has been continuously removed over 100 times of the probability change in the latent probability state). As shown in FIG. 318 (b), when the number of probability changes has elapsed and the mode has shifted to the consecutive resort mode, an effect that the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and “top” "Arrive!" Is displayed. In addition, the characters “remaining 0 m” are displayed in the display area HR2. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the mode has shifted to the extended resort mode.

  FIG. 319 (a) shows a state (preparation) from the transition to the consecutive-villa mode until the winning ball can be actually acquired (until the winning of the second special symbol lottery). It is the figure which showed the display mode in a state. As shown in FIG. 319 (a), in the preparation state, the characters “right-handed” are displayed in the small area Dm3, and “right-handed RUSH starts!” For the display area HR1. Is displayed. Further, the characters “RUSH being prepared” are displayed in the sub display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the player enters the RUSH state in which a winning ball can be obtained by making a right strike.

  As shown in FIG. 319 (a), when the mode is shifted to the extended resort mode, the small area Dm1 is switched to a display area for performing the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the small area Dm1 is configured as a display area for displaying a variable display of special symbols on the side that is mainly executed in each gaming state. Further, the small area Dm2 for displaying the variable display of the other special symbol is a display area relatively smaller than the small area Dm1 on the lower right side of the sub display area Ds (in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize). )Is displayed. Thereby, since only the small area Dm1 is confirmed regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to visually recognize the variation display of the special symbol on the side to be executed, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, the small area Dm1 can be focused by displaying the variable display on the side different from the side to be executed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is possible to make the player easily understand which variation display is mainly performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide gameability that is easy for a player to understand.

  FIG. 319 (b) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a game ball enters the second entrance 640 in the preparation state and wins a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. FIG. As shown in FIG. 319 (b), when the player enters the second entrance 640 in the preparatory state and wins a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, “RUSH starts! "And the characters" RUSH rush! "Are displayed in the sub display area Ds. Further, the treasure chest 812 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that a state (RUSH) in which a prize ball can be acquired in the extended game mode has started. Therefore, it is possible to realize gameability that is easy for a player to understand.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is halved. In other words, even if a game ball enters the second entrance 640, there is a relatively high possibility that the game ball will come off (it will come off with a probability of about 1/2). The twelfth embodiment is configured such that the preparation state is continued as it is when the second special symbol is lost in the preparation state. In other words, the configuration is such that the RUSH start is not notified until the player wins a small hit and is in a state where a winning ball can be actually acquired. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with a state in which a prize ball cannot be acquired even though the start of RUSH is notified.

  Further, in the twelfth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, when a lottery of one special symbol is won, the lottery of the other special symbol executed during execution of the big hit variation is forcibly removed. ing. For this reason, when the transition from the normal mode to the extended game mode occurs, there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol started simultaneously with the start of the extended game mode is a big hit During the big hit variation, the lottery of the second special symbol is surely missed. In other words, if the big hit change of the first special symbol is started at the time of transition to the ready state, even if the right-handed game is continued and the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, it is missed. As a result of the continuous (no win for the big hit), the ready state will continue for a long time (until the big hit fluctuation ends). As described above, since the small hit probability of the second special symbol is ½, the expectation that the big special variation of the first special symbol is being executed can be improved as the discontinuation continues in the preparation state. More specifically, for example, the possibility that the dislocation continues four times or more in the preparation state is about 6%, and the possibility that the discontinuation continues six times or more is about 1%. Therefore, even if the second special symbol lottery is lost in the preparation state, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the jackpot, so the player's interest in the preparation state can be further improved. .

  In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set to ½, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit probability may be arbitrarily determined. . For example, when the lottery probability is increased and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured so as to be almost (for example, with a probability of 59/60). Also good. In such a configuration, if a deviation occurs even once in the preparation state, it is possible to improve the expectation that the fluctuating first special symbol is a big hit, so that the second special symbol is disengaged in the preparation state. In this case, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, the higher the probability of hitting, the shorter the ready state will be shorter (the average number of lotteries from winning the win-win mode to winning the win) will be reduced. It is possible to shorten the period until the possession ball is secured by the prize ball. That is, since it becomes possible to give a prize ball to the player earlier, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the small hit probability is lowered and the player is likely to come off during the preparation state. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the disengagement to continue, so that a sense of expectation that the first special symbol is undergoing jackpot fluctuation can be more frequently held. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320, a description will be given of the change over time in the production mode before and after the preparation state (before and after the start of RUSH) in the twelfth embodiment. First, referring to FIG. 320 (a), the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the extended resort mode is removed, and the second special symbol is drawn twice in the preparation mode. A description will be given of the change over time in the production mode in the case where the game is continuously out of play and the third special symbol lottery is won.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (a), in the twelfth embodiment, when the 99th special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (latent probability state in which the number of times of 100 variation is set), the above-described case is performed. An effect of reaching the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 318 (b)) is executed. Then, the change display of the special symbol for the 100th time is started, and the display mode is changed to the display mode (see FIG. 319 (a)) indicating the preparation state, so that a right-handed game is notified. When a game ball is entered into the second entrance 640 by right-handing during this preparation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the small area Dm1. As shown in FIG. 320, during the second variation of the second special symbol, the display indicating the ready state is continued, and the third variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol is started. The display mode (see FIG. 319 (b)) indicating the entry of the RUSH is set. Also, at the start of the small hit game, the change of the first special symbol that has been changing is forcibly stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the RUSH display is continued until the extended villa mode ends. In the twelfth embodiment, the extended game mode is set to the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). continue. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the hope of not winning a jackpot over as many draws as possible.

  Next, referring to FIG. 320 (b), the time-lapse of the effect mode when the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the extended game mode is a lottery result corresponding to “big hit D12”. The change will be described. Here, “big hit D12” is a big hit of a type in which a short time state is set in which the number of time reductions is two after the end of the big hit. In other words, after the jackpot ends, it is a type of jackpot that makes a transition to the villa mode by losing consecutively in a maximum of two special symbol lotteries, and it is relatively easy to transition to the villa mode (games) It is a jackpot of type. In the twelfth embodiment, only when the variable display corresponding to “big hit D12” is started at the time of shifting to the extended villa mode, the shift to the extended villa mode is notified, and the other first special When the jackpot of the symbol (relatively difficult to shift to the consecutive house mode) is held, the jackpot winning is notified without notifying the transition to the consecutive house mode. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed by ending the resort mode without winning a small hit even though the player has shifted to the consecutive resort mode.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (b), when the transition to the consecutive house mode is started and the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to “big hit D12” is started, the second started during execution of the big hit variation. All of the special symbol fluctuation displays are off. Therefore, while the big hit variation is being executed, the discontinuation will continue, so the expectation that the big hit variation of the first special symbol will be executed for the player as the discontinuation continues is improved. Can be made. In the twelfth embodiment, when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the consecutive house mode, a 10-second fluctuation time is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, a variation time of 1 second is set with high probability. Therefore, if you consider the period from the transition to Renso mode until the game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the engine that displays the lottery result of the second special symbol, The change display of the second special symbol about 5 times can be executed during (10 seconds). The chances of losing five consecutive times in the lottery of the second special symbol in a state where the first special symbol jackpot is not fluctuating is low (about 3%). The player's confidence that it is changing can be strengthened. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the ready state.

<Electrical Configuration in the 12th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 321 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is a variation pattern scenario compared to the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 14) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that a table 202ka is added. The ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is also different in that a part of the first random number table 202a, a part of the small random number table 202b, and a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f are changed. doing.

  The variation pattern scenario table 202ka is a data table that is referred to in order to select a table for determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 202f. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to, one variation pattern table is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table. Is done. Details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka will be described later with reference to FIG. 322 (b).

  First, the configuration of the first random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 321 (b). FIG. 321 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321 (b), in the first hit random number table 202a according to the twelfth embodiment, “0-3” as random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol. Four random values (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 321 (b), five random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 4” are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

  Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being a big hit is 1/120 (4/480), while the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state of the special symbol. When executed, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/96 (5/480). Note that the change in the jackpot probability in the twelfth embodiment is intended to suppress that the extended game mode becomes excessively advantageous and that the normal mode becomes excessively disadvantageous for the player. . That is, when the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is low (for example, in the case of 1/240 which is the same as in the eleventh embodiment), once the transition to the extended mode is made, the shifted extended mode is difficult to end. It becomes excessively advantageous for the player and may be disadvantageous to the hole. In addition, when the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is high (for example, in the case of 1/60, which is the same as that in the eleventh embodiment), the probability variation number is passed in the normal mode (over 100 special symbol lotteries). The possibility of shifting to the consecutive resort mode becomes extremely low. Thereby, there exists a possibility that it may become disadvantageous excessively for a player, and there exists a possibility that the game in the pachinko machine 10 may be avoided. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is increased to suppress excessive advantage when the mode is shifted to the extended resort mode, and the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of hitting a jackpot is reduced to prevent the normal mode from being disadvantaged excessively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 322 (a), details of the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 322 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment. In the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322 (a), the random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is “5 to 479”. 475 random values are defined. On the other hand, 240 random numbers of “240 to 479” are defined as random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery.

  In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, a winning combination is made with a high probability (a probability of 475/480). As described above, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive resort mode and the second special symbol has long fluctuation, the long fluctuation is This is forcibly terminating. In other words, when the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, so that it is almost a small hit and stops when the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is off at the start of the small hit Can be displayed. Therefore, even if the player enters the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode and the long variation of the second special symbol is started, it is easily long by returning to the left-handed game. Variations can be terminated.

  In addition, by setting the small hit probability of the second special symbol to ½ (240/480), the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation state is configured to be out at a relatively high rate. As a result, when the disengagement continues in the preparation state, whether or not the second special symbol was lost in lottery, or the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the small hit is forcibly set to disengage It can be difficult to understand what is being done. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game where the jackpot expectation degree of the special symbol on the other side (that is, the first special symbol) increases as the second special symbol continues to deviate in the preparation state. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 322 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322 (b), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka shows the correspondence between the lottery number of special symbols after the jackpot is completed (or after the RAM is cleared) and the variation pattern to be selected for each previous jackpot type. Is stipulated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), in the case where the previous jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, the probability variation / latency is within the range of 1 to 99 special symbol lottery times. A reliable start time table 202f11 is defined in association with each other. Details of the probability change / latency start table 202f11 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 is defined in association with a range in which the number of lotteries is 100 or more. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326 (b). However, when the fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the RUSH table 202f14, a short fluctuation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is used as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. Second) variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed continuously in a short period only by playing the right-handed game, and an advantageous state is formed in which a small winning is won with a high probability (1/2).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the short-start table 202f12 for a special symbol lottery of 1 to 99 times. Are defined in association with each other. Details of the short start table 202f12 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is defined in association with a range in which the number of lotteries is 100 or more.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), in a state in which no jackpot has been won (so-called state after the RAM is cleared), the number of lotteries for the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 99 times. The normal start time table 202f13 is defined in association therewith. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326 (a), the normal start table 202f13 has a relatively long variation time regardless of the lottery result when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed ( A table in which long fluctuations (for 60 seconds) are set. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by performing the RAM clear and is set to the normal state, it can be prevented from being in the same state as the extended game mode advantageous to the player. In other words, similarly to a general gaming machine, it can be set in a disadvantageous state for the player when initialization is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the player from being in a state advantageous to the player immediately after initialization and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is defined in association with a range in which the number of lotteries for special symbols is 100 or more. For this reason, even after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, except for the jackpot probability, the operation is the same as in the normal mode (the operation that shifts to the extended play mode by continuously losing by 100 special symbol lotteries). be able to. Therefore, the state after initialization becomes excessively unfavorable for the player, and the player can be prevented from refraining from playing the game with the pachinko machine 10, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

  In the fourteenth embodiment, whether or not the state is after the RAM is cleared (initialized) is, for example, whether or not the RAM 203 has been won at least once after the RAM is cleared. It is configured to be discriminable by providing a flag indicating whether or not (initial winning flag). If the first-time winning flag is off, it is determined that the normal state after the initialization, and if the number of fluctuations is in the range of 1 to 99, the normal start table 202f13 is referred to and is 100 times. In the above range, a variation pattern scenario with reference to the RUSH table 202f14 is set. On the other hand, by winning the jackpot, the first-time winning flag is set to ON, and thereafter, control is performed so as to set a scenario in which the normal start table 202f13 is not referred to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 323, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 323, in the twelfth embodiment, six jackpot types from “Big Jack A12” to “Big Jack F12” are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two jackpot types, “jackpot G12” and “jackpot I12”, are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 323, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, whereas the jackpot type is “big hit A12”. It is defined in association. This “big jackpot A12” is a jackpot (8 rounds probable jackpot) of the type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 8 and the chance mode A (probability varying state) is set after the jackpot is finished. The chance mode A continues after the jackpot is over until a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times at the maximum, and after 100 passes, the mode shifts to the consecutive resort mode. Therefore, “big hit A12” is a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the big hit.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 323, “big hit B12” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “5 to 49” as the big hit type. This “big hit B12” has two rounds of jackpot rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the jackpot of the type set to normal mode (latent probability state) or chance mode A (probability variable state) (two rounds probable big hit) It is. More specifically, when the “big hit B12” is won in the normal mode or the consecutive house mode, the normal mode is set to be disadvantageous after the end of the big hit, while the “big hit B12” is set in the short-time state or the probable change state. If this happens, the chance mode A is set to be relatively advantageous after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, “big hit B12” is relatively advantageous when winning in chance mode A or chance mode B, but relatively disadvantageous in normal mode or extended mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 323, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 69”, “hit C12” is defined in association with the big hit type. This “big jackpot C12” is a big jackpot (two rounds probable big hit) of the type set in the normal mode (latent probability state) that is the most disadvantageous after the jackpot ends, with the number of rounds of the big jackpot being two rounds. That is, the “big hit C12” is a big hit type that is most disadvantageous in terms of gaming state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 “70”, “hit D12” is defined in association with the big hit type. The “big hit D12” is a big hit (8 round normal big hit) of the type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode B (time-short state) is set after the end of the big hit. The chance mode B ends when the special symbol lottery is executed twice after the jackpot ends (the number of time reductions is set to 2). In other words, since it shifts to the consecutive resort mode by losing the special symbol lottery twice consecutively at the maximum, it becomes an advantageous jackpot type that is extremely easy to shift to the consecutive resort mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 “71 to 74”, “big hit E12” is defined in association with the big hit type. This “big jackpot E12” is a big jackpot (two round normal jackpot) of the type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is two and the chance mode B (short-time state) is set after the jackpot ends. The chance mode B is set to 50 times when “big hit E12” is won in the normal mode or the latent mode, while 25 times is set when “big hit E12” is won in the short-time state or the probable change state. Is done. The chance mode B has a lower jackpot probability than the chance mode A, and further shifts to the consecutive-village mode by passing the number of time reductions, which is advantageous for the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 “75 to 99”, “big hit F12” is defined in association with the big hit type. This “big jackpot F12” is a big jackpot (two round normal jackpot) of the type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is two and the chance mode B (short-time state) is set after the jackpot is finished. Note that the number of time reductions in the chance mode B set after the end of the “big hit F12” is set to be greater than the number of time reductions in the chance mode B set after the end of the “big hit E12”. Therefore, the chance mode B after the end of the “big hit F12” is in a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to pass the number of time reductions.

  On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of “0 to 69” as the jackpot type “Big hit G12”. ing. This “big hit G12” is a big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) of the type set in the chance mode A (probability change state) of 100 rounds after the big hit, and the number of big hits is 12 rounds. Further, “big hit I12” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “70 to 99” as the big hit type. This “big jackpot I12” is a big jackpot (8 round normal jackpot) of the type set in the chance mode B (short-time state) after the jackpot is finished with eight rounds. As described above, it is extremely easy to pass two short-time times, but it is relatively difficult to continuously miss 100 probability variation states. However, it can be said that it is a jackpot of a type (that is, an advantageous type) that makes it easier to shift to the villa mode than “Big Jack G12”.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, at least two time reduction times are set without providing a normal big hit with a time reduction number of 0 (a big hit that shifts directly to the villa mode after the end of the big hit). . By configuring so that the gaming state after the jackpot is not directly set to the normal state, it is possible to suppress the same state as when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. That is, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes long, and it becomes an unfavorable state in which the game must proceed by left-handed (a state in which the variation pattern is determined by referring to a normal start time table 202d13 described later). The variation pattern can be determined with reference to the time-start table 202f12. That is, it can be configured to immediately shift to the RUSH state when the number of time reductions has elapsed. Therefore, the jackpot type that is substantially equivalent to shifting directly to the villa mode (suppressing the number of time reductions is two jackpots) while suppressing the excessive initial advantage of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. Type) can be provided. During the jackpot game, since the normal symbol is in a low-probability state, the right electric accessory 64ra is difficult to be released. As a result, the game ball frequently enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game. Enter the ball. That is, simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, when 2 is set as the number of time reductions, the first time reduction is digested simultaneously with the end of the big hit. By making a right-handed game ball into the right first entrance 64r during a long fluctuation of the second special symbol, a small hit is made with a high probability, and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is not exceeded. It can be forcibly terminated. Therefore, when the number of time reductions is set twice, it is possible to shift to the extended play mode only by substantially generating one start prize after the end of the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 324, details of the above-described probability variation / latent probability start table 202f11 will be described. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation / latent probability start table 202f11. As shown in FIG. 324, the probability variation / latent probability start table 202f11 defines, for each special symbol type, the correspondence between the gaming state at the time of executing the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern that can be selected. Has been. More specifically, a longer variation time is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol in the latent probability state (normal mode) than in the probability variation state (chance mode A). Thereby, in the normal mode in which the left-handed game is performed, the variation display mode can be diversified, while in the chance mode A, the game efficiency can be increased.

  On the other hand, with regard to the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type and the gaming state. As a result, when the second special symbol is varied in a gaming state other than the continuous play mode, the game efficiency is remarkably increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive resort mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the details of the above-mentioned short-time start table 202f12 will be described. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the short-time start table 202f12. As shown in FIG. 325, when the time-short start table 202f12 is referred to select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, it is relatively short (1 to 20 seconds) in the time-short state (chance mode B). The variation time is selected. Thereby, the game efficiency in chance mode B can be improved. On the other hand, in a normal state (that is, after a short time has elapsed), a very short (0.1 second or 10 second) variation time is selected. As a result, the time after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state, and after the number of time reductions has passed (after the transition to the villa mode), when the holding ball of the first special symbol remains, the holding ball in a very short time Is digested.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, regardless of the variation type, a long variation of 60 seconds is set while the short-time state continues, and a short variation time of 10 seconds or 1 second is set after the short-time state has elapsed. Is set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a gaming ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a gaming state other than the consecutive resort mode. In addition, after shifting to the consecutive resort mode, it is possible to form a very advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol and the small hit game are repeated in a short time. Therefore, the game can be performed with the goal of elapse of the number of time reductions, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 326 (a), details of the above-mentioned normal start table 202f13 will be described. FIG. 326 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the short-time start table 202f13. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the normal start time table 202f13 is referred to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a relatively long variation time (7 seconds to 90 seconds) is selected. . Therefore, the variation display mode can be diversified in the state in which the left-handed game should be performed in the same manner as the latent state.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation for 60 seconds is set regardless of the fluctuation type. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a gaming ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a gaming state other than the consecutive resort mode.

  Next, the details of the above-described RUSH table 202f14 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the RUSH table 202f14. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when the RUSH table 202f13 is referred to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a very short variation time (0.1 second or 10 seconds) is selected. . Also, when the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected. Thereby, the advantageous degree after transfering to the RUSH state (continuous villa mode) can be raised more.

  Next, referring to FIG. 327, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 327 is a diagram illustrating a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 327, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is roughly divided into four modes (game state). That is, the normal mode (latent probability state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, the chance mode A (probability changing state) shown in the center left side of FIG. 327, and the chance mode B (short time state) shown in the center right side of FIG. And the extended mode (normal state) shown in the lower part of FIG.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates the probability state of special symbols and the normal state of normal symbols, and it is highly probable that the jackpot will be high, and it is difficult to release the right electric accessory 64ra (the game ball is in the right position). (It is difficult to enter the 1 entrance 64r), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the chance mode A indicates that the special symbol is in a probabilistic state and the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and has a high jackpot probability. Since game balls frequently enter the mouth 64r (the electrically-powered article 64ra is frequently released), the game state is relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, chance mode B indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, by performing a right-handed game, as in the probability change state, Since game balls frequently enter the 1 entrance 640r, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode is formed. Furthermore, as described above, the consecutive-villa mode indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation time set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is significantly shorter than the other three gaming states (from 60 seconds to 1 second), the right-handed game can be used to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery. And as described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, since the first specific winning opening 64a is opened with a high probability (1/2), the first specific winning opening 64a is opened. The game balls frequently enter the two entrance holes 640 and the first specific prize opening 64a, thereby forming a very advantageous gaming state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained without going through a big win. Therefore, the ream mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another state when a big hit occurs and when a specified number of certain variations has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot A12, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance after the jackpot ends Transition to mode A. In addition, when one of the big hits D12 to F12, which is a big hit of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as a big hit type, is selected (determined), the chance mode B is relatively advantageous after the big hit ends. And migrate. Furthermore, after the normal mode is set, the specified number of times of probability change (100 times) is passed, so that the mode is shifted directly to the most advantageous extended resort mode (without a big hit). On the other hand, when the jackpot B12 or jackpot C12 is determined as a jackpot type of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 65% as the jackpot type, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the specified probability variation number than to win a big hit, so that the player can expect that the deviation continues for the specified number of times. . Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transition from chance mode A (probability change state) to another state when a big hit occurs or when the specified number of times of probability change has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and any of jackpots D12 to F12 determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type is selected (determined) Shifts to a relatively advantageous chance mode B after the jackpot. Furthermore, after the chance mode A is set, the specified lottery number (100 times) is passed, so that the mode is directly shifted to the most advantageous consecutive resort mode (the number of times of probability change and the number of time reductions ends at the same timing. ). In addition, when the jackpot C12 is determined as a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot A12 or jackpot B12, which is determined as a jackpot type of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the mode is again switched to the chance mode A after the jackpot ends. (The chance mode A is looped.) Therefore, in the chance mode A, even if it becomes a big hit, it becomes difficult to shift to the disadvantaged normal mode (the ratio at which the chance mode A is set becomes high). Even if the player is elected (cannot be shifted to the consecutive resort mode), the player can be prevented from being discouraged. In the chance mode A, as in the normal mode, the jackpot probability is relatively high (1/96), so it is relatively difficult to pass the probability variation number. Therefore, in the chance mode A, it is possible to realize a gameability that expects both winning of the jackpot and continuous losing, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transition from chance mode B (probability change state) to another state in the case of a big hit and when a specified number of short time passes. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and either jackpot A12 or B12 determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type is selected (determined) Is shifted to a relatively advantageous chance mode A after the jackpot. Furthermore, after the chance mode A is set, the system shifts directly to the most advantageous extended resort mode by passing the prescribed number of times (any one of 2, 25, 50, and 100). . In addition, when the jackpot C12 is determined as a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, an unfavorable normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot A12 or jackpot B12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), then again to the chance mode B after jackpot winning (Shifts to chance mode B). Therefore, in the chance mode B, as in the chance mode A, even if it becomes a big hit, it becomes difficult to shift to the disadvantaged normal mode (the ratio that the chance mode A is set increases), so the number of time reductions has elapsed. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged even if the player wins the jackpot before the game (cannot be shifted to the consecutive resort mode). Further, in the chance mode B, the probability of jackpot is relatively low and the number of time reductions may be set to 50 times or less. Therefore, compared to the chance mode A and the normal mode, the jackpot probability is not directly set. There is a high possibility of shifting to the Renso mode. Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the chance mode B, the player can feel that there is a high possibility that the mode is shifted to the extended game mode. Therefore, the player's expectation for the extended mode can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transition from the extended mode (normal state) to another state only when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot G12, which is a jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the comparison is made after the jackpot ends. Shift to chance mode A, which is advantageous. In addition, when the jackpot I12 is determined as a jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, a chance mode that makes it easier to shift to the villa mode than the chance mode A after the jackpot ends Transition to B. When the jackpot I12 is reached, the number of time reductions is set to two. Therefore, when the chance mode B is set after the jackpot I12, the number of time reductions is almost elapsed, and the mode is again set to the extended mode. Can be migrated. Therefore, the jackpot I12 can be said to be a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the jackpot G12. As described above, in the Renso mode, the variation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter than the other modes, and the second special symbol lottery has a high probability (1/2 probability) and is small. Because it is a win, just by playing a right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the second entrance 640, and during the small hit period (during the opening period of the first specific winning entrance 65a) It is possible to frequently generate a winning to the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to continue to win a prize ball based on the entrance to the first specific prize winning opening 65a until the big win is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol (that is, a large amount of prizes can be obtained only by continuing the right handing). It creates a very advantageous gaming state that allows you to get a ball. As described above, the normal state that is shifted based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the long variation (60 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol. Similarly, a disadvantageous gaming state is formed. Thereby, it can suppress that it becomes advantageous to a player excessively by initializing the pachinko machine 10, and giving an unexpected disadvantage with respect to a hall | hole.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the four modes (game state) of the normal mode, the chance mode A, the chance mode B, and the extended play mode are used. Thereby, since game nature changes whenever a mode is changed, it can attach to a game sharply. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 307 (b)) in that the winning flag 223ka, the ready state flag 223kb, and the RUSH The difference is that a middle flag 223kc is added.

  The winning flag 223ka is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won at least once since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. If this winning flag 223ka is on, it means that you have won a jackpot more than once after power-up, and if it is off, you have not won a jackpot once after power-up. Means. When the game state is the normal state at the start of the change, the state of the winning flag 223ka is referred to. It is determined that the fluctuation is in an unfavorable state) (when the number of special drawing lotteries is less than 100), while the effect for the normal mode is executed, if it is on, the effect for the extended mode Execute.

  The ready state flag 223 kb is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the ready state. If it is on, it means that it is in the ready state (see FIG. 319 (a)), and if it is off, it is in the ready state. Means no. In the normal state, the preparation state flag 223 kb is referred to determine whether or not the preparation state has already been ended (the display is switched to RUSH), and the preparation state effect is executed. It is determined whether to execute the effect in the RUSH state.

  The RUSH-in-progress flag 223kc is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the extended villa mode. If it is on, it means that it is in the continuous villa mode, and if it is off, it means that it is not in the continuous villa mode. In the normal state, the preparation state flag 223kb and the RUSH flag 223kc are referred to, and it is determined which state of the effect mode is set.

  Whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is being executed in an effect mode effect (top arrival effect) in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain, which is executed with the remaining number of times of probability change or the number of time reductions remaining. It is a flag indicating that. If the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on, it means that the peak arrival effect (see FIG. 318 (b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the peak arrival effect is not being executed. To do. When the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is turned on and the symbol stop timing is reached, the state shifts to the extended mode and becomes a preparation state.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in 12th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 329 to 333, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, and is the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309), based on the gaming state set based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421, the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. 12 (see FIG. 309), the same processing as S401, S403 to S410, S412 and S421 is executed.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S406 that the lottery result of the current first special symbol is not a big hit, Is determined, and the special figure 1 deviation variation process for executing the process corresponding to the determination result is executed (S431), and this process is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation process (S431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S431). In this special figure 1 deviation variation process (S431), it is first determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S3111), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S3111: Yes) ), The special figure 1 small hit flag for indicating that the first special symbol is being changed is set to ON (S3112), and then the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to small hit (S3113). ). Then, as a first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37, a small hit symbol is set (S3114), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3111, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, out of place) (S3111: No), the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. A special symbol is set as a special symbol (S3115), and the process is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation process (see FIG. 330) is a control process added by having a configuration that can win a small hit when the first special symbol lottery is missed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 331, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment is executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 35), the first special symbol determination result and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, the processes in S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 are the first in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 of the one special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) are executed. In addition, in the 1 special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S503 is completed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (see FIG. 322 (b)) is then read out. A variation pattern selection table corresponding to the previous jackpot type and the special drawing lottery count is read (S521). Specifically, if the previous big hit is a probable big hit and the number of special drawing lotteries is 99 or less, the latent / probable start table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) is read as a variation pattern selection table. If the previous jackpot is a normal jackpot and the number of special drawing lotteries is 99 or less, the short-time start table 202f12 (see FIG. 325) is read as the variation pattern selection table. In addition, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, if it has never won a big hit and the number of special drawing lots is 99 or less, the normal start table 202f13 (FIG. Read a). On the other hand, if the number of special drawing lotteries is 100 or more, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is read as the variation pattern selection table regardless of the previous jackpot type. When the process of S521 ends, the process proceeds to S505.

  By executing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331), the variation pattern can be selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol lotteries. Therefore, the variation pattern can be diversified. In addition, the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted from the other acquired gaming state are different in the degree of advantage, and after initialization, Similarly, while it can be set in a disadvantageous state for the player, the normal state shifted through another gaming state can be formed as the most advantageous gaming state for the player. Although illustration is omitted, similarly in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 42), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to (that is, the previous jackpot type, the number of special symbol lotteries) The variation pattern selection table is modified so as to read out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 332, the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process 13 (S221) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The first special symbol variation stop process 13 (S221) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

  Of the first special symbol variation stop process 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S801 to S809, the first special symbol variation stop process in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as S801 to S809 of (see FIG. 38) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation stop process 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S801 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is OFF (S801: No), A special figure 1 outage stop process for setting a special symbol outage stop symbol is executed (S821), and this process ends. Details of the special figure 1 stop processing (S821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 stop processing (S821). In the special figure 1 stoppage processing (S821), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is on (S3211), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is on (S3211: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3212), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (that is, the forced stop of the second special symbol is set). For this purpose, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set (S3213). Next, the second special symbol is removed from the first symbol display device 37 and stopped and displayed as a symbol (S3214), and a small hit scenario corresponding to the current small hit type is set (S3215). Then, the special figure 1 small hit flag is set to OFF (S3216), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S3217), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3211 that the special figure 1 small hit flag is off (S3211), there is no possibility of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the second special symbol or the possibility of starting the small hit. Therefore, this process is finished as it is.

  By executing this special figure 1 off stop process (see FIG. 333), when the first special symbol lottery is won, the second special symbol fluctuation display is removed at the same time as the small hit symbol is stopped. You can force stop display. Therefore, in the state in which the long variation of the second special symbol is being executed, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated simply by executing the lottery of the first special symbol and winning a small hit.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in 12th Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 339. First, with reference to FIG. 334, the variable display setting process 13 (S4121) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, and the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment. ), The first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the first or special diagram 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. The display variation pattern command is set, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Of the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, the processes of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 are respectively variable display setting processes in the eleventh embodiment. 12 (see FIG. 314), the same processing as S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 is executed. In the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5102 is completed, an effect mode is set according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. Is performed (S5141), and the process proceeds to S5106. Details of the effect mode setting process (S5141) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5108 is completed, the variable display setting process 12 for special figure 2 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 316) is performed. Instead, the fluctuation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 is executed (S5142), and the process proceeds to S5110. Details of the special figure 2 variation display setting process 13 (S5142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) according to the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5113 is completed, a preparation state setting process for setting a preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)) is then executed. In step S5143, the process is terminated. Details of the preparation state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the above-described effect mode setting process (S5141) will be described. This effect mode setting process (S5141) is a process for setting the effect mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command as described above. In this effect mode setting process (S5141), first, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (continuous villa mode) (S13101). If it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S13101: No), then the time reduction state It is determined whether or not (chance mode B) (S13102). In the process of S13102, if it is determined that the state is not the short-running state (S1302: No), it means that it is in the latent state (normal mode) or the state of probability variation (chance mode A), and the number of times of probability variation has passed 100 times. Unless this is done, it means that there is no possibility of shifting to the consecutive resort mode, so it is next determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 223ja is 99 (S13103).

  In the process of S13103, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223ja is 99 (S13103: Yes), the ceiling effect for selecting the effect mode of the last change display effect before the transition to the extended resort mode. A setting process is executed (S13104), and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13102 that the gaming state is the short time state (S13102: Yes), then it is determined whether the remaining short number of times is 1 (S13105), and the remaining short number of times is 1. If so, the same process as the ceiling effect setting process (S13104) described above is executed (S13110), and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining short count is not 1 in the process of S13105 (S13105: No), and when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223ja is not 99 in the process of S13103 (S13103: No). Since there is no possibility of shifting to the extended mode, an effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13106), and the process proceeds to S13111.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S13101 that the current gaming state is the normal state (S13101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning flag 223ka is on (S13107). When it is determined that the completed flag 223ka is on (S13107), a normal effect setting process for setting the effect state for the normal state is executed (S13108), and the process proceeds to S13111. Details of the normal effect setting process (S13108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S13107 that the winning flag 223ka is off (S13107: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 223ja is 99 (S13109). When it is determined that the value of the number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), the ceiling effect setting process (S13110) is executed, and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13109, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223ja is not 99 (S13109: No), the process proceeds to S13108.

  In the process of S13111 that is executed after any one of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110, a display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined in any one of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110 is set. (S13111), and this process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described ceiling effect setting process (S13104, S13110) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As shown in FIG. 336, in the ceiling effect setting process (S4131), first, the execution area data corresponding to the first special symbol is read out from the winning information storage area 223b (S13201), and the read execution area data is read out. Is determined to be data corresponding to the jackpot (S 13202), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S 13202: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (to notify the jackpot) Is determined (S13203), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1322 that the data read from the execution area is not data indicating a big hit (S1322: No), then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the first special symbol is retained. The data of one area is read (S13204), and it is determined whether or not the read data of the reserved first area is data corresponding to the jackpot. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won immediately after the transition to the consecutive resort mode. In the process of S13205, if it is determined that the data in the reserved first area is a big hit (S13205: Yes), then it is the data indicating the big hit D12 (that is, in a relatively short time (2 (S13206: No) if it is determined that it is a jackpot type that shifts to the consecutive resort mode) (S13206). The jackpot effect of the effect mode of the effect time obtained by adding 10 seconds to the change time of the change display to be executed this time (that is, the change time of the jackpot change in the extended game mode) (that is, the change time of the first special symbol for two times) The striking jackpot effect) is determined (S13207), and the process ends. In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined by prefetching that a jackpot variation of a jackpot type other than the jackpot D12 starts immediately after starting the jackpot mode, the mode shifts to the pool mode (see FIG. 318 (b)). ), And the presentation mode is executed as if the jackpot was won immediately before the consecutive-villa mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed because the big hit is started without enjoying the small hit game even once it has shifted to the consecutive resort mode. can do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S13205 that the data of the reserved first area of the first special symbol is not data indicating a big hit (S13205: No), and in the process of S13206, the data of the reserved first area is a big hit D12. If it is determined that the data indicates the character (S13206: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 318 (b)) that the character 811 reaches the top of the rock is determined (S13208), and the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is turned on. (S13209), and this process ends.

  By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 336), the prefetch result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the extended-village mode (normal state) (the number of time reductions or the number of times of certain change has ended) Accordingly, it is possible to suitably set whether or not the peak achievement effect (see FIG. 318 (b)) can be executed.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 338, the details of the above-described special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5143) will be described. This special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 13 (S5143) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, as described above. When the variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223kc is on (S3401), and the RUSH flag 223kc is off. If it is determined (S 13401: No), then the variation display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S 13402), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S 1401 that the RUSH flag 223 kb is on (S 13401: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the ready state flag 223 kb is on (S 13403). If it is determined that the middle flag 223 kb is off (S 13403: No), it means that the ready state has been completed in the extended game mode. Therefore, for the extended game mode corresponding to the change type indicated by the change pattern command. An effect mode is determined (S13404), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13403 that the ready state flag 223kb is on (that is, in the ready state) (S13403: Yes), then the variation type command is notified of the variation type per small hit (S13405), if it is determined that the small variation type has been notified (S13405: Yes), the ready state flag 223kb is set to off (S13406), and the present variation display effect is produced. As an aspect, the effect aspect (refer FIG. 319 (b)) which alert | reports RUSH rush entry is determined (S13407), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S13405 that the variation type is not a small hit variation type (S13405: No), it means that the ready state continues at least until the variation ends. The preparation mode for the preparation state corresponding to the variation type indicated by the command is determined (S13408), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 338), the situation when the second special symbol lottery is executed (in preparation state or in a state in which the RUSH entry has been notified) Depending on whether there is a state other than the extended resort mode, it is possible to execute an effect in an appropriate mode.

  Next, details of the above-described preparation state setting process (S5144) will be described with reference to FIG. This preparation state setting process (S5144) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)) as described above. In this preparation state setting process (S5144), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on (S13501). If it is determined that it is off (S13501: No), the process proceeds to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility of making it, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S13501, when it is determined that the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on (S13501: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is set to off (S13502), and the display mode in preparation for RUSH ( 319 (a)) is set (S13503). Next, both the RUSH flag 223 kb and the ready state flag 223 kb are set to ON (S 13504), and this process ends.

  By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 339), the display state of the preparation state can be set from the time when the mode is shifted to the extended resort mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is set as an advantageous game state (long game mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed. Configured and configured the latent state as the most disadvantageous normal mode. And it was set as the structure which transfers to the most advantageous extended resort mode by ending the frequency | count of probability change in normal mode. In other words, it is possible to shift from the most unfavorable gaming state directly to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. By configuring in this way, in the most disadvantageous normal mode (latent probability state), it is possible to play a game with one goal being to elapse the probability variation number.

  Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that shifts to a relatively advantageous normal state by setting the latent probability state to the most unfavorable gaming state and ending the number of times of probability change in the latent probability state. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is easier to give a time-saving state that is more advantageous after the jackpot end than when the jackpot is in the normal state than when the jackpot is in the latent state. The normal state is advantageous, and while staying in the normal state (that is, until winning the jackpot), a disadvantageous state in which the holding ball is likely to decrease is formed. It was a thing. In other words, even if the number of times of probability change has elapsed in the latent state and the transition to the normal state is not advantageous to the player at that time, and further, it was necessary to win a big hit. Even if the player directly shifts to the normal state without going through the game, there is a problem that the player is not satisfied and it is difficult to improve the player's interest.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, by shifting (progressing) the number of times of probability change in the disadvantageous normal mode (latent probability state), the configuration shifts directly to the most advantageous extended mode (normal state). did. In other words, even if the jackpot is not won, the game is shifted to an advantageous state in which it is possible to easily and continuously win the winning ball simply by continuing the right-handed game. By configuring in this way, when the probability variation number can be completed, the player can have a greater satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. Can do.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted by ending the number of probability changes or the number of time reductions in other gaming states. Thus, the player has a different degree of advantage. That is, different variation pattern selection tables are referred to in the normal state set by initialization and the normal state transferred through another gaming state (the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set after the jackpot is ended) Based on the variation pattern selection table). By configuring in this way, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 while forming the normal state transitioned through another gaming state as the most advantageous gaming state for the player, It can be formed as a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player. In other words, as with a general gaming machine, when initialization is performed, it can be set in a disadvantageous state for the player. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the unexpected disadvantage. In the twelfth embodiment, even in the normal state after the initialization, when the number of lotteries for the special symbol is 100 times or more, a state that is most advantageous for the player is formed. ing. For this reason, even after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, except for the jackpot probability, the operation is the same as in the normal mode (the operation that shifts to the extended play mode by continuously losing by 100 special symbol lotteries). be able to. Therefore, the state after initialization becomes excessively unfavorable for the player, and the player can be prevented from refraining from playing the game with the pachinko machine 10, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment has a configuration in which the period from the transition to the consecutive house mode until the first winning of the second special symbol in the lottery is notified as a preparation state. When a situation in which a winning ball can be obtained is obtained (that is, when a small hit fluctuation is started), it is notified that an advantageous state (RUSH state) has been established. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the situation where a prize ball cannot be acquired continues despite the RUSH state being alert | reported for a long time, and a player feels dissatisfied. Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which when the special symbol lottery is won, the other special symbol lottery executed during the big hit variation is controlled to be forcibly removed. ing. For this reason, when the transition from the normal mode to the extended game mode occurs, there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol started simultaneously with the start of the extended game mode is a big hit During the big hit variation, the lottery of the second special symbol is surely missed. In other words, if the big hit change of the first special symbol is started at the time of transition to the ready state, even if the right-handed game is continued and the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, it is missed. As a result of the continuous (no win for the big hit), the ready state will continue for a long time (until the big hit fluctuation ends). As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which the sense of expectation during execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol can be improved as the discontinuation continues in the preparation state.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set to ½, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit probability may be arbitrarily determined. . For example, when the lottery probability is increased and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured so as to be almost (for example, with a probability of 59/60). Also good. In such a configuration, if a deviation occurs even once in the preparation state, it is possible to improve the expectation that the fluctuating first special symbol is a big hit, so that the second special symbol is disengaged in the preparation state. In this case, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, the higher the probability of hitting, the shorter the ready state will be shorter (the average number of lotteries from winning the win-win mode to winning the win) will be reduced. It is possible to shorten the period until the possession ball is secured by the prize ball. That is, since it becomes possible to give a prize ball to the player earlier, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the small hit probability is lowered and the player is likely to come off during the preparation state. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the disengagement to continue, so that a sense of expectation that the first special symbol is undergoing jackpot fluctuation can be more frequently held. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the configuration is basically configured to shift to the extended-villa mode when the number of times of probability change or the number of time reductions has been completed, but is not limited thereto. For example, it is good also as a structure which provides the jackpot of the kind in which direct villa mode is set after the jackpot ends. In this case, when a jackpot of a type for which the direct villa mode is set is won, the RUSH table 202f14 may be referred to immediately after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a jackpot of a type that shifts directly to the villa mode after the jackpot ends, while suppressing the excessive advantage after initialization of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to play a game paying attention to the jackpot type. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition, as a condition for shifting to the consecutive home mode, for example, when the probability variation state is consecutive for a specific number of times (for example, 5 times) and again wins the probability variation jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is forcibly changed to the normal state It is good also as a structure set to. That is, a so-called probability variation limit function may be installed. By configuring in this way, even if you win a promising big hit in consecutive disadvantageous normal mode, you can have a feeling as if you are approaching consecutive resort mode, so motivation for the player's game Can be increased.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the dedicated variation pattern table is referred to in the initial state so that the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 is not excessively advantageous. You may comprise so that it may become a mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to start the game with the pachinko machine 10 immediately after opening the hall in the hope of being initialized. Can be improved.

  In the present twelfth embodiment, it is configured such that the expectation that is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol increases as the discontinuation continues in the lottery of the second special symbol during the preparation state. In addition to this, it may be configured to execute an effect that indicates the number of times that the detachment has continued during the preparation state (that is, the expectation level during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol). Specifically, for example, the background color on the display screen in the preparation state may be changed from blue → green → red → rainbow color every time the disconnection continues twice. By comprising in this way, it can be made to understand easily that the player who does not know use of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is so good that the detachment | disconnection of a 2nd special symbol continues. Therefore, it is possible to realize gameability that is easy for a player to understand.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 344. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state is an advantageous game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed, while the latent state is The game state is the most disadvantageous for the player. In addition, the transition to the normal state is assumed to be when the number of times of probability change is completed in the latent state, so that it is expected that the deviation will continue for the number of times of probability change set in the unfavorable latent state. It was configured to make it possible to realize innovative gameplay.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, while the two gaming states of the latent probability state and the normal state are configured as advantageous gaming states in which the small hit game is frequently executed, It is configured as a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to set a disadvantageous state while the time-saving state that is advantageous in general gaming machines is set, and to an advantageous state when the time-saving state is not set, so the time-saving state is ended. It is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game is played in the hope of doing.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment because the board configuration of the game board 13 is the board configuration of the game board 13 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). ), The configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. is there. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the twelfth. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, modes in the thirteenth embodiment will be briefly described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most advantageous state, and the latent state is also configured as a gaming state advantageous to the player, although the degree of advantage is lower than that in the normal state. On the other hand, the probability variation state and the short-time state are configured as disadvantageous gaming states in which the game should proceed by left-handed gaming. In addition, it can be said that the shorter time state is more advantageous for the player because the shorter time state is easier to shift to the most advantageous normal state than the probability variation state. In the thirteenth embodiment, the most unfavorable probability change state is referred to as a normal mode, the short-time state is referred to as a chance mode, and the latent probability state advantageous to the player is referred to as a extended play mode A. The normal state that is most advantageous to the user is referred to as “village mode B”. As in the above-described twelfth embodiment, in the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, only the long variation is selected when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. , Forming a disadvantageous state where it is necessary to play a game by left-handed.

<Electrical Configuration in the 13th Embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342. Here, the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment in terms of the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a, the prescribed contents of the second random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d. The specified contents and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. First, the configuration of the first random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 238 (a). FIG. 321 (b) explains the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment.

  FIG. 340 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 340 (a), in the first random number table 202a according to the thirteenth embodiment, “0-3” as random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol. Four random values (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (a), eight random numbers (counter values) “0 to 7” are defined as random numbers (counter values) determined to be big hits in a high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

  Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being a big hit is 1/120 (4/480), while the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state of the special symbol. When executed, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/60 (8/480). Note that the change of the jackpot probability in the thirteenth embodiment is performed in order to further enhance the superiority of the normal state. In other words, it is configured so that it becomes difficult to continue the latent state for a long time by making it easy to win a big hit in the latent state. Therefore, since the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the state of frequently winning a small win will shift to the normal state that is likely to continue for a long time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, details of the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 340 (b). FIG. 340 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 340 (b), in the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment, “0” is set as a random value (counter value) determined to be a normal symbol hit in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Is stipulated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (b), two random number values (counter values) “0, 1” are determined as random number values (counter values) that are determined to be normal symbol hits in the normal symbol time-short state. It is prescribed.

  That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the normal symbol is hit only with a low probability even in the short time state of the normal symbol. As a result, even if a left-handed game is performed in the short-time state or the probability-changed state, it is difficult for the electric accessory 64a to be opened, so that the game ball hardly enters the lower first entrance 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the game ball into the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handed game, the probability variation state and the short time state are disadvantageous in that the number of possessed balls tends to decrease. It becomes a game state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 341, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 341, in the thirteenth embodiment, seven jackpot types from “Big Jack A13” to “Big Jack G13” are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, three jackpot types from “Big Jack H13” to “Big Jack J13” are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 341, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), the jackpot type is “Big Jack A13” for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0-4”. It is defined in association. The “big hit A13” is a big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) of the type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot is set to the consecutive house mode A (latent probability state). As described above, the consecutive jackpot mode A is a gaming state in which a small hit game is frequently executed only by making a right strike, so “big hit A13” is a comparison in terms of the gaming state after the big hit ends. It will be a jackpot type that is advantageous.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 341, “big hit B13” is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 9”. This “big hit B13” is a big hit (two rounds probable big hit) of the type set in the normal mode (probability variation state) that is the most unfavorable after the big hit is ended. Since the number of time reductions set after the end of “big hit B13” is set to 25, it is relatively easy to end the time reductions. By ending the number of time reductions, the villa mode A is thereafter used until the probability variation number (100 times) ends.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 341, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 29”, “hit C13” is defined in association with the big hit type. This “big jackpot C13” is a big jackpot (two rounds probable big hit) of the type set in the normal mode (probability variation state) that is the most disadvantageous after the big jackpot is finished. In addition, since the number of time reductions is set to 50 in the normal mode after the “big hit C13” is completed, it is more difficult to shift to the extended play mode A than in the “big hit B13”. Therefore, the “big hit C13” is a type of big hit that is more disadvantageous than the “big hit B13”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 “30 to 74”, “hit D13” is defined in association with the big hit type. This “big hit D13” is a big hit (two rounds probable big hit) of the type in which the number of big hits is two rounds and the normal mode (probability change state) is set after the big hit. In the normal mode after the “big hit D13” is completed, the number of time reductions is set to 75. Therefore, it is more difficult to shift to the extended mode A than in the “big hit C13”. Therefore, the “big hit D13” is a type of big hit that is more disadvantageous than the “big hit B13” or the “big hit C13”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 “75”, “hit E13” is defined in association with the big hit type. The “big jackpot E13” is a big jackpot (8 round normal jackpot) of the type in which the jackpot round number is eight and the chance mode (short time state) is set after the jackpot is finished. In the chance mode that is set after the “big hit E13” is completed, the number of time reductions is set to 2, so it is extremely easy to end the time reductions. When the number of time reductions is completed in the chance mode, the mode shifts to the most advantageous extended resort mode B (normal state), so the “bonus E13” is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 “76 to 80”, “hit F13” is defined in association with the big hit type. This “big jackpot F13” is a big jackpot (two round normal jackpot) of the type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is two and the chance mode (time-short state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, since the number of time reductions in the chance mode set after the end of the “big hit F13” is set to 50, it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive house mode B than the “big hit E13”. Therefore, “big hit F13” is a type of big hit that is more disadvantageous than “big hit E13”. In the chance mode, the jackpot probability is low, and by shifting to the shortest number of times, the mode shifts directly to the most advantageous villa mode B. Therefore, the “big hit B13” to the “big hit D13” that shift to the normal mode are changed. It can be said that it is advantageous (it is easy to shift to Renso mode B) jackpot type. If attention is paid only to the point that the jackpot probability is low, it can be said that it is more disadvantageous than “jackpot B13” to “jackpot D13”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 “81 to 99”, “hit G13” is defined in association with the big hit type. This “big jackpot G13” is a big jackpot (two rounds of normal jackpots) of the type in which the number of jackpot rounds is two and the chance mode (short-time state) is set after the jackpot is finished. In addition, since the number of time reductions in the chance mode set after the end of the “big hit G13” is set to 75 times, it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive house mode B than the “big hit E13” or the “big hit F13”. . Therefore, “big hit G13” is a type of big hit that is more disadvantageous than “big hit E13” or “big hit F13”.

  On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), the jackpot type is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “0 to 24” as the jackpot type. ing. This “big hit H13” is a big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) of the type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the consecutive mode A or the normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when “big hit H13” is won in the extended game mode B (normal state), the extended game mode is set to the extended game mode A (latent state), When “big hit H13” is won in the normal mode (probability change state), chance mode (short-time state), and extended play mode A (latency probability state), the normal mode is set after the big hit.

  Also, “big hit I13” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “25 to 74” as the big hit type. This “big hit I13” is a big hit (8 rounds promising big hit) of the type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the consecutive mode A or the normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when “big hit H13” is won in the extended villa mode A (latency probability state) or the extended villa mode B (normal state), after the big hit, the extended villa mode A (latent In the normal mode (probability change state) or chance mode (short-time state), when “big hit H13” is won, the normal mode is set after the big hit.

  Further, “big hit J13” is defined as a big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “75 to 99”. This “big jackpot J13” is a big jackpot (8 round normal jackpot) of the type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the chance mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when winning the “big hit J13” in consecutive resort mode B, two times are set as the number of time reductions, so that an advantageous state that makes it extremely easy to end the time reduction times is formed. . In addition, when winning the “big hit J13” in the Renso mode A, 75 times are set as the number of time reductions, and when winning the “big hit J13” in the normal mode or the chance mode, 100 times are set as the number of time reductions.

  In the normal mode and chance mode, when the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times in the game state in which the left-handed game is to be performed. This is for the purpose of suppressing the irregular gaming method aiming at the ball outlet 640. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, a game state that is disadvantageous to the player is formed while the short state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the normal mode and chance mode, when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is irregular for the player by adopting a configuration in which the short time state of the disadvantageous normal symbol continues for a long time (100 times). You can make them feel like you don't want to play a big game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method for playing a right-handed game in a gaming state where a left-handed game should be played.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the probability variation / latent probability start table 202f11 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The probability variation / latent probability start table 202f11 in the thirteenth embodiment is a lottery of the first special symbol in the latency state compared to the probability variation / latent probability start table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) in the twelfth embodiment. As a variation pattern to be selected when is executed, only a variation pattern having a short variation time (0.1 second or 10 seconds) is selected, and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed in the latent state. As a variation pattern selected in this case, only a variation pattern having a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected. In this change, the latent state in the twelfth embodiment is a normal mode that is disadvantageous for the player, whereas the latent state in the thirteenth embodiment is configured as a extended play mode A that is advantageous for the player. It is because of having done.

  Next, a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 343. explain. FIG. 343 is a diagram illustrating a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 343, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is roughly divided into four modes (game states). That is, the normal mode (probability change state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, the chance mode (short-time state) shown in the center of FIG. , The extended resort mode B (normal state) shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343 is provided.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates that the special symbol is in a probable change state and the normal symbol is in a short-time state. The normal mode has a high probability of being a big hit, and the electric accessory 64a is more likely to be opened than in the normal state of the normal symbol. However, the probability of being released is low, and the game ball hardly enters the lower first entrance 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to advance the game by entering the game ball into the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handed game, a game state disadvantageous for the player is formed. In addition, as described above, the chance mode indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol, and although it is necessary to advance the game by the left-handed game as in the normal mode, Since it becomes easier to shift to the most advantageous extended resort mode A than in the mode, the gaming state has a higher degree of advantage than the normal mode. In addition, Renso mode A shows the probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and by playing a right-handed game, an advantageous game state in which a small hit game is frequently executed is shown. Form. The extended game mode A indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol. Like the extended game mode A, a very advantageous game in which a small hit game is frequently executed. Form a state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another state when the jackpot is reached or when the specified number of times of certain change has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, when the jackpot A13, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it is repeated after the jackpot ends. Transition to Zhuang mode A. In addition, if any of the jackpots E13 to G13, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode becomes relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. Transition. Furthermore, after the normal mode is set, the specified number of times of probability change (100 times) is passed, so that the mode is shifted directly to the extended game mode A that is advantageous to the player (without a big hit). On the other hand, when the jackpot B13 to C13, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the specified probability variation number than to win a big hit, so that the player can expect that the deviation continues for the specified number of times. . Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transition from the chance mode to another state in the case of a big hit and when a specified number of time reductions has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, when the jackpot A13, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it is repeated after the jackpot ends. Transition to Zhuang mode A. In addition, when one of the big hits B13 to D13 determined as a big hit type at a rate of 70% is selected (determined), it shifts to an unfavorable normal mode after the big hit ends. . Furthermore, after the chance mode is set, the prescribed time-saving number of times (two times, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, or 100 times) is passed, so that the game mode B is the most advantageous for the player. And move directly (without jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot E13 to G13, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is determined, the chance mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the chance mode, even if it is a big win, the ratio of maintaining the current status or falling to the disadvantaged normal mode becomes extremely high, so it is more advantageous to pass the specified number of times than the big win It is easy to become. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to continue to come off over a specified number of times, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transition from the extended mode A to another state when it is a big hit or when the specified number of certain changes has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the lower part of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13 determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type is selected (determined), the jackpot of the second special symbol is selected. Transition to disadvantageous normal mode. Further, when the jackpot J13, which is a jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the mode shifts to an unfavorable chance mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the villa mode A is set, the specified number of certain changes (100 times after the end of the previous jackpot) is passed to directly enter the villa mode B that is most advantageous to the player (without going through the jackpot). )Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot I13 is determined as a jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, the villa mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in Renso mode A, a prize ball can be obtained while staying in the Renso mode, and it is easy for the player to loop in the same mode when a big hit is made, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes. Furthermore, if the number of times of probability change can be passed, the transition to the most advantageous extended resort mode B is made. Form.

  In addition, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility that a transition from the extended mode B to another state is possible only when a big hit is made. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13, I13 determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type is selected (determined), the jackpot of the second special symbol is jackpot After the end, the mode shifts to the extended resort mode A which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot J13 is determined as a jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, the chance mode is set after the jackpot ends. In the chance mode set after the end of jackpot J13, the number of time reductions is set to 2. Therefore, it is possible to almost end the time reduction number and shift to the extended mode B. Therefore, it becomes a jackpot type that is more pleasing to the player than the jackpots H13 and I13 that shift to the Renso mode A. As described above, in the consecutive resort mode B, a prize ball can be obtained while staying in the consecutive resort mode, and in the case of a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to a normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. This is very advantageous for the player.

<Control processing of main controller in 13th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 344, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 14 (S121) in the thirteenth embodiment. The normal symbol variation process 14 (S121) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the normal symbol variation in the twelfth embodiment. Similar to the process (see FIG. 48), a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing the ball at the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are performed. Process.

  Of the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, each processing of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 is the twelfth embodiment. The same processing as that of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48) in the embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed. Is done.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, next, the normal symbol variation time is set to 60 seconds (S1831). The process proceeds to S1814. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, a long variation time is set regardless of the normal symbol lottery result and the gaming state. Therefore, the chance of opening the electric utility item 64a can be reduced even in the probability changing state and the time-shortening state in which the short-time state of the normal symbol is set.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1821 that the normal symbol is not in a time-short state (S1821: No), the electric utility item 64a is opened. The time and the number of times are set to “0.1 second × 1 time” (S1832), and the process proceeds to S1823. On the other hand, in the process of S1821, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in a short time state (S1821: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 64a are set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. (S1833), the process proceeds to S1823. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, even when the normal symbol is in the short-time state, the normal symbol has a long variation time (60 seconds) and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is short. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the first entrance 64b2. Therefore, the gaming state in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the two gaming states of the latent probability state and the normal state are configured as advantageous gaming states in which small hit games are frequently executed. Here, conventionally, the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, so that it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability, and the latent state is more advantageous than the probability variation state. Has been proposed. That is, a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous state (so-called small hit RUSH function) that allows winning balls to be won without winning a big win has been proposed. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the state shifts to an advantageous state other than the latent state, such as a probability change state, the player is satisfied if the state does not shift to the latent state (small hit RUSH state). It was difficult to hold. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided as so-called small hit RUSH states, and in the small hit RUSH state (reliance mode A) having a relatively low degree of advantage, The configuration allows a relatively easy transition. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that can experience the small hit RUSH state relatively easily can be formed, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modification of 13th Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 and 346. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, it is easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of winning a small hit in the two game states of the latent state and the normal state (the variation time of the second special symbol). It was formed as an advantageous state. That is, just by making a right-hand hit, the small bonus of the second special symbol occurs frequently, and the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened, so that the winning ball can be played even if the big win is not won. It was set as the structure which forms the advantageous state which can be acquired continuously (intermittently).

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, by playing a game aiming at the first entrance 64b1 by left-handed game, the first special symbol small hit frequently occurs, and the small hit By playing a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by a right-handed game and an advantageous state (latent probability state) where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second specific prize opening 650a that is opened during the game, A configuration in which an advantageous state (normal state) in which a small hit of the second special symbol frequently occurs and a game ball easily enters the second specific winning opening 650a opened during the small hit game is provided. It was. In other words, by performing a left-handed game, it is possible to obtain a winning ball intermittently (continuously) without winning a jackpot, and by performing a right-handed game In addition, it is configured to provide two types, an advantageous state (normal state) in which a winning ball can be obtained intermittently (continuously) without winning a jackpot. Further, by configuring the first special symbol small hit probability (for example, 1/5) to be lower than the second special symbol small hit probability (for example, 59/60), The configuration is such that it is more advantageous to obtain a prize ball than the latent state.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment in that the small hit probability is changed, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64aj is changed. And the board configuration of the game board 13 has been changed. With reference to FIG. 345 and FIG. 346, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of this modification will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 345, the gaming board 13 in the present modification is provided with an electric accessory 64aj in place of the electric accessory 64a provided along with the lower first entrance 64b2. I drink differently. As in the case of the electric combination 64a in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the electric combination 64aj is normally in a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. 1st state) is formed, and when it is won by lottery of normal symbols, an open state (second state) in which a game ball can easily enter the lower first entrance 64b2 as compared to the closed state Form. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, in this modified example, even if the open state is set, the game ball will hardly enter the lower first entrance 64b2. In this modification, the first special winning symbol 65a is opened when the big win is won and when the second special symbol is drawn, and the first special symbol lottery is opened. The second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened when a small hit is made.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the state of the electric accessory 640aj and the flow path of the game ball will be described with reference to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 346 (a), the flow path of the game ball in a state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed will be described. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), in a state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed, the game ball that has flowed down from the upper side toward the electric accessory 64aj collides (interferes) with the electric accessory 64aj to cause a path. Is changed (variable) and flows down to the right side of the second variable prize-winning device 650 (path Ka1), or the path is changed by colliding (interfering) with the electric accessory 64aj, so that the second variable prize-winning device It flows down to 650 (path Ka2), or directly flows down to the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka3) without colliding (interfering) with the electric accessory 64aj. That is, in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed, it is not possible to enter the lower first entrance 64b2, but it is relatively easy to reach the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in the latent state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set (the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to be released), the first special symbol lottery is executed and the probability of 1/5 is achieved by performing the left-handed game. When the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, it is possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the second specific winning opening 650a. If the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, a long variation is set regardless of the lottery result, so even if the right hand is continuously performed, there are few merits for the player ( Although it wins in small hits, it becomes difficult to win a prize ball because the interval between the small hit games is long).

  In addition, FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball in a state where the electric accessory 64aj is opened. As shown in FIG. 346 (b), in the state in which the electric accessory 64aj is opened, the game ball that has flowed down from above the electric accessory 64aj collides (interferences) with the electric accessory 64aj and the flow-down path is established. Even if it is changed, the possibility of being reflected in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 becomes low (paths Kb1, Kb2). Moreover, since the area of the region formed between the electric accessory 64aj and the lower first entrance 64b2 is increased by opening the electric accessory 64aj, the lower first portion is interfered with a nail or the like. It becomes relatively easy for game balls to enter the entrance 64b2 (for example, a ratio of about 1 in 200 balls). Note that the game ball is configured so that it is difficult to enter the game ball as compared to the short time state of the normal symbol in other embodiments just because it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state. Therefore, in the probability variation state where the short time state of the normal symbol is set or in the short time state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2 and the second specific winning entrance 650a. Each time the lottery is executed, it is an unfavorable state in which a game ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning port 650a even though the second specific winning port 650a is opened with a probability of 1/5 Form. In this modification, in the normal symbol time-saving state, every time a game ball passes through the through gate 67, a variation time of 0.1 seconds is set, and it is a hit with a high probability (for example, 232/233). In the case of winning, the electric accessory 64aj is opened for 2.5 seconds. That is, by performing the left-handed game, the operation is repeated for 0.1 seconds of fluctuation and 2.5 seconds of release. In other words, the electric accessory 64aj is almost in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second specific entrance 650a in the time-short state or the probability variation state.

  As described above, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, the second specific prize opening 650a is closed by the electric accessory 64aj that is released when the normal symbol is hit, thereby reducing the time-saving state or the probability variation state. Even if the player hits the left and hits a small hit, it is difficult to win a prize ball. As a result, only when the player has left-handed in the normal state of the normal symbol (the state where the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to be opened) and has made a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game is played to the second specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to form an advantageous state in which the ball can easily enter the ball. In other words, a relatively advantageous state is formed by left-handing in the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which a winning ball can be easily acquired by left-handing and an advantageous state in which a winning ball can be easily acquired by right-handing, so that the gaming method can be diversified. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Also, in this modification, the degree of advantage is different between a latent state where it is easy to obtain a prize ball by left-handed and a normal state where it is easy to obtain a prize ball by right-handed (if the winning frequency is different). ). As a result, the game can be sharpened, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In this modification, the probability of winning the second special symbol is higher than the probability of winning the first special symbol. The normal state where the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of, or in addition to, varying the probability of hitting depending on the type of special symbol, for example, in the small bonus of the first special symbol, in the small bonus game of one time than the small bonus of the second special symbol The configuration may be such that the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed is more advantageous by configuring the number of game balls that can be won to be reduced. In place of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the entrance to the second specific prize opening 650a that is released when the first special symbol is won is determined by the second special symbol. By reducing the number of winning balls based on the winning at the first specific winning opening 65a that is released in the case of becoming, it becomes more advantageous in the normal state where the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed. You may comprise. By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be varied in many ways, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the normal state is configured to be more advantageous than the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the latent state may be more advantageous than the normal state.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 341. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, an advantageous state in which a winning ball with a small hit is easily obtained is formed in two types of game states, a normal state and a latent state. In addition, the normal state and the latent state are differentiated, and the normal state is more advantageous than the latent state, thereby realizing a sharp game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, only the latent state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to obtain a winning ball with a small hit. In the fourteenth embodiment, the degree of advantage (ease of winning a winning ball) is variable according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the latent state. More specifically, as the latent state, the most advantageous state (latent state A) in which the lottery of the second special symbol with a high probability of winning a small hit (for example, the probability of 59/60) is easily executed, There are two types of states: a state (latency state B) in which the degree of advantage is lower than the latent state A in which the first special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. It was possible to switch between. Thereby, even in an advantageous latent state in which a small hit game is easy to be executed, the degree of advantage can be further varied, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed and the main controller 110 The other configuration, which is a part of the configuration of the ROM 202, is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 347, a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 347 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347, the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment has an upper first entrance for the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). 64b1 and a lower first entrance 64b2 are provided with a central first entrance 64c accompanied by a central electric accessory 64ca, a distribution device 6400D instead of the second entrance 640 And the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650 that is released when the big hit or the first special symbol is a small hit is moved to the right side of the board, and the game launched by left-handed The point that the upper left side is blocked by a plurality of nails so that the ball is difficult to enter is changed. The change of the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650 is that the game state (latent state) in which a left-handed game should be performed is determined because a lottery is won with a relatively high probability (1/5 probability) by lottery of the first special symbol. This is to prevent the gaming ball from entering the second variable prize-winning device 650 in a gaming state other than the certain state) to be advantageous to the player.

  Similarly to the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment, the electric accessory 64ca associated with the central first entrance 64c is released when the normal symbol is hit. For this reason, in the short time state or the probability variation state in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the game ball can easily enter the central first entrance 64c, so that it is difficult to consume the holding ball. Therefore, the game efficiency is improved in the short-time state or the probability variation state, which is advantageous for the player.

  The allocating device 6400D is configured to be able to distribute (enter) a game ball that has entered into either the first entrance 6400D1 or the second entrance 6400D2 provided therein. Yes. Similar to the central first entrance 64c, the first entrance 6400D1 is configured as an entrance that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the second entrance 6400D2 is configured as an entrance that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 347, inside the sorting device 6400D, a game ball that has entered is received, and the received game ball is sent to either the first entrance 6400D1 or the second entrance 6400D2. The distribution member 6400Da is provided to flow down. The sorting member 6400Da is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides that can receive the balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 6400Da has an arrangement in which the right-side receiving part is located immediately below the opening of the distribution apparatus 6400D (position where a game ball can enter), and the left-side reception part is the opening of the distribution apparatus 6400D. There are two possible arrangements: an arrangement that is directly underneath. FIG. 347 illustrates an arrangement in which the right-side receiving part comes directly under the opening.

  When a game ball that has entered the sorting device 6400D through the opening is received by the right receiving portion in a state where the right receiving portion is positioned immediately below the opening, As a result of the weight of the sphere causing the sorting member 6400a to rotate clockwise about the shaft 6400Db as a rotation axis, the left receiving portion is arranged directly below the opening. Further, since the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front due to the rotation, the game ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down to the lower right direction of the sorting member 6400Da. That is, it flows down toward the second entrance 6400D2 and enters the second entrance 6400D2.

  On the other hand, if the game ball that has entered the sorting device 6400D is received by the left receiving unit in a state where the left receiving unit is arranged immediately below the opening, the weight of the game ball As a result, the sorting member 6400Da rotates counterclockwise about the shaft 6400Db as a rotation axis, and as a result, the right-side receiving portion comes directly under the opening. Further, since the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front due to the rotation, the game ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down in the lower left direction of the sorting member 6400Da. That is, it flows down toward the first entrance 6400D1 and enters the first entrance 6400D1. For this reason, every time a game ball enters the sorting device 6400D, it can be alternately distributed to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2.

  Although details will be described later, in the fourteenth embodiment, in the latent state, the variation time of the first special symbol is likely to be shorter (the first special symbol small hit starts during the variation of the second special symbol). As a result, the state in which the phenomenon that the second special symbol changes is forcibly stopped due to the deviation is likely to occur) (latency state B) and the variation time of the second special symbol tends to be shorter (first Any of the state (latency probability state A) is likely to occur when the small special hit of the second special symbol is started during the change of the special symbol, and the phenomenon that the first special symbol changes is forcibly stopped due to detachment This state is set to be set. That is, in the latent state, the state of mainly executing the first special symbol lottery winning with a 1/5 probability and mainly the second special symbol lottery winning with a probability of 59/60. Two types of states, that is, a state to be executed are provided. Accordingly, the variable display on the game board 13 is configured so that both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simply by making a right stroke in the latent state. A distribution device 6400D capable of alternately distributing game balls to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2 with respect to the right region of the device unit 80 is provided.

<Electric Configuration in Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 348 to 352. Here, the configuration of the jackpot type selection table 202d, the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is partially changed in the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment. Is different. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 348, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 348, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot A14 or G14, the lottery number of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times. Thus, a probability variation A table 202f21 is defined in association with the variation pattern selection table. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 350, the probability variation A table 202f21 is one of tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and this table is referred to in the latent probability state. While the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is likely to be executed is formed, when the table is referenced in the probability variation state, the left-handed game has higher game efficiency than the right-handed game. A relatively advantageous gaming state is formed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a normal table 202f23 is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with a range in which the number of special symbol lotteries is 100 or more. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, when the normal table 202f23 is referred to, right-handed execution in the normal state forms an extremely disadvantageous state in which the gaming efficiency deteriorates.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is any one of the jackpots B14, D14, and F14, the B table for probability variation is used for the range in which the number of lotteries for the special symbol is 1 to 99. 202f22 is defined in association with it. This probability variation B table 202f22 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. When this table is referenced in the latent probability state, the small bonus game of the first special symbol When the table is referred to in the probability variation state, the left-handed game forms a relatively advantageous game state in which the game efficiency is higher than the right-handed game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range in which the number of special symbol lotteries is 100 or more. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot C14, the probability variation B table 202f22 (see FIG. 351) corresponds to the range where the number of lotteries of special symbols is 1 to 24. The probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350) is defined in association with the range of 25 to 99 times. This probability variation B table 202f22 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. When this table is referenced in the latent probability state, the small bonus game of the first special symbol When the table is referred to in the probability variation state, the left-handed game forms a relatively advantageous game state in which the game efficiency is higher than the right-handed game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range in which the number of special symbol lotteries is 100 or more. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined in association with the special symbol regardless of the number of lotteries. Yes.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, depending on whether the probability variation A table 202f21 or the probability variation B table 202f22 is referenced (that is, depending on the previous jackpot type), the latent probability state In this case, the advantage is variable. That is, in the latent probability state, a state in which a small hitting game based on the first special symbol lottery is likely to be executed (latent probability state B) and a small hitting game based on the second special symbol lottery are relatively low. Two types of states can be formed: a state that is easily executed (latent state A). Therefore, since more states with different degrees of advantage of the player can be formed, the game can be diversified and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 349, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

  As shown in FIG. 349, in the fourteenth embodiment, five jackpot types from “big jackpot A14” to “big jackpot E14” are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, three jackpot types from “big jackpot F14” to “big jackpot H14” are defined as jackpot types of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 349, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), the jackpot type “Big Jack A14” is set for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0-4”. It is defined in association. This “big hit A14” is a type set to the latent probability state A (latent probability state in which the small special hit game of the second special symbol is easy to be executed) having the largest number of rounds and having eight rounds and the most advantageous after the big hit. Jackpot (8 rounds probable jackpot). Since the latent state A is the most advantageous gaming state, the “big hit A14” is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the big hit.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 349, “big hit B14” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “5 to 19” as the big hit type. This “big hit B14” has eight rounds of big hits, and when winning in a gaming state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state after the big hit, while the latent state After winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot (8 round probability change jackpot) set to the latent probability state B (an advantageous state in which the first special symbol jackpot game is easy to be executed) is set. When the probability variation state is set after the end of “big hit B14”, the latent probability state B is maintained until the number of probability variation (100 times) is completed by causing the time reduction number to pass (end). .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 349, “big hit C14” is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 29”. This “big hit C14” has a big hit number of 8 rounds, and when winning in a gaming state other than the latent probability state, after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state, After winning the big hit, the type of big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) set to the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the second special symbol small hit game is likely to be executed) is set. After the “big hit C14” is completed, the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times, so that the latent state A shifts to the low advantageous state B (see FIG. 348). Further, when the probability change state is set after the end of the “big hit B14”, the latent probability state B is maintained until the number of times of the probability change (100 times) ends by causing the time reduction number to pass (end). .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 349, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “70 to 79”, “hit D14” is defined in association with the big hit type. This “big hit D14” has a number of rounds of jackpot of 8 rounds, and when winning in a gaming state other than the latent probability state, the winning state is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state after the big hit, while the latent probability state After winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot (8 round probability change jackpot) set to the latent probability state B (an advantageous state in which the first special symbol jackpot game is easy to be executed) is set. When the probability variation state is set after the end of “big hit D14”, the latent probability state B is maintained until the number of probability variation (100 times) is completed by causing the number of time reductions to pass (terminate). . Here, when a “big hit D14” is won in a gaming state other than the latent probability state, the number of times of probability change is set smaller than that of “big hit B14” or “big hit C14”, so a transition to a more advantageous latent probability state is made. The player can have a strong sense of expectation to do. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 349, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, “big hit E14” is defined in association with the big hit type. The “big jackpot E14” is a big jackpot (8 round normal jackpot) of the type that is set to a time-saving state where the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds and 100 rounds after the jackpot ends. Since the short-time state in the 14th embodiment is more disadvantageous than the probability variation state, the “big hit E14” is the most disadvantageous big hit among the big hit types of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), the jackpot type is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “0 to 4” as the jackpot type. ing. This “big hit F14” has 16 rounds of big hits, and when winning in a gaming state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state after the big hit, while the latent state After winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot (16 round probability change jackpot) set to the latent probability state B (an advantageous state in which the first special symbol jackpot game is easy to be executed) is set. In addition, since the probability variation state set after the end of the “big hit F14” is set to 100 times as the number of time reductions, the probability variation state of the special symbol also ends at the same time as the completion of the time reduction times. Therefore, when the “big hit F14” is won in a gaming state other than the latent state, there is no possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state. This is intended to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn in a gaming state other than the latent probability state.

  Further, “big hit G14” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5-79” as the big hit type. This “big hit G14” has 16 rounds of big hits, and when winning in a gaming state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state after the big hit, while the latent state After winning the big hit, the type of big hit (16 rounds probable big hit) set to the latent probability state A (the most advantageous state in which the second special symbol small hit game is likely to be executed) is set. In addition, since the probability variation state set after the end of “big hit G14” is set to 100 times as the number of time reductions, like “big hit F14”, an irregularity in which a right hand is made in a gaming state other than the latent probability state. It is possible to suppress the game method.

  Further, “big hit H14” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “80 to 99” as the big hit type. This “big hit H14” has 16 rounds of the big hit, and when winning in a gaming state other than the latent state, it is set to the most disadvantageous normal state after the big hit, while in the latent state When winning, it is a type of jackpot (16 round normal jackpot) that is set to a short time after the jackpot ends. In addition, when a “big hit H14” is won in a gaming state other than the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed game state other than the latent state is set. It is for aiming at.

  Next, details of the probability variation A table 202f21 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 350 shows the specified contents of the probability variation A table 202f21. As shown in FIG. 350, in the probability variation A table 202f21, for each special symbol type, a correspondence relationship between the gaming state at the time of executing the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern that can be selected is defined. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the probability variation state, the variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more. Become. In the latent state, the long variation of the first special symbol is selected as in the case where the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the probability variation state.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result in the probability variation state, while a short variation time of 0.1 seconds to 1 second is set in the latent certain state. Is set. As a result, when a right ball is made in the probability variation state and game balls continuously enter the sorting device 6400D, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol become long, and the gaming efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method of making a right turn in the probability variation state. On the other hand, if the player hits the right in the latent state, the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2 are alternately entered. And the change display of the second special symbol are executed in an overlapping manner. However, as shown in FIG. 350, in the latent state, the long variation of the first special symbol is set, while the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second or less, so the right-handed game is continued. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, an advantageous state is formed in which winning is continuously performed only for the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, the latent state A that is most advantageous to the player is formed.

  Next, details of the probability variation B table 202f22 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 351 shows the specified contents of the probability variation B table 202f22. As shown in FIG. 351, the probability variation B table 202f22 is configured such that the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state is exactly the same as the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350). As a result, when a game ball continuously enters the sorting device 6400D by making a right turn in a probability variation state in which a scenario in which a variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation B table 202f22 is set, the probability variation is changed. As in the case where the A table 202f21 is referred to, as a result of the game balls being alternately distributed to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, The variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol become long, and the gaming efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method of making a right turn in the probability variation state.

  In the latent state, the variation time of the first special symbol is 1 second or less, while the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a long variation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Is done. As a result, if the right strike is made in the latent state, the fluctuation display of 1 second or less of the first special symbol and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate, so the right strike game is continued. By performing, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed at a higher frequency than the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, an advantageous state (latent state B) is formed in which the first special symbol is won continuously only for small hits. Note that the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 1/5, whereas the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 59/60. The frequency at which the small hit game is executed is lower than in the latent state A. That is, the latent state B forms a state having a lower advantage than the latent state A. Therefore, in the latent state, it is advantageous for the player that the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350).

  Next, the details of the normal table 202f23 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202f23. As shown in FIG. 352, the normal table 202f23 is configured such that the same variation time as the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state is selected. That is, by making the first special symbol lottery by left-handed, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is set, while in the normal state, the short-time state, and the probability-changing state, the right handing is continued. As a result, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2. As a result, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, and the first special symbol changes. The time and the variation time of the second special symbol become longer, and the gaming efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn in a state other than the latent state.

  Next, a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 343. explain. FIG. 341 is a diagram illustrating a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 341, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is roughly divided into five states. That is, the normal state shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, the time reduction state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, the probability changing state shown on the center of FIG. , A latent state A shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341 is provided.

  The normal state indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability that the jackpot is low (1/240), the most disadvantageous gaming state in which the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be released. Form. Also, the short time state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol, and the probability that the jackpot is low (1/240) is easy to open the electric accessory 64a. By hitting, a relatively advantageous gaming state is formed in which a game can be played without reducing the ball. In addition, the probability variation state indicates the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol, and there is a high probability of being a big hit (1/80), and the electric utility item 64a is easily opened, so it is left-handed. By performing the above, it is possible to form a gaming state that is more advantageous than the short-time state in which a game can be played without reducing the ball. In addition, the latent probability state A and the latent probability state B indicate the probability variation state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of a big hit is high (1/80). Is a gaming state that is difficult to open. It should be noted that, in the latent state B, the right hitting makes it easy to execute the first special symbol small hit game, so that the second specific winning opening 650a that allows the game ball to enter the right hit is entered. A game ball is entered relatively frequently (every time the first special symbol lottery is executed about 5 times) to form an advantageous state in which a winning ball can be obtained. On the other hand, in the latent state A, as described above, it is easy to execute the small hit game of the second special symbol by making a right strike, so the first specific prize that allows a game ball to enter by making a right strike is provided. A state advantageous to the latent state B in which a winning ball can be obtained by frequently entering the mouth 65a (almost every time the second special symbol lottery is executed) is formed.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 341, there is a possibility that a transition from the normal state to another state is possible only when a big hit is made. Specifically, as shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, if the jackpot A14 is determined (decided) as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends Transition to the most advantageous latent state A. Also, if one of the big hits B14 to D14, which is a big hit of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the big hit type, is selected (determined), the probability variation state becomes relatively advantageous after the big hit ends. Transition. Furthermore, when the jackpot E14, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the system shifts to a short-time state after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, in the normal state, winning the jackpot always shifts to an advantageous state as compared to the normal state, so that it is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a big hit.

  In addition, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, there is a possibility that the shift from the short-time state to another state may occur not only when the jackpot is reached but also when the short-time number is completed. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, if the jackpot A14 is determined (decided) as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends Transition to the most advantageous latent state A. Also, if one of the big hits B14 to D14, which is a big hit of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the big hit type, is selected (determined), the probability variation state becomes relatively advantageous after the big hit ends. Transition. Further, after the time reduction state is set, the normal time state that is most disadvantageous for the player is made directly (without going through the jackpot) by elapse (termination) a predetermined number of time reductions (100 times). On the other hand, when the jackpot E14 is determined as a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the short-time state, if a big hit is made, the game state shifts to a more advantageous game state, or at least the current gaming state (short-time state) is maintained, but the short-time number is ended. If it does, it will shift to a disadvantageous normal state, and it can be made to play a game in anticipation of winning a big hit before the time-short state ends.

  In addition, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of transition from the probability variation state to another state when a big hit is made or when a specified number of time reductions has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, when the jackpot E14 is selected (determined) as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, the probability changes after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the short state, which is disadvantageous than the state. Further, when the jackpot A14, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state B after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, by passing a specified number of times (10 times, 25 times, or 50 times) after the probability change state has been set, it is possible to directly enter the extended resort mode A that is relatively advantageous to the player (without going through big hits). To). On the other hand, when one of the big hits B14 to D14, which is a big hit of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the big hit type, is determined, the probability variation state is set again after the big hit. Therefore, in the probability variation state, the rate of transition to the more advantageous state in the case of a big hit is low (a proportion of 5%), while the time-short state is terminated, so that a more advantageous latent state is surely achieved. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that strongly expects that the short-time state will end.

  In addition, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 341, the process shifts from the latent state B to another state not only when the jackpot is reached, but also when the specified number of probability changes (100 times after the jackpot is finished) is finished. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the lower part of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14 or C14 is determined (determined), the jackpot of the first special symbol is determined at a rate of 55% as the jackpot type. After the completion, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state B. When the jackpot E14 determined as a jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type is selected (determined), it shifts to an unfavorable time-saving state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the probability variation number (100 times after the jackpot is finished) is finished, the state is shifted to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the jackpot B14, D14, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the latent state B is set again after the jackpot ends. The For this reason, in the latent state B, it is possible to realize a game that makes it possible to expect to win a big hit before the number of times of probability change ends and the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state.

  In addition, as shown in the lower right side of FIG. 341, the process shifts from the latent state A to another state not only when the jackpot is reached, but also when the specified number of probability changes (100 times after the jackpot is finished) is finished. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the lower part of FIG. 341, when the jackpot F14 determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends A transition is made to the latent state A, which has a relatively low degree of advantage. In addition, when the jackpot H14 determined as a jackpot type and determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the system shifts to an unfavorable time-saving state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the probability variation number (100 times after the jackpot is finished) is finished, the state is shifted to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot G14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the latent state A is set again after the jackpot ends. For this reason, in the latent state A, the most advantageous latent state A is highly probable by winning the jackpot before the number of times of probability variation ends and the transition to the most disadvantageous normal state is made. A very advantageous gaming state that loops at a rate of 75%).

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, there are two types of games, a latent probability state A and a latent probability state B, as advantageous states in which a winning ball can be obtained without a big hit by a small hit game. It was set as the structure which provides a state. Both of these states are latent states (special symbol probability variation state and normal symbol normal state), and by varying the variation pattern scenario, it is biased toward the second special symbol lottery with high probability of small hits It is configured to form a latent state A to be executed (with a bias) and a latent state B to be executed with a bias (with a bias) toward the first special symbol having a low small hit probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize different game playability (gameability capable of acquiring more prize balls and gameplay ability that is difficult to obtain prize balls) in one latent state. Can improve the interest of the elderly. Also, unlike the thirteenth embodiment described above, the latent state can be made the most advantageous gaming state and the normal state can be formed as the most unfavorable gaming state. Therefore, the normal state that shifts when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. It is not necessary to make any control different between the state and the normal state that is shifted through another gaming state. Therefore, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most unfavorable gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state may be configured as one of advantageous states in which a small hit game is easily executed. That is, in addition to the latent state A and the latent state B, the normal state may be a state advantageous to the player. By comprising in this way, since an advantageous state increases more, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the 14th embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the latent state, the long variation is always set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It is not limited to this. For example, when switching from a right-handed game to a left-handed game, such as immediately after the jackpot ends or when the number of probability changes has elapsed in the latent state, over the first special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (for example, 4 times) Even if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, long variation may not be set (a variation time of 20 seconds or less is set). That is, as a variation pattern scenario, when the variation display executed at the first time after the jackpot ends or at the 100th after the jackpot ends is the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is not dependent on the situation of the holding ball, A scenario in which a variation time of 20 seconds or less is selected may be set. Further, in this case, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds) within 5 times after the end of the jackpot and in the range of 100 to 105 times after the end of the jackpot. May be. By configuring in this way, after the jackpot, the holding ball of the second special symbol can be set to 0 before the first variable display of the first special symbol is finished. In spite of having performed, it can suppress that the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol will be in the disadvantageous state which performs a long fluctuation.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the latent state, the variation time of the first special symbol is lengthened, so that Although it has been configured to reduce the gaming efficiency when playing right-handed games in the gaming state and to suppress irregular gaming methods that play right-handed games in a state other than the latent state, it is not limited to this . For example, in a state other than the latent state, the first special symbol may be configured to perform long fluctuation when the total number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more. When a regular game method (left-handed game) is performed in a state other than the latent state, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are accumulated, so the number of reserved balls is four at the maximum. On the other hand, when an irregular gaming method is performed in which a right-handed game is performed in a gaming state other than the latent state, a gaming ball alternately enters the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2. There are more than 5 holding balls. Therefore, by continuing the right handing, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol form a very unfavorable gaming state with long fluctuations. Therefore, an irregular game in which a right handing is made in a gaming state other than the latent state. Control over the method can be achieved. At first glance, the right-hand strike is stopped when the first special symbol variation display is started, and the right-hand strike is resumed when the first special symbol variation is completed, so that the number of reserved balls becomes 4 or less. It seems that there is a way to adjust the game to play. However, when this method is performed, as the number of lotteries for the first special symbol increases, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol that changes long regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls increases. When the lottery is performed four times, there are almost four holding balls. Therefore, since the first special symbol also becomes long fluctuation thereafter, a disadvantageous state in which the game efficiency is remarkably bad is formed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn in a state other than the latent state.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, a probability state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed by increasing the probability of winning the second special symbol than the probability of winning the first special symbol. The latent state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous than that, but is not limited thereto. Instead of, or in addition to, varying the probability of hitting depending on the type of special symbol, for example, in the small bonus of the first special symbol, in the small bonus game of one time than the small bonus of the second special symbol By configuring so that the number of game balls that can be won is likely to be reduced, the latent state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed may be advantageous. . In place of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the entrance to the second specific prize opening 650a that is released when the first special symbol is won is determined by the second special symbol. If the number of winning balls is less than the number of winning balls based on entering the first specific winning opening 65a that is released in the event of becoming, the latent state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. You may comprise so that it may become. By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be varied in many ways, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 359. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the probability variation state (special symbol (special symbol) is terminated by ending the time-shortening state in the state where the probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) is set. In the state where the high probability state (normal probability of low probability state) is set, and when the big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1), the gaming state in which the jackpot variation is in the latent state (It is an advantageous state in which a small hit game is easy to be executed). Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, when the number of time reductions is completed before the number of times of probability change in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is changed to the latent probability state (an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easily executed). And was configured to migrate.

  On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the second special symbol lottery is executed during execution of the jackpot variation, so that It is possible to shift to the latent state during execution of the big hit fluctuation. That is, it is configured such that it is possible to form an advantageous state in which a small hit game is easily executed even during execution of a big hit variation. Further, by adopting the same state transition as in the eleventh embodiment, the game state after the big hit is more advantageous in the latent state than in the probability change state. As a result, when the remaining time until the end of the jackpot change is small (even if the jackpot game is easy to be executed, the jackpot game is started without being able to execute the jackpot game almost) Even if it exists, it can make a player think that he wants to finish a short number of times. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameability in which the lottery of the second special symbol is actively executed during execution of the big hit variation.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed and the main controller 110 The configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the eleventh embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 354 and FIG. 355, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 354 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 354, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment has a right side area (right-handed game) of the gaming board 13 with respect to the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above. This is different in that the configuration of the area where the sphere launched by (3) flows down is different. Further, the difference is that a central first entrance 64c is provided instead of the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2.

  As shown in FIG. 354, a ball path ZK1 through which game balls can flow down (pass) is formed in the right region of the game board 13, and the through gate 67 and the variable winning device 1650 are sequentially arranged from the upstream side of the ball path ZK1. The second entrance 640 accompanied by the electric accessory 640a and the small winning variable winning device 2650 that is opened during the small winning game are arranged. In addition, a right first entrance 64r serving as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol when a game ball enters is provided above the second entrance 640. The game ball that has flowed down the ball path ZK1 has a right first entrance 64r where the game ball that rolls along the ball path ZK1 is difficult to enter (repulsion (interference with the ball path ZK1 and other game balls)). ) Where the ball can be entered only when Therefore, 90% or more of the right-handed game balls enter the second entrance 640 or pass through the second entrance 640 to the small winning variable winning device 2650 or the out entrance 66. Enter the ball. The ratio of the game balls entering the right first entrance 64r is about 1 in 20.

  The variable winning device 1650 arranged in the ball path ZK1 is a device that performs an opening / closing operation in accordance with a predetermined opening scenario when winning a jackpot in a lottery of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The open / close door 1650f is variable between a specific winning opening 1650a, an open state in which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 1650a, and a closed state in which it is more difficult (impossible) to enter the ball than in the open state. Each time one ball enters during the big hit game, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The second entrance 640 has an opening formed so as to cut out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of the ball path ZK1, and each time one ball enters, one prize ball is entered. It is configured so that the ball is paid out. Moreover, it is comprised so that it may become a trigger of the lottery (fluctuation) of a 2nd special symbol similarly to the 1st control example mentioned above. The opening of the second entrance 640 is covered with an electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a is in an open state in which a ball can enter and is more difficult to enter than in the open state. It is configured such that the ease of entering the ball can be varied by variably controlling the closed state to be possible.

  In a state where the opening of the second entrance 640 is covered with the electric accessory 640a (closed state), the sphere that has flowed down the ball path ZK1 passes over the electric accessory 640a and goes downstream of the ball path ZK1. It is configured to flow down. That is, in the ball path ZK1, a game ball that flows down to the downstream side of the second entrance 640 is a game ball that has not entered (but failed to enter) the second entrance 640.

  Of the ball path ZK1, the ball flowing down downstream from the second entrance 640 reaches the small winning variable winning device 2650. The small winning prize winning device 2650 includes a small winning prize opening 2650a and an opening / closing door 2650f for covering the opening of the small winning prize opening 2650a. It has an opening formed so as to cut out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of ZK1, and each time one ball enters, 10 balls are paid out as award balls. .

  The small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is operated to open during a small hitting game executed when winning a small winning in the special symbol (second special symbol) lottery, and the opening / closing door 2650f is predetermined. When the ball is opened in the open scenario, the ball is variably controlled between an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where it is more difficult (impossible) to enter the ball than the open state. In the fifteenth embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the winning combination is made with a high probability (for example, 59/60). .

  In the closed state in which the opening / closing door 2650f closes the small winning prize opening 2650a, the sphere that has flowed down the ball path ZK1 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f and flows down toward the out port 66. . The upper surface (sphere passage surface) of the opening / closing door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the sphere, and is configured so that one second is required for the sphere to pass over the opening / closing door 2650f. . By providing this delay means, it is possible to secure the necessary ball passing time in a smaller space. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifteenth embodiment, the delay means is opened and closed so as to be a ball path having a high frictional resistance (friction coefficient) (higher frictional resistance than other ball path surfaces of the ball path ZK1). A concavo-convex portion is formed on the upper surface of the door 2650f so that the sphere can get over.

  As the delay means, a spherical delay passage (for example, a passage in which the spherical passage is folded) is formed by devising the structure of the spherical passage surface, or the spherical delay passage is devised by devising the material of the spherical passage surface. Anything may be used as long as it can form a sphere or delay the passage time for a sphere to pass through a predetermined section.

  Furthermore, a ball launched by a left-handed game (a game aiming at the left region (left region) of the variable display device unit 80) enters each winning opening (entrance port) provided in the above-described ball path ZK1. As a regulating member (regulating means) for regulating the situation, a nail is implanted below the game board 13 (below the first entrance 64 and to the right). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide different games for the right-handed game and the left-handed game to the player, and therefore, it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired (less tired) for the player. .

  Next, details of the sphere flow in the right region in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 355 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flow in a state where the short-time state or the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, and FIG. 355 (b) is a case where the latent probability state is set as the gaming state. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the ball | bowl flow in the state performed.

  The ball path ZK1 of the game board 13 of the fifteenth embodiment is based on the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 640 (by the time the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640) The time required is 0.5 seconds. The ball passing time on the electric accessory 640a covering the second entrance 640 (the time required for the ball to pass (flow down) from the upstream end to the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a) is 1 second. doing.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the high probability state (short time state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.1 second. ˜0.4 seconds, that is, a time shorter than the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 640 is set. In addition, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a 0.2 second opening operation is executed twice with a 0.8 second closing period in between. That is, it is configured to perform an opening operation in which a closing period shorter than a time (1 second) in which the ball passes over the electric accessory 640a is set.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (a), when the right-handed game is played when the short-time state is set as the game state, most balls enter the second entrance 640. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the variation time of the normal symbol is set in a time less than half of the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 640 (0.5 seconds), Even if a lottery with the result of the lottery being missed is performed once, the ball that caused the lottery to be missed can be entered into the second entrance 640 by winning in the next lottery. it can.

  On the other hand, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 to 5 seconds, that is, from the through gate 67 to the second entrance. A time longer than the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) up to 640 is set. Further, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a 0.04 second opening operation is executed once. That is, it is configured such that the sphere can enter the second entrance 640 only for 0.04 seconds for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (b), when a right-handed game is played when the latent state is set as the gaming state, most of the balls do not enter the second entrance 640. The ball will flow down to the winning device 2650 for small hits. In the fifteenth embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is 1 second, and the ball is fired once every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, it is configured such that one ball always stays on the electric accessory 640a by continuously playing the right-handed game.

  By configuring in this way, when a normal symbol lottery is won, the ball can be surely entered into the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol lottery can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed in the gaming state (probability change state, short time state, latent probability state) in which the hit game is executed. As described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the winning ball is won with a high probability. Therefore, in the latent state, the game ball enters the second entrance 640 at intervals of 3 to 5 seconds. In this manner, it is possible to enter the game ball into the small hitting prize winning device 2650 and acquire the winning ball. In other words, a small hit game is frequently executed by lottery of the second special symbol, and an advantageous state in which prize balls based on the small hit can be frequently acquired is formed. On the other hand, in the short-time state or the probability variation state, almost all game balls that have been hit to the right enter the second entrance 640 (or the right first entrance 64r), so small hit games are frequently executed. However, it is extremely difficult to make the game ball reach the small hitting prize winning device 2650 during the small hitting game execution period. Therefore, the probability variation state and the short-time state are simply states that allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 (or the right first entrance 64r) efficiently. The degree of advantage is low compared to the certain state (it is difficult to win a prize ball).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 356, description will be given of various operations that are characteristic operations in the fifteenth embodiment when winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variation state. FIG. 356 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the change display effect executed in response to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 and the change situation of each special symbol in the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, like each of the embodiments described above, has a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. (Dynamic display) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  As shown in FIG. 356, chance zone display (see FIG. 297 (b)) is set as the effect mode in the probability variation state. In addition, during the probabilistic state, as described above, most of the game balls launched by right-handed hit the second entrance 640 and rarely (for example, at a rate of 1 in 20) to the right Enter the first entrance 64r. Therefore, during the probability variation state, the number of time reductions is subtracted basically by executing the lottery of the second special symbol. Also, if the big special draw is won in the second special symbol during the probability variation state, the probability variation state is looped at a rate of about 75% and the time shortening state at a rate of 20%, as in the eleventh embodiment described above. It is configured to shift (fall). In other words, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state is low even if a big hit in the probability change state is reached, so that the number of time reductions is shorter than the big hit as in the case of the eleventh embodiment. Can play games with a strong expectation that Even if a game ball enters the right first entrance 64r and the first special symbol lottery is executed, it will not win a small hit, but in the probability variation state, as described above, Since it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the small win winning device 2650, the change in the first special symbol and the change in the second special symbol are executed in duplicate (simultaneously), thereby shortening the time. The player can have an impression that the number of times can be subtracted more. Therefore, in the probability changing state, the more the game ball enters the right first entrance 64r, the more the player can have an impression that the player is approaching the latent state. Can improve interest in

  When the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the number of time reductions ends, as described above, the state shifts to a more advantageous latent state, and frequently A small hit game of the second special symbol is executed, and a very advantageous state in which a game ball can be easily won to the small hit prize winning device 2650 is formed. In the latent state, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the player does not win a small hit, so the player has the impression that the remaining number of probability changes has been subtracted once. You can make it. Therefore, in the probability variation state, it is possible to realize a game property that expects more game balls to enter the right first entrance 64r, whereas in the latent state, the right first entrance 64r. It is possible to realize a game that makes it possible to expect that a game ball will not enter. That is, it is possible to realize a novel gameability capable of switching the role of the right first entrance 64r (whether or not it is a preferred entrance) according to the gaming state. .

  Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, by changing the opening control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 for each gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol can be performed even in the time-short state or the probability variation state. The configuration is mainly executed. That is, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the second special symbol lottery is executed even if the first special symbol lottery is executed without setting the long variation of the second special symbol in the short-time state or the probability variation state. Even so, a relatively short variation time is set. As a result, in the probability variation state, the number of times is reduced by lottery of the second special symbol, and the gameability aiming at the most advantageous latent state is realized. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to realize a game that digests the number of times of the second special symbol during execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 356, in the state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game, and a relatively low ratio (for example, the number of the game balls that have been launched). At a ratio of 1/20), the game state is such that the lottery of the first special symbol is also executed. In other words, the probability variation state is a state in which the electric symbol 640a is easy to open because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game ball is easy to enter the second entrance 640, and the small hit A game state is formed in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the prize winning device 2650. In this probability variation state, when a big win is won by lottery of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 356, during the big hit variation, only the second special symbol lottery is executed by right-handed. In the fifteenth embodiment, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is executed when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery in the probability variation state. During the big hit change in the probability variation state, the change display of the first special symbol is interrupted every time a small hit is made in the second special symbol lottery. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a plurality of lotteries for the second special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, it is possible to execute the variation display of the second special symbol for the remaining number of times. In this case, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating (the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203h is on), it is not possible to win the jackpot redundantly in the lottery of the second special symbol (the lottery result is lost or It will be a small hit). Therefore, while the long variation of the first special symbol is being executed, there is no possibility that the probability variation state or the short-time state will be set by winning the lottery of the second special symbol. Thereby, every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it becomes an extremely advantageous state in which the number of time reductions can be surely subtracted. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, 90% or more is set to a fluctuation time of 1 second. Therefore, by continuously executing the right handing during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, the long fluctuation Regardless of the number of time reductions at the start of the time, the number of time reductions can be almost ended during the long fluctuation. Note that, during execution of the jackpot fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the first special symbol, a super chance zone effect (see FIG. 357) described later is executed. That is, the effect mode for showing that it shifts to an advantageous latent state is executed by executing the right strike and ending the number of time reductions.

  As shown in FIG. 356, during the execution of the super chance zone effect (that is, during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol in the probability variation state), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed until the number of time reductions elapses (ends). When executed, the gaming state is changed from the probability changing state to the latent state. In other words, the state shifts from the state where it is difficult to reach the game ball to the small winning prize device 2650 to the state where it is easy to reach the game ball to the small winning prize device 2650. Therefore, until the big hit is started, it is possible to entertain an advantageous game in which a small hit game is frequently won and a prize ball based on winning in the small win winning device 2650 can be obtained. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Note that after the transition to the latent state, a RUSH effect (see FIG. 7B) is executed as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, when the jackpot is started after entering the latent state, the game state (number of times reduced) after the jackpot can be set with reference to the latent state. In other words, since the ratio of looping through the same state is high (75% of the time, the latent state is set again after the jackpot is completed), it can be handled as having won the jackpot in the latent state, so the end of the jackpot Even later, it is possible to increase the possibility that the latent state will be continued. Therefore, when the super chance zone effect is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is difficult to enter the right first entrance 64r even if the right hand is made, and the variation time of the big hit variation of the second special symbol is also Because it is short, it becomes difficult to digest the remaining number of times by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, a normal jackpot effect is executed during the jackpot variation of the second special symbol.

  Next, characteristic effects in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the super chance zone effect will be described with reference to FIG. 357 (a). This super chance zone effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol in the probability variation state. When this super-chance zone effect is executed, the character 811 performs an effect of finding the carrot images NG1 to NG3 simulating carrots, and the display area HR1 is “find carrots! Is displayed. In addition, the characters “15 remaining” are displayed in the display area HR2. Furthermore, the characters “Super Chance Zone Entry !!” are displayed in the sub display area Ds. With these display contents, it can be easily understood that the character 811 is more advantageous for the player by eating all the carrots shown in the carrot image. In the fifteenth embodiment, after the super chance zone effect is started, an effect in which the character 811 eats carrots one by one is executed every time the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the remaining number of times and the remaining number of carrots are linked (synchronized). In other words, by eating all the carrots, it can be easily understood that the state shifts to a latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

  If the character 811 can eat carrots before the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is finished in the probability variation state (as the number of times is reduced), as shown in FIG. 357, the display area HR1 On the other hand, the characters “complete meal! RUSH start!” Are displayed, and the characters “remaining zero” are displayed in the display area HR2. In addition, the characters “RUSH rush!” Are displayed in the sub display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the player has entered (shifted) to the most advantageous latent state (RUSH state).

  In the fifteenth embodiment, as the super chance zone effect, the character 811 performs an effect of eating one carrot for each change, thereby allowing the number of remaining lotteries until the latent state is reached to be suggested. However, it is not limited to this. As long as the remaining number of times can be suggested, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, as in the twelfth embodiment, the remaining number of times is suggested by the height of climbing the rock (the remaining distance to the top). It is good also as composition to do.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the super-chance zone effect is configured to execute an effect suggesting the remaining number of lotteries until the number of times shortened, but instead of or in addition to this, the first special symbol It is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation (for example, countdown display etc. of remaining time) which suggests the remaining time until jackpot fluctuation | variation is complete | finished. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a right-handed game more seriously in an attempt to finish the number of times before the suggested remaining time elapses, so the player's interest in gaming is improved Can be made.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359. First, with reference to FIG. 358, details of the second random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 358, in the second per random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment, “0 to 230” is selected as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol low probability state. 230 random numbers (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358, 231 random values (counter values) of “0 to 231” are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be normal symbol hits in the normal symbol time-short state. Yes.

  In other words, the fifteenth embodiment is configured such that, even when the normal symbol is in the short-time state or the normal symbol in the normal state, the normal symbol is almost hit every time it passes through the through gate 67. As a result, when the right-handed game is performed in the short-time state or the probability-changing state, or when the right-handed game is performed in the latent state, the second electric entry 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the second A state in which it is possible to enter the entrance 640 can be formed. Note that, as described above, in the short-time state and the probability variation state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the release time is lengthened. On the other hand, in the latent state, the variation time of the regular symbol is long and the release time is shortened. . As a result, almost all game balls that have reached the second entrance 640 can enter the second entrance 640 in the short-time state or the probable change state. On the other hand, in the latent state, the game ball easily passes through the second entrance 640 while the second entrance 640 is closed, so that the game ball enters the small hit prize device 2650. It becomes easy to do. Therefore, it is possible to form a state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-short state or the probability variation state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 359 (a), the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 359 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time reduction / probability change table 202f2. As shown in FIG. 359 (a), the time reduction / probability changing table 202f2 according to the fifteenth embodiment is long for 600 seconds regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the big win is obtained in the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, when the variation is set, when the first special symbol is not selected, the middle variation of 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 359 (a), a relatively short variation pattern of 1 second to 20 seconds is defined in association with the variation pattern of the second special symbol. As a result, when the big win is made by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, it is possible to continuously execute only the lottery of the second special symbol by continuing the right handing. Therefore, by continuously making a right turn in the probability variation state, the second special symbol can be drawn at a relatively short interval, and the number of time reductions can be digested. Therefore, it is possible to easily shift to the most advantageous latent state during execution of the big hit variation.

  Next, the latent probability table 202f3 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 359 (b). FIG. 359 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability table 202f3. As shown in FIG. 359 (b), in the latent probability table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment, a long variation of 600 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol regardless of the lottery result. A relatively short variation time of 20 seconds or less is defined as the special symbol variation time. Therefore, a more advantageous gaming state is formed in which the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed than the latent probability state or the probability variation state. In other words, since only the small bonus game of the second special symbol is executed and the chances of entering the small bonus winning device 2650 are increased, the right change is ended until the number of probability change ends or the big hit is reached. A gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be continuously acquired by hitting is formed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, by making a right-hand hit in the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the small winning prize device 2650 and the second The board surface configuration and the control of the electric accessory 640a in the time-saving state were configured so that the special symbol lottery was easily executed. On the other hand, in the latent state, by making a right strike, an advantageous game state is formed in which the game balls enter the second entrance 640 and the small hitting prize winning device 2650 in a well-balanced manner. . That is, in the game state other than the normal state, the game is progressed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, while the game ball is moved to the small winning prize device 2650 in the state other than the latent state. It is set as the structure which suppresses entering. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize an easy-to-understand gameability that the game is advanced by lottery of the second special symbol in all game states other than the normal state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the big hit variation, thereby shortening the time. The number of times is subtracted, and it is possible to shift to the latent state during execution of the big hit variation. That is, it is configured such that it is possible to form an advantageous state in which a small hit game is easily executed even during execution of a big hit variation. Furthermore, by making it possible to digest the short-time state during execution of the big hit variation and shift to the latent state, it becomes a latent state when the first special symbol lottery is won. It becomes easy to start the jackpot from. In other words, since the gaming state after the jackpot end can be set with reference to the latent state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the latent state will continue even after the end of the jackpot. . As a result, regardless of the remaining number of short-time states, a very special and innovative gameplay is realized in which the right-hand hit is continued during the big hit fluctuation aiming to end the short-time number during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. can do. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the common variation pattern selection table (time variation / accuracy variation table 202f2) in the time reduction state and the probability variation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the case of a short-time state, the variation time may be shortened when the first special symbol is a lottery. This is because there is no merit for the player even if the number of times is reduced in the time reduction state.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the probability variation state, only a long variation of 600 seconds is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an arbitrary variation time is set. May be. The shorter the variation time, the higher the possibility that a big hit will be started before the number of time reductions is ended even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed during the probability variation state. When the jackpot variation of the symbol is executed (when the super chance zone effect is started), the game can be performed with a sense of tension. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. On the other hand, the longer the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to finish the number of times during the jackpot fluctuation, so when a super chance zone starts, A game can be performed. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

<Modification of Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment described above, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) is executed every time the number of lotteries for which the number of time reductions may elapse (end) is reached. In addition to this, the present modification is configured to execute the river break-through effect as an effect suggesting that the player wins the jackpot during the chance zone (normal symbol time-short state). In addition, when the river breakthrough effect is started, a privilege (reward) that can be given to the player when the river is broken is notified in advance. As a result, it is possible to give the player a greater variety of expectations.

  First, with reference to FIG. 360 (a), a display mode at the start of a river breakthrough effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 360 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the river breakthrough effect executed at the number of lotteries that may end the number of time reductions. As shown in FIG. 360 (a), in the river breakthrough effect in this modified example, the privilege (reward) given to the player when the river breaks through the current river breakthrough effect is displayed on the display area HR1. It is configured to do. In the example of FIG. 360 (a), the case where it is notified that RUSH is given as a privilege (transition to the latent state) by successful river breakthrough is illustrated. That is, the display area HR1 shows a state in which the characters “Arrive at the first river! This display content allows the player to understand that rushing into the RUSH by breaking through the river, so that the game can be played paying attention to the result of the river breaking effect. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 360 (a), for example, there are suggested contents such as “Continue with Breakthrough! End with Fall ...”, Suggestion Contents with “Breakthrough with Breakthrough! End with Fall ...”, etc. Yes. In this way, by giving variations to the suggested content, it is possible to vary the player's sense of expectation for the river breakthrough effect according to the suggested content. For example, in the case of the display content “RUSH with breakthrough! End with drop ...”, there is a large difference in the degree of advantage between breaking through and dropping, so that the breakthrough is expected more strongly. Can do. In addition, in the case of the display content of “Large hit by breakthrough! End by fall ...”, either the accidental hit or end of the short-time count ends at the timing when the short-time count may end Therefore, it can be felt that the possibility of being a big hit is low. Therefore, even if the time-short state ends, the shock can be eased. Furthermore, in this display mode, an effect of breaking through the river is executed, so that a big surprise and joy can be given to the player. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the present modification, as described above, the river breakthrough effect can be executed even at a timing when there is no possibility that the time reduction state will end. That is, the river breakthrough effect is configured to be executed in the case of a big hit and in a part of the case of losing (for example, 1/100 of the case of losing). The display mode in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 360 (b). FIG. 360 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in a river breakthrough effect that is executed in a case of a big win and in a case of a loss. As shown in FIG. 360 (b), when there is no possibility that the time reduction will end, the river image KG having a narrower aspect than the normal river breakthrough effect is displayed. In addition, the characters “Discovered Ogawa! If you jumped over, hit or continue!” Are displayed in the display area HR1. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the break through the river itself has been confirmed. In the case of a jackpot, the jackpot is notified when the river breaks through, while the continuation is reported in the case of a miss.

  Thus, in this modification, even when a big hit is made during the chance zone, the big hit is notified by the river breakthrough effect. With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the production in the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand. Moreover, in this modification, it is set as the structure which alert | reports beforehand the privilege (reward) provided when a river breaks through at the time of the start of a river breakthrough effect. By configuring in this way, the player's sense of expectation for the river breakthrough effect can be varied according to the contents of the privilege, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that at the start of the river breakthrough effect that is executed in the case of jackpot or losing, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot or the number of hours set after the jackpot ends may be suggested. More specifically, for example, there are four white, green, and red letters as the “big hit” character color. When white, there is usually a high probability of big hit, and when green, the probability of big hit is likely. However, in the case of red, the probability variation is a big hit, and the possibility of a small number of times (0 or 10 times) is high (that is, it is easy to shift to the latent state). By configuring in this way, when green characters or red characters are displayed, it is possible to make the game play with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be notified, so the player's interest in the game is improved be able to.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the held ball number command Has been described from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, each of the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, different display means may be provided between the display means for displaying the main symbol highlighted in the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols in the third symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game that aims at the right region of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (short-time state) advantageous to the player, and the left region of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game is configured to be executed, but it is sufficient that the target area of the game board 13 is different depending on the gaming state. May execute a right-handed game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the game in a different game state can be performed aiming at the same area | region.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. It may be possible to use the operation means configured as a lever that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A discriminating touch sensor type operating means, a radio type operating means capable of discriminating an operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not on the main controller 110 but on the sound lamp controller 113 side.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in an effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. The main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process for executing a game (lottery) and a game (lottery) result are displayed as effects. The processing for this may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as “setting”) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured to be able to change the setting at the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused may be used.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine having a multi-stage setting, any combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) is one of a plurality of stages (for example, six stages) A typical example is one that can be set as follows, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, it is implemented as a pachinko machine that can vary the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when the jackpot hits, according to the setting May be. That is, according to the setting, the rate at which the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is varied, or the rate at which the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which a big jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is variable depending on the setting, or a big jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. It is good also as a structure which varies the advantageous degree for every setting by changing the ratio to change according to a setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot for which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is determined after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot for which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0) is granted. The ratio at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot is over, the ratio at which the jackpot is determined to be shifted to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) (or easy to shift) is varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) ) May be varied in accordance with the setting. Alternatively, a jackpot type may be provided in which the ratio determined only with a specific setting is significantly high (almost not determined with other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as the setting 6. And in setting 6, when the jackpot is a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as a structure. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that it is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so let the player play the game paying attention to the number of jackpot rounds be able to. Instead of this, or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time-short state is completed. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, a jackpot type in which a jackpot (or an accessory in the jackpot) is activated with an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined with a specific setting (the ratio to be determined increases). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is varied according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probability variation state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes jackpot probability high so that it is. This configuration is of a type that tends to increase the number of possessed balls as the number of lottery special symbols increases, especially in the probability variation state (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired). It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the probability variation state wins the next big win, and is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a high probability of small winning in the probability variation state, so that the advantage of high setting The sex can be increased. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probability variation state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big win is likely to increase. Therefore, in the probable state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the number of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more special symbols are used. These special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols is determined and the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed independently have been described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  About each embodiment mentioned above and each control example, you may comprise it combining all or one part.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (possible a small hit during specific special figure fluctuation)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the information, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display means, and the second determination can be executed. Second determination means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When 1 identification information is displayed, a 1st privilege game is performed, and when the said 2nd identification information for showing a specific 2nd determination result is displayed on the said 2nd display means, 2nd privilege game In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination; The gaming state setting means can set the first gaming state in the dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A1 characterized by

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is ended according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, the gaming machine described above is executed because the period during which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery to be performed, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the winning is not performed immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period during which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property that grants a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is greatly different. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine A1, since the first game state in which the second determination can be easily performed during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, the length of the period during which the first game state is set. Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since it can be made easy, the 1st game state can be made into the game state more advantageous to a player than the 2nd game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the first gaming state is set, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, the first entrance means, and the second entrance ball A third entering means different from the means, a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second entering means, and entering the second entering means is more difficult than the first state. Variable means capable of changing between two states, wherein the first determination means is configured to input the first ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The second determination means is configured to execute the second determination based on a game ball entering the third ball entry means, and in the second game state, the second determination means is configured to execute the second determination. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be easily changed to the first state rather than the first gaming state. 3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first determination can be made more difficult to execute in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to make it easier for the third ball entry means to play a ball and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. .

  In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, a high probability that a probability that is determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination is higher than normal is set. The game state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the start of dynamic display of the first identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is set with fewer privileges that can be given to the player than the first privilege game. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. In other words, in the second privilege game, since the privilege that can be given to the player is set smaller than that in the first privilege game, an excessive privilege is given to the player during the period in which the first gaming state is set. There is an effect that it can control giving.

<Characteristic B group> (Game content and special 1 and special 2 are set at once)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. Second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. Specific to the second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game and executing the second bonus game when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In the gaming machine, period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed; The effect determining means for determining the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, and the effect determined by the effect determining means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by having an execution executing means for executing.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is ended according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, the gaming machine described above is executed because the period during which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery to be performed, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the winning is not performed immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period during which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property that grants a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is greatly different. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination unit is determined by the effect determination unit, Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide fun for predicting a future game based on the effect executed for the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first privilege game. Characteristic gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game It is possible to predict the contents. Therefore, since the player can be watched for the effect, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. It has a settable gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. The gaming machine B3 is configured to execute the first gaming state during a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first gaming state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first privilege game is executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. The game which aims at a 2nd privilege game using can be performed. Furthermore, since the period during which the first game state is set can be predicted by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to play the game eagerly during the first game state. effective.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a normal first privilege game as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and a small first privilege game with less privileges granted to the player than the normal first privilege game. And the first dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determining means includes the case where the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means, and the case where the bonus game executing means performs the normal first A gaming machine B4, wherein one bonus game is executed and an effect of the same mode is determined when the first period is determined by the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determining means is a combination of two advantageous factors for determining the contents of the effect, the effect determining means has the same mode. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the contents of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of patterns of future game situations. And according to the progress state of the 1st game state, it becomes possible to raise the accuracy of prediction gradually. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of prediction for the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify that the most advantageous game content has been set for the player, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (rush notification)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. Second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. Specific to the second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game and executing the second bonus game when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In the gaming machine, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination can be set. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means and the gaming state setting means, it is determined that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. And a notification timing determination means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for showing to a person.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, in accordance with the lottery result, an advantageous gaming state (probability variation state) that is advantageous to the player is set for the period until winning the next jackpot after the bonus game is completed, and the player is notified that the gaming state has changed. There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect to be performed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). By the way, the gaming machine described above is configured to execute an effect to notify the effect based on the setting of the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous gaming state is set. Despite being in a state where a new lottery cannot be executed, the game state is informed and the player is discomforted. was there. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed can be determined based on the dynamic display status of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state has been set.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine C2 wherein the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state set based on the determination result of the first determination means executed separately from the second determination means is set, the notification is made based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. Timing is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand by combining the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

  The gaming machine C2 has dynamic display determination means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determination means When it is determined that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed by the automatic display determination means, the notification timing is determined based on the time point when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine C3 to play.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second determination can be executed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first gaming state for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, when the notification timing determination unit determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determination unit, the dynamic display of the second identification information ends. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing to perform.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, during the period in which the second determination cannot be performed, the fact that the first gaming state has been set is not notified and the second determination can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination cannot be executed despite the notification that the first gaming state has been set, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine C4, the gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determining unit that determines a period from the timing when the dynamic display of the second identification information is ended to the end of the first gaming state, based on the determination result by the remaining period determining unit. The game machine C5 is characterized by comprising notification determination means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, since it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on a period during which the second determination can be performed during the first gaming state, for example, the second determination is performed during the first gaming state. When the executable period has become extremely short, the player can be prevented from notifying that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the first game state is finished in a short period of time despite notifying the player that the first game state has been set. There is an effect that can be done.

<Characteristic D group> (Simultaneous change discards jackpot, interrupts jackpot)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the predetermined period, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means is displayed. Two display means, second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. A privilege game executing means to be executed, and a content of the second privilege game is a plurality of privilege contents. And a second privilege game type setting means for setting the second dynamic display means in a state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed, and when the second identification information indicating that it is the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means, A game having stop control means for executing stop control for dynamic display by the first dynamic display means based on the benefit content set by the second privilege game type setting means. Machine D1.

  Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gameability (so-called simultaneous variation type) in which a plurality of lotteries are executed simultaneously. In a gaming machine having such a game, when a lottery result of one lottery is a win, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed and other lottery games being executed are forced off Have been proposed (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly causes other lotteries to be stopped and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result in which the bonus game is executed is stopped and displayed regardless of the type of the bonus game. There was a problem of giving discomfort to the person. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the stop control content for the first dynamic display can be set according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, a situation that causes discomfort to the player is suppressed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D1, the stop control unit is configured to stop and display the dynamic display by the first dynamic display unit with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. The game machine D2 is capable of executing a temporary stop control in which measurement of a period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means is stopped until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to set whether the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege, and the privilege game to which a large privilege is granted is discarded by executing the privilege game to which a small privilege is granted. There is an effect that this can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set the first privilege type and the second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and the stop The gaming machine D3, wherein the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination unit is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display unit ends, and the specific first determination Until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means has an invalid means for invalidating the setting of the second benefit type. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalid means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it can suppress that a 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege game in which the 2nd privilege classification was set are performed continuously, and that an excessive privilege is provided with respect to a player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means, A gaming machine D5 that makes it easier to set the first privilege type than the second privilege type.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first privilege type is more easily set than the second privilege type, even if a large number of second privilege games are executed, it is possible to suppress an excessive privilege being given to the player. There is.

<Other Thought 1> (A latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second determination means, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, When the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a first privilege game is executed, and a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. When the second identification information for display is displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game, the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination. The first determination is executed rather than the first gaming state and the second determination. A gaming state setting means capable of setting the second gaming state, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that sets the first gaming state after the first bonus game is completed when the first gaming state is set during a predetermined period and a predetermined second condition is satisfied. E1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is ended according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, the gaming machine described above is executed because the period during which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery to be performed, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the winning is not performed immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period during which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property that grants a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is greatly different. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided before and after the first privilege game, an unexpected game can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Rush per bonus during the symbol determination period)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First stop display means for stopping display, stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for stopping display of the first identification information by the first stop display means, and second determination capable of executing the second determination Means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means, A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. And the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state during the stop display period in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G1 characterized by

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is ended according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, the gaming machine described above is executed because the period during which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, during the advantageous gaming state. If you win the next time immediately by the selected lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened. The period for which is set is longer. That is, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous game state is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property that grants a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is greatly different. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period during which the first gaming state is set, the period during which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. . In addition, since the first gaming state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the game content after the first gaming state ends is notified to the player in advance. It can be grasped. By configuring in this way, for example, when the first gaming state is set in a state where the specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first gaming state ends, It can be grasped in advance that the first privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the stop display period setting means sets a stop display period of a different length based on the determination result of the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determination means, so the first privilege game is based on the determination result of the first determination means. The presence / absence of execution and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination unit is the specific first determination result, the stop display period setting unit displays a stop display longer than the case other than the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that the period is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than the case other than the specific first determination result Since it becomes easy to be set, it is possible to execute the first gaming state in which a longer period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means can set stop display periods of different lengths when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be varied even in the case of the specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of the specific first determination result, the period during which the first game state is set is different, so that the player is eager to play a game so that a longer first game state is set. There is an effect that can be made.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination unit determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination unit determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G5 that is configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since it can be made easy, the 1st game state can be made into the game state more advantageous to a player than the 2nd game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the first gaming state is set, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (Winning win and small hitting RUSH at the time of short-term end fluctuation)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the privilege for executing the second privilege game is displayed. In a gaming machine having gaming execution means, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a second that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. A game state setting means capable of setting a game state, and The setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state during a first period in which the second determination can be performed when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized by that.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is ended according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, whether or not an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set is set based on only one lottery result. There was a problem that the game could not be played while being entertained. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine H1, since the first gaming state can be set for the first period when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be executed reliably. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first gaming state is ended without executing the second determination despite the setting of the first gaming state, and the player is dissatisfied. Can provide no games.

  The gaming machine H1 includes a first determination number measuring unit that can measure the number of times of the first determination executed by the first determination unit, and the first determination number measured by the first determination number measurement unit. The gaming machine H2, wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, so the first determination by the first determination means is executed. Thus, the game content can be surely advanced toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a state in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when playing a game for a long time, and to suppress discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the judgment result of the first judgment means is the specific first judgment result.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, so that the player knows There is an effect that an easy game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means When the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set for a second period during which the second determination is difficult to execute. A gaming machine H4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only in the second period in which it is difficult to execute the second determination. Thereby, the 1st game state set when only the 1st predetermined condition is materialized can be made into the game state which becomes disadvantageous to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

  In the gaming machine H4, the gaming state setting means is shorter than the first period when the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set for a third period longer than two periods.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H4, when only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the first gaming condition is set higher than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the game can be performed eagerly to establish the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristics I> (Expectation of small hitting RUSH entry is variable at short times)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the privilege for executing the second privilege game is displayed. A game execution means, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination can be set. A gaming state setting means, wherein the gaming state setting means The means is capable of setting a third gaming state in which the first gaming state is more likely to be set than the second gaming state for a predetermined period. The period in which the third gaming state is set is the first period, The second game period has a third game state period setting means capable of setting a second period longer than the first period, and the first period is set by the third game state period setting means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first gaming state than is set.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of game states are shifted in stages according to a lottery result and can set an advantageous game state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, JP, 2015-058267, A). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a single ease of setting the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state where the advantageous gaming state is easy to be set (semi-advantageous gaming state), and therefore aims to set the advantageous gaming state. There was a problem that the content of the game played in this way became monotonous. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the degree of expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state in which the third gaming state is set by changing the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is easily set. Can be different. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the setting contents of the third gaming state, the player is enthusiastic about the game process until the first gaming state is set. There is an effect that it can be done.

  The gaming machine I1 further includes progress determining means for determining the passage of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means uses the progress determining means to determine whether the predetermined period has elapsed. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the first setting condition that is satisfied when the above is determined.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period for which the third gaming state is set elapses, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming state setting means is in a state where the third gaming state is set and the first determination result by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine I3, wherein the first gaming state is set on the basis that a second setting condition is established.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when the third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be satisfied, that is, when the third gaming state for a long time is set, The first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determination means during the third gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to aim for different transition conditions for setting the first gaming state according to the period of the third gaming state to be set, the game motivation depends on the length of the period of the third gaming state to be set. It can suppress that it falls.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the progress determining means determines the passage of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized by having condition limiting means for preventing the first setting condition from being satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the elapse of the third period is determined, the first setting condition is not established by the condition limiting means, so the first gaming state is set. Can be reliably restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress providing an excessively advantageous state to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the game machine has a first game state period setting means for setting a period during which the first game state is set, and the first game state period setting means includes the progress determination means, The gaming machine characterized in that the period when the first gaming state is set is set longer when it is determined that the first period has elapsed than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the first period when it is determined that the second period has elapsed is longer than the first period, which is determined that the second period has elapsed. A gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be watched with respect to the determination result of the progress determination means.

<Characteristic J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
First determination means capable of executing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination capable of executing the second determination Means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a first game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. Game state setting means capable of setting two game states, and game state thereof An advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period during which the first gaming state can be continuously set by the setting means, and a first end condition that is satisfied when the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means has elapsed, Alternatively, when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied, ending means for ending the first gaming state is provided, and when the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the second ending condition A game machine J1 having an end restriction means for restricting the establishment of.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of game states are shifted in stages according to a lottery result and can set an advantageous game state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, JP, 2015-058267, A). By the way, the gaming machine described above provides the player with the advantageous gaming state for a predetermined period because the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set varies based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state. However, there is a problem in that the advantageous gaming state is completed in a short period of time and the game motivation is lowered although the advantageous gaming state is difficultly set. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the completion of the second end condition can be limited by the end limiting unit. Therefore, the first gaming state can be continuously set during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be established and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be established. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the advantageous first gaming state and the disadvantageous first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means, so the gaming state setting means is advantageous. There is an effect that the game can be actively performed so that the first game state is set.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so the first determination means There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the determination result becomes the specific first determination result.

  The gaming machine J4 or J3 has a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means notifies that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the game machine has a determining means for determining that a condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. A gaming machine J5 characterized by comprising second notifying means for notifying that a condition for establishing the second end condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the establishment condition of the second end condition is established during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set Therefore, when it is assumed that the first gaming state set this time is not the advantageous first gaming state but the disadvantaged first gaming state, it is determined whether or not the first gaming state has ended. The player can be discriminated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first gaming state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (provides a period during which the number of time reductions is not subtracted during the time reduction state)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means When the first identification information for displaying a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means A gaming state setting means capable of setting a favorable gaming state for facilitating execution of a predetermined period, a period measuring means for measuring a period of the advantageous gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the predetermined time by the period measuring means. An end means for ending the advantageous gaming state when a period is measured, a measurement limiting means for restricting the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, Having Gaming machine K1, characterized in that.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (short-time state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, the gaming machine described above is configured to set the period until the number of lotteries reaches a predetermined number as the period for which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, so the advantageous gaming state is set. There was a problem that it was possible to easily predict the period. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine K1, measurement during a predetermined period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be limited by the measurement limiting means, so that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected game to the player and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, a second determination unit capable of executing the second determination, a second display unit for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination unit, and a second display unit A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means. , A bonus game executing means for executing the first bonus game and executing the second bonus game when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means; The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result Gaming machine K2, characterized in that the case, in which the predetermined limit condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1, the second determination means can be configured to dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. When the determination result is a specific second determination result, a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Thereby, the 1st determination by a 1st determination means can be performed in the state which restricted measurement of the period of an advantageous game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, the measurement limiting unit is configured to display the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring unit while the second dynamic display unit is executing a dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result. A gaming machine K3 that limits the measurement of a period.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine K1, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. Is limited. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the advantageous gaming state period is limited. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, there is provided a notifying means for notifying that the measurement of the advantageous gaming state period by the period measuring means is restricted by the measurement restricting means. Game machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means informs that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement restricting means. There is an effect that it can be provided.

<Feature L group> (Small hit RUSH with different termination conditions)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the privilege for executing the second privilege game is displayed. In a gaming machine having gaming execution means, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a second that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. A game state setting means capable of setting a game state, and The setting means sets the first gaming state when a predetermined first condition is satisfied, or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied. It is easier to continue the first gaming state when the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied than when the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine L1 characterized by being a thing.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of game states are shifted in stages according to a lottery result and can set an advantageous game state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, JP, 2015-058267, A). By the way, since the gaming machine described above has a single advantageous gaming state end condition, the ease of continuation of the set advantageous gaming state cannot be made different. There is a problem that the game to be provided becomes monotonous and the willingness to play decreases. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set because the game state setting means can set the first game state that is easily set continuously and the first game state that is difficult to set continuously. Even after being played, the game can be performed while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set, The predetermined end is set when the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, rather than when the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it is difficult to satisfy the conditions.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the first condition is based on the second condition established, rather than the case where the first gaming state is set based on the first condition established. When the gaming state is set, it is more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to set the first gaming state that is easy to end and the first gaming state that is difficult to end for the player, the first difficult to end even after the first gaming state is set. There is an effect that a game can be performed while the player desires that the game state is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine L2 has an end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. If the first gaming state is set based on the above, the gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the first termination condition is not satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the second condition is established, the first ending condition is not established, so it is difficult to finish. The first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second condition.

  In the gaming machine L3, the end condition setting means sets the second end condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3, the second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. Thereby, a privilege game can be provided when the first gaming state is terminated based on the fact that the second termination condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the first gaming state is ended, a privilege can be given to the player, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the gaming machine L5 has a notifying means for notifying that the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the second condition is established.

  According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic M group> (Set a special-effect high-fall fall invalid period)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a specific first determination on the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed, the bonus game executing means for executing the first bonus game, and the first determination means executed when a predetermined setting condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting unit capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which a first determination result is more likely to be the specific first determination result than a normal gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit. When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where is set, gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, and limiting the establishment of the predetermined transition condition Transfer Gaming machine M1, characterized in that those having a condition limiting means.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, it is configured to set an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player for the period until winning the next jackpot after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result, and in addition, a predetermined lottery ( There has been proposed a gaming machine that terminates an advantageous gaming state when winning a falling lottery. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-152). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is configured such that the falling lottery is executed based on the fact that the game win / fail lottery is executed, so that there is a sense of crisis that the advantageous gaming state always ends for the player. There was a problem that the game could not be played with confidence. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with peace of mind and has an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine M1, it is possible to restrict the transition of the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state by the transition condition restricting means, so that the gaming state transitions from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is possible to set a game period not to be played. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period during which the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first determination unit executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and the first determination unit performs the first determination when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. A special determination means capable of executing a special determination different from the one determination, and when the determination result by the special determination means is a specific special determination result, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. A featured gaming machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, when the first determination condition is satisfied, a special determination is executed, and when the determination result is a specific special determination result, a predetermined transition condition Is established. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, there is an effect that an easily understandable game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. Second bonus game execution means, and variable entry means that is variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the inside when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. And a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, and a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when it passes.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is established when the game ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be established at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, an unexpected game can be provided to the player. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player is to fire the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means includes a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means is likely to pass through the specific area, and a variable control means that is less likely to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine M4 that can be set to two variable controls.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the variable control means makes it possible for the ball that has entered the variable pitching means to easily pass through the specific area and the second variable control that is difficult to pass. Therefore, an unexpected game can be provided to the player. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player is to fire the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine M4, the gaming machine M5 is characterized by having notification means for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, since the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. is there.

<Characteristic N group> (game selection of small hit game)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination; a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and a first determination specific to the first display means. When the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game and the determination result of the first determination means are different from the specific first determination result When the second determination result is, the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game executing means for executing the second privilege game different from the first privilege game, and the second privilege game executing means. A variable pitching means that is variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the inside, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable pitching means, A specific area through which game balls can pass is provided inside the variable pitching means. Gaming machine N1, wherein said when a certain region game ball passes through, and has a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantage playing state disadvantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, There has been proposed a gaming machine that can set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous for a player when a beneficial game is executed and a game ball passes through a specific area during the bonus game (for example, JP 2013-152 publication). In the above-described gaming machine, an advantageous gaming state is set when the game ball passes through the specific area, and therefore, whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area is watched. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine N1, since a disadvantageous gaming state is set when a gaming ball passes through a specific area, there is an effect that a novel gaming property can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means includes a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means is likely to pass through the specific area, and a variable control means that is less likely to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine N2 that can be set to 2 variable control.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the variable control means makes it easier for the ball that has entered the variable pitching means to pass through the specific area, and the first variable control. Since either of the second variable control that is difficult to pass through the specific area is set, when the game ball is fired according to the content of the variable control to be executed, the launched game ball can pass through the specific area Sex can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to decide whether or not to fire the game ball.

  In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game executing means has notification means capable of notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N2, the notification means notifies that the second variable control has been set, so that the player can determine whether or not to fire a game ball. Can provide useful information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to decide whether or not to fire the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the invalidating means includes detecting means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the specific area, and invalidating means for invalidating a detection result by the detecting means. Is a game machine N4 that invalidates the detection result of the detection means based on the determination result of the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detection means can be invalidated by the invalid means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine N4, during the period when the detection result by the detection means is invalidated by the invalidation means, the measurement means for measuring the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and the measurement result of the measurement means A gaming machine N5, comprising: a measurement result notifying means for notifying information based thereon.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, the information based on the measurement result of the measuring unit is notified by the measurement result notifying unit during the period in which the detection result by the detecting unit is invalidated. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel the superiority.

<Feature O group> (Time reduction is completed based on the previously established condition among multiple conditions)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first privilege game, and when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means. A game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is easy to execute, a second game state in which the first determination is less likely to be executed than the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. The gaming machine that has the apparatus has an ending means for ending the first gaming state when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied, or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied. The ending means includes the first ending condition and the second ending condition. Gaming machine O1, characterized in that the conditions of, but to terminate the first game state based on the end condition is satisfied first.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine that can simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (short time state) that is advantageous to the player is set becomes the start timing of the change of the special symbol, the advantageous gaming state should be set to the maximum. There was a problem that the player was uncomfortable and made the player uncomfortable. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine O1, a first end condition and a second end condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and the first gaming state ends when any of the end conditions ends. There is an effect that the first gaming state can be reliably ended.

  In the gaming machine O1, a second determination unit capable of executing the second determination, a second display unit for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination unit, and a second display unit Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game executing means for displaying a specific second determination result on the second display means When the second identification information is displayed, the second privilege game is executed. While the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by an automatic display means. When the first determination means is executed, the first end condition is satisfied, and the second determination means is executed. The second termination condition is satisfied. Game machine O2 to.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is established based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is based on the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, the game machine can dynamically display the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first gaming state can be appropriately terminated.

  In the gaming machine O2, a first execution number measuring unit that measures the number of executions of the first determination unit, a second execution number measurement unit that measures the number of executions of the second determination unit, and the first execution number measurement unit. And the number of executions of the first determination means as a first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set. The first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times combined with the number of executions of the second determination means, and the execution of the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number Execution determination means for determining that the second determination means executes the second determination in a state where the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. If so, the second decision is made Gaming machine O3, characterized in that than be one in which to establish the second end condition before.

  According to the game O3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during dynamic display in which the first end condition can be satisfied. There is an effect that can be terminated.

  In the gaming machine O3, the first end condition is that the number of executions of the first determination unit is determined after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination unit reaches the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine O4, which is established at any point in time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times exceeds the predetermined number is executed.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine O3, the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination unit is a predetermined number of times is ended. Since the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the means is greater than the predetermined number is executed, the predetermined first period can be set longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine O4, a third determination unit capable of executing the third determination, a third display unit for displaying third identification information for indicating a determination result by the third determination unit, and a third display unit Third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information, and third privilege when the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result is stopped and displayed on the third display means. A third privilege game executing means for executing a game, and the third determination means sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that it is easier to be executed than in the case of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because the third determining means that is easily executed when the first gaming state is set is provided. By lengthening the period, the period during which the third determination means can be easily executed can be lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic P group> (Special figure changes during the opening of the jackpot game)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Based on the display, the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege game is displayed based on the display of the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. A bonus game executing means for executing the first bonus game, wherein the second determination means is configured to perform the second determination during a specific first period of the period during which the first privilege game is being executed. And the second determination is executed in a second period different from the first period. Gaming machine P1, characterized in that those without.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of special symbol types are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, JP 2013-226399 A). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine was to allow a player to perform a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but if one wins a win in one special symbol, the other special symbol Since the change is not executed, there is a problem that the willingness to play decreases when the lottery efficiency decreases. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in gaming motivation and improves the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine P1, since the second determination can be executed while the first privilege game is being executed, more determinations can be made to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that game efficiency can be increased.

  In the gaming machine P1, variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first state, and the first privilege Variable control means for variably controlling the variable pitching means between the first state and the second state when a game is executed, and the variable pitching means is in the second state by the variable control means. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the period changed to 1 is the first period.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second determination is executed using a period during which the game ball cannot enter the variable entry means during the period in which the first privilege game is being executed, the game result of the first privilege game is understood. The second determination can be executed without difficulty. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the second determination means, as the second determination result, is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous second determination result and the advantageous second privilege game executed based on the advantageous second determination result. It is possible to discriminate a disadvantageous second discrimination result in which a disadvantageous second privilege game is executed, and the discrimination result of the second discrimination means executed during the first privilege game is the advantageous second discrimination. A gaming machine P3 characterized by having discrimination limiting means for limiting the result.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are produced. That is, the second determination executed during the first privilege game is limited by the determination limiting means so that the determination result does not become the advantageous second determination result, so that the player is excessively granted a privilege. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine P3, there is provided variable limiting means for limiting the variable means from being changed from the second state to the first state by the variable control means during the disadvantageous second privilege game. Game machine P4.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the variable restriction means may restrict the first privilege game from being changed to the first state in a state where the disadvantageous second privilege game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determination means. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of games that are difficult to understand by executing a plurality of privilege games in duplicate.

  In the gaming machine P4, when the variable restriction means restricts the first privilege game from changing to the first state, the first privilege game is changed to the first state. Characteristic gaming machine P5.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, even if the variable restriction means restricts the first privilege game from being changed to the first state, the first state in the first privilege game Since the length of the period is not variable, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, while the second period of the first privilege game is set, there is an effect that the game can be performed eagerly to make the second determination to the end.

  In any one of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means variably controls the variable pitching means to be in the second state when the first privilege game is executed, and at least The gaming machine P6 is characterized in that a period from when the first bonus game is executed to when the variable pitching means enters the first state is the first period.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the following effects are produced. That is, since the second determination can be executed immediately after the first privilege game is executed, the second determination can be executed continuously from the period before the first privilege game is executed. Thereby, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed during the first privilege game without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine P6, the first period is different from the second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period. First bonus game setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first bonus games, wherein the bonus game granting means grants the first bonus game set by the first bonus game setting means. The first privilege game setting means is at least longer than a period in which identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means set by the second dynamic display setting means is dynamically displayed. A normal first privilege game in which a first period is set and a shortened first privilege game in which the first period is set shorter than a period in which identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is dynamically displayed. And can also be set Gaming machine P7, characterized in that it.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first privilege game is normally set by the first privilege game setting means, the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means can be executed during the first period, and the shortened first When the privilege game is set, it can be configured so that it is difficult to execute the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the first period during which it is difficult to make the player interested during the bonus game, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, there is provided second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period, and the first privilege game is executed. And a forcible stop means for forcibly stopping and displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means displayed dynamically.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first privilege game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that a new dynamic display is performed during the first period. Can be easily started. Therefore, the determination by the second determination means executed during the first period can be easily provided to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8 has a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and the privilege game giving means indicates that the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. In the state where the identification information for stopping is displayed, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the first privilege game is given, and the second determination means is determined by the first determination means. It is assumed that the period from when the identification information for indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed until the game ball passes through the specific area is also in the first period. A gaming machine P9, which executes a determination.

<Derivation of characteristic Pa group> (Small hit RUSH using special electric start)
Determination means capable of executing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and predetermined identification information for displaying a specific determination result is displayed on the display means On the basis of the above, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game and the first state from the first state where the game ball is difficult to enter based on the privilege game being executed by the privilege game executing means. Variable entry means that can be changed to a second state where game balls are easier to enter, and after the predetermined identification information is displayed, the variable entry means is changed to the second state by the privilege game execution means. And a special game executing means capable of executing a special game for changing the variable pitching means to the second state.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, whether the game is won or not is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of special symbol types are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, JP 2013-226399 A). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has caused a player to perform a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols simultaneously, but in any game, unless the player wins a win by lottery, Since a privilege game cannot be provided, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

  According to the gaming machine Pa1, the variable entry means can be changed to the second state by the special game execution means before the variable entry means is changed to the second state by the privilege game execution means. It is possible to provide an unexpected game to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Pa1, from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the entrance means capable of entering the ball and the entry of the ball into the entrance means, the game ball is more than the first state. Has a second variable pitching means that can be changed to a second state in which it is easy to enter the ball, and the special game executing means is configured based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second variable pitching means. A gaming machine Pa2 characterized by executing a special game.

  According to the gaming machine Pa2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa1, the following effects are produced. In other words, since the special game is executed by causing the second variable entry means to enter the game ball, it is possible to provide an easily understandable game for the player.

  The gaming machine Pa2 has special game setting means for setting the contents of the special game executed by the special game execution means, and the special game setting means has a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. A special game is set out of a plurality of special games with different preparation periods until the variable entry means is changed to the second state. Pa3.

  According to the gaming machine Pa3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are produced. That is, depending on the special game to be executed, the preparation period from when the game ball enters the second variable entry means until the variable entry means can be changed to the second state can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed while expecting a special game with a short preparation period to be executed.

  The gaming machine Pa3 has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the special game setting means is configured to perform the game state setting means by the game state setting means. A gaming machine Pa4 that makes it easier to set a bonus game with a shorter preparation period than when the second gaming state is set when the first gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine Pa4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the first gaming state is set, it is easy to set a short preparation period, so that a concentrated special game can be executed during the period when the first gaming state is set, and the game There is an effect that interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Pa4, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the determination result by the determining means being the specific determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine Pa5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the presence / absence of a special game and the setting of the game state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means. .

  In the gaming machine Pa5, the gaming machine Pa5 includes a waiting period setting unit that sets a waiting period from when the predetermined determination result is displayed on the display unit until the privilege game is executed, and the special game setting unit includes: When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming machine Pa6 sets the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the waiting period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Pa6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the standby period is set, so that the special game can be reliably executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Q group> (derived from P group)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Based on the display, the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege game is displayed based on the display of the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. In the gaming machine having the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game, the second determination means performs the second determination during a specific first period of the period during which the first bonus game is being executed. Execute and execute the second determination in a second period different from the first period Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that those without.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, whether the game is won or not is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of special symbol types are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, JP 2013-226399 A). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has caused a player to perform a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols simultaneously, but in any game, unless the player wins a win by lottery, Since a privilege game cannot be provided, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

<Characteristic R group> (V winning rate is varied according to the fluctuation time of the special figure)
A discriminating unit for discriminating when the discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating unit on the display unit for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display unit. A dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and a privilege game is given based on the fact that the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of the determination by the privilege game granting means and the determination means, the game ball enters. A variable entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that is easy to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass; The means is the specific area The bonus game is also given when a game ball passes, and the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period as the dynamic display period. The game machine R1 is characterized in that it is easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the second period is set than when the first period is set. .

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, whether the game is won or not is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a special game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a special game is executed even when a ball passes a specific area during the specific game (for example, JP, 2012-192067, A). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is capable of executing a privileged game at a plurality of occasions, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the passing rate of the ball is variable, there is a problem that the lottery result greatly affects the subsequent game content and the interest of the game is lowered. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific area can be varied depending on the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting unit. And the player can be watched until the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, a period group storage unit having a plurality of period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting unit are defined, and a plurality of periods stored in the period group storage unit A period group selecting means for selecting one period group from the period groups, and the dynamic display period setting means is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selecting means. One dynamic display period is set from a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the period group storage means corresponds to the first period group and the second period rather than the first period group. A gaming machine R2 having at least a second period group including a large number of the dynamic display periods.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the second period group in which the second period is easily set is set, the second period can be set more easily than in the case where the first period group is set. While the group is set, there is an effect that a game advantageous to the player can be executed with peace of mind.

  The gaming machine R2 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state as a gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the period group selecting means includes the gaming state setting The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the period group is selected according to the gaming state set by the means.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are produced. In other words, since the period group is set according to the game state, once the second period group advantageous to the player is set, the first game state is set until a different game state is set by the game state setting means. The two-period group will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be executed with peace of mind to the player.

  In the gaming machine R3, the dynamic display period setting unit is configured such that the first determination result and the second determination result are determined as a determination result by the determination unit in a state where the second period group is set. A gaming machine R4 characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on the fact that identification information indicating different third determination results is stopped and displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R3, the following effects are produced. That is, the player knows that the currently set period group is the second period group advantageous to the player by the dynamic display period set when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the third discrimination result. Can be made. Therefore, even if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a discrimination result in which the bonus game cannot be executed, there is an effect that the player can be interested and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature S group> (R derivative)
A discriminating unit for discriminating when the discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating unit on the display unit for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display unit. A dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and a privilege game is given based on the fact that the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of the determination by the privilege game granting means and the determination means, the game ball enters. A variable entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that is easy to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass; The means is the specific area The bonus game is also given when a game ball passes, and the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period as the dynamic display period. The game machine S1 is characterized in that it is easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the second period is set than when the first period is set. .

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, whether the game is won or not is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a special game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a special game is executed even when a ball passes a specific area during the specific game (for example, JP, 2012-192067, A). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is capable of executing a privileged game at a plurality of occasions, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the passing rate of the ball is variable, there is a problem that the lottery result greatly affects the subsequent game content and the interest of the game is lowered. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

<Feature T group> (3 loops of 1 type and 2 types)
Discriminating means for discriminating when the discriminating condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the identification for indicating the first discrimination result as the discrimination result on the display means When the information is stopped and displayed, the privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player, the first game state after the bonus game given by the privilege game granting means is terminated, A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the privilege game is more easily given than in the first game state, and a third game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be given than in the first game state; A period when the game ball can pass through the specific area based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of the determination by the determination means. A period setting means capable of setting the bonus game, and the bonus game granting means grants the bonus game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the gaming machine includes the second gaming machine. When a bonus game is granted in a state where the gaming state is set, either the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set to the gaming state setting rather than the third gaming state after the bonus game ends. A gaming machine T1 that is easily set by means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, whether the game is won or not is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a specific game is executed, and a special game is also executed when the ball passes a specific area during the specific game, and the ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine capable of setting an easy gaming state has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-192067). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is capable of executing a privileged game at a plurality of occasions, so that it can improve the interest of the game, but there is a gaming state in which a ball easily passes through a specific area. In some cases, the game ends immediately and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

  According to the gaming machine T1, when the second gaming state is set, the third gaming state is not set when the next bonus game is given. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with peace of mind in a state where a privilege game is easily given to the player.

  In the gaming machine T1, the gaming state setting means allows the bonus game to be played in the state in which the first gaming state is set, compared to the case where the bonus game is granted in the state in which the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine T2 is characterized in that when it is given, it is easier to set the third gaming state after the bonus game ends.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first game state is set, the third game state is easily set based on the provision of the privilege game, and therefore, a game state advantageous to the player is set for a long period of time. Can be suppressed. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the gaming state setting means includes a first privilege game that is given based on a determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result of the bonus game, and the specific area. The game state set according to the type of the bonus game given by the bonus game granting unit is different from the second bonus game given based on the passing of the game ball. A gaming machine T3.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the game state to be set can be different between the case where the first privilege game is given and the case where the second privilege game is given, which type of privilege game is executed for the player. You can be interested in what has been done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3, in the state where the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means is more advantageous to the player when the second privilege game is given than when the first privilege game is given. A gaming machine T4 that makes it easy to set a different gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine T4, when the second gaming state is set, it is possible to cause the player to play the game ambiguously so that the second privilege game is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3 or T4, in the state where the first gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means is that the player is given the first privilege game rather than the second privilege game. A gaming machine T5 that makes it easy to set a game state advantageous to the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first gaming state is set, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly so that the first privilege game is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature U group> (derived from T group)
A discriminating unit for discriminating when the discriminating condition is satisfied, a display unit for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating unit, and the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display unit. In this case, after the bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player and the bonus game given by the bonus game granting means are finished, the first gaming state and the first gaming state The game state setting means capable of setting the second game state in which the privilege game is easily given and the third game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be given than the first game state, and the result of discrimination by the discrimination means Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the game ball is changed from the first state in which it is difficult to enter to the second state in which it is easy to enter. And variable And a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game granting means can be used even when the game ball passes through the specific area. The award game is provided, and the gaming state setting means, when a bonus game is granted in a state where the second gaming state is set, after the bonus game ends, The gaming machine U1 is characterized in that any one of the second gaming states is easily set.

<Feature V group> (Small hit RUSH that does not require simultaneous fluctuation)
The 1st entrance means in which a game ball can enter, the 1st discrimination means which can perform the 1st discrimination based on the entrance to the 1st entrance means, and the discrimination result by the 1st discrimination means are shown First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for display on the display means, second ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and game balls entering the second ball entry means An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the information, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a second for indicating a determination result by the second determination means Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means; storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination by the second determination means is performed; The second identification information for indicating the specific second discrimination result on the display means is Second bonus game granting means for granting execution of the second bonus game when stopped display, limiting means for restricting the entry of game balls into the second pitching means, and the display means specific to the display means First privilege game execution means for executing at least a first privilege game capable of executing release of the restriction means when the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine V1 characterized by that.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (short-time state) in which a ball can easily enter a specific entrance after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). Publication). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the player can get bored early in the game because the ball can be easily entered into a specific entrance when it is in an advantageous gaming state. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine V1, since it is possible to enter a ball into the ball entry means only while a special game or a special special game is provided, a special game or a special special game is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to limit the storage to the storage means in a state where it is not.

  In the gaming machine V1, a second ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a game ball that enters more than the first position. A variable member that is variable to a second position that regulates the ball, and the variable member is variably controlled when the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed, The gaming machine V2, wherein the limiting means is to position the variable member at the first position, and the restriction releasing means is to position the variable member at the second position.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be varied according to the variable situation of the variable member executed in the special game or the special special game, the special game, or A ball can be entered into the entry means in synchronization with the special privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the game performance during the bonus game or the special bonus game.

  In the gaming machine V1 or V2, it is easier for the restriction release means to release the restriction by the restriction means when the special privilege game is executed than when the special game is executed. Game machine V3.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be varied according to the type of game in which the variable member is varied, thus improving the amusement during a special game or a special special game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine V3, the bonus game is less likely to be executed than the special bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the bonus game is less likely to be executed than the special bonus game, but it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the entrance means during the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to eagerly aim that the privilege game is executed, and to increase the operation of the game.

<Characteristic W group> (Variation of ease of establishment of multiple game conditions according to an accessory action pattern)
Setting the discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, the variable means for changing from the first state to the second state when the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result, and the variable operation contents of the variable means Variable operation setting means, and variable control means for controlling the variable means based on the variable action content set by the variable action setting means. The variable control means is controlled by the variable action setting means. When one variable operation content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the first privilege is more easily given than the second privilege different from the first privilege, and the variable operation setting means When the second variable operation content different from the first variable operation content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the second privilege is more easily given than the first privilege. Gaming machine W1, wherein.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (short-time state) in which a specific electric actor can be variably operated after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). . By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine always has the same privilege that can be given to the player by variably operating the electric accessory, and further, one privilege is granted by making the variable operation content of the electric accessory different. Since it is only possible to set a state that is easily performed and a state that is difficult to be performed, there is a problem that the game gets bored early. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine W1, since the privilege to be granted can be made different based on the contents of the movable operation set by the movable operation setting means, the player can keep an eye on the variable status of the variable means. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine W1, end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions, condition determination means for determining whether the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means, and the end conditions by the condition determination means Variable control end means for ending variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that is satisfied, and based on the fact that a specific end condition is satisfied among the plurality of end conditions A gaming machine W2 in which a special state in which the first privilege and the second privilege are easily given when the variable control ending means ends the variable control is set.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific end condition is satisfied, a special state is set, so that the player can be eager to play the game so that the specific end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine W2, the ball entry means, the second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the discrimination result by the second discrimination means are specified. A gaming machine W3 having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the result is a second discrimination result, wherein the second privilege is executed by the second discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine W2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second determination that can execute the privilege game is given as the first privilege, the player is expected to set the first variable operation content that is easy to give the first privilege. While playing games. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine W3, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the game state can be changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which entry is easier than the first state. A gaming machine W4 having an operable variable pitching means, wherein the second privilege is that a game ball enters the variable pitching means.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W3, the following effects are produced. That is, when a privilege game is being executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the second variable operation content that is likely to give the second privilege is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the ending condition setting means sets that the first privilege is granted as the specific ending condition.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines gaming machines W2 to W4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the first privilege to be granted so that the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group X> (Through-passing is possible during a hit game)
First discrimination means capable of entering a game ball, discrimination condition establishment means for establishing a discrimination condition based on a game ball entering the first entrance means, and the discrimination condition establishment means The determination means capable of executing determination when the condition is satisfied, the privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, and the privilege game granting means Passing means that allows a game ball to pass while a bonus game is being granted, determination means capable of performing a determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the determination result is a specific determination result Based on the above, the variable means that is variably controlled from the first position to the second position, and when the variable means reaches the second position, the game ball enters more than the first position. The second entry that makes it easier to sphere Has a stage, the said discrimination condition is satisfied means, the gaming machine wherein the game balls in the second ball entrance means in which to establish the discrimination condition even when the ball entrance X1.

  In the gaming machine X1, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a ball that has passed through the passage means can enter the game machine X2.

  In the gaming machine X2, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for setting a period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means Setting means, and the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period during which a ball that has passed through the passage means can enter the second entry means, and a ball that enters more than the first period. A gaming machine X3 characterized in that at least a difficult second period can be set.

  The gaming machine X4, wherein the first period is longer than the second period.

<Characteristic Y group> (advantageous general ending)
A determination means for executing the determination, and a period determination means for determining a period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, and the notification result for indicating the specific determination result is notified In a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state based on a player based on the setting machine, the gaming machine has a setting unit that sets a setting period until the next determination by the determination unit can be performed after the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that at least a first setting period and a second setting period that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting period are set as the period.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-226399). By the way, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and gets bored early in the game due to a longer period until the hit game or the like is executed which is advantageous to the player. It has been demanded to suppress a problem that a player can enjoy even in a period until a winning game is executed and get bored early in the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress getting tired of games early.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, when the advantageous state is set, the player can expect the second setting period to be set, and the problem that the player gets bored of the game early can be suppressed. effective.

  The gaming machine Y1 has a first flow path through which a gaming ball can pass when in the advantageous state, and when the second set period is set, the first flow path is set to the first flow path. The gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the game ball is configured to flow down more easily than when one set period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Y1, when the second set period is set, the game ball can easily flow down to the first flow path, and the second set period is There is an effect that it can be expected to be set more.

  In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, during the second set period, the determination result by the determination unit next to the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result and becomes the advantageous state. The gaming machine Y3 is set in a period in which the bonus is easily given when the game ball passes.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the second setting period is set, so that the value for setting the next advantageous state can be increased, and the advantageous state is There is an effect that the expectation to be set can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, a specific entry means that is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is possible, and is provided with at least a part of the benefit by entering the game ball. And a state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball can enter the specific entry means and a second state in which entry is more difficult than the first state, The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the second setting period is a period during which the game ball can reach the specific entry means during the period in which the first state is set.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the second setting period is set, so that the gaming ball can easily reach the specific entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation for setting the second setting period can be increased.

  In the gaming machine Y4, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter by entering the advantageous state, and a specific determination means that executes a specific determination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. A period determining means for determining a variable period for varying a period until the specific entry means is set to the first state based on the specific determination being executed by the specific determination means; The gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that the period determining means is configured to be able to determine a period that is advantageous to the player even when the second setting period is not set.

  According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Y4, the period that is advantageous to the player is determined even when the second setting period is not set by the period determining means, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the number of states, and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic β group derivation> (advantageous at regular intervals at regular intervals)
Based on the notification of the determination means for executing the determination, the period determination means for determining the period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, and the notification result for indicating the specific determination result. An advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a first flow path through which a game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means; And the first flow path is set to have a high probability of being able to pass when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval. Game machine β1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-226399). By the way, there is a need for a gaming machine that further enhances the fun of gaming. It is an object to provide a gaming machine that has improved the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine β1, since the probability that it is possible to pass through the first flow path when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval is set high, the next after the advantageous state is executed There is an effect that it is possible to give interest to the interval to be executed and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine β1, there are a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where the game ball is guided to the ball entry means, and a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball entry means. And a variable means that can be varied, wherein the advantageous state setting means changes the variable means to the first position as the advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine β2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine β2, since the advantageous state is set by changing the variable means to the first position, the advantageous state can be easily understood. .

  In the gaming machine β2, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the ball entry means when the advantageous state is set. A game ball rolling on a predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path when the setting of the advantageous state is cancelled. Machine β3.

  According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β2, it is possible to give interest to the game ball on the variable means even when the advantageous state is cancelled. There is an effect that it can have.

  In any one of the gaming machines β1 to β3, a specific area in which the game ball guided to the first flow path can enter is arranged, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the specific area And a state variable means for setting the second state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter than the state of entering the ball, and before the flow-down period for the game ball to flow down the first flow path The first variable control for changing the state variable means to the first state and then changing to the second state, and the state variable means for changing to the first state during the flow-down period. And a variable control means for executing at least one of the second variable control and the gaming machine β4.

  According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, it can be expected that the second variable control is executed by the variable control means, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be achieved. is there.

<Characteristic Z group> (Attacker under the ordinary electric train)
Entry means capable of entering a game ball, determination means capable of executing a determination based on the entry into the entry means, and identification means for displaying the determination result of the determination means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; , Variable means that can be varied between a first state that facilitates entry of the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, and a specific condition And a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the condition, wherein the variable means is in the first state. And being guided to the variable means by the first entering hand A specific channel in which a game ball flowing down by changing to the second state before entering the ball can enter, a specific region in which a game ball flowing down the specific channel can enter, And the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game that sets an entry state in which a game ball can enter the specific area until an end condition is satisfied. Machine Z1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-226399). By the way, there is a need for a gaming machine that further enhances the fun of gaming. It is an object to provide a gaming machine that has improved the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine Z1, a game ball that could not be entered into the ball entry means by the variable means can be expected to enter the specific channel, and the game can be performed. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Z1, when starting dynamic display of the identification information, the gaming machine Z1 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means The period includes at least an advantageous display period during which a game ball can easily enter the specific area and an unfavorable display period during which it is difficult to enter the specific area. Characteristic gaming machine Z2.

  According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Z1, the player can be interested in the dynamic display period of the identification information, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the privilege game execution means starts executing the setting of the entering state in the specific area according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the privilege game. Game machine Z3.

  According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the specific area is set to the entrance state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the privilege game. There is an effect that the sex can be kept constant.

<Characteristic AA group> (Production based on fluctuations in Special Figure 2)
Entry means capable of entering a game ball, determination means capable of executing a determination based on the entry into the entry means, and identification means for displaying the determination result of the determination means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the display information, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a specific entry means that allows a game ball to enter until an end condition is satisfied when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, enter the specific entry means A detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down a possible flow path, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect during the dynamic display period, wherein the effect execution means is the detection means At least a part of the performance based on the detection result by Gaming machine AA1, characterized in that in which row.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, when notifying the lottery result, the player can have high expectation for the lottery result by configuring the player to notify the player of the lottery result after performing an effect that suggests the lottery result for a predetermined period. A gaming machine has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-226399). By the way, since the effect is executed based on the predetermined lottery result, the effect tends to be constant, and the game becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, the detection means detects a game ball that flows down the flow path that allows entry into the specific entry means, and at least a part of the effect that is executed based on the detection result is executed. As a result, not only the dynamic display of the identification information but also the effect that is being executed can be executed depending on the flow of the game ball, improving the interest of the game, and the player gets bored with the game early There is an effect that defects can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit sets at least a first dynamic display period set so that a game ball can easily enter the specific ball entry unit. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the performance executing means executes a specific performance on the condition that at least one of the first dynamic display period is determined.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA1, the specific performance is executed on the condition that at least one condition is determined that the first dynamic display period advantageous to the player is determined. Is executed, it is possible to expect that the first dynamic display period is determined.

  In the gaming machine AA2, when the first dynamic display period is determined and the first dynamic display period is determined, if the game ball is not detected by the detection means during the specific detection period, the effect execution means The game machine AA3 is characterized in that it performs different effects.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if the gaming ball is not detected by the detection means during the specific detection period, the specific effect is provided. Is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the execution of the specific effect is performed wastefully and the expectation for the specific effect is lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific entry means is provided with a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and the special game is played based on passing through the specific area. A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that setting for execution is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the gaming ball passes through the specific area when the gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, and the bonus game is executed. Can be expected, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AA4, variable means that can be changed between a first state that facilitates entry of the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first state. And variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on establishment of a specific condition, and the flow path includes the variable means The game ball that is guided to the variable means by being in the first state and is allowed to flow in by being changed to the second state before entering the first ball entry means can flow in. A gaming machine AA5, which is characterized by being made.

  According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA4, by changing the variable means, it is expected that game balls that have not entered the ball entry means will also flow into the flow path. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AA5, the specific ball entry means is configured such that the game ball that has flowed into the specific area through the flow path can easily pass through the specific area. .

  According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA5, there is an effect that the degree of expectation for passing through the specific area can be increased by flowing down the flow path, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics AB group> (Penden non-winning balls can win special electrics)
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first entry means, and the first discrimination means First dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the discrimination result on the display means for a predetermined period, a first state in which a game ball can enter and the first state. When the first variable entry means that can be changed to the second state in which entry is difficult and the discrimination result by the first discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the first variable entrance means is changed to the second A first variable control means for changing the state from the first state to the first state; a first guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the first variable ball entry means; and a second one capable of entering the game ball. Entry means and second discrimination means capable of executing second discrimination based on a game ball entering the second entry means The second identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the second discrimination means is dynamically provided on the display means for a predetermined period of time, and provided in the first guide path, A second variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which entry is more difficult than the first state, and the determination result by the second determination means is a specific determination result. A second variable control means for changing the second variable pitching means from the second state to the first state, wherein the first variable pitching means is A gaming machine AB1 in which a game ball that has flowed down the first guiding path can enter without entering the second variable entry means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. On the basis of this, there is a second design in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period, and each design can be changed simultaneously. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is obtained as a lottery result of the second pattern, a small privilege game (for example, a small hit game) that can give a small privilege to a player is provided. Some are configured so as to be executed, and a game state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be executed and a game state that is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-39398).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the length of the variation time of the second symbol, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easily executed and a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute, as a result. Since the game state in which the small privilege game is easy to be executed and the game state in which the small privilege game is difficult to be set are set, for example, in the state where the lottery of the second pattern is easy to be performed, it is given to the player by the small privilege game. There is a problem in that it is not possible to make detailed settings such as varying the amount of privilege to be played, and the interest of the game is reduced. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine AB, the number of game balls that reach the first variable ball entry means can be varied in accordance with the situation of the second variable means, so the number of balls that reach the first variable ball entry means can It becomes possible to adjust according to the control content of 2 variable means. Therefore, the amount of privilege given to the player in the game in which the first variable pitching means is opened can be adjusted, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AB1, gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means Dynamic display period setting means capable of setting the dynamic display period from different periods, and the dynamic display period setting means is configured such that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. In addition, the gaming machine AB2 is characterized by making it easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be varied according to the set gaming state. Furthermore, when the first gaming state is set, a longer dynamic display period is more easily set than when the second gaming state is set. Therefore, since the period during which the ball cannot enter the second variable ball entry means can be lengthened, the ball can easily reach the first variable ball entry means, and the fun of the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine AB2, the second variable entry means has at least an opening through which a game ball can enter and an opening / closing lid member that opens and closes the opening, and the opening / closing lid member opens the opening. In a state in which the portion is closed, the upper surface of the opening / closing lid member is configured to form a part of the first guide path, and the dynamic display period setting means is configured to perform the first state by the game state setting means. A gaming machine AB3 that makes it easier to set a dynamic display period longer than a passing time for a game ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing lid member when a gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AB2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first game state is set, the ball can surely reach the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AB2 or AB3 has variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern that is variably controlled by the second variable control means from among a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means has the gaming state When the first gaming state is set by the setting means, a variable pattern in which the period during which the second variable entry means is in the second state is set is longer than when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine AB4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB2 or AB3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the first gaming state is set, a variable pattern is set in which the period during which the second variable entry means is in the second state is set longer than when the second gaming state is set. One gaming state can be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics AC Group> (Special Figure 1 lottery results based on Special Figure 2 lottery during fluctuation of Special Figure 1)
First discriminating means capable of executing first discrimination, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the first discriminating means for a predetermined period, and the first identification information Second dynamic display for dynamically displaying the first display means to be displayed, the second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination, and the second identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the second discrimination means for a predetermined period. A second display means for displaying the second identification information, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game based on the fact that the second identification information for executing a bonus game and indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means is stopped and displayed; The first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. And a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect for suggesting the determination result of the first determination means based on the fact that the determination of the second determination means is executed during A gaming machine AC1 characterized by that.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine that can simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variation effect only for the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and specially for the second special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Because it is configured to execute variable effects, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lotteries are actively executed There was a problem that the willingness to try declined. Further, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand the lottery result of each special symbol to the player. In addition, since an independent variation effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that an effect without a sense of unity is executed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game by providing the player with a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of each special symbol.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is suggested based on the discrimination of the second discrimination means executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Since the suggestion effect is executed, the player can be motivated to perform the determination of the second determination means for the player to grasp the determination result of the first determination means in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AC1, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AC1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, there is an effect that the effect effect of the suggestion effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AC2, a period from when the first determination unit determines that the specific first determination result is reached until the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine AC3 includes a restricting unit that restricts the determination result of the second determination unit from being the specific second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AC2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the determination by the second determination means is limited to the specific second determination result. It can suppress that the privilege game different from the content of the suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the suggestion effect can be enhanced and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AC1 or AC3, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect using a display mode of the second identification information.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed using the display mode of the second identification information, the player can check the determination result of the second determination unit while only checking the display mode of the second identification information. It becomes possible to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player pays attention to the second identification information and can improve the interest of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, a totaling unit that totals the determination results of the second determination unit, and a condition establishment determination unit that determines whether the execution condition is satisfied based on the determination results totaled by the totaling unit. And the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when it is determined by the condition satisfaction determining means that the execution condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the following effects are produced. That is, the discrimination results of the second discrimination means are aggregated, and the suggestion effect is executed when the aggregation results satisfy the execution conditions. Therefore, the game is actively performed to satisfy the execution conditions for the player. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the game machine includes an effect mode setting unit that sets an effect mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution unit, and the effect mode setting unit includes the first suggestion mode and the first suggestion mode. A gaming machine AC6 characterized in that it can set a second suggestion mode that suggests the determination result of the first determination means more difficult to understand than the first suggestion mode.

  According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the following effects are achieved. In other words, easy-to-understand suggestive effects and difficult-to-understand suggestive effects are executed according to the effect modes set by the effect mode setting means. Thereby, it can suppress that the discrimination | determination result of a 1st discrimination | determination means will be easily grasped | ascertained by one suggestion production. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed eagerly to execute the suggestion effect a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine AC6, the game machine AC6 includes a number measurement unit that measures the number of executions of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution unit, and the effect mode setting unit executes the suggestion effect measured by the number measurement unit. The gaming machine AC7 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first suggestion mode when the number of times is a specific number of times larger than the predetermined number of times than when the number of times is a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AC6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the more the number of times that the suggestion effect has been executed, the more the suggestion effect that is easy to understand for the player, so that the game can be motivated to execute the suggestion effect multiple times.

<Characteristic BA group> (The more advantageous second advantageous state becomes easier to be set when the number of consecutive first advantageous states is larger)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means has become a specific discrimination result; As the gaming state after the award game is ended, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state, and a predetermined specific condition established in the second gaming state. And a second gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to the third gaming state, and the specific condition is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. The second gaming state that was played Also, the second gaming state set based on execution of the privilege game during the second gaming state is configured to be more easily established. Game machine BA1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines described above are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state is ended according to the winning type can also be changed. Some of them are aiming to improve their interest. Further, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after the winning state is finished, and in the relatively advantageous gaming state, it is continuously removed by a specific number of lotteries. In some cases, there will be a transition to a more advantageous state.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the transition condition from the relatively advantageous gaming state to the more advantageous gaming state is fixed regardless of the situation at the time when the relatively advantageous gaming state is reached. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's expectation at the time when the game state is set to be advantageous, and it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, it is advantageous to the player based on the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, a game state after the privilege game has ended, a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a second A first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state; and in the second gaming state Second gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to the third gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and the specific condition is set between the first gaming state and the second gaming state setting unit. Based on the award game being executed The second gaming state set based on the execution of the bonus game during the second gaming state is more easily established than the second gaming state set in the second gaming state. It is what.

  As a result, when the player enters the second gaming state, the player becomes more advantageous than the first gaming state and easily shifts to the third gaming state, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation for the third gaming state. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is that the game after the end of the special game is greater than the case where the second game state is set based on the special game being executed during the first game state. A gaming machine BA2 that is configured to be more likely to be established when the second gaming state is set continuously for a specific number of times or more.

  According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is when the second gaming state is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. Rather than being configured to be more likely to be established when the second gaming state is set continuously for a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, the second gaming state Even if the bonus game is executed without satisfying the specific condition, the sense of expectation for the third gaming state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means performs the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result continuously over a first predetermined number of times in the gaming state. The second gaming state setting means, when the second gaming state has been set continuously for a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, in the second gaming state The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result continuously for a second number less than the first number. What to do Game machine BA3 characterized by Rukoto.

  According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means is configured to execute the second gaming based on the fact that the bonus game is executed during the first gaming state. When the state is set, the determination result of the determination means is a difference determination result different from the specific determination result continuously for a first predetermined number of times in the second gaming state. The second gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state continuously for a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the bonus game ends. The determination result of the determination means is different from the specific determination result continuously for the second number of times less than the first number in the second gaming state. On the basis of the, It is for setting the serial third gaming state.

  Thus, in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that expects that the determination result of detachment is continuous rather than a specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, Variable means that can be varied between a first position at which a game ball can enter the entry ball means and a second position at which the game ball is harder to enter than the first position, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means The variable game execution means for executing the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the second determination result is different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine BA4 is characterized in that the third gaming state is configured such that the variable game is more easily executed than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effects played by any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, a predetermined number of times is determined based on a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball entering the ball entry means. It is possible to change between a privilege granting means for granting the bonus, a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which the game ball is harder to enter than the first position. Variable means and the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. Variable game execution means for executing the variable game, and the third game state is configured such that the variable game is more easily executed than the second game state.

  Thereby, in the 3rd game state, since the opportunity to enter a game ball into a ball entry means increases, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA4, the discrimination means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. And a second discriminating means that executes the step, and the discriminating by the second discriminating means is more likely to be the second discrimination result than the discriminating by the first discriminating means. The gaming machine BA5 is characterized in that the third gaming state is configured such that the second determination condition is more easily established than in other gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA4, the discrimination means is different from the first discrimination condition that is different from the first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. And a second discriminating unit that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition. The discrimination by the second discrimination unit is more than the discrimination by the first discrimination unit. 2 is configured such that the probability of a determination result is high, and the third gaming state is configured such that the second determination condition is more easily established than the other gaming states. It is.

  Thereby, in the third gaming state, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the determination result of the second determination means.

  In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance means A second variable means that is variable to a third position at which a game ball can enter and a fourth position at which the game ball is difficult to enter than the third position; Is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine BA6 characterized by being established.

  According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, the first entrance means that can enter the game ball, and the second entrance means different from the first entrance means , Second variable means variable to a third position at which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a fourth position at which the game ball is difficult to enter than the third position; The first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is input to the second ball entry means. It is established based on the game ball entering.

  Thereby, it is possible to focus attention on the variable position of the second variable means, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA6, the second game state is configured such that the second variable means is more easily changed to the third position than the first game state and the third game state. A gaming machine BA7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BA6, in the second gaming state, the second variable means is changed to the third position compared to the first gaming state and the third gaming state. Since it is comprised so that it may become easy, there exists an effect that the advantageous degree of a 2nd game state can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, the passage means through which the game ball can pass, the passage discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means, and the discrimination result of the passage discrimination means is the third Variable control means for changing the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the result of the determination, and the passage determination means when the determination is executed in the second gaming state When the first determination result is the third determination result and the determination is executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the third determination is performed with a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine BA8 characterized by a result.

  According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, passing means through which the game ball can pass, passage determining means for executing the determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, Variable passage control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result of the passage determination means being the third determination result, wherein the passage determination means When the determination is performed in the two gaming states, the third determination result is obtained with the first probability. When the determination is performed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the determination is performed based on the first probability. Is the third discrimination result with a low second probability.

  Thereby, the game can be performed while paying attention to the determination result of the passage determination means, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BB group> (I suggest the result of the dynamic display in the effect for notifying the content at least different from the result)
A first determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the first determination means being a specific determination result. Based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating a determination result of the first determination means, And a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means in an overlapping manner with the first effect, The second effect executing means, when the first effect and the second effect are executed by executing the second effect, the second effect is indicated by the first effect in the second effect. Executes a specific production mode that can suggest the discrimination result of the first discrimination means Gaming machine BB1, wherein those that are configured ability.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, whether or not the game is successful is drawn by lottery, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There is something that plays a hit game. Further, among such conventional gaming machines, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variation effect only for the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and specially for the second special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Because it is configured to execute variable effects, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lotteries are actively executed There was a problem that the willingness to try declined. Further, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand the lottery result of each special symbol to the player. In addition, since an independent variation effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that the effect cannot be suitably executed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, based on the fact that the first determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, a first effect executing means for executing a first effect for indicating a determination result of the first determining means, and the first determination condition. The second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of different second determination conditions and the second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means can be executed in duplicate with the first effect. A second effect executing means, wherein the second effect executing means executes the second effect, and the second effect is executed when the first effect and the second effect are executed in duplicate. In the production, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means indicated by the first production is displayed. It is what is configured to be able to execute certain representation embodiment capable suggested.

  As a result, not only the determination result of the second determination means but also the determination result of the first determination means can be suggested by the second effect, so that it is possible to realize a more preferable effect mode.

  In the gaming machine BB1, the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect mode in the second effect before the determination result of the first determining means is indicated by the first effect. A gaming machine BB2, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BB1, the second effect executing means performs the second effect before the determination result of the first determining means is indicated by the first effect. Since the specific effect mode is configured to be executable, the determination result of the first determination unit can be confirmed by confirming the second effect without confirming the first effect until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  The gaming machine BB1 or BB2 includes first entry means that allows a game ball to enter, and second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first determination condition is the first discrimination condition The second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second entry means, and the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second entry means. A gaming machine BB3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. The first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is a game input to the second ball entry means. It is established based on the ball entering.

  Thereby, the game can be performed while paying attention to the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter than in the first state. And a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means, and a determination result of the second determination means is different from the specific determination result. Based on the determination result, the variable pitching means includes variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the second effect The execution means is configured to be able to suggest the specific effect mode in the second effect that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. A gaming machine BB4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter than the first state. The variable entry means that can be changed depending on the state, the privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the variable entry means, and the discrimination result of the second discrimination means A variable game in which the variable pitching means executes a variable game that is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on a second determination result different from the specific determination result. Execution means, wherein the second effect execution means is the second effect that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. It is comprised so that an aspect can be suggested.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the determination result of the second determination means becomes the second determination result.

  In the gaming machine BB4, as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game, the first gaming state in which the determination of the first determining unit is easily performed, and the determination of the second determining unit is more easily performed than the first gaming state. A game state setting means for setting one game state among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state, and a game based on a predetermined condition established in the first game state. A gaming machine BB5, comprising: a gaming state changing means for changing the state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BB4, as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game, the first gaming state in which discrimination by the first discrimination means is easy to be executed, and the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is easy to be performed; and a predetermined in the first gaming state Game state changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the specific condition.

  Thereby, in the 1st game state, since it can be made to play in anticipation that specific conditions are satisfied, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter than in the first state, and its variable Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, wherein the second determination means is whether the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. The second effect is composed of an effect of outputting a predetermined sound based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine BB6.

  According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the first state in which a game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter than in the first state. Variable entry means that can be varied, and privilege grant means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the variable entry means, and the second determination means includes the variable entry means It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the ball means, and the second effect is an effect of outputting a predetermined sound based on the game ball having entered the variable ball entry means. It is composed of.

  Thereby, since the auditory performance by voice can be executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the specific effect mode includes a first effect mode and the first effect for indicating the specific determination result as compared to the first effect mode. A gaming machine BB7 including at least a second effect mode in which a ratio executed by the second effect executing means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine BB7, in any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the specific effect mode includes a first effect mode and the first effect for indicating the specific determination result rather than the first effect mode. Is included at least in the second effect mode, and the second effect mode is executed in the second effect. It can be expected more strongly. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BB7, the specific effect mode includes a third effect mode that can be executed by the second effect executing means only when the first effect for indicating the specific determination result is being executed. A gaming machine BB8 that is at least included.

  According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB7, the second presentation is only performed when the first presentation for indicating the specific determination result is executed in the specific presentation mode. Since at least the third effect aspect that can be executed by the execution means is included, the player can have greater joy when the third effect aspect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first effect at least during a predetermined period. BB9.

  According to the gaming machine BB9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first effect at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, by confirming the second effect that is easy to visually recognize, it is possible to confirm both the determination result of the second determination means and the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic BC group> (Transfer directly to an advantageous state based on the establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from a jackpot in an unfavorable state)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes a specific discrimination result; Second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a specific setting condition at least different from the execution of the privilege game during the first gaming state disadvantageous to the player; And an acquired game executing means for executing an acquired game in which the player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. BC1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines described above are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state is ended according to the winning type can also be changed. Some of them are aiming to improve their interest. Further, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after the winning state is finished, and in the relatively advantageous gaming state, it is continuously removed by a specific number of lotteries. In some cases, there will be a transition to a more advantageous state.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult to shift to a more advantageous gaming state unless it is shifted to a relatively advantageous gaming state, so that the interest in the disadvantaged gaming state is improved. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, the privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result. A second game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a specific setting condition at least different from the execution of the privilege game between the privilege game executing means for executing the game and the first game state disadvantageous for the player Second game state setting means for setting a state, and acquired game execution means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state And comprising.

  Thus, in the disadvantageous first game state, the game can be performed in expectation that a specific setting condition is satisfied, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BC1, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position; and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the ball entry means, and the acquired game execution means includes: When the specific condition is satisfied that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable means as the acquired game from the second position for the predetermined time A gaming machine BC2 that is controlled to be variable to one position.

  According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the position, and a privilege grant means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means The acquisition game execution means includes the variable means as the acquisition game, assuming that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, and that the specific condition is satisfied. Is controlled to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thereby, in the second gaming state, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

  In the gaming machine BC2, when the acquired game is executed at least in the second game state, the second game state is maintained even after the execution of the acquired game is completed. Game machine BC3.

  According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BC2, at least when the acquired game is executed in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the acquired game is completed. Since it is maintained, the advantageous degree of a 2nd gaming state can be raised more. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BC2 or BC3, the game machine includes a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball and a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and the determination condition is the first entrance ball At least a first determination condition established based on a game ball entering the means and a second determination condition established based on a game ball entering the second entry means The determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition has a higher probability of being the second determination result than the determination executed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. In the first gaming state, when the determination is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination result is more difficult than the second gaming state. A gaming machine BC4 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BC2 or BC3, the first entering means capable of entering a game ball and the second entering means different from the first entering means are provided. The determination condition is based on a first determination condition established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means and a game ball entering the second ball entry means. And a determination that is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition is more than a determination that is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The probability that the second determination result is obtained is increased, and the first game state is determined when the second game is executed when the determination is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. It is configured so that the determination result is more difficult to obtain than the state.

  Thereby, since the advantageous degree in a 2nd game state can be improved more, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is maintained in the same gaming state at least until the determination result of the determination unit becomes the specific determination result. A gaming machine BC5.

  According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state has the same game at least until the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. Since the state is maintained, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that expects that a specific determination result is not obtained in the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine BC5, the gaming machine BC6 is characterized in that the second gaming state has a lower probability of being the specific determination result than the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BC5, the second gaming state has a lower probability of being the specific determination result than the first gaming state, so the degree of advantage in the second gaming state There is an effect that can be further increased.

  The gaming machine BC5 or BC6 includes an initialization unit that initializes the setting of the gaming machine, and the second gaming state is configured by a gaming state that is set when the initialization is performed by the initialization unit. A gaming machine BC7, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, the gaming machine BC7 includes initialization means for initializing the setting of the gaming machine, and the initialization by the initialization means is performed in the second gaming state. The game state is set in the case of a game.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a very special gameability different from that of a general game machine, in which a game state set by initialization is advantageous.

  In the gaming machine BC7, the acquired game is executed after the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initialization unit until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BC8, characterized by comprising limiting means for limiting it so as not to be played.

  According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BC7, the predetermined specific condition is determined after the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initialization means. Since it is provided with a limiting means for limiting the acquired game so that it is difficult to be executed until it is established, it can be suppressed that it becomes too advantageous at the time of initialization. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous after initialization and giving a disadvantage to the hole.

  In the gaming machine BC8, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position; and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the ball entry means, and the acquired game execution means includes: When the specific condition is satisfied that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable means as the acquired game from the second position for the predetermined time The limiting means controls the position to vary to one position, and the limiting means has a period from when the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result to when the acquired game is started. Than when there is no restriction by means of restriction Gaming machine BC9, characterized by controlling the Kunar so.

  According to the gaming machine BC9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BC8, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the position, and a privilege grant means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means The acquisition game execution means includes the variable means as the acquisition game, assuming that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, and that the specific condition is satisfied. Is controlled so as to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the limiting means obtains the acquisition after the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result. The period until the game is started depends on the restriction means. Limit is controlled to be longer than if not done.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the advantageous degree of the 2nd gaming state after initialization can be made low.

<Characteristic BD group> (Advantages are different between the normal state at the time of RBAM chestnut and the normal state shifted by another opportunity)
Based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine, a first state setting means capable of setting the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state and a predetermined specific at least different from the power-on to the gaming machine Based on the establishment of the setting condition, second state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is determined by the first state setting means. Based on the setting, a specific element relating to the degree of advantage is set to be equal to or less than a predetermined specific degree of advantage, and the specific state based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means A gaming machine BD1 comprising: a particular element setting unit that sets an element to be higher than the particular advantage degree.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines described above are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state is ended according to the winning type can also be changed. Some of them are aiming to improve their interest. Further, among such conventional gaming machines, a novel game in which a gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than a gaming state set when a gaming machine setting is initialized (so-called normal state) is provided. There are also sex things.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the degree of advantage of the gaming state after initialization is increased in order to achieve novel gaming, it will be excessively advantageous to the player by initialization. Therefore, there is a possibility that the hall may be a gaming machine that is difficult to initialize.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, the first state setting means capable of setting the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on the initialization of the gaming machine, and the power supply for the gaming machine A second state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state based on establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition that is different from at least the insertion; Based on the fact that the first gaming state has been set by the one state setting means, a specific element relating to the degree of advantage is set to be equal to or less than a predetermined specific advantageous degree, and the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means Specific element setting means for setting the specific element to be higher than the specific advantage level based on the fact that is set.

  Thereby, since the game can be performed in expectation that the first game state is set by the second state setting means, rather than the first state setting means, the player's interest in the game is encouraged. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting unit determines the specific element based on a predetermined specific condition established during the first gaming state set by the first state setting unit. A gaming machine BD2, which is set to be higher than the specific advantage level.

  According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means has a specific setting condition that is set in advance during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. Since the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantage level based on the establishment, the game can be performed in expectation that a specific setting condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is harder to enter than the first position. A second position, a variable means that can be changed, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and determination based on the establishment of the determination condition And a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. Variable game execution means, and the specific element setting means varies the ease of execution of the variable game as the specific element.

  According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position, and a privilege grant that gives a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. Means, a determination means for executing determination based on establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means from the second position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. Variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to one position, and the specific element setting means changes the ease of execution of the variable game as the specific element.

  Thereby, in the 1st game state, since the ease with which a variable game is performed can be varied, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD3, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, and the dynamic display means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific element setting means is configured such that the first game state is set by the first state setting means. On the basis of the control, the dynamic display period determining means controls so that a period longer than a predetermined first period is easily set, and the second state setting means sets the first gaming state. Based on this, the gaming machine BD4 is controlled so that a period shorter than the first period is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BD3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means. Display means; and dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, wherein the specific element setting means is controlled by the first state setting means. Based on the setting of the first gaming state, the dynamic display period determining means controls so that a period longer than a predetermined first period is easily set, and the second state setting Based on the setting of the first gaming state by the means, control is performed so that a period of a shorter length than the first period is easily set.

  As a result, there is an effect that the degree of advantage can be varied more reliably in the first gaming state.

  The gaming machine BD4 includes first entry means capable of entering a game ball, and second entry means different from the first entry means, and the determination condition is transmitted to the first entry means. And a first determination condition established based on entering the ball and a second determination condition established based on entering the second entry means, and The determination means has the specific determination result when the determination is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, rather than when the determination is executed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The specific element setting means determines that the second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means. Operation in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on Control is performed so that a period longer than the first period is set as the display period, and the second determination condition is based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the establishment of is controlled so that a period shorter than the first period is easily set. Game machine BD5.

  According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BD4, the gaming machine BD5 includes a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a second entry means different from the first entry means, The determination condition is a first determination condition established based on entering the first entry means, a second determination condition established based on entering the second entry means, And when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, rather than the determination is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. Is configured such that the probability that the specific determination result is obtained is higher, and the specific element setting means is that the first game state is set by the first state setting means. Based on the establishment of the second determination condition The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information is controlled so that a period longer than the first period is easily set, and the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means. Based on that, it is easy to set a period shorter than the first period as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. It is something to control.

  Thus, there is an effect that the degree of advantage can be made different by changing the execution interval of the determination by the second determining means.

  In the gaming machine BD5, based on the determination result of the determination means being a predetermined second determination result, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and the end of the privilege game As a later gaming state, the specific element is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state in which the specific advantageous degree is set to be lower than the specific advantageous degree, and the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantageous degree. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state; and The gaming machine BD6, wherein the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the specific setting condition when a predetermined change condition is established in a state where the gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BD5, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result set in advance. As the gaming state after the bonus game execution means and the bonus game, the specific element is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state in which the specific factor is set to be less than or equal to the specific advantage level, and the specific element is A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state set higher than the specific advantage degree; The second state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the establishment of the specific setting condition that a predetermined change condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set.

  Thereby, in the second gaming state, the game can be performed in expectation that a predetermined change condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD6, the first gaming state is configured such that the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result lower than the second gaming state. A gaming machine BD7.

  According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine BD6, the first gaming state has a lower probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result than the second gaming state. Therefore, the first gaming state can realize a novel gaming property that is advantageous when set by the second state setting unit even though the determination result of the determining unit is low. effective.

  In the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means performs a dynamic display in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. The gaming machine BD8 is controlled so that a period longer than the first period is easily set as a target display period.

  According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information is controlled so that a period longer than the first period is easily set, it is difficult to establish the second determination condition in the second gaming state. There is an effect that can be done.

<Characteristic BE group> (execution of specific effects during the period from the transition to small hit RUSH until the small hit fluctuation starts)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means that can be changed, the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, In a gaming machine comprising variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from two positions to the first position, a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed based on establishment of a specific setting condition A game state setting means for setting one game state among a plurality of game states including at least the second game state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the first game state, and the game state setting The second gaming state is set by means And after the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means, the determination result of the determining means becomes the specific determination result. Based on that, a gaming machine BE1 comprising: a second effect executing means for executing a second effect of an effect mode different from the first effect.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a variety of interest effects are executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP 2003-325886 A). Publication).

  Among such conventional gaming machines, an effect mode (preparation effect mode) indicating that a situation advantageous to the player is close in a predetermined game state, and a player during execution of the preparation effect mode There are some which can execute an advantageous situation effect indicating that an advantageous situation is obtained when an advantageous situation is obtained.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the preparation effect mode is executed, the player only wants to execute the advantageous situation effect as soon as possible, and the execution period of the preparation effect mode becomes long However, there is a problem that the player's interest may be impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BE1, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more than the first position. Based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the variable means that can be changed to the second position where it becomes difficult to enter the ball, the determination means that executes determination based on the establishment of the determination condition The variable means includes variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and based on establishment of a specific setting condition, One game state is set out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to execute and a second game state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the first game state. Game state setting means to play and the game state setting means A first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the setting of the second gaming state, and a determination result of the determining means after the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means. And a second effect executing means for executing a second effect of an effect mode different from the first effect based on the fact that the result is the specific determination result.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BE1, based on the fact that the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is provided. A privilege game executing means to be executed; and a dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means, wherein the determining condition is a first determining condition and a first determining thereof. A second determination condition different from the condition, and the dynamic display means includes a dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition. The dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of is configured to be able to be performed in duplicate, and the gaming machine includes the first determination condition and the second determination condition. Judgment based on the establishment of one of the criteria Is executed based on the fact that the other determination condition is satisfied at least during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the second determination result. The game machine BE2 is provided with a discrimination result control means for controlling the discriminating result to be a discrepancy discrimination result different from both the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BE1, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. Based on a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means, and the determination condition is , At least a first determination condition and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, wherein the dynamic display means is the identification information based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The dynamic display and the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the second determination condition can be performed in an overlapping manner, and the gaming machine can perform the first determination. The condition and the second discrimination condition When the determination result based on the establishment of one determination condition results in the second determination result, at least during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the second determination result, the other determination condition And a determination result control means for performing control so that the determination result is different from both the specific determination result and the second determination result.

  Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the bonus game from being executed repeatedly between the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition.

  In the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured such that determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easier to execute than the first gaming state, and the second determination condition The determination executed based on the establishment of is configured to be any one of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the detachment determination result. Game machine BE3.

  According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured such that the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easier to execute than the first gaming state. The determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is any one of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the outlier determination result. It is configured as follows.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it can be expected that a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state.

  The gaming machine BE3 includes a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition at least different from the execution of the privilege game in the first gaming state. A gaming machine BE4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BE3, in the first gaming state, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming based on the establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from the execution of the bonus game. Since the game state changing means for changing to the state is provided, the game can be performed in the hope that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means does not execute the privilege game after the first gaming state is set and before the determination by the determining means a predetermined number of times is executed. The gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state when the game is played.

  According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means executes the determination by the determining means a predetermined number of times after the first gaming state is set. The game state is changed to the second game state when the bonus game has not been executed before, so in the first game state, a novel game is performed in the hope that the bonus game will not be executed. There is an effect that a game can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured to have the second determination result with a first probability when the determination by the determining unit is executed, and the second gaming state is When the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is configured with a second probability lower than the first probability, and the gaming state changing means is the first When the bonus game is not executed after the game state is set and before the determination by the determination means for a predetermined number of times is executed, the second determination result is determined by the determination means. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by changing the probability of becoming from the first probability to the second probability.

  According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured to have the second determination result with a first probability when the determination by the determining means is executed. The second gaming state is configured such that when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. The gaming state changing means, when the bonus game is not executed between the time when the first gaming state is set and the determination by the determining means a predetermined number of times being executed. The gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by changing the probability of the second discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means from the first probability to the second probability.

  Thereby, since it is possible to realize a novel gameability that a lower probability of the second determination result is advantageous, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, based on the initialization means for initializing the setting of the gaming machine and the initialization executed by the initialization means, the gaming state is set to the second gaming state The variable game is less likely to be executed in the initialization time setting means and the second game state set by the initialization time setting means than in the second game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine BE7, comprising: a restricting means for restricting to

  According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, based on the initialization means for initializing the setting of the gaming machine and the initialization executed by the initialization means In the initialization time setting means for setting the gaming state to the second gaming state, and in the second gaming state set by the initialization time setting means, from the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means And a restricting means for restricting the variable game so as not to be executed.

  Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a very special and novel gameability that the same game state as the state after the initialization can be made advantageous while suppressing the advantage after the initialization too much.

<Characteristic BF group> (Multiple small hit RUSH states with different advantages)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball is harder to enter than the first position. Variable means that can be varied, privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and Based on the determination result of the determination means being the first determination result, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the determination result of the determination means is different from the first determination result. Based on the second determination result, the variable means executes a variable game that is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and establishment of a predetermined setting condition Based on the first state, the variable game is more than the first state A state setting means capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including a second state that is easily performed and a third state that is more advantageous to the player than the second state; A gaming machine BF1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines described above are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state is ended according to the winning type can also be changed. Some of them are aiming to improve their interest. Furthermore, in the above-described conventional game machines, as an advantageous state, a state where a so-called small hit game is easily executed and a game value can be obtained even if the hit state does not occur is installed. As a result, there are those that aim to further enhance interest.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the game shifts to an advantageous state in which a small hit game is easily executed, the subsequent game simply becomes a monotonous one that continues to acquire the game value. There was a problem that it became difficult to improve the interest of the elderly.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BF1, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball from the first position. Variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter, privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and establishment of the determination condition Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the discriminating means, bonus game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the first discrimination result, and discrimination of the discrimination means The variable means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result that the second determination result is different from the first determination result. Based on the game execution means and establishment of a predetermined setting condition, One state can be set from a plurality of states including a second state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the first state and a third state that is more advantageous to the player than the second state. Possible state setting means.

  Thereby, since it can be made to play a game in anticipation of becoming a 2nd state or a 3rd state, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BF1, the state at the time of the second determination result is maintained at least even after the end of the variable game executed based on the second determination result. This is a gaming machine BF2.

  According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BF1, the variable game executed based on the fact that the state at the time when the second determination result is obtained becomes the second determination result. Since it is maintained at least after the end of the game, the variable game can be executed a plurality of times in the second state. Therefore, there exists an effect that the advantageous degree of a 2nd state can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the third state is a state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second state, so that the advantage of the third state can be further improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine BF3, the determination means determines based on the establishment of a first determination means that executes determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and a second determination condition that differs from the first determination condition. And the second determination means for executing the second determination means, and the second state is such that the first determination condition is more easily established than the second determination condition, In the third state, the second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition, and the determination by the second determination means is more than the determination by the first determination means. However, the gaming machine BF4 is configured to increase the probability that the second determination result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BF3, the determination means is different from the first determination condition and the first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition. And at least a second discriminating unit that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, wherein the second state is greater than the first discrimination condition than the second discrimination condition. In the third state, the second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition, and the third state is more determined than the determination by the first determination means. Also, the determination by the second determination means is configured such that the probability of the second determination result is higher.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the second determination condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting unit sets one state from among the plurality of states as a gaming state after the execution of the special game by the special game execution unit is completed. And the probability that the specific determination result in the second state is higher than the probability that the specific determination result in the third state. Characteristic gaming machine BF5.

  According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means has the plurality of game states after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. It is possible to set one state from among the states, and the probability of being the specific determination result in the second state is higher than the probability of being the specific determination result in the third state It is comprised as follows.

  Thereby, since the probability that the third state is a specific determination result is lower, the advantageous third state can be configured to continue for a longer time. Therefore, when the third state is set, there is an effect that the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  In the gaming machine BF5, a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball can enter the first entry means. And a second variable means that is variable to a fourth position at which the game ball is difficult to enter than the third position, wherein the determining means is the first entrance means, Alternatively, the determination is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second state and the third state are the second variable than the first state. The gaming machine BF6 is characterized in that the means is not easily changed to the third position.

  According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BF5, the first entrance means that can enter the game ball, the second entrance means different from the first entrance means, the first entrance A second variable means that is variable to a third position at which a game ball can enter the ball means and a fourth position at which the game ball is difficult to enter than the third position; The discriminating means executes discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The second state and the third state are The second variable means is less likely to be changed to the third position than in the first state.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a state in which it is difficult to change is more advantageous than a state in which the second variable means is easily changed to the third position.

  In the gaming machine BF4, from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. Game state setting means for setting one gaming state, wherein the state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first gaming state, and the second gaming state is set. Based on the above, the gaming machine BF7 is characterized in that one of the second state and the third state is set.

  According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BF4, as the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game, the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state, , And a gaming state setting unit that sets one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least one of the gaming state, and the state setting unit sets the first state based on the setting of the first gaming state. Then, one of the second state and the third state is set based on the setting of the second gaming state.

  Thereby, as the second gaming state, a second gaming state in which the second state is set and a second gaming state in which the third state is set can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which the degree of advantage is variable in spite of the same game state.

<Characteristic BG group> (Advantage can be varied by subtracting the number of time reductions during execution of big hit fluctuation)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; a privilege game executing means for executing an award game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result; In a gaming machine comprising: display means capable of displaying information; and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means. The first gaming state setting means for setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of the setting condition, and the second setting condition predetermined in the first gaming state, Second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a degree of advantage different from that of the first gaming state, wherein the second setting condition is a movement of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A dynamic display Gaming machine BG1, characterized in that it is capable of at least satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines described above are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state is ended according to the winning type can also be changed. Some of them are aiming to improve their interest.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if the gaming state is set to be advantageous, there is a possibility that the winning game may cause a transition from the advantageous state to the disadvantaged state. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest of the player when it was a hit in the state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a game; display means capable of displaying identification information; and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means on the display means. And a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a first predetermined setting condition, and a second predetermined in the first gaming state. And a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state based on the establishment of the setting condition, wherein the second setting condition is the specific game To show the discrimination result It is capable of at least met during dynamic display of the execution of the identification information.

  As a result, even during the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second setting condition is satisfied. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BG1, the discrimination means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination condition that is different from the first discrimination condition. And a second discriminating means for executing the first discriminating means, wherein the dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the first discriminating means. And a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the second setting condition In the first gaming state, the determination by the second determination means is executed while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. Conditions that can be established based on Gaming machine BG2, wherein those that are configured.

  According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BG1, the determination means is different from the first determination condition and the first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition. And a second discriminating unit for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition, wherein the dynamic display unit is a first unit for indicating a discrimination result of the first discriminating unit. 1st dynamic display means which displays 1 identification information dynamically, and 2nd dynamic display means which displays the 2nd identification information for showing the discrimination | determination result of the said 2nd discrimination means dynamically The second setting condition is that the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is executed by the first dynamic display means in the first gaming state. The discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed. Are those composed of conditions that may hold based on the.

  As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which discrimination by the second discrimination means is actively executed while dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is being executed. There is an effect that the interest in games can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is that the determination unit executes a predetermined specific number of times before the bonus game is executed after the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine BG3, which is established based on what has been done.

  According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is determined in advance before the bonus game is executed after the first gaming state is set. Since the determination is made based on the determination of the specific number of times by the determination means, the determination of the specific number of times by the determination means is performed while the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability that aims to end the game.

  In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means has a length equal to or longer than a predetermined period as a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first gaming state. The dynamic display period of the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the second dynamic display means is shorter than the specific period as the dynamic display of the identification information in the first gaming state. A gaming machine BG4 that performs dynamic display of the identification information during a dynamic display period of length.

  According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means is a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result in the first gaming state. , Executing dynamic display of the identification information in a dynamic display period having a length equal to or longer than a predetermined period, wherein the second dynamic display means is configured to display the identification information in the first gaming state. As the dynamic display, the dynamic display of the identification information in the dynamic display period having a length shorter than the specific period is executed.

  Thereby, in the first gaming state, when the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is executed by the first dynamic display unit, the dynamic display by the second dynamic display unit is more performed. Since many can be executed, there is an effect that it can be easily set to the second gaming state.

  In any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, a privilege granting unit that grants a predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the ball entry unit, and a determination by the determination unit A variable game execution in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a result of the second determination result being different from the specific determination result. And the second gaming state is such that the variable game is more easily executed than the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is harder to enter than the first position, and a privilege grant that grants a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means And the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means and the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. Variable game execution means for executing a variable game, wherein the variable game is more easily executed in the second game state than in the first game state.

  As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the variable game is easily executed during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, so that the variable game can be played until the privilege game is executed. The effect is that you can entertain.

  In any one of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a privilege for setting any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game ends. It is provided with post-game setting means, and when the special game is executed in the second gaming state, the post-special game setting means is more effective when the special game is executed in the second gaming state. A gaming machine BG6 configured so that the second gaming state is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a plurality of at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are included as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. When a bonus game is executed in the second gaming state, compared to a case where the bonus game is executed in the first gaming state. However, the second gaming state is more easily set by the post-reward game setting means.

  Thus, by shifting to the second gaming state before the bonus game is executed, the second gaming state can be easily set even after the bonus game is ended, so that the identification information for indicating a specific determination result There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that more actively executes discrimination by the second discrimination means during execution of the dynamic display.

  In any one of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64b1 Upper first entrance (part of first entrance means)
64b2 Lower first entrance (part of first entry means)
640 Second entrance (second entry means)
65a First specific winning opening (variable pitching means)
111 payout control device (privilege grant means)
S406 First determination means S408 Part of privilege game execution means S602 Game state change means S1006 Part of second determination means S1008 Part of privilege game execution means S1101 Part of second determination means S1103 Variable game execution means S2403, S2404 Game state setting means S5104 First effect execution means S5126 Second effect execution means

Claims (5)

First determination means for executing determination based on establishment of the first determination condition;
On the basis of the determination result of the first determination means becoming a specific determination result, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player;
First effect executing means for executing a first effect for indicating a determination result of the first determining means;
Second determination means for executing determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition;
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determining means in an overlapping manner with the first effect;
The second effect executing means is indicated by the first effect in the second effect when the first effect and the second effect are executed by executing the second effect. A gaming machine that is configured to be capable of executing a specific performance mode capable of suggesting a discrimination result of the first discrimination means.   The second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect mode in the second effect before the determination result of the first determining means is indicated by the first effect. The gaming machine according to claim 1. A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a second entry means different from the first entry means,
The first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. Variable entry means that can be varied between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter than in the first state;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Based on the determination result of the second determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable pitching means is variable from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period. Variable game execution means for executing a variable game to be played,
The second effect execution means is configured to be able to suggest the specific effect mode in the second effect that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is provided. As a gaming state after the end of the award game, a first gaming state in which the determination of the first determining means is easily performed, and a second gaming state in which the determination of the second determining means is more easily performed than the first gaming state. And a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least
And a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on a predetermined condition established in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 4.

Images